2. 分别论的论母巴利
2. Vibhaṅgamātikā
现在,在《法集论》的论母之后,接着就是对《分别论》论母的义理解说。然而,对于它——巴利
Idāni dhammasaṅgaṇīmātikānantaraṃ vibhaṅgamātikāya atthavaṇṇanā anuppattā. Tassā pana –
从含义上,按照法的分类,显示分别论的方法;
另外,也有依脱离巴利的方式而存在的注释方法。巴利
Atthato dhammabhedena, vibhaṅganayadassanā; Pāḷimuttanayā cāpi, hoti saṃvaṇṇanānayo.
这个论母被放在十八种分别的开头,共有十八种,就是:蕴分别论母、处分别论母、界分别论母、谛分别论母、根分别论母、缘起分别论母、念处分别论母、正勤分别论母、神足分别论母、觉支分别论母、道支分别论母、禅那分别论母、无量分别论母、学处分别论母、无碍解分别论母、智分别论母、小事分别论母、法心分别论母。巴利
Sā panesā aṭṭhārasannaṃ vibhaṅgānaṃ ādimhi ṭhapitā aṭṭhārasavidhā hoti – khandhavibhaṅgamātikā-āyatana-dhātu-sacca-indriya-paccayākāra-satipaṭṭhāna-sammappadhāna-iddhipādabojjhaṅga-maggaṅgajhāna-appamaññā-sikkhāpada-paṭisambhidā-ñāṇa-khuddakavatthu-dhammahadayavibhaṅgamāti
蕴分别论母的义理注释巴利
Khandhavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
在这里,先就作为开端的蕴分别论母,从含义上来说:所谓“五蕴”,这里的“五”是数量的限定,用它表明既不比这少,也不比这多。“蕴”则是指出被限定的法。这里,“蕴”这个词在许多地方出现,有聚集、功德、施设、惯用语等含义。其中,在“大水蕴”等说法中,“蕴”是聚集的意思。在“戒蕴、定蕴”等说法中,是功德的意思。在“世尊看见大木蕴”等说法中,是施设的意思。在“识即是识蕴”等说法中,即使只是一个心,也因惯用语而称为蕴。而在这里,取的是聚集的意思。因为“蕴”这个词有聚集的含义,也可以说它有部分的意思。世间人欠了债被催讨时会说“我们用两蕴还,我们用三蕴还”,所以“蕴”就是部分的意思。所谓“色蕴”,这里的“色”是因为被破坏,也就是以冷热等众所周知的方式被破坏、被碰触、被逼迫的意思。世尊确实这样说过:巴利
Tattha ādibhūtāya khandhavibhaṅgamātikāya atthato tāva – pañcakkhandhāti ettha pañcāti gaṇanaparicchedo, tena na tato heṭṭhā, na uddhanti dasseti. Khandhāti paricchinnadhammanidassanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ khandha-saddo sambahulesu ṭhānesu nipatati rāsimhi guṇe paṇṇattiyaṃ ruḷhiyanti. Tattha ‘‘mahāudakakkhandho’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.1037; a. ni. 4.51; 5.45; 6.37) hi rāsito khandho nāma. ‘‘Sīlakkhandho samādhikkhandho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.355) guṇato. ‘‘Addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandha’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) paṇṇattito. ‘‘Viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 63) ekampi cittaṃ ruḷhito khandho nāma, svāyamidha rāsito adhippeto. Rāsaṭṭho hi khandha-saddo, koṭṭhāsaṭṭhotipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Lokasmiṃ hi iṇaṃ gahetvā codiyamānā ‘‘dvīhi khandhehi dassāma , tīhi khandhehi dassāmā’’ti vadanti, tasmā khandhoti koṭṭhāsoti vuttaṃ hoti. Rūpakkhandhoti ettha ruppatīti rūpaṃ, sītuṇhādīhi pasiddhākārena ruppati ghaṭṭīyati, pīḷiyatīti attho. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,因为会变坏,所以称为色。被什么变坏呢?被寒冷变坏,被炎热变坏,被饥饿变坏,被口渴变坏。巴利
‘‘Ruppatīti kho, bhikkhave, tasmā rūpanti vuccati. Kena ruppati? Sītenapi ruppati, uṇhenapi ruppati, jighacchāyapi ruppati, pipāsāyapi ruppatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.79).
色本身又是蕴,所以叫色蕴,意思是色的聚集、色的类别。受蕴等等也是同样的道理。以上就是这里从含义上注释的方法。巴利
Rūpañca taṃ khandho cāti rūpakkhandho, rūparāsi rūpakoṭṭhāsoti attho. Vedanākkhandhādīsupi eseva nayoti ayaṃ tāvettha atthato saṃvaṇṇanānayo.
不过,从法的分类来看,下面在善三法里已经分别说明的、按过去等类别区分的所有色法,就叫色蕴。同样,四地所摄的受和想,就叫受蕴、想蕴。除了受和想,其余触等五十个心所,就叫行蕴。在五蕴中,只有涅槃不被包含;而在取蕴中,则一切出世间法都不被包含。这正是蕴和取蕴的差别:蕴是不加区分地说的,取蕴则是按有漏、可被执取的状态加以区分后说的。但在这里,因为是不加区分地说的,所以除了涅槃,其余一切法都被包含在内。以上就是从法的分类方面所作的注释方法。巴利
Dhammabhedato panettha heṭṭhā kusalattike vibhattā atītādibhedabhinnā sabbe rūpadhammā rūpakkhandho nāma. Tathā catubhūmakā vedanāsaññāyo vedanākkhandho nāma, saññākkhandho nāma. Vedanāsaññā pana ṭhapetvā sesā phassādayo paññāsa cetasikā saṅkhārakkhandho nāma. Pañcasu khandhesu nibbānameva asaṅgahitaṃ, upādānakkhandhesu pana sabbe lokuttaradhammā. Ayameva hi khandhehi upādānakkhandhānaṃ viseso. Khandhā avisesato vuttā, upādānakkhandhā sāsavopādāniyabhāvena visesetvā. Idha pana avisesena vuttattā nibbānaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā sabbe dhammā saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti ayaṃ dhammabhedato saṃvaṇṇanānayo.
显示分别的方法,是指显示《分别论》巴利文中所说的义理方法。因为在《分别论》中,蕴分别是以经分别、论分别、问难这三种方法来说明的。处分别等也是这样。不过,在根分别和学处分别里,没有经分别;在缘起分别里,没有问难。而在智分别等三种里,这三种方法都没有。因为其中,智分别从一种开始,一直到十种,作了分别;小事分别从一种开始,一直到六十二种分类,作了分别;法心分别则是以一切包含等十种方式作了分别。因此,对那些方法,只以显示其要点的形式,在各处加以注释。在这里,就是蕴分别中三种方法的要点显示。具体如下:首先,在经分别中,色蕴——巴利
Vibhaṅganayadassanāti vibhaṅgapāḷiyā āgataatthanayadassanato. Vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ hi suttantabhājanīyaṃ abhidhammabhājanīyaṃ pañhāpucchakanti tīhi nayehi khandhavibhaṅgo vibhatto. Tathā āyatanavibhaṅgādayo. Kevalaṃ hi indriyavibhaṅge, sikkhāpadavibhaṅge ca suttantabhājanīyaṃ natthi. Paccayākāravibhaṅge pañhāpucchakaṃ natthi. Ñāṇavibhaṅgādīsu pana tīsu tayopi nayā na santi. Tesu hi ñāṇavibhaṅgo ekavidhato paṭṭhāya yāva dasavidhā vibhatto, khuddakavatthuvibhaṅgo ekavidhato paṭṭhāya yāva dvāsaṭṭhipabhedā vibhatto, dhammahadayavibhaṅgo pana sabbasaṅgahādīhi dasahi vārehi vibhatto, tasmā tesaṃ tesaṃ nayānaṃ mukhamattadassanavasena tattha tattha saṃvaṇṇanā bhavissanti. Tatridaṃ khandhavibhaṅge tiṇṇaṃ nayānaṃ mukhamattadassanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – suttantabhājanīye tāva rūpakkhandho –
在这里,什么是色蕴?无论哪一种色,是过去的、未来的、现在的,是内的或外的,是粗的或细的,是低劣的或殊胜的,是远的或近的,把这一切归拢到一起、集合起来,这就称为色蕴。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo rūpakkhandho? Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ vā bahiddhā vā oḷārikaṃ vā sukhumaṃ vā hīnaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā yaṃ dūre santike vā, tadekajjhaṃ abhisaññūhitvā abhisaṅkhipitvā ayaṃ vuccati rūpakkhandho’’ti (vibha. 2) –
像这样概括提示之后,再详细分别。受蕴等也是这样。其中,自己内在的色,叫做内;与此不同的、属于其他人的色,以及没有识的色,叫做外。受等也是这样。而净色和所缘色,叫做粗;其余的叫做细。不可爱的色,叫做劣;可爱的色,叫做胜。巴利
Evaṃ uddisitvā vitthārato vibhatto, tathā vedanākkhandhādayopi. Tattha niyakajjhattaṃ nāma ajjhattarūpaṃ ajjhattaṃ nāma, tato aññaṃ parapuggalagataṃ, aviññāṇañca bahiddhā nāma, tathā vedanādayopi. Pasādavisayarūpaṃ pana oḷārikaṃ nāma, sesaṃ sukhumaṃ nāma. Aniṭṭharūpaṃ hīnaṃ nāma, iṭṭharūpaṃ paṇītaṃ nāma.
难道可意和不可意没有各自的分法吗?同一件事物,对某个人是可意、合心的,对另一个人却是不可意的。比如衣服等东西,对猪等动物来说是不可意的,对人类来说却不是这样;而人类的衣服、装饰等对人类来说是可意的,对猪等动物来说却不是这样。那么,是不是应该只凭个人喜好来确定可意和不可意呢?不是的,因为可意和不可意是被各自分别区分的。善业所生的,只有作为善异熟所缘的,才叫可意;不善业所生的,只有作为不善异熟所缘的,才叫不可意。然而,由于想颠倒,有人在速行刹那,把本来可意的佛像等当作不可意来作意;把本来不可意的地狱火、刀、毒等当作可意来作意。这种颠倒只存在于速行中,不存在于异熟中。因此,应该依据异熟来判断可意和不可意是确定的。巴利
Nanu iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ paṭivibhattaṃ nāma natthi, ekaṃ ekaccassa iṭṭhaṃ hoti manāpaṃ, tadeva aññassa ca aniṭṭhaṃ hoti. Vatthādīni hi sūkarādīnaṃ nappiyāni honti, na manussādīnaṃ, tesañca vatthābharaṇādīni piyāni, na sūkarādīnanti, tasmā rucivaseneva iṭṭhāniṭṭhatā gahetabbā? Na, iṭṭhāniṭṭhānaṃ pāṭekkaṃ vibhattattā. Kusalakammajaṃ hi kusalavipākavisayova iṭṭhaṃ nāma, akusalakammajaṃ akusalavipākavisayova aniṭṭhaṃ nāma, saññāvipallāsena pana koci iṭṭhameva buddharūpādiṃ javanakkhaṇe aniṭṭhato manasi karoti, aniṭṭhañca nirayaggisatthavisādiṃ iṭṭhato manasi karoti. Javanehi eva vipallāsabhāvo, na vipākehīti vipākavasena iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ niyataṃ veditabbaṃ.
不过在《迷惑破除》,即《分别论》义注里——巴利
Sammohavinodaniyā pana vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāya –
粪便污泥带来乐触,在眼门和鼻门是不可意的,在身门却是可意的。转轮王被宝珠击打时,或被金桩刺穿时,宝珠和金桩在眼门是可意的,在身门却是不可意的。巴利
‘‘Sukhasamphassaṃ hi gūthakalalaṃ cakkhudvāraghānadvāresu aniṭṭhaṃ, kāyadvāre iṭṭhaṃ hoti. Cakkavattino maṇiratanena pothiyamānassa, suvaṇṇasūle uttāsiyamānassa ca maṇiratanasuvaṇṇasūlāni cakkhudvāre iṭṭhāni honti, kāyadvāre aniṭṭhānī’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 6) –
这样,从门的角度来说,同一个事物既可意也不可意,已经讲过了。但这两者在同一刹那是不可能的,因为同一聚中的四大种和所造色是在同一集合里生起的。确实,当不善的四大种生起而成为不可意时,依靠它们生起的所造色等并不会以善的方式变成可意;但在不同刹那,可意的宝珠等被那些东西击打时,以不善为缘的时节会使其变成不可意,以善为缘时,不可意的粪便污泥等会变成可意——这是我们自己的见解。在这样区分了可意与不可意之后,应当依各类色法而见其低劣与殊胜。而微细的色称为远色,粗大的色称为近色。或者,应当依各类色法而见色的远与近。其余部分如前所说。巴利
Evaṃ dvāravasena ekasseva vatthuno iṭṭhatā, aniṭṭhatā ca vuttā. Sā ca ekakkhaṇe na yuttā ekakalāpagatabhūtopādāyarūpānaṃ ekasāmaggiyamuppattito. Na hi bhūtesu akusalavasena aniṭṭhesu uppajjantesu tadupādāyarūpādikusalena iṭṭhāni uppajjanti, bhinnakkhaṇe pana iṭṭhāni maṇiratanādīni tehi pothiyamānassa akusalapaccayena utunā aniṭṭhāni vipariṇamanti, kusalapaccayena aniṭṭhāni gūthakalalādīni iṭṭhānīti, ayaṃ no attanomati. Evaṃ vibhattesu ca iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu taṃ taṃ rūpaṃ upādāyupādāya hīnaṃ, paṇītañca daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sukhumaṃ pana rūpaṃ dūrerūpaṃ nāma, oḷārikaṃ santikerūpaṃ nāma. Taṃ taṃ vā pana rūpaṃ upādāyupādāya rūpaṃ dūre santike daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在受等当中,不善受是粗的,其余的是细的。善与不善受是粗的,无记受是细的。苦受是粗的,其余的是细的。或者,乐与苦是粗的,其余的是细的。未入定者的受是粗的,入定者的受是细的。有漏的是粗的,无漏的是细的。再者,应当依据每一种受来判断粗与细。不善受与善受、无记受相距远,它们彼此之间也相距远。这样,依照种类、自性、个人、地的区别,按所说的方式,应当看待远受。善受与善受相距近,这样,依照种类等的共通性,应当看待近受。或者,应当依据每一种受来看待受的远与近。同样,在想蕴等当中,也应当随其对应而了知粗、细等。这里是简要的说明,详细内容则应从《分别论》及其注释中获取。这就是经分别的方式。巴利
Vedanādīsu pana akusalā vedanā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Kusalākusalā oḷārikā, abyākatā sukhumā. Dukkhā vedanā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Sukhadukkhā vā oḷārikā, itarā sukhumā. Asamāpannassa vā vedanā oḷārikā, samāpannassa sukhumā. Sāsavā oḷārikā , anāsavā sukhumā. Taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya oḷārikasukhumatā daṭṭhabbā. Akusalā vedanā kusalābyākatāhi dūre, tā ca tāya dūreti evaṃ jātisabhāvapuggalabhūmibhedato vuttanayena dūrevedanā daṭṭhabbā, kusalā vedanā kusalāya santiketi evaṃ jātiādisāmaññato santikevedanā daṭṭhabbā. Taṃ taṃ vā pana vedanaṃ upādāyupādāya vedanā dūresantike daṭṭhabbā. Evaṃ saññākkhandhādīsupi yathānurūpaṃ oḷārikasukhumatādayo veditabbāti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana vibhaṅgapāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu (vibha. 8 ādayo; vibha. aṭṭha. 8 ādayo) gahetabboti ayaṃ suttantabhājanīyanayo.
在阿毗达摩分别的理路中,色蕴先从一种到十一种,应当依照色品里所说的方式来了知。受蕴则:一种,与触相应;两种,按有因二法来分;三种,按善三法来分;四种,按四地来分;五种,按自性差别来分;六种,按六门来分;七种,按与七识相应来分;八种,是在这些当中,把与身识相应的受按乐和苦分成两种;九种,是在这些当中,把与意识相应的受按善三法分成三种;十种,是在这些当中,把与身识相应的受分成两种,把与意识相应的受分成三种。这样先说了以有因二法为根本的第一轮,然后在善三法的地方,把受三法、喜三法、有见三法排除在外,与其余一切三法结合,一直到十种,另外还说了十八轮。就像这里以有因二法为根本来结合一切三法一样,在因相应二法等当中,也应当知道以相应的二法为根本,一直到有诤二法为止,各自结合一切三法,这就是二法为根本的结合方式。又像以每一个二法结合一切三法而说了二法为根本的方式一样,也应当知道以每一个三法相应地结合一切二法而说三法为根本的方式,以及把这两者混合起来而说双方递增的方式。就像在这里的受蕴一样,在想蕴等当中,也应当随其相应来了知二法为根本等方式。这就是阿毗达摩分别的理路。巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīyanaye rūpakkhandhassa tāva ekavidhādito yāva ekādasavidhā rūpakaṇḍe vuttanayena veditabbā. Vedanākkhandho pana ekavidho phassasampayutto, duvidho sahetukadukavasena, tividho kusalattikavasena, catubbidho catubhūmakavasena, pañcavidho sabhāvabhedena, chabbidho chadvārikavasena, sattavidho sattaviññāṇasampayogavasena, aṭṭhavidho tesu kāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ sukhadukkhavasena dvidhā bhinditvā, navavidho tesu manoviññāṇasampayuttaṃ kusalattikavasena tidhā bhinditvā, dasavidho tesu kāyaviññāṇasampayuttaṃ duvidhā, manoviññāṇasampayuttañca tidhā bhinditvāti evaṃ sahetukadukamūlaṃ paṭhamavāraṃ vatvā puna kusalattikaṭṭhāne vedanāttikapītittikasanidassanattikavajjite sabbattike yojetvā yāva dasavidhā, aparepi aṭṭhārasa vārā vuttā. Yathā cettha sahetukadukamūlikā sabbattikayojanā, evaṃ hetusampayuttadukādīsu anurūpadukamūlikāpi saraṇadukapariyosānā paccekaṃ sabbattikayojanāpi veditabbāti ayaṃ dukamūlako yojanānayo. Yathā ca ekekadukena sabbattikayojanāvasena dukamūlako nayo vutto, evaṃ ekekattikena yathānurūpaṃ sabbadukayojanāvasena tikamūlako, tadubhayamissakavasena ubhatovaḍḍhanako ca nayo veditabbo. Yathā cettha vedanākkhandhe, evaṃ saññākkhandhādīsupi yathārahaṃ dukamūlakādinayā veditabbāti ayaṃ abhidhammabhājanīyanayo.
在问难门中,对五蕴要问:几是善,几是不善,几是无记,几与乐受相应……几是有诤,几是无诤?色蕴是无记;四蕴可能是善,可能是不善,可能是无记。在受三法里,色和受不可说,其余诸蕴三种情况都可能。色是非异熟非异熟法,可能是已执取且已执取所依,可能是非已执取而已执取所依,是非杂染且顺杂染;其余四蕴在这三种三法里,三种情况都可能。色是无寻无伺;三蕴(受、想、识)三种情况都可能;行蕴三种情况都可能,也有不可说的情况。色不可说;受可能是喜俱行,也可能不可说;三蕴(想、行、识)三种情况都可能,也有不可说的情况。色既不是见所断也不是修所断,不是见所断也不是修所断的因,不是趣向积集也不是趣向离散,不是有学也不是无学,是劣的;其余诸蕴三种情况都可能。在劣所缘三法里,色是非所缘,其余诸蕴三种情况都可能,也有不可说的情况。色是中,是不定,其余诸蕴三种情况都可能。在道所缘三法里,色是非所缘,其余诸蕴三种情况都可能,或者不可说。在已生、过去等三法里,五蕴三种情况都可能。在过去所缘三法里,色是非所缘,其余诸蕴三种情况都可能,也有不可说的情况。在内三法里,五蕴三种情况都可能。在内所缘三法里,色是非所缘,其余诸蕴三种情况都可能,也有不可说的情况。四蕴是无见无对,色蕴三种情况都可能。巴利
Pañhāpucchakanaye pana pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ kati kusalā, kati akusalā, kati abyākatā, kati sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā…pe… kati saraṇā, kati araṇāti? Rūpakkhandho abyākato, cattāro khandhā siyā kusalā, siyā akusalā, siyā abyākatā, rūpaṃ, vedanā ca vedanāttike na vattabbā, sesā tidhāpi honti, rūpaṃ nevavipākanavipākadhammadhammaṃ, siyā upādinnupādāniyaṃ, siyā anupādinnupādāniyaṃ, asaṃkiliṭṭhasaṃkilesikaṃ, sesā cattāro khandhā tīhi tikehi tidhāpi honti. Rūpaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, tayo khandhā tidhāpi honti, saṅkhārakkhandho tidhā ca na vattabbo ca. Rūpaṃ na vattabbaṃ, vedanā siyā pītisahagatā, na vattabbā, tayo tidhā ca na vattabbā ca. Rūpaṃ nevadassanenanabhāvanāyapahātabbaṃ, nadassanenanabhāvanāyapahātabbahetukaṃ, nevācayagāminaapacayagāmi, nevasekhaṃnāsekhaṃ, parittaṃ, sesā tidhāpi honti. Parittārammaṇattike rūpaṃ anārammaṇaṃ, sesā tidhā ca na vattabbā ca. Rūpaṃ majjhimaṃ, aniyataṃ, sesā tidhāpi. Maggārammaṇattike ca rūpaṃ anārammaṇaṃ, sesā tidhāpi vā na vattabbā. Uppannātītattikesu pañcapi tidhā honti. Atītārammaṇattike rūpaṃ anārammaṇaṃ, sesā tidhā ca na vattabbā ca. Ajjhattattike pañcapi tidhā honti. Ajjhattārammaṇattike rūpaṃ anārammaṇaṃ, sesā tidhāpi na vattabbā ca. Cattāro khandhā anidassanaappaṭighā, rūpakkhandho tidhāpi hoti.
四种蕴不是因,行蕴可能是因,也可能不是因。色是无因,与因不相应;其余三者两种都可能。三种蕴可能是有因且不是因,也可能不可说;行蕴两种都可能且不可说;色只是不可说。在无间双论中也是这样。色是非因无因,三者两种都可能,行蕴两种都可能且不可说。五蕴都是有缘、有为。四蕴不可见、无对碍,色两种都可能。色是色法,其余是非色法。色是世间法,其余两种都可能。五蕴都可能被某种识了知,也可能不被任何识了知。四蕴不是漏,行蕴两种都可能且不可说。色是有漏、与漏不相应,其余两种都可能。色是有漏且不是漏,三者同样如此且不可说,行蕴两种都可能且不可说。色只是不可说,三者可能是有漏相应且不是漏,也可能不可说,行蕴两种都可能且不可说。色是与漏不相应且有漏,其余两种都可能且不可说。按照这个方法,在结缚论等中也应当知道如何配合。只是在执取相应双论中,色是与执取不相应,三者两种都可能,行蕴两种都可能,依见而不可说。这是第三双论中唯一的差别。色是无所缘,其余是有所缘。识是心,其余不是心。三者是心所,两者不是心所。三者与心相应,色与心不相应。识不可说。在心相应双论中也是这样。三者是心所生,识不是心所生。色两种都可能。在无间双论二种中也是这样。三者是心相应且心所生,两者不是心相应且心所生。在无间双论二种中也是这样。识是内,三者是外,色两种都可能。四蕴不是取,色两种都可能。五蕴都可能是已执取,也可能是非已执取,但不是取。巴利
Cattāro khandhā nahetū, saṅkhārakkhandho siyā hetu, siyā na hetu. Rūpaṃ ahetukaṃ, hetuvippayuttaṃ, sesā dvidhāpi. Tayo khandhā siyā sahetukā ceva na ca hetū, siyā na vattabbā ca, saṅkhārakkhandho dvidhā ca na vattabbo ca, rūpaṃ na vattabbameva. Tathā anantaradukepi. Rūpaṃ nahetuahetukaṃ, tayo dvidhāpi, saṅkhārakkhandho dvidhā ca na vattabbo ca. Pañcapi sappaccayā, saṅkhatā, cattāro anidassanā, appaṭighā, rūpaṃ dvidhāpi. Rūpaṃ rūpī, sesā arūpino. Rūpaṃ lokiyaṃ, sesā dvidhāpi. Pañcapi kenaci viññeyyā, na ca kenaci viññeyyā ca. Cattāro no āsavā, saṅkhārā dvidhāpi, na vattabbā ca. Rūpaṃ sāsavo, āsavavippayutto , sesā dvidhāpi. Rūpaṃ sāsavā ceva no ca āsavā, tayo tathā ca na vattabbā ca. Saṅkhāro dvidhā ca na vattabbo ca. Rūpaṃ na vattabbameva, tayo siyā āsavasampayuttā ceva no ca āsavā, siyā na vattabbā, saṅkhāro dvidhā ca na vattabbo ca. Rūpaṃ āsavavippayuttaṃ sāsavañca, sesā dvidhā ca na vattabbā ca. Iminā nayena saṃyojanagocchakādīsupi yojanā veditabbā. Kevalaṃ hi parāmāsasampayuttaduke rūpaṃ parāmāsavippayuttaṃ, tayo dvidhāpi, saṅkhāro dvidhāpi, diṭṭhivasena na vattabbo ca. Tatiye ettakameva viseso. Rūpaṃ anārammaṇaṃ, sesā sārammaṇā. Viññāṇaṃ cittaṃ, sesā no cittā. Tayo cetasikā, dve acetasikā. Tayo cittasampayuttā, rūpaṃ cittavippayuttaṃ. Viññāṇaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Tathā cittasaṃsaṭṭhadukepi. Tayo cittasamuṭṭhānā, viññāṇaṃ no cittasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Rūpaṃ dvidhāpi. Tathā anantaradukadvayepi. Tayo cittasaṃsaṭṭhasamuṭṭhānā, dve no cittasaṃsaṭṭhasamuṭṭhānā. Tathā anantaradukadvayepi. Viññāṇaṃ ajjhattikaṃ, tayo bāhirā, rūpaṃ dvidhāpi. Cattāro no upādā. Rūpaṃ dvidhāpi. Pañcapi siyā upādinnā, siyā anupādinnā, no upādānā.
烦恼品就像前面所说的那样来配合。色既不是见所断,也不是修所断,其余诸法两种情形都有。如此,直到喜双论为止,都应知道这样配合。巴利
Kilesagocchako vuttanayova. Rūpaṃ nevadassanenanabhāvanāya pahātabbaṃ, sesā dvidhāpi. Evaṃ yāvapītidukā yojanā veditabbā.
色不是受,不是乐,也不是与乐俱行,其余诸法两种情况都可能。在无间双论中也是如此。色属于欲界,其余诸法两种情况都可能。这样一直到有诤双论,应当知道如何配合。这是提问的方式。巴利
Rūpaṃ na vedanā, na sukhā, na sukhasahagatā, sesā dvidhāpi. Tathā anantaradukepi. Rūpaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ, sesā dvidhāpi. Evaṃ yāva saraṇadukā yojanā veditabbā. Ayaṃ pañhāpucchakanayo.
这些方法应当依据巴利三藏和注释书来详细理解。而它们义理的判定,则应当依照《法集论》论母义释中所说的来理解。从这里往后,不再多说,只解释前面还没讲过的内容。这就是从分别论的展示方式而来的注释方式。巴利
Ime pana nayā vitthārato pāḷiaṭṭhakathāhi ñātabbā. Atthavinicchayo ca nesaṃ dhammasaṅgaṇīmātikatthasaṃvaṇṇanāya vuttānusārena ñātabbo. Ito paraṃ atirekaṃ avatvā apubbameva vaṇṇayissāmāti ayaṃ vibhaṅganayadassanato saṃvaṇṇanānayo.
那么现在在这里——巴利
Idāni panettha –
从次第、增减,以及应当看待的共相与别相来看;
欲求蕴善巧者应知巴利圣典之外的方法。巴利
Kamatonūnādhikato, daṭṭhabbasamabhedato; Pāḷimuttanayo ñeyyo, khandhakosallamicchatā.
在这里,关于次第:在生起次第、断除次第、行道次第、地次第、说法次第等多种次第中,只有五蕴的说法次第是合适的,其他几种都不合适,因为不可能。世尊确实希望利益众生,想让那些在五蕴上执取有我的所化众生,通过显示聚集与密集的剖析,从执取有我的执著中解脱出来,为了让各类众生容易领解,首先宣说了以眼等为所缘的粗的色蕴;然后宣说了感受可爱、不可爱所缘的粗的受蕴;接着宣说了执取受等所缘行相的想蕴,即“他所感受的,他想知”;再依想而造作的行蕴;最后宣说了作为受等之所依与增上的识蕴。这就是此处所说的次第。巴利
Tattha kamatoti ettha uppattikkamo pahānakkamo paṭipattikkamo bhūmikkamo desanākkamoti bahuvidhesu kamesu khandhānaṃ desanākkamova yujjati, na itare, asambhavā. Abhedena hi pañcasu khandhesu attaggāhapatitaṃ veneyyajanaṃ samūhaghanavinibbhogadassanena attaggāhato mocetukāmo bhagavā hitakāmo tassa tassa janassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ cakkhuādīnaṃ visayabhūtaṃ oḷārikaṃ paṭhamaṃ rūpakkhandhaṃ desesi, tato iṭṭhāniṭṭhavisayasaṃvedakaṃ oḷārikaṃ vedanaṃ, yaṃ vedeti, taṃ sañjānātīti evaṃ vedanāvisayassa ākāraggāhikaṃ saññaṃ, saññāvasenābhisaṅkhārake saṅkhāre, tesaṃ vedanādīnaṃ nissayādhipatibhūtaṃ viññāṇanti ayaṃ tāvettha kamo.
为什么世尊只说五蕴,不多不少呢?因为一切有为法都按同类归摄在一起;因为执取我、我所的对象以这五者最为究竟;也因为其他法都被这五者所含摄。在种种不同类别的有为法中,按同类归摄时,色依色的同类归为一蕴,受依受的同类归为一蕴,想、行、识也是如此。所以,从一切有为法按同类归摄来说,只说五蕴。而执取我、我所的对象,即色等五者,以它们最为究竟,所以从执取我、我所的对象以这五者为究竟来说,也只说五蕴。此外,其他所说的戒等五法蕴,因为都归入行蕴,所以也含摄在这里面。因此,从其他法都被含摄于此来说,也只说五蕴。这就是不多不少的道理。巴利
Anūnādhikatoti kasmā pana bhagavatā pañceva khandhā vuttā anūnā anadhikāti? Sabbasaṅkhatasabhāgekasaṅgahato, attattaniyaggāhavatthussa etapparamato, aññesañca tadavarodhato. Anekappabhedesu hi saṅkhatadhammesu sabhāgavasena saṅgayhamānesu rūpaṃ rūpasabhāgekasaṅgahavasena eko khandho hoti, vedanā vedanāsabhāgekasaṅgahavasena eko khandho hoti. Esa nayo saññādīsupi, tasmā sabbasaṅkhatasabhāgekasaṅgahato pañceva vuttā. Etaparamañcetaṃ attattaniyaggāhavatthu, yadidaṃ rūpādayo pañca, tasmā attattaniyaggāhavatthussa etaparamatopi pañceva vuttā. Yepi caññe sīlādayo pañca dhammakkhandhā vuttā, tepi saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannattā ettheva avarodhaṃ gacchanti, tasmā aññesaṃ tadavarodhatopi pañceva vuttāti ayaṃ anūnādhikato.
从“应见的共相与别相”来说,就是依应见的差别和譬喻的差别。其中,先依应见的差别来说:五取蕴总体上应当看作举剑的敌人、重担、吞食者,以及被称为无常、苦、无我的杀害者。特别来说,色应当看作像泡沫团一样,受、想、行、识则依次应当看作像水泡、阳焰、芭蕉树干、幻术一样。就像泡沫团经不起挤压,即使拿来想当盘子等用,也达不到那个目的,终究会破灭;同样,色也经不起挤压,即使以净相等方式执取它,它也不会那样保持下去,只会是不净等。巴利
Daṭṭhabbasamabhedatoti daṭṭhabbabhedato, upamābhedato ca. Tattha daṭṭhabbabhedato tāva pañcupādānakkhandhā sāmaññato ukkhittāsikapaccatthikato, bhārato, khādakato, aniccadukkhaanattasaṅkhātavadhakato ca daṭṭhabbā. Visesato pana pheṇapiṇḍaṃ viya rūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, udakabubbuḷamarīcikakadalikkhandhamāyā viya yathākkamaṃ vedanādayo daṭṭhabbā. Yathā hi pheṇapiṇḍo vimaddāsaho, so ca pattathālakādiatthaṃ gahitopi tamatthaṃ na sādheti, bhijjati, evaṃ rūpampi vimaddāsahaṃ, tañca subhādivasena gahitampi na tathā tiṭṭhati, asubhādiyeva hoti.
就像泡沫团由许多接合处拼合而成,是各种水蛇等生物的住处;它起初只有熟枣那么大,逐渐长大,刚浮起来时就会破灭,稍微漂一段也会破灭,一旦到了大海,就一定会破灭。同样,色身也是布满孔洞缝隙,由许多接合处拼合而成,八十种虫类聚集其中;它起初只是凝滑那么一点,逐渐长大,在凝滑阶段就会破灭,到了胞等阶段也会破灭,等到寿命耗尽时,就一定会破灭。应当这样看待它,就像泡沫团一样。巴利
Yathā vā pheṇapiṇḍo anekasandhighaṭito bahunnaṃ udakasappādipāṇakānaṃ āvāso, ādito cesa badarapakkamatto hutvā anupubbavaḍḍhanako uṭṭhitamattopi cesa bhijjati, thokaṃ gantvāpi, samuddaṃ patvā pana avassameva bhijjati , evaṃ rūpampi chiddāvachiddaṃ anekasandhighaṭitaṃ asītikimikulavokiṇṇaṃ, ādito cetaṃ kalalamattaṃ hutvā anupubbavaḍḍhanakaṃ, kalalamattepi cetaṃ bhijjati, abbudādibhāvepi āyukkhayaṃ patvā avassameva bhijjati. Evaṃ pheṇapiṇḍasadisaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
就像水泡只能让人短暂觉得好看,抓不住,也没法长久停留,感受也是这样。又像水泡是依靠水面、水滴、把水垢聚拢做成囊袋以及摄持之风这四种条件才生起的,感受也是依靠所依处、所缘、烦恼垢和触的撞击这四种条件才生起的,所以应该把感受看作和水泡一样。巴利
Yathā pana bubbuḷo muhuttaramaṇīyo agayhupago na ciraṭṭhitikova, evaṃ vedanāpi. Yathā ca bubbuḷo udakatalaṃ, udakabinduṃ, udakajallakaṃ saṅkaḍḍhitvā puṭaṃ katvā gahaṇavātañcāti cattāri kāraṇāni paṭicca uppajjati, evaṃ vedanāpi vatthuṃ, ārammaṇaṃ, kilesajallaṃ, phassasaṅghaṭṭanañcāti cattāri kāraṇāni paṭicca uppajjatīti sā bubbuḷasadisā daṭṭhabbā.
就像阳焰以湖泊、水池等样子来骗人,想蕴也一样,以常等样子来骗人,所以应该看作跟阳焰一样。就像芭蕉树干不能拿来执取,它是由很多层叶鞘合在一起的;行蕴也一样,不能执取,它没有常等坚实核心,而且是由触等许多法聚合而成的,所以应该看作跟芭蕉树干一样。就像幻术把不是金、银等的东西也变得让人执取,欺骗大众;识蕴也一样,它本身是无常等样子,却仿佛以那同一个心而来,让人把它执取为常等,从而欺骗人,所以应该看作跟幻术一样。又说:巴利
Yathā pana marīcikā jalāsayādibhāvena vippalambhikā, evaṃ saññāpi niccādibhāvenāti marīcisadisā daṭṭhabbā. Yathā pana kadalikkhandho agayhupago bahuvaṭṭisamodhāno, evaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhopi agayhupagoniccādisāravirahito, phassādibahudhammasamodhāno ca hotīti so kadalikkhandhasadiso daṭṭhabbo. Yathā pana māyā asuvaṇṇarajatādirūpānipi tathā gāhāpetvā mahājanaṃ vañceti, evaṃ viññāṇampi aniccādirūpaṃ teneva cittena āgacchantaṃ viya niccādito ca gāhāpetvā vañcetīti taṃ māyāsadisaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vuttañca –
“ 色就像一团水沫,受就像水泡;
想如阳焰,行如芭蕉;
识就像幻术一样,这是太阳族佛陀所宣说的。”巴利
‘‘Pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ rūpaṃ, vedanā bubbuḷūpamā; Marīcikūpamā saññā, saṅkhārā kadalūpamā; Māyūpamañca viññāṇaṃ, desitādiccabandhunā’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 3.95);
这里应当看到的分类差别就是这样。巴利
Ayamettha daṭṭhabbabhedo.
再从譬喻的差别来看:色取蕴像病房,受取蕴像疾病,想取蕴像病因,行取蕴像用了不合适的疗法,识取蕴像病人。此外,它们还可以依次比喻为:监狱、刑罚、罪过、施刑者、罪犯;以及器皿、食物、菜肴、侍者、进食者。这就是这里譬喻的差别。应当知道,这就是脱离巴利圣典而作的判别方法。巴利
Upamābhedato ca pana gilānasālūpamo rūpupādānakkhandho, gelaññūpamo vedanupādānakkhandho, gelaññasamuṭṭhānūpamo saññupādānakkhandho, asappāyasevanūpamo saṅkhārupādānakkhandho , gilānūpamo viññāṇupādānakkhandho. Apica cārakakāraṇaaparādhakāraṇakārakaaparādhikūpamā ete bhājanabhojanabyañjanaparivesakabhuñjakūpamā cāti ayamettha upamābhedo. Evaṃ pāḷimuttakavinicchayanayo ñeyyo.
处分别论母的注释巴利
Āyatanavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于处分别论母,先从含义上说:这里说的“十二处”,是从处、引生和导引广大的角度称为处。因为在眼、色等当中,各种心与心所法通过各自的门和所缘,以各自领受等作用而引生、现起、努力、精勤;而这些又扩展、广布那些作为基础的法,并且确实导引这极其广大的轮回之苦,使它转起,所以说为“处”。巴利
Āyatanavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – dvādasāyatanānīti ettha āyatanato, āyānaṃ tananato, āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanāni. Cakkhurūpādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādinā kiccena āyatanti upaṭṭhahanti ghaṭenti vāyamanti, te ca pana āyabhūte dhamme etāni tanonti vitthārenti, idañca atīva āyataṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayanteva, pavattayantīti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘āyatanānī’’ti vuccanti.
另外,从住处、来源、汇聚处、出生地和原因这几个意义来说,在教法和世间中都称为“处”。因为在眼等之中,那些心和心所法依靠它们才能生起活动,所以安住于它们;它们又像矿藏一样,心和心所法以所依和所缘的方式密集地汇聚到这些作为来源的眼等之中;眼等正是它们的出生处,也是它们的原因。因此应当知道,眼等以住处等意义而称为“处”。巴利
Apica nivāsaṭṭhānaṭṭhena, ākaraṭṭhena, samosaraṇaṭṭhānaṭṭhena, sañjābhidesaṭṭhena, kāraṇaṭṭhena ca sāsane, loke ca ‘‘āyatana’’nti vuccanti. Cakkhuādīsu hi te te cittacetasikā dhammā tadāyattavuttitāya nivasanti, tesu ca ākarabhūtesu ākiṇṇā vatthārammaṇavasena ca samosaranti, cakkhādayova nesaṃ sañjātideso, kāraṇañca, tasmā nivāsaṭṭhānādinā atthena cakkhādīni āyatanānīti veditabbāni.
在“眼处”等当中,“眼”就是能看,意思是它品尝色、辨明色。“色”就是能显现色,意思是当颜色发生变化时,它能显示出自己进入心中的状态。“耳”就是能听。“声”就是能被听到,意思是它被发出。“鼻”就是能嗅。“香”就是能散发香气,意思是它显示自己的来源。“舌”就是召唤生命。“味”就是众生所品尝的,意思是它被品味。“身”就是种种可厌的有漏法的来源,是生起之处。“触”就是能被触碰的。“意”就是能思量。“法”就是执持自相。它既是眼且依前述之义为处故名眼处……乃至……既是法且为处故名法处,这是此处的逐词释义。巴利
Cakkhāyatanantiādīsu cakkhatīti cakkhu, rūpaṃ assādeti, vibhāveti cāti attho. Rūpayatīti rūpaṃ. Vaṇṇavikāraṃ āpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti attho. Suṇātīti sotaṃ. Sappatīti saddo, udāharīyatīti attho. Ghāyatīti ghānaṃ. Gandhayatīti gandho, attano vatthuṃ sūcayatīti attho. Jīvitaṃ avhāyatīti jivhā. Rasanti taṃ sattāti raso, assādentīti attho. Kucchitānaṃ sāsavadhammānaṃ āyoti kāyo, uppattideso. Phusīyatīti phoṭṭhabbaṃ. Manatīti mano. Attano lakkhaṇaṃ dhārentīti dhammā. Cakkhu ca taṃ yathāvuttenatthena āyatanañcāti cakkhāyatanaṃ…pe… dhammā ca te āyatanañcāti dhammāyatananti ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
从法的分类来说,这里一切识都叫意处。心所、微细色和涅槃叫法处。其余的处很容易理解。应当知道,在这些处当中,包含了过去等各类分别所区分的、超越时间的世间和出世间一切名色法,以及各种施设。因为从“生由二蕴、一处、一界所摄”等说法可知,色与非色的生、老、坏灭被摄于行蕴、法处、法界中,所以其余的施设也应当知道它们各自按适当的方式被摄于这些当中。这就是这里所说的法的分类。巴利
Dhammabhedato panettha sabbampi viññāṇaṃ manāyatanaṃ nāma. Cetasikasukhumarūpanibbānāni dhammāyatanaṃ nāma. Sesāni suviññeyyāni. Imesu ca āyatanesu atītādibhedabhinnā, kālavinimuttā ca lokiyalokuttarā sabbe nāmarūpadhammā, paññattiyo ca saṅgahitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Jāti dvīhi khandhehi ekenāyatanena ekāya dhātuyā saṅgahitā’’tiādivacanato (dhātu. 71) hi rūpārūpalakkhaṇānaṃ jātijarābhaṅgānaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhadhammāyatanadhammadhātūsu saṅgahitattā itarāsampi paññattīnaṃ yathārahaṃ tattha saṅgahitabhāvo veditabboti ayamettha dhammabhedo.
从分别方式来看,这里在经分别的部分中,首先依照“眼是无常、苦、无我、变易法;色是无常、苦、无我、变易法……法是无常、苦、无我、变易法”这样,按能缘处和所缘处来说诸处。这就是经分别的方式。巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha suttantabhājanīye tāva ‘‘cakkhuṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā vipariṇāmadhammaṃ. Rūpā aniccā dukkhā anattā vipariṇāmadhammā…pe… dhammā aniccā dukkhā anattā vipariṇāmadhammā’’ti (vibha. 154) evaṃ visayivisayāyatanavasena āyatanāni vuttānīti ayaṃ suttantabhājanīyanayo.
不过在阿毗达摩分别里,先说净色和所缘处,是依照色蕴部分所说的方式分别的:“其中,什么是眼处?就是依四大种而生的眼净色……”等等。意处则是从一种开始,一直到十种,依照受蕴部分所说的方式分别。法处则是先列举:“其中,什么是法处?就是受蕴、想蕴、行蕴,以及不可见、无对的、属于法处的色,还有无为界”,然后以“其中,什么是受蕴?”等等,依照受蕴等部分所说的方式分别。微细色和涅槃就完全依照色蕴部分所说的方式。这就是阿毗达摩分别的方式。巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīye pana pasādavisayāyatanāni tāva ‘‘tattha katamaṃ cakkhāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ cakkhu catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasādo’’tiādinā (vibha. 156) rūpakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 597) vuttanayena vibhattāni. Manāyatanaṃ pana ekavidhato paṭṭhāya yāvadasavidhā vedanākkhandhe vuttanayena vibhattaṃ. Dhammāyatanaṃ pana ‘‘tattha katamaṃ dhammāyatanaṃ? Vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho, yañca rūpaṃ anidassanaappaṭighaṃ dhammāyatanapariyāpannaṃ asaṅkhatā ca dhātū’’ti (vibha. 167) uddisitvā ‘‘tattha katamo vedanākkhandho’’tiādinā (vibha. 167) vedanākkhandhādīsu vuttanayena vibhattaṃ. Sukhumarūpanibbānāni rūpakaṇḍe vuttanayānevāti ayaṃ abhidhammabhājanīyanayo.
问答法这部分,接下来不再逐条展开,而是把三法组和二法组开头与结尾的部分,以及那些能说明特殊含义的三法组和二法组搭配起来讲。其余三法组和二法组的搭配方式,按照蕴的部分所讲的那样就能理解。怎么问呢?十二处当中,几处是善……略……几处是无诤?十处是无记,二处可能是善、可能是不善、可能是无记。在受三法组中,十处不可说,意处在三种情况下都可说,法处有三种情况以及不可说……略……色处是有见有对,九处是无见有对,意处和法处是无见无对。十一处不是因,法处可能是因、可能不是因……略……十一处有缘,法处可能是有缘、可能是无缘……略……十处是色,意处不是色,法处两种情况都可说……略……十处是无诤,二处可能是有诤、可能是无诤。这就是问答法。巴利
Pañhāpucchakanayaṃ pana ito paraṃ vitthārato adassetvā tikadukānaṃ ādiantehi ceva visesatthadīpakehi ca tikadukehi yojetvā dassayissāma, sesehipi tikadukehi yojanānayo khandhe vuttanayena sakkā ñātunti. Kathaṃ dvādasannaṃ āyatanānaṃ kati kusalā…pe… kati araṇāti? Dasāyatanā abyākatā, dvāyatanā siyā kusalā, siyā akusalā, siyā abyākatā. Vedanāttike dasāyatanāni na vattabbāni, manāyatanaṃ tidhāpi, dhammāyatanaṃ tidhā na vattabbañca…pe… rūpāyatanaṃ sanidassanasappaṭighaṃ, navāyatanāni anidassanasappaṭighāni, manāyatanadhammāyatanāni anidassanaappaṭighāni, ekādasāyatanāni na hetū, dhammāyatanaṃ siyā hetu, siyā na hetu…pe… ekādasāyatanāni sappaccayāni, dhammāyatanaṃ siyā sappaccayaṃ, siyā appaccayaṃ…pe… dasāyatanāni rūpaṃ, manāyatanaṃ arūpaṃ, dhammāyatanaṃ dvidhāpi…pe… dasāyatanāni araṇāni, dvāyatanāni siyā saraṇāni, siyā araṇānīti ayaṃ pañhāpucchakanayo.
从次第和数量,以及它们应见的差别来看;
在这里,应该按照巴利圣典之外的方式来了解决择。巴利
Kamato tāvattato ca, tesaṃ daṭṭhabbabhedato; Pāḷimuttanayenettha, viññātabbo vinicchayo.
在这里,说法次第本身也是适用的。因为在诸内处当中,由于眼处是以有见有对为所缘,最为明显,所以最先宣说;接下来是以无见有对为所缘的耳处等。或者也可以说,由于眼处和耳处是成就见无上、闻无上的原因,能带来大利益,所以最先宣说;接下来是鼻处等三处;而这五处也都是所行境界,所以最后宣说意处;又因为色处等是眼处等的所缘,所以它们紧跟在眼处等之后。再者,从识生起之因的确定来看,也应了知这些处的次第。经中确实这样说:缘眼与色,眼识生起……乃至……缘意与法,意识生起。这就是此处所说的次第。巴利
Tattha kamatoti idhāpi desanākkamova yujjati. Ajjhattikesu hi āyatanesu sanidassanasappaṭighavisayattā cakkhāyatanaṃ pākaṭanti paṭhamaṃ desitaṃ, tato anidassanasappaṭighavisayāni sotāyatanādīni. Atha vā dassanānuttariyasavanānuttariyahetubhāvato bahūpakārattā cakkhusotāyatanāni paṭhamaṃ desitāni, tato ghānāyatanādīni tīṇi, pañcannampi pana gocaravisayattā ante manāyatanaṃ, cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ gocarattā tesaṃ anantaraṃ rūpāyatanādīni. Apica viññāṇuppattikāraṇavavatthānatopi ayametesaṃ kamo veditabbo. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ…pe… manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati manoviññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.421; saṃ. ni. 4.60, 113; mahāni. 107) ayaṃ tāvettha kamo.
“限量性”是指十二处之量。这里说的是:眼等本身确实也是法,既然如此,为什么不只说“法处”,而要说十二处呢?因为六识身的生起,要依据门和所缘来确定,所以才有这些处的差别,因此说十二处。属于眼识心路的识身,只以眼处作为生起的门,只以色处作为所缘;其余诸识身也各自对应各自的门和所缘。第六识身则以称为有分心的意处这一部分作为生起的门,以法处作为不共的所缘。因此,依据六识身生起的门和所缘来确定,而说十二处,这就是这里“限量性”的含义。巴利
Tāvattatoti tāvabhāvato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – cakkhādayopi hi dhammā eva, evaṃ sati dhammāyatanamicceva avatvā kasmā dvādasāyatanāni vuttānīti ce? Chaviññāṇakāyuppattiyā dvārārammaṇavavatthānato ayametesaṃ bhedo hotīti dvādasa vuttāni. Cakkhuviññāṇavīthipariyāpannassa hi viññāṇakāyassa cakkhāyatanameva uppattidvāraṃ, rūpāyatanamevārammaṇaṃ. Tathā itarāni itaresaṃ. Chaṭṭhassa pana bhavaṅgamanasaṅkhāto manāyatanekadesova uppattidvāraṃ, asādhāraṇañca dhammāyatanaṃ ārammaṇanti. Iti channaṃ viññāṇakāyānaṃ uppattidvārārammaṇavavatthānato dvādasa vuttānīti ayamettha tāvattatā.
关于“应见的差别”,这里应当这样理解:这一切处都应从“没有来”和“没有去”的角度来看。因为它们并不是在生起之前从某处来到这里,也不是在灭去之后去到某处;而是在生起之前,并没有获得自身的体性,在灭去之后,自身的体性已经坏散,只在过去与未来之间的现在,依靠各种条件而运作,不能自主而转起。所以应当从“没有来”和“没有去”的角度来看。
同样,也应从“没有勤求”和“没有主动用力”的角度来看。眼和色等并不会这样想:“但愿我们和合时能生起识。”它们也不会为了生起识,而以门、以依处或以所缘的身份去主动努力;只是由于法性如此,当眼和色等和合时,眼识等便生起。所以应当从“没有勤求”和“没有主动用力”的角度来看。
此外,内在的诸处应当看作像空村一样,因为它们没有恒常、清净、快乐、自我的性质;外在的诸处应当看作像抢劫村庄的盗贼一样。同样,内在的诸处应当看作像六种动物,外在的诸处应当看作像它们各自活动的范围。这就是这里所说的“应见的差别”。这样,在这里应当依照经典之外的解释方式来了知这一判定。巴利
Daṭṭhabbabhedatoti ettha pana sabbāni cetāni āyatanāni anāgamanato, aniggamanato ca daṭṭhabbāni. Na hi tāni pubbe udayā kutoci āgacchanti, napi uddhaṃ vayā kuhiñci gacchanti , atha kho pubbe udayā appaṭiladdhasabhāvāni uddhaṃ vayā paribhinnasabhāvāni, pubbantāparantavemajjhe paccayāyattavuttitāya avasāni pavattanti, tasmā anāgamanato, aniggamanato ca daṭṭhabbāni. Tathā nirīhato, abyāpārato ca. Na hi cakkhurūpādīnaṃ evaṃ hoti ‘‘aho vata amhākaṃ sāmaggiyaṃ viññāṇaṃ nāma uppajjeyyā’’ti, na ca tāni viññāṇuppādanatthaṃ dvārabhāvena, vatthubhāvena, ārammaṇabhāvena vā byāpāramāpajjanti, atha kho dhammatāvesā yaṃ cakkhurūpādisāmaggiyaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīni sambhavanti, tasmā nirīhato, abyāpārato ca daṭṭhabbāni. Apica ajjhattikāni suñño gāmo viya daṭṭhabbāni dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitattā, bāhirāni gāmaghātakacorā viya. Tathā ajjhattikāni chapāṇakā viya daṭṭhabbāni, bāhirāni tesaṃ gocarā viyāti ayamettha daṭṭhabbabhedo. Evaṃ pāḷimuttanayenettha viññātabbo vinicchayo.
界分别论母的注释巴利
Dhātuvibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《界分别论母》,先从含义上说:在这里,“十八界”当中的“界”,有安排、被保持、安排方式、借它而被安排,或者在这里被保持的意思。因为世间的诸界是依因果作用而确定的。它们安排并产生种种轮回之苦,又被众生保持、承载;它们只是苦的安排,而且以这些界为因,轮回之苦随顺于众生而被安排,按照所安排的方式,苦就在这些界当中被保持、被安放。因此,根据这些含义,随其相应而称为“界”。巴利
Dhātuvibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – aṭṭhārasa dhātuyoti ettha vidahati, dhīyate, vidhānaṃ, vidhīyate etāya, ettha vā dhīyatīti dhātu. Lokiyā hi dhātuyo kāraṇabhāvena vavatthitā. Anekappakāraṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ vidahanti nipphādenti, sattehi ca dhīyante dhārīyanti, dukkhavidhānamattameva cetā, etāhi ca kāraṇabhūtāhi saṃsāradukkhaṃ sattehi anuvidhīyati, yathāvihitañca dukkhaṃ etāsveva dhīyati ṭhapīyatīti etehi atthehi yathāsambhavaṃ ‘‘dhātuyo’’ti vuccanti.
就像对被称为“身体”的这个集合体,在它各个组成部分——浆液、血液等——当中,因为这些部分彼此性质不同、被不同特相所限定,所以安立了“界”这个名称;同样地,对被称为“五蕴”的这个自体,在眼等当中,也应当知道有“界”这个名称。不过,从世间和出世间共通的意义来说,因为它们保持自己的本性,所以叫“界”。这是对仅仅无灵魂者的一个称呼。因此,按照前面所说的含义,眼加上界,就是“眼界”;其余各项也是这样。这就是这里暂且逐词解释的意思。巴利
Yathā vā sarīrasaṅkhātassa samudāyassa avayavabhūtesu rasasoṇitādīsu aññamaññaṃ visabhāgalakkhaṇaparicchinnesu dhātusamaññā, evametesupi pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa attabhāvassa cakkhādīsu dhātusamaññā veditabbā. Lokiyalokuttarasādhāraṇatthavasena pana attano sabhāvaṃ dhārentīti dhātuyo. Nijjīvamattānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttenatthena cakkhu ca taṃ dhātu cāti cakkhudhātu. Evaṃ sesesupīti ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
不过,这里的界应当依照在诸处中所述的方式,从法的差别来了知。另外,五门转向和两种领受识名为意界。而除了五识和意界之外,其余一切识都名为意识界。剩下的部分则很容易理解。巴利
Dhammabhedato panettha āyatanesu vuttanayena veditabbo. Apica pañcadvārāvajjanasampaṭicchanadvayaviññāṇaṃ manodhātu nāma. Pañcaviññāṇamanodhātuvajjitaṃ pana sabbampi viññāṇaṃ manoviññāṇadhātu nāma. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
从分析方式来看,在经分别这部分里,先列出“地界、水界、火界、风界、空界、识界”这六界,然后前五界按内与外来分别,最后一界按六种识来分别;接着又列出“乐界、苦界、喜界、忧界、舍界、无明界”这六界,并按相应方式加以分别;再进一步列出“欲界、嗔恚界、害界、出离界、无嗔恚界、无害界”这六界。这样一来,通过三组六界,三地所摄的十八界被分别从自性、特相与资粮、所依、所缘、作用、不离等角度加以说明。应当知道,这就是经分别的方法。巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha suttantabhājanīye tāva – ‘‘pathavīdhātu āpo tejo vāyo ākāsaviññāṇadhātū’’ti cha dhātuyo uddisitvā ādito pañca ajjhattikabāhiravasena, pacchimā ca cha viññāṇavasena vibhattā, aparāpi ‘‘sukhadhātu dukkhasomanassadomanassupekkhāavijjādhātū’’ti cha dhātuyo uddisitvā tathā tathā vibhattā, puna aparāpi ‘‘kāmadhātu byāpādavihiṃsānekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsādhātū’’ti cha dhātuyo uddisitvā, evaṃ tīhi chakkehi paccekaṃ tebhūmakā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo sarūpato, lakkhaṇāhārato, nissayavisayapayogavinābhāvādito ca vuttāti veditabbāti ayaṃ suttantabhājanīyanayo.
不过在《阿毗达摩分别》里,先按各自的自性列出了十八界,其中净色界和所缘界,是依照“处”那一部分所说的方法来分别的;而七识界则是——巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīye pana sarūpeneva aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo uddisitvā pasādavisayadhātuyo āyatane vuttanayena vibhattā, satta viññāṇadhātuyo pana –
在这里,什么是眼识界?依靠眼和诸色而生起的心……眼识界。这就称为眼识界……身识界。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā cakkhuviññāṇadhātu? Cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cittaṃ…pe… cakkhuviññāṇadhātu. Ayaṃ vuccati cakkhuviññāṇadhātu…pe… kāyaviññāṇadhātu.
在这里,什么是意界?从眼识界……乃至……从身识界灭去之后,紧接着生起的心……或者,对一切法最初作意时生起的心……这称为意界。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā manodhātu? Cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā…pe… kāyaviññāṇadhātuyā…pe… niruddhasamanantarā uppajjati cittaṃ…pe… sabbadhammesu vā pana paṭhamasamannāhāro uppajjati cittaṃ…pe… ayaṃ vuccati manodhātu.
在这里,什么是法界?就是受蕴、想蕴、行蕴,以及那种不可见、无障碍、属于法处的色,还有无为界……(中略)……这就叫作法界。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā dhammadhātu? Vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho, yañca rūpaṃ anidassanaṃ appaṭighaṃ dhammāyatanapariyāpannaṃ, asaṅkhatā ca dhātu…pe… ayaṃ vuccati dhammadhātu.
在这里,什么是意识界?……意界生起后灭去,紧接着无间生起的心……依于意与法而生起的心……这称为意识界。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamā manoviññāṇadhātu…pe… manodhātuyāpi uppajjitvā niruddhasamanantarā uppajjati cittaṃ…pe… manañca paṭicca dhamme ca uppajjati cittaṃ…pe… ayaṃ vuccati manoviññāṇadhātū’’ti (vibha. 184) –
已经这样分别说明了。其中,“在一切法中,或者最初的转向”这一句,应当理解为:在五识所缘的一切法中。而在“意界生起后灭去、无间”这一句里,“pi”这个词是集合的意思,所以应当理解为:意界,以及推度、确定等意识界,也是这样。在“依意与法”等句中,意思是:依靠意门中的有分意和四地法所缘,生起伴随转向的速行。这是阿毗达摩的分别方法。巴利
Evaṃ vibhattā. Tattha sabbadhammesu vā pana paṭhamasamannāhāroti ettha pañcaviññāṇavisayesu sabbadhammesūti evaṃ attho gahetabbo. Manodhātuyāpi uppajjitvā niruddhasamanantarāti ettha pana pi-kāro sampiṇḍanattho, tasmā manodhātuyāpi santīraṇavoṭṭhabbanādimanoviññāṇadhātuyāpīti evamattho gahetabbo. Manañca paṭiccātiādīsu manodvāre bhavaṅgamanañceva catubhūmakadhammārammaṇañca paṭicca sahāvajjanakajavanaṃ nibbattatīti attho. Ayaṃ abhidhammabhājanīyanayo.
在问分法这一体裁中,对十八界提问:其中多少是善?……多少是无诤?十六界是无记,二界三种情况都可能。……十界是非异熟、非异熟法,五界是异熟,意界有时是异熟,有时是非异熟、非异熟法,二界三种情况都可能。十界是已执取、已执取,声界是未执取、已执取,五界有时是已执取、已执取,有时是未执取、已执取,二界三种情况都可能。……十界有时是已生,有时是将生,声界有时是已生,有时是未生,有时不能说为“将生”,六界三种情况都可能。法界三种情况都可能。……色界是有见、有对,九界是无见、有对,八界是无见、无对。十七界不是因,法界两种情况都可能。……十六界是无诤,二界两种情况都可能。这就是问分法。巴利
Pañhāpucchakanaye pana aṭṭhārasannaṃ dhātūnaṃ kati kusalā…pe… kati araṇāti? Soḷasa dhātuyo abyākatā, dve dhātuyo tidhāpi honti…pe… dasa dhātuyo nevavipākanavipākadhammadhammā, pañca dhātuyo vipākā, manodhātu siyā vipākā, siyā nevavipākanavipākadhammadhammā, dve dhātuyo tidhāpi honti. Dasa dhātuyo upādinnupādāniyā, saddadhātuyo anupādinnupādāniyā, pañca dhātuyo siyā upādinnupādāniyā, siyā anupādinnupādāniyā, dve dhātuyo tidhāpi…pe… dasa dhātuyo siyā uppannā, siyā uppādino, saddadhātu siyā uppannā, siyā anuppannā, siyā na vattabbā uppādinoti, cha dhātuyo tidhāpi. Dhammadhātu tidhāva…pe… rūpadhātu sanidassanasappaṭighā, nava dhātuyo anidassanasappaṭighā, aṭṭha dhātuyo anidassanaappaṭighā. Sattarasa dhātuyo na hetū, dhammadhātu dvidhāva…pe… soḷasa dhātuyo araṇā, dve dhātuyo dvidhāpīti ayaṃ pañhāpucchakanayo.
现在,对于这些——巴利
Idāni panetāsaṃ –
应当从次第与定量去观察,也要从诸缘的分类去观察。
在这里,对诸界的理解,应当依据经典之外的抉择。巴利
Kamatāvattato daṭṭhabbā, paccayānaṃ vibhāgato; Dhātūnamidha viññeyyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,先按次第来说:此处也同样只有说法的次第才合适。而这个说法的次第,是依因果的先后安立来讲的。眼界和色界,这两者是因;眼识界,这是果。一切处都是如此。这就是这里的次第。巴利
Tattha kamato tāva idhāpi desanākkamova yujjati. So ca panāyaṃ hetuphalānupubbavavatthānavasena vutto. Cakkhudhātu rūpadhātūti idaṃ hi dvayaṃ hetu, cakkhuviññāṇadhātūti idaṃ phalaṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha. Ayaṃ tāvettha kamo.
不过,就这里的范围来说,在经分别中以三组六界所讲的这些界,以及在各种经和阿毗达摩的段落里以“光界……乃至……多界、种种界的世界”等说法出现的那些界,如此可见许多其他的界。为什么不依据那些界来划分,而只说十八界呢?因为那些界也都包含在其中了。巴利
Tāvattato pana yā idha suttantabhājanīye tīhi chakkehi vuttā dhātuyo ceva, tesu tesu suttābhidhammapadesesu ‘‘ābhādhātu…pe… anekadhātunānādhātuloko’’tiādinā āgatā cāti aññāpi bahudhātuyo dissanti, tāsampi vasena paricchedaṃ avatvā kasmā aṭṭhāraseva vuttāti? Tāsampi tadantogadhattā.
另外,有些人把识执为有命(灵魂)。为了向他们说明:识的自性就是了知,而它又按眼识等不同种类分成许多种;并且它必须依赖眼、色等条件才能生起运作,所以是无常的。同时也是为了断除他们长久以来随眠的“有命”想——因此只说十八界。还有什么别的原因呢?也是随所化众生的意乐。所化众生有三种:迷于无色者、迷于色者、迷于二者者。对这三人,依次以不太简略也不太详细的方式,适合为他们说:能辨明无色差别的蕴教、能辨明色差别的处教、能辨明二者差别的界教。所以,随所化众生的意乐,只说十八界。正如所说的——巴利
Apica vijānanasabhāve viññāṇe jīvasaññīnaṃ tassā cakkhuviññāṇādibhedena anekataṃ, cakkhurūpādipaccayāyattavuttitāya aniccatañca pakāsetvā tasmiṃ dīgharattānusayitajīvasaññāsamūhananatthañca aṭṭhāraseva vuttā. Kiñca bhiyyo – veneyyajjhāsayavasena ca. Veneyyā hi arūpamūḷho rūpamūḷho ubhayamūḷhoti tividhā honti. Tesaṃ tiṇṇampi yathākkamaṃ nātisaṅkhepavitthārato arūpabhedavibhāvinī khandhadesanā, rūpabhedavibhāvinī āyatanadesanā, tadubhayabhedavibhāvinī dhātudesanā sappāyāti veneyyajjhāsayavasena aṭṭhāraseva vuttāti. Vuttañca –
“ 按照略说和广说的方式,就这样以种种方式,
他随着各人的情况,把法讲清楚。
正法的威力刹那间将其摧毁消散,
黑暗从应当受教化的众生的心中消失。”巴利
‘‘Saṅkhepavitthāranayena tathā tathā hi, Dhammaṃ pakāsayati esa yathā yathāssa; Saddhammatejavihataṃ vilayaṃ khaṇena, Veneyyasattahadayesu tamo payātī’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 183);
在这里,先就是这样。巴利
Ayamettha tāvattatā.
不过,从“应当看待的方式”来说,这一切有为界都应当被看待为:远离前际与后际,空无恒常、美丽、快乐、自我,并且是依靠各种条件才生起和存在的。在这里,特别应当把眼界看作像鼓面,把色界看作像鼓槌,把眼识界看作像鼓声。这三者又应当依次看作像镜子、面容和影像那样。也应当看作像芝麻、榨油轮和油那样,像下面的取火木、上面的取火木和火那样。耳界等的道理也是这样。至于意界,则应当根据具体情况,看作像眼识界等的前行或随行。在法界中,受应当看作像箭刺,想应当看作像空拳,行应当看作像毒树,微细色应当看作像刀轮,无为界应当看作像安稳的归宿之地;而意识界则应当看作像猴子,像劣马,像抛向空中、想落到哪里就落到哪里的木棍,像舞台上的演员。这就是这里所说的“应当看待的方式”。巴利
Daṭṭhabbato panetā sabbāpi saṅkhatā dhātuyo pubbantāparantavivittato, dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvasuññato, paccayāyattavuttito ca daṭṭhabbā. Visesato panettha bheritalaṃ viya cakkhudhātu daṭṭhabbā, daṇḍo viya rūpadhātu, saddo viya cakkhuviññāṇadhātu. Tathā tissopi cetā yathākkamaṃ ādāsatalamukhamukhanimittāni viya. Tathā tilayantacakkatelāni viya, adharāraṇīuttarāraṇīaggī viya ca daṭṭhabbā. Esa nayo sotadhātuādīsupi. Manodhātu pana yathāsambhavato cakkhuviññāṇadhātuādīnaṃ purecarānucarā viya daṭṭhabbā. Dhammadhātuyaṃ pana vedanā sallasūlamiva , saññā rittamuṭṭhi viya, saṅkhārā visarukkhamiva, sukhumarūpaṃ khuracakkaṃ viya, asaṅkhatā dhātu khemantabhūmi viya ca daṭṭhabbā, manoviññāṇadhātu pana makkaṭo viya, assakhaḷuṅko viya, yatthakāmanipātito vehāsakkhittadaṇḍo viya, raṅganaṭo viya ca daṭṭhabbā. Ayamettha daṭṭhabbatā.
从缘的分别来看:在眼识界中,眼是依止缘,色是所缘缘,唯作意界是无间缘,三种无色蕴是俱生缘。耳识界等也是这样。对于意识界,意界是无间缘,法界是所缘缘,相应、依止、俱生等则是它的缘。这就是缘的分别。应当这样了知超越经文的决断。巴利
Paccayānaṃvibhāgato panettha cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā cakkhu nissayapaccayo, rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayo, kiriyāmanodhātu anantarapaccayo, tayo arūpino khandhā sahajātapaccayo. Evaṃ sotaviññāṇādīsupi. Manoviññāṇadhātuyā pana manodhātu anantarapaccayo, dhammadhātu ārammaṇapaccayo, sampayuttanissayasahajātādipaccayoti ayaṃ paccayavibhāgo. Evaṃ viññeyyo pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
谛分别论母的义释巴利
Saccavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《谛分别》的论母注释,先就含义来说:在“四圣谛”这句话里,“谛”这个字出现在多种含义中。比如在“应说真实语,不应发怒”等句中,指的是言语上的真实;在“安住于谛的沙门婆罗门”等句中,指的是戒离上的真实;在“为什么他们各说各的谛,自称善说者”等句中,指的是见解上的真实;在“真实只有一个,没有第二个”等句中,指的是胜义真实,也就是涅槃和道;在“四圣谛中,哪些是善”等句中,指的是圣谛。这里这个字也是用在圣谛上。以什么含义称为“谛”?以真实之义。什么是真实之义?就是用智慧之眼去观察时,不像幻术那样颠倒,不像阳焰那样欺骗人,也不像外道所执的“我”那样根本找不到实体,而是以逼迫、生起、寂静、出离为本质,以真实、不颠倒、如实的状态成为圣智的对象。应当知道,这个真实之义就是谛之义。经中也说:巴利
Saccavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – cattāri ariyasaccānīti etthāyaṃ sacca-saddo anekesu atthesu dissati. Seyyathidaṃ – ‘‘saccaṃ bhaṇe na kujjheyyā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 224) vācāsacce. ‘‘Sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādīsu (jā. 2.21.433) viratisacce. ‘‘Kasmā nu saccāni vadanti nānā, pavādiyāse kusalāvadānā’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 891) diṭṭhisacce. ‘‘Ekaṃ hi saccaṃ, na dutiyamatthī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 890) paramatthasacce, nibbāne ceva magge ca. ‘‘Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ kati kusalā’’tiādīsu (vibha. 216) ariyasacce. Svāyamidhāpi ariyasacce vattati. Kenaṭṭhena saccāni? Tathaṭṭhena. Koyaṃ tathaṭṭho nāma? Yo paññācakkhunā upaparikkhamānānaṃ māyāva viparīto, marīcīva visaṃvādako, titthiyānaṃ atthā viya anupalabbhamānasabhāvo ca na hoti, atha kho bādhanappabhavasantiniyyānabhūtena tacchāviparītabhūtabhāvena ariyañāṇassa gocaro hoti. Ayaṃ tathaṭṭho saccaṭṭhoti veditabbo. Vuttañca –
“ 在四种情况中,皆真实、不颠倒、如实而住;
智者说,于苦等无差别,此即谛义。”巴利
‘‘Iti tacchāvipallāsabhūtabhāvaṃ catūsupi; Dukkhādīsvavisesena, saccaṭṭhaṃ āhu paṇḍitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 189; sārattha. ṭī. mahāvagga 3.14).
这些既是圣的,也是谛,所以叫圣谛。“圣”的意思是至高、不欺诳。这些谛是佛陀等圣者应当亲证的谛,或者是圣者、正自觉者所拥有的谛——因为是由他产生、由他开显的缘故;又或者是能使人成为圣者的谛,因为证悟了它们,圣者的境界才得以成就,所以叫圣谛。不过在“苦圣谛”等说法里,“du”这个音表示可厌。比如可厌的孩子就叫“恶子”。“kha”这个音则表示空。比如虚空就叫“空”。而这第一谛是可厌的,因为它是种种灾祸的依止处;也是空的,因为它远离了凡夫所构想的常、乐、我、净的状态。所以,因为可厌和空,就叫作“苦”。“saṃ”这个音在“集合、聚合”等用法里,表示结合。“u”这个音在“已生、已起”等用法里,表示生起。“aya”这个音则表示原因。而这第二谛,在其余诸缘和合时,就是苦生起的原因,所以叫“苦集”。巴利
Ariyāni ca tāni saccāni cāti ariyasaccāni. Ariyānīti uttamāni, avisaṃvādakānīti attho. Ariyehi buddhādīhi paṭivijjhitabbāni saccāni, ariyassa vā sammāsambuddhassa santakāni saccāni tena uppāditattā, pakāsitattā ca, ariyabhāvakarāni vā saccāni tesaṃ abhisambuddhattā ariyabhāvasiddhitoti ariyasaccāni. ‘‘Dukkhaṃ ariyasacca’’ntiādīsu pana du-iti ayaṃ saddo kucchite dissati. Kucchitaṃ hi puttaṃ ‘‘duputto’’ti vadanti. Khaṃ-saddo pana tucche. Tucchaṃ hi ākāsaṃ ‘‘kha’’nti vuccati. Idañca paṭhamasaccaṃ kucchitaṃ anekopaddavādhiṭṭhānato, tucchaṃ bālajanaparikappitadhuvasubhasukhattabhāvavirahitato, tasmā kucchitattā, tucchattā ca ‘‘dukkha’’nti vuccati. Saṃ-iti ca ayaṃ saddo ‘‘samāgamo, sameta’’ntiādīsu saṃyogaṃ dīpeti. U-iti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘uppannaṃ udita’’ntiādīsu uppattiṃ. Aya-saddo pana kāraṇaṃ dīpeti. Idañca dutiyasaccaṃ avasesapaccayasamāyoge sati dukkhassuppattikāraṇanti ‘‘dukkhasamudayo’’ti vuccati.
至于第三谛,因为“ni”这个音表示“没有”,“rodha”这个音表示“牢狱”,所以这里就是“没有”,或者说,当证得这个谛时,被称为轮回牢狱的苦灭,因为它空于一切趣,又因为它是与轮回牢狱相对立的,所以称为“苦灭”;或者因为它是苦不再生起、灭尽的因缘。至于第四谛,因为这条道通向苦灭,或者带领众生走向那里,以所缘的力量朝向它,并且是达到苦灭的修行之道,所以称为“导向苦灭之道”。巴利
Tatiyasaccaṃ pana yasmā ni-saddo abhāvaṃ, rodha-saddo cārakaṃ dīpeti, tasmā abhāvo ettha, etasmiṃ vā adhigate saṃsāracārakasaṅkhātassa dukkhanirodhassa sabbagatisuññattā, tappaṭipakkhattā cāti ‘‘dukkhanirodha’’nti vuccati, dukkhassa vā anuppādanirodhapaccayattā. Catutthaṃ pana yasmā etaṃ dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchati, sattaṃ vā taṃ gamayati ārammaṇavasena tadabhimukhattā, paṭipadā ca hoti dukkhanirodhappattiyā, tasmā ‘‘dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti vuccati.
另外,对苦等每一种,都分别阐明了四种含义;这些含义真实、没有错谬、不会变成别的样子,是正在证知苦等的人所应当证知的。就像所说的那样:巴利
Apica dukkhādīnaṃ cattāro cattāro atthā vibhattā tathā avitathā anaññathā, ye dukkhādīni abhisamentehi abhisametabbā. Yathāha –
苦有四种含义:逼迫、有为、热恼、变坏。这四种就是苦的苦义,它们是真实的、不虚假的、不会变成别的样子。集有四种含义:累积、因源、结合、障碍……灭有四种含义:出离、远离、无为、不死……道有四种含义:导引、因、见、增上……这些也都是不会变成别的样子的。巴利
‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho, ime cattāro dukkhassa dukkhaṭṭhā tathā avitathā anaññathā. Samudayassa āyūhanaṭṭho nidānaṭṭho saṃyogaṭṭho palibodhaṭṭho …pe… nirodhassa nissaraṇaṭṭho vivekaṭṭho asaṅkhataṭṭho amataṭṭho…pe… maggassa niyyānaṭṭho hetvaṭṭho dassanaṭṭho ādhipateyyaṭṭho…pe… anaññathā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 2.8).
像这样已经分类的四种,每一种又各有四种含义,因此应当通过它们来理解苦等(四圣谛)。这就是这里字词的含义。巴利
Evaṃ vibhattānaṃ catunnaṃ catunnaṃ atthānaṃ vasena dukkhādīni veditabbāni. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
不过,若按法的分类来说,除渴爱之外的一切世间法,或者除杂染法之外的法,就称为苦谛;而渴爱,以及一切不善法与世间善法,称为集谛;涅槃称为灭谛;与出世间善心相应的八支正道,称为导向苦灭之道圣谛。然而应当知道:与这些道支相应的心与心所,以及沙门果,在这里并未被包含在内。因为依照“凡是无常的,即是苦”的说法,它们也摄入行苦之中。可是,依那种能让人在佛陀座下修梵行的遍知来说,它们并不具有那样的性质,所以不被称为苦圣谛。应当这样理解:除此以外,一切世间法与出世间法都已包含在内。这就是法的分类。巴利
Dhammabhedato pana taṇhāvajjitā sabbalokiyadhammā, saṃkilesikavajjitā vā dukkhasaccaṃ nāma, taṇhā pana sabbā akusalā vā lokiyakusalā vā dhammā samudayasaccaṃ nāma, nibbānaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ nāma, lokuttarakusalacittasampayuttāni aṭṭhamaggaṅgāni dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā ariyasaccaṃ nāma. Imehi pana maggaṅgehi sampayuttā cittacetasikā dhammā ceva sāmaññaphalāni cettha asaṅgahitānīti veditabbāni. Tāni hi ‘‘yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato saṅkhāradukkhasaṅgahitānipi. Yāya pariññāya bhagavati brahmacariyaṃ vussati tathattena na honti, dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti na vuccanti, tāni ṭhapetvā sabbe lokiyalokuttaradhammā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā. Ayaṃ dhammabhedo.
不过,如果按照分别法来分析,在经分别这部分里,先讲苦谛——巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha suttantabhājanīye dukkhasaccaṃ tāva –
在这里,什么是苦圣谛?生是苦,老是苦,死是苦,愁、悲、苦、忧、恼也是苦,与不可爱的人相聚是苦,与可爱的人分离是苦,求不到想要的也是苦;简单来说,五取蕴就是苦。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ? Jātipi dukkhā, jarāpi dukkhā, maraṇampi dukkhaṃ, sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsāpi dukkhā, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo dukkho, yampicchaṃ na labhati, tampi dukkhaṃ, saṃkhittena pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhā’’ti (vibha. 190) –
列出后已作了分析。其中,苦有三种:苦苦、变易苦、行苦。其中,苦苦又分两种:间接的苦和直接的苦。其中,身体和心里的苦受与忧受,叫做直接的苦;而其余作为苦苦之基础的五取蕴,叫做间接的苦。乐受与喜受,叫做变易苦。而一切五取蕴,或者说一切有为法,叫做行苦。依这三种苦,应当知道在三有中,生等如何相应地具有苦苦性。因为在欲有中,生本身并不是苦,但在恶趣、人趣等处,以地狱之火灼烧等为根源、以入胎等为根源、以饥渴等为根源的苦,由于它成为那一切身心之苦的基础,所以从间接的意义上说是苦。老、死等也是这样。应当知道:老,因为它是身体衰弱之苦的基础,也是被子女等轻视之苦的基础;死,因为它是临终苦受的基础,也是看见地狱等趣相之苦的基础;愁等,因为既是愁等所生的身心之苦的基础,本身也是苦,所以是苦。而它们的变易苦性和行苦性,则是众所周知的。这样,应当知道在欲有中,生等依三种苦而具有苦性。然而在色有和无色有中,因为没有愁、悲、苦、忧、恼,所以应当知道那里的生等,只依变易苦和行苦而具有苦性,而不是依苦苦。这是苦谛中的方法。巴利
Uddisitvā vibhattaṃ. Tattha dukkhaṃ tividhaṃ hoti dukkhadukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ saṅkhāradukkhanti. Tattha dukkhadukkhaṃ duvidhaṃ pariyāyadukkhaṃ nippariyāyadukkhanti. Tattha kāyikacetasikadukkhadomanassavedanā nippariyāyadukkhaṃ nāma, tadavasesā pana dukkhadukkhassa vatthubhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā pariyāyadukkhaṃ nāma. Sukhasomanassavedanā vipariṇāmadukkhaṃ nāma. Sabbe pana pañcupādānakkhandhā, sabbasaṅkhatā vā saṅkhāradukkhaṃ nāma. Imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ dukkhānaṃ vasena yathāyogaṃ tīsu bhavesu jātiādīnaṃ dukkhadukkhatā veditabbā. Kāmabhavasmiṃ hi jāti tāva sayaṃ na dukkhā, apāyagatimanussagatiādīsu pana nirayaggisantāpādimūlakaṃ, gabbhokkantikādimūlakaṃ, jighacchāpipāsādimūlakañca dukkhaṃ tassa sabbassa kāyikacetasikadukkhassa vatthubhāvena pariyāyato dukkhanti. Tathā jarāmaraṇādayopi. Kevalaṃ jarā kāyadubbalatāmūlassa, puttadārādiparibhavamūlassa ca, maraṇaṃ pana māraṇantikavedanābhūtassa, nirayādigatinimittadassanamūlassa ca dukkhassa vatthubhāvato, sokādayo sokādimūlassa kāyikacetasikadukkhassa vatthubhāvattā ceva sayaṃ dukkhattā ca dukkhāti veditabbā. Vipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhatā cesaṃ pasiddhāyeva. Evaṃ kāmabhave jātiādīnaṃ tīhipi dukkhehi dukkhatā veditabbā. Rūpārūpabhavesu pana yasmā sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā na santi, tasmā tattha jātiādīnaṃ vipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhavasena ca dukkhatā veditabbā, na dukkhadukkhavasenāti ayaṃ dukkhasacce nayo.
至于集谛,先只举出“欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱”(《分别论》203),接着问:“这渴爱生起时,是在哪里生起呢?”(《分别论》203)。随后以六种根、境、识、触、受、想、思、渴爱、寻、伺为所缘,说明渴爱生起之处:“这渴爱正是在这里生起的。”如此开示其生起之后,又加以详细分别。巴利
Samudayasaccaṃ pana ‘‘kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā’’ti (vibha. 203) tattakameva uddisitvā ‘‘sā kho panesā taṇhā kattha uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti (vibha. 203) pucchitvā channaṃ channaṃ indriyavisayaviññāṇaphassavedanāsaññācetanātaṇhāvitakkavicārānaṃ visayabhūtānaṃ vasena taṇhāya ‘‘etthesā taṇhā uppajjamānā uppajjatī’’ti evaṃ uppattiṃ pakāsetvā vitthārato vibhattaṃ.
灭谛这部分,先引用“就是这渴爱的无余离染、灭尽、舍弃、放下、解脱、不执著”(《分别论》204),接着又问:“那么,这渴爱在哪里灭时便灭呢?”(《分别论》204),然后按照集谛中已说过的根等,以逆序的方式说明渴爱的灭尽,并作了详细的分别。其中,“无余离染、灭尽”等词是涅槃的同义词。因为依靠涅槃,渴爱才无余地离染、灭尽、被舍弃、被放下、被解脱、不执著,所以说为“无余离染、灭尽、舍弃、放下、解脱、不执著”。涅槃本身是同一个,但它的名称,则依与一切有为法名称相对反的方式而有许多种。巴利
Nirodhasaccaṃ pana ‘‘tassā eva taṇhāya asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo’’ti (vibha. 204) vatvā puna ‘‘sā kho panesā taṇhā kattha nirujjhamānā nirujjhatī’’ti (vibha. 204) pucchitvā samudayasacce vuttaindriyādīnaṃ vasena paṭilomato taṇhāya nirodhaṃ pakāsetvā vitthārato vibhattaṃ. Tattha asesavirāganirodhotiādīni padāni nibbānavevacanāni. Nibbānaṃ hi āgamma taṇhā asesā virajjati, nirujjhati, cajīyati, paṭinissajjīyati, muccati, na allīyati, tasmā ‘‘asesavirāganirodho cāgo paṭinissaggo mutti anālayo’’ti vuccati. Ekameva hi nibbānaṃ, nāmāni panassa sabbasaṅkhatānaṃ nāmapaṭipakkhavasena anekāni honti.
难道不是这样吗:并不存在所谓单独的涅槃,涅槃只是烦恼的灭尽而已,正因如此,在那些经藏和论藏的教导中才说“贪的灭尽、嗔的灭尽”等等?不是这样,因为阿拉汉果和涅槃会变成同一个东西。阿拉汉果也因为在贪等完全灭尽时生起,所以借由近说被称为贪的灭尽等;同样,涅槃因为是贪等灭尽的因,所以也被说成是贪的灭尽等,应该这样理解。否则,涅槃就会变成多种多样,因为贪等有多种,它们的灭尽也就有多种。如果一切烦恼的灭尽是同一个,那么在初道断除见等烦恼时,一切烦恼的灭尽就应该发生了,而且它就会变得很粗显,因为连畜生等众生也有生起的贪灭尽,这样它们也能明显证得涅槃了;在种姓心的刹那也会有贪等的灭尽,因为种姓心以涅槃为所缘。但这样一来,道以涅槃为所缘就不合理了。因为道并不是缘着自己所断除的烦恼灭尽而生起的。而且它还会变成不存在,因为作为贪等灭尽的那种不存在,从某一方面来看是空无的。如果它也是存在的,那么不存在本身就不存在了,这样离染的特征就不成立了,而且它还会变成有为法。因为任何时候都能找到的东西,不可能成为无为法,否则一切都会变成无因的。如果它是有为法,那它就不是涅槃了,因为它具有生、老、坏灭,所以是苦。这样一来,不存在的不存在也不成立,而且已经灭尽的贪等还会再次生起,因为那些特定的不存在,其不存在本身已经坏灭了。巴利
Nanu pāṭekkaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma natthi, kilesakkhayamattameva nibbānaṃ, teneva ca tāsu tāsu suttābhidhammadesanāsu ‘‘rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.314) vuttanti ce? Na, arahattanibbānānaṃ ekatāpajjanato. Arahattampi hi ‘‘yo kho, āvuso, rāgakkhayo dosakkhayo mohakkhayo, idaṃ vuccati arahatta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.314) rāgādīnaṃ parikkhayante uppannattā upacārena arahattaṃ rāgakkhayādibhāvena vuccati, tathā rāgādīnaṃ khayahetuttā nibbānampi rāgakkhayādibhāvena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Itarathā nibbānassa bahuttaṃ āpajjati rāgādīnaṃ bahunnaṃ khayassāpi bahuttā. Sabbakilesānampi khayassa ekattena paṭhamamaggena diṭṭhiādīnaṃ khaye sabbakilesakkhayo āpajjati, oḷārikattañcassa siyā tiracchānānampi uppannarāgakkhayassa pākaṭattena nibbānappattito, gotrabhūkkhaṇepi ca rāgādikkhayo hoti gotrabhuno nibbānavisayattā, maggassa pana nibbānārammaṇatāappasaṅgo. Na hi attanā khepiyamānakilesakkhayamārabbha maggo uppajjati, abhāvo cassa āpajjati rāgādikkhayabhūtassa pana abhāvassa pakkhavasena tuccharūpattā, tassāpi bhāvattābhāvāva vivekalakkhaṇaṃ na siyā, saṅkhatatā cassa siyā. Na hi kadāci upalabbhamānaṃ asaṅkhataṃ bhavitumarahati sabbesampi ahetukattāpattito, saṅkhatattepi cassa na nibbānattaṃ uppattijarābhaṅgasamaṅgitāya dukkhattā, tathā ca abhāvassāpi abhāvo, anavaṭṭhānañca khīṇānampi rāgādīnaṃ puna uppajjanaṃ yesaṃ tesameva abhāvo abhāvassa vinaṭṭhattā.
不过,如果通过别的什么原因,有(烦恼)存在生起,贪等也不会有任何减损。因为一个东西生起时,另一个东西并不会消失。如果说:非存在是存在的对立面,当对立面就在近前时,另一个就消失——那么,这个所谓的“消失”到底是什么?如果它也是存在性的,那它就会有同样的毛病,也会站不住脚,而且达不到目的。如果它是虚无性的,那么它一开始就已经是虚无了,何必还要跑那么远才到达呢?这样就成立:作为贪等灭尽的涅槃,因为是虚无性的,所以是非存在,但非存在本身并不是涅槃。过去和未来的烦恼不存在,并不能证得涅槃,因为那只是非存在;只有现在烦恼的非存在,才叫非存在。所谓非存在,并不只是烦恼的离去,而是以不再生起的方式来说的。如果说:毕竟的离去也能通过涅槃达成?不对,因为涅槃不是它的因。如果说:观智是因?不对,因为没有对生起我执等分别的有为法的观见,就不会生起作为无我等分别之体的观智。如果它会生起,那一切众生早就都解脱了,但事实并非如此,因为任何时候都不会没有对相违法观见的疑问。因为没有观见,分别就不可能生起;而产生我执分别的色等观见,并不能产生与其相违的分别。如果说:通过诸佛的辗转教导,对色等的观智分别才得以生起?不对,因为诸佛如果没有对相违法的观见,观智分别也不会生起。因为某一因缘和合能生起某一果,并不等于同样的因缘和合就能生起与之相违的果,否则就有无因的过失。而且,由于没有对相违法的观见,一个人就没有生起观智分别的能力,所以通过这类人的辗转传承,也不可能产生那种能力及其教导。然而,由于三法印的教导是诸佛亲证涅槃的直接近因,因此正是通过它,烦恼的毕竟断除和观智教导的能力才得以成立。所以,应当知道涅槃本身才是这两者的因,而不是别的。巴利
Apica kāraṇantarena vā bhāve uppanne rāgādīnaṃ na kāci hāni hoti. Na hi aññassuppattiyaṃ aññaṃ vigacchati. Abhāvo bhāvassa virodhi, virodhisannidhāne ca itaraṃ vigacchatīti ce? Kimidaṃ vigamanaṃ nāma. Yadi tampi bhāvarūpaṃ, samānadosatā cassa siyā anavaṭṭhānañca, na ca atthasiddhi. Yadi tuccharūpaṃ, kiṃ paṭhamamevassa tuccharūpatāya upagatāya dūrampi gantvā upagantabbāti siddhā, rāgādikkhayabhūtassa nibbānassa tuccharūpatāya abhāvo, na ca abhāvo eva nibbānaṃ. Atītānāgatadosānamabhāve nibbānappattiyā abhāvato vattamānānañca abhāvo nāma. Abhāvo nāma na kilesavigamamatto, api tu anuppattibhāvena. Accantavigamo nibbānenāpi sampādīyatīti ce? Na, tassa kāraṇabhāvā. Vipassanā kāraṇamiti ce? Na, attādivikappajanakasaṅkhatadhammadassanena vinā anattādivikappabhūtāya vipassanāya anuppattito. Yadi hi uppajjeyya, tāya sabbepi sattā vimuttā eva siyuṃ, no ca kadāci na puccheyya viruddhadhammadassanābhāvā. Na hi dassanaṃ vinā vikappo sambhavati, na ca attāti vikappajanakarūpādidassanameva tabbiruddhavikappajanakaṃ hoti. Buddhānañca paramparopadesena rūpādīsu vipassanāvikappo uppajjatīti ce? Na, tesampi viruddhadassanābhāvena vipassanāvikappānuppattito. Na hi yādisāya kāraṇasāmaggiyā yādisaṃ kāriyaṃ uppajjati, tādisāya eva tabbiruddhaṃ uppajjati ahetukattappasaṅgato. Na ca viruddhadassanābhāvena ekassa vipassanāvikappajanakasāmatthiyābhāvato tādisānaṃ paramparāyapi tabbhāvo, tadupadeso ca sambhavati. Tilakkhaṇūpadesanānantarikatāya pana buddhānaṃ nibbānasacchikiriyā siddhi, tenevassa kilesānamaccantappahānassa, vipassanopadesasāmatthiyassa ca siddhīti nibbānameva tadubhayakāraṇaṃ, nāññanti gahetabbaṃ.
为什么见到涅槃就能彻底断除贪等烦恼,并且生起对三相的观见呢?难道不是见到别的东西才能断除别的烦恼、生起三相的智慧吗?不是的。因为见到无为法,有为法的过失就变得清清楚楚。就好比一个已经见到彼岸的船夫,对船上的快乐不再执著,对船也不再贪恋;同样,已经见到涅槃这种究竟安乐的人,对轮回中的快乐、对依靠轮回和以轮回为对象等所产生的快乐执著,以及对轮回的欢喜,都会断除。再者,贪等烦恼执著于有为法,它们无法在无为法上停留,就像苍蝇无法停在大火堆上,水里的动物无法待在陆地上。以见涅槃而断除了过失的心,能够如实地在那些有为法上见到三相,就像涂了药膏、治好了白内障等眼病之后,眼睛能清楚地看到瓶子等色法一样。还应当知道:对于已经见到过患的诸行,贪等不会再产生,就像已经知道粪坑是不净的一样。巴利
Kasmā pana nibbānadassanena rāgādīnaṃ accantappahānaṃ, tilakkhaṇañca hoti. Na hi aññassa dassanena itararāgappahānaṃ, tilakkhaṇañāṇañca yuttanti? Na, asaṅkhatadassanena saṅkhatassa vā dosassa vā pākaṭattā. Diṭṭhaaccantasukhānaṃ hi vaṭṭasukhe, tannissayārammaṇādīsu ca sukhābhimāno, vaṭṭābhirati ca pahīyati diṭṭhaparatīrassa nāvikassa nāvāyekadese sukhābhimānābhiratiyo viya. Apica saṅkhatadhammesu allinā rāgādayo asaṅkhatadhamme saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti aggikkhandhe viya makkhikā, thale viya ca jalacarā, nibbānadassanena pahīnadosassa cittassa yāthāvato tesu saṅkhatesu tilakkhaṇadassanaṃ sambhavati bhesajjālepena vihatakācatimirādidosassa cakkhuno ghaṭādirūpadassanaṃ viya, diṭṭhadosesu cassa saṅkhāresu na puna rāgādīnamuppatti ñātā sucibhāve viya vaccakūpeti veditabbaṃ.
为什么只有某些众生能证得涅槃,而不是所有众生都能证得呢?因为证得涅槃要依靠无始以来诸佛代代相传的教导,而那些教导者并不是在任何地方、任何时候都出现;听闻的人要碰上那个恰好的时机也极其难得;再加上世界轮围无穷无尽。所以,只有在佛陀出世的时候,某些众生因为得到三相的教导而证得涅槃,并不是所有众生都能证得。应当这样理解。巴利
Kasmā pana kesañci sattānaṃ eva nibbānasacchikiriyāsambhavo, na sabbesanti? Anādibuddhaparamparopadesasāpekkhattā, tesañca upadesakānaṃ sabbattha sabbadā abhāvato, sotūnañca khaṇasampattiyā accantadullabhattā, cakkavāḷānañca anantattā, tasmā keci eva buddhuppādakāle tilakkhaṇopadesalābhena nibbānaṃ sacchikaronti, na sabbeti gahetabbaṃ.
那么,怎样才能通过涅槃实现贪等烦恼的彻底断除呢?这并非因为那些过去、未来的烦恼现在不存在,也不是因为它们过去曾经存在,而是因为现在正在生起的烦恼自性灭尽。如果问:涅槃是空无自性的法,它作为原因时,为什么不会有上面所说的那些过失呢?答案是:没有那些过失,因为涅槃具有真实存在的自性。实际上,圣道以之前分道的修行为基础,以涅槃为所缘,依不产生随眠的方式而现起;正是这圣道,才是烦恼的不再生起之灭。为什么说不再生起?因为那些将来本应生起的烦恼不再生起。这就好比靠近火堆的稻秆:虽然生起,却不发芽,具有无种的性质。因为从胜义上说,并不存在任何实实在在、可称为“无”的事物,能让原因把它产生出来。所谓“产生”,无非是生起与它相违的刹那——正如蕴聚的“不存在”,是靠令多个刹那生起才得以成立。因此,圣道是烦恼的不再生起之灭,涅槃则是圣道的亲依止缘;依亲依止这一方便说,涅槃才被称为“无余离贪灭”等。如果问:为什么不依自性而说呢?因为涅槃极其微细,而且往昔未曾证得。这微细性,应当依世尊所说的“少事少业”之语、以及依圣眼所见了知。巴利
Kathaṃ panettha rāgādīnaṃ accantavigamo nibbānena sādhīyatīti? Na tāva so, atītānāgatānaṃ tesamidāni abhāvā, pubbe ca tassa vijjamānattā, vattamānānaṃ sarasanirodhato. Kathañcassa tuccharūpassa nibbānassa hetutte yathāvuttadosānamavasaroti ce? Na, tassa bhāvarūpattā. Pubbabhāgapaṭipattiyā hi nibbānamārabbha anusayājananabhāvena uppannamaggā eva kilesānamanuppādanirodho taduppattiyā āyatiṃ uppajjanārahānaṃ anuppattito aggisannidhāne aṅkurājanakabhāvena uppannasālikkhandhassa bījatābhāvarūpatā viya. Na hi abhāvo nāma koci paramatthato atthi, yo kāraṇena janīyati tabbiruddhakkhaṇuppādanabhāvovuppādanaṃ anekakkhaṇuppādanena khandhakārābhāvuppādanaṃ viya, tasmā kilesānaṃ anuppattinirodhasaṅkhātassa ariyamaggassa upanissayattā upanissayopacārena nibbānaṃ ‘‘asesavirāganirodho’’tiādinā vuttaṃ. Sarūpeneva kasmā na vuttanti ce? Abhisukhumattā, anupaladdhapubbattā ca, sukhumatā cassa bhagavato appossukkatāvacanato, ariyena cakkhunā passitabbato ca veditabbā.
这里,外道又说:“涅槃根本不存在,因为它无法被认知。”但涅槃并不是无法被认知的,因为它已经被证实了。圣者们确实能通过与之相应的修行而认知涅槃。而且,也不能说“涅槃不存在”,因为一切众生都具有与解脱相违的法,就会得出没有解脱的结论。这种说法也不合理,因为就像热等的对立面——冷等必然存在一样,与轮回相对立的涅槃也必然存在。正如所说的:巴利
Ettha pana paravādī āha – ‘‘nattheva nibbānaṃ anupalabbhanīyato’’ti. Na anupalabbhanīyaṃ tassa siddhattā. Upalabbhati hi taṃ tadanurūpapaṭipattiyā ariyehi. Apica nibbānaṃ natthīti na vattabbaṃ sabbasattānaṃ viruddhadhammānaṃ bhāvena apavaggābhāvappasaṅgato. Na ca taṃ yuttaṃ uṇhādipaṭipakkhassa sītādino viya bhavapaṭipakkhassa nibbānassapi avassaṃbhāvā. Vuttañca –
“ 就像炎热存在的时候,另外还有清凉存在;
如是,当三种火存在时,就该希求涅槃。”巴利
‘‘Yathāpi uṇhe vijjante, aparaṃ vijjati sītalaṃ; Evaṃ tividhaggi vijjante, nibbānaṃ icchitabbaka’’nti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.11) –
首先,因为以究竟灭为因的观照教导能够被见到,所以涅槃确实存在;如果没有涅槃,那种观照就不可能成立——以上就是所说的这个道理。这个涅槃,由于没有前际,所以是无生的;正因如此,它没有老死,而且是常的。如果有人说:那么极微等也应该是常的,因为涅槃是常?不对,因为所依不同,因的特征不能成立。如果有人说:极微等也是无为的?不对,因为无为性还没有成立,而且多个无为也不合理。如果真有一个叫无为的东西,那就应该只有一个,因为处所、时间、自性的差别是由因的差别造成的;如果自性不同却又没有因,那就会推得太过了。巴利
Ādi. Accantanirodhahetuno vipassanopadesassa dassanato ca attheva nibbānaṃ taṃ vinā tassāsambhavatoti vuttovāyamattho. Tadetaṃ purimāya koṭiyā abhāvato appabhavaṃ, tatova ajarāmaraṇaṃ, niccañca hotīti aṇuādīnampi niccabhāvapatti nibbānasseva niccattāti ce? Na, bhinnādhikaraṇattena hetulakkhaṇassānupapattito. Aṇuādīnampi asaṅkhatatā iti ce? Na, asaṅkhatatāsiddhito asaṅkhatānañcānekattānupapattito. Yadi hi asaṅkhataṃ nāma bhaveyya, ekeneva bhavitabbaṃ desakālasabhāvabhedassa kāraṇabhedakattā, bhinnasabhāvānampi ahetukatte atippasaṅgato.
如果有人问:涅槃的自性和有为法的自性不同,那它怎么会是无因的呢?回答是:因为涅槃以无为为自性,和有为之法自性不同,所以它不依赖任何因缘。既然同样都是无为,那么存在自性上的差别就说明因也有差别,因此只应该有一个常法。而这个常法,按照前面所说的道理,以及佛陀的教言来看,在胜义上真实存在的就是涅槃。佛陀确实这样说过:“诸比丘,有未生、未有、未作、无为。”(《如是语》43)这是苦灭圣谛的理路。巴利
Saṅkhatehi sabhāvabhinnassa nibbānassa kathaṃ ahetukatāti ce? Asaṅkhatasabhāvena saṅkhatasabhāvehi bhinnassa kāraṇānapekkhattā. Asaṅkhatatte hi samāne bhavasabhāvabhedo kāraṇabhedaṃ sūcayati , tasmā ekameva niccaṃ bhavitumarahati, tañca yathāvuttayuttito, sabbaññuvacanato ca paramatthato vijjamānaṃ nibbānameva. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ akataṃ asaṅkhata’’nti (itivu. 43). Ayaṃ dukkhanirodhasacce nayo.
另一种则先列出“正见……正定”,再详细分别。这里的决择,将在《道支分别》中显现。这是经分别的方法。巴利
Itaraṃ pana ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti uddisitvā vitthārato vibhattaṃ. Vinicchayo panettha maggaṅgavibhaṅge āvi bhavissatīti ayaṃ suttantabhājanīyanayo.
不过在《阿毗达摩分别》里——巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīye pana –
有四谛:苦、苦的集起、苦的灭尽、通往苦之灭尽的道。其中,渴爱是苦的集起;其余有漏的诸法……是苦;渴爱的断除是苦的灭尽;八支圣道是通往苦之灭尽的道。巴利
‘‘Cattāri saccāni dukkhaṃ dukkhasamudayo dukkhanirodho dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā. Tattha taṇhā dukkhasamudayo. Avasesā sāsavadhammā…pe… dukkhaṃ. Taṇhāya pahānaṃ dukkhanirodho. Aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo dukkhanirodhagāminī paṭipadā’’ti (vibha. 206) –
说完之后,又详细地逐一说明了八道支,接着指出“其余诸法与趣向苦灭之道相应”(《分别论》206等),这样就在第一轮中分别了四谛。然后,又以另外几轮的方式加以分别:“渴爱以及其余烦恼是集;同样,渴爱、其余烦恼以及其余不善法是集;同样,渴爱、其余烦恼、其余不善法、三善根以及有漏法是集;同样,渴爱、其余烦恼、其余不善法、三善根、有漏法以及其余有漏善法是集。其余有漏法是苦,那一种集的断除是灭,八支圣道是道。”在这里,不说“圣谛”而只说“谛”,是为了毫无遗漏地显示以缘为条件的集。因为在圣谛中,只有渴爱才是集,其他法不是集。而且,聚集起苦的并不只是渴爱单独一个,其余的善法、不善法也同样作为缘而聚集起来;为了表明它们也是集,所以只说“谛”。此后,因为正是八支圣道才是道,与它相应的触等一切法也都是道,为了显示这个道理,在总摄一切法的轮次中也对一切法作了分别。这里所收摄的只是圣财。其余的部分都与前面相同。这就是阿毗达摩分别的方法。巴利
Vatvā aṭṭha maggaṅgāni vitthārato niddisitvā ‘‘avasesā dhammā dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya sampayuttā’’ti (vibha. 206 ādayo) evaṃ paṭhamavāre cattāri saccāni vibhattāni. Tāni puna aparehipi ‘‘taṇhā, avasesā ca kilesā samudayo, tathā taṇhā, avasesā ca kilesā, avasesā ca akusalā samudayo, tathā taṇhā, avasesā ca kilesā, avasesā ca akusalā, tīṇi ca kusalamūlāni, sāsavāni samudayo, tathā taṇhā, avasesā ca kilesā, avasesā ca akusalā, tīṇi ca kusalamūlāni, sāsavāni, avasesā ca sāsavakusaladhammā samudayo. Avasesā sāsavadhammā dukkhaṃ, tassa tassa samudayassa pahānaṃ nirodho, aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo paṭipadā’’ti imehi vārehi vibhattāni. Tattha ‘‘ariyasaccānī’’ti avatvā nippadesato paccayasaṅkhātaṃ samudayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saccānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ariyasaccesu hi taṇhāva samudayo, na itare. Na ca kevalaṃ taṇhāva dukkhaṃ samudāneti, avasesā kusalākusalāpi paccayaṃ samudānentiyevāti tepi samudayato dassetuṃ ‘‘saccāni’’tveva vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ yasmā aṭṭhaṅgiko maggova paṭipadāti. Sampayuttā pana phassādayo sabbepi dhammā paṭipadā eva, tasmā taṃ nayaṃ dassetuṃ sabbasaṅgāhikavārepi sabbāni vibhattāni . Ettha hi ariyadhanāneva saṅgahitāni. Sesaṃ sadisamevāti ayaṃ abhidhammabhājanīyanayo.
在问难品的方式中,对于四圣谛,有几项是善……几项是无诤?集谛是不善,灭谛是无记,苦谛三种情况都有。集谛是有寻有伺,灭谛是无寻无伺,道谛三种情况都有,苦谛三种情况都有,还有不可说的情况。三谛是无见无对,苦谛三种情况都有。集谛是因,灭谛不是因,其余两谛两种情况都有。两谛是世间的,道谛和灭谛是出世间的。集谛是有诤,两谛是无诤,苦谛两种情况都有。这就是问难品的方式。现在在这里——巴利
Pañhāpucchakanaye pana catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ kati kusalā…pe… kati araṇā? Samudayasaccaṃ akusalaṃ, nirodhasaccaṃ abyākataṃ, dukkhasaccaṃ tidhāpi. Samudayo savitakkasavicāro, nirodho avitakkaavicāro, maggo tidhāpi, dukkhaṃ tidhāpi, na vattabbaṃ ca. Tīṇi saccāni anidassanaappaṭighāni, dukkhaṃ tidhāpi. Samudayo hetu, nirodho na hetu, sesā dvidhāpi. Dve saccāni lokiyāni, magganirodhā lokuttarā. Samudayasaccaṃ saraṇaṃ, dve saccāni araṇāni, dukkhaṃ duvidhāpi. Ayaṃ pañhāpucchakanayo. Idāni panettha –
从次第、不减不增,以及从特相等、从空性;
智的作用和譬喻应当被了知,这是超越巴利经文的抉择。巴利
Kamatonūnādhikato, lakkhaṇādīhi suññato; Ñāṇakiccopamā ñeyyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,同样先说次第:此处也适合按照说法的次第来讲。因为苦谛比较粗显,又是一切众生共通的,所以容易理解,因此先说苦谛;然后为了显示它的因,说集谛;接着为了让人明白“因灭则生灭”,说灭谛;最后为了显示证得灭谛的方法,说道谛。也可以这样理解:为了令那些耽著于生存之乐味的人心生警醒,先说苦;然后为了让人明白“生存不是无因而来的,也不是由自在天等创造出来的,而是由这个因产生的”,说集谛;接着,那些被有因之苦所压倒、心生警醒的人,通过看见出离而获得安慰,所以为他说灭谛;最后说能导向灭谛的道谛。这就是这里的次第。巴利
Tattha kamato tāva idhāpi desanākkamova yujjati. Ettha oḷārikattā, sabbasattasādhāraṇattā ca suviññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ, tato tasseva hetudassanatthaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tato ‘‘hetunirodhā bhavanirodho’’ti ñāpanatthaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, tadadhigamupāyadassanatthaṃ ante maggasaccaṃ. Bhavasukhassādagadhitānaṃ saṃvegajananatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ dukkhamāha, tato ‘‘bhavaṃ neva ahetukaṃ āgacchati, na issaranimmānādinā hoti, ito pana hotī’’ti ñāpanatthaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, tato sahetukena dukkhena abhibhūtattā saṃviggamānasānaṃ tannissaraṇadassanena assāsajananatthaṃ nirodhaṃ, tato nirodhasampāpakaṃ magganti ayamettha kamo.
为什么恰恰只有四个真理,不多也不少呢?因为除了这四个之外,不可能再有别的真理,而且其中任何一个都无法去掉。再者,世尊在说明流转时,是连同它的因一起说明的;在说明还灭时,也是连同它的方法一起说明的。这样,流转、还灭以及这两者的因,已经达到了究竟,所以只说四个。这就是这里的不多不少。巴利
Anūnādhikato pana kasmā cattāri eva saccānīti ce? Tato aññassa asambhavato, aññatarassa ca anapaneyyato. Apica pavattimācikkhanto bhagavā sahetukaṃ ācikkhati, nivattiñca saupāyaṃ. Iti pavattinivattitadubhayahetūnaṃ etaparamato cattāri eva vuttānīti ayametthānūnādhikato.
在这里,从特相等来说:苦谛以逼迫为特相,以热恼为作用,以流转为现起。集谛以生起为特相,以令不断绝为作用,以障碍为现起。灭谛以寂静为特相,以不退失为作用,以无相为现起。道谛以出离为特相,以断除烦恼为作用,以出起为现起。此外,依次还有流转、令流转、还灭、令还灭的特相;同样,也有有为、渴爱、无为、见的特相。这些就是这里的各种特相。巴利
Lakkhaṇādīhi panettha lakkhaṇato bādhanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, santāpanarasaṃ, pavattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Pabhavalakkhaṇaṃ samudayasaccaṃ, anupacchedakaraṇarasaṃ, palibodhapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Santilakkhaṇaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ, accutirasaṃ, animittapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ maggasaccaṃ, kilesapahānakaraṇarasaṃ, vuṭṭhānapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Apica pavattipavattakanivattinivattakalakkhaṇāni paṭipāṭiyā, tathā saṅkhatataṇhāasaṅkhatadassanalakkhaṇāni cāti imānettha lakkhaṇāni.
就空性而言,不过这些(谛)依次是空的,因为其中没有感受者、造作者、寂灭者和去者。正如所说:巴利
Suññato panetāni yathākkamaṃ vedakakārakanibbutagamakābhāvato suññāni. Vuttañca –
“ 确实只有苦,而没有哪个在受苦的人。
没有造作者,只有行为存在;
涅槃是存在的,但不存在入了涅槃的人。
道是存在的,但找不到行道的人。”巴利
‘‘Dukkhameva hi, na koci dukkhito, Kārako na, kiriyāva vijjati; Atthi nibbuti, na nibbuto pumā, Maggamatthi, gamako na vijjatī’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 189);
空于常、乐、我、净。
前两者空于我,即不死之境。
远离常、乐、净、我。
在诸谛之中,道是空的。巴利
Dhuvasubhasukhattasuññaṃ, Purimadvayamattasuññamamatapadaṃ; Dhuvasubhasukhaattavirahito, Maggo iti suññato tesu. (vibha. aṭṭha. 189);
或者,有三种是空于灭的。而灭则空于其余三谛。在这里,因也空于果,因为在因、集谛和道谛中没有苦与灭的存在,就像自然论者所说的自然那样。果也空于因,因为苦与集、灭与道并不结合,不是与因结合的果。就像主张因与果结合的人所说的二微尘等那样。这就是这里所说的空。巴利
Nirodhasuññāni vā tīṇi. Nirodho ca sesattayasuñño. Phalasuñño vā hettha hetu samudayamaggesu dukkhanirodhānaṃ abhāvā pakativādīnaṃ pakati viya. Hetusuññañca phalaṃ dukkhasamudayānaṃ, nirodhamaggānañca asamavāyā, na hetusamavetaṃ hetuphalaṃ. Hetuphalasamavāyavādīnaṃ dviaṇukādīni viyāti ayamettha suññatā.
关于智的作用:这里有两种谛智,即随觉智和通达智。其中,随觉智是世间智,依靠听闻等途径,在灭谛和道谛上生起。通达智是出世间智,它断除与证悟谛理相违的烦恼,以灭为所缘,从作用上通达四谛。至于那世间智,其中的苦智以镇伏的方式生起,能去除有身见;集智去除断见;灭智去除常见;道智去除无作用见。或者说,在无常、苦、无我、不净的诸蕴中,苦智去除那执取常、乐、我、净之想的果上颠倒;集智去除在无因中执著有因,即认为“世界由自在天、主因、时间、自性等产生”的因上颠倒;灭智去除在无色界等中执取解脱的灭上颠倒;道智去除在欲乐享受和自我折磨等不清净的道中,执取为清净道的方便上颠倒。这就是这里智的作用。巴利
Ñāṇakiccatoti ettha duvidhaṃ saccañāṇaṃ anubodhañāṇaṃ, paṭivedhañāṇañca. Tattha anubodhañāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ, taṃ anussavādivasena nirodhe, magge ca pavattati. Paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, taṃ saccāvabodhapaṭipakkhakilese khepentaṃ nirodhamārammaṇaṃ katvā kiccato cattāripi saccāni paṭivijjhati. Yaṃ panetaṃ lokiyaṃ, tattha dukkhañāṇaṃ pariyuṭṭhānābhibhavanavasena pavattamānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiṃ nivatteti, samudayañāṇaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ, nirodhañāṇaṃ sassatadiṭṭhiṃ, maggañāṇaṃ akiriyadiṭṭhiṃ. Dukkhañāṇaṃ vā tesu dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvarahitesu khandhesu dhuvasubhasukhattabhāvasaññāsaṅkhātaṃ phale vippaṭipattiṃ, samudayañāṇaṃ ‘‘issarapadhānakālasabhāvādīhi loko pavattatī’’ti akāraṇe kāraṇābhimānappavattaṃ hetumhi vippaṭipattiṃ, nirodhañāṇaṃ arūpalokādīsu apavaggaggāhabhūtaṃ nirodhe vippaṭipattiṃ, maggañāṇaṃ kāmasukhallikaattakilamathānuyogappabhede avisuddhimagge visuddhimaggaggāhavasena pavattaṃ upāye vippaṭipattiṃ nivatteti. Idamettha ñāṇakiccaṃ.
在这里,如果借用譬喻来说明,就应该把苦谛看成重担,把集谛看成挑起重担,把灭谛看成放下重担,把道谛看成放下重担的方法。另外,也可以依次配合疾病、疾病的起因、疾病的痊愈和药物,以及此岸、大洪水、彼岸和能到达彼岸的方法等来理解,这些都应当通过譬喻来了知。这就是这里的譬喻。这样,就应当知道这段超出字面之外的抉择义。巴利
Upamāto panettha bhāro viya hi dukkhasaccaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, bhārādānamiva samudayasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanamiva nirodhasaccaṃ, bhāranikkhepanupāyo viya maggasaccaṃ. Apica rogatannidānatadupasamabhesajjehi, orimatīramahoghapārimatīrataṃsampāpakopāyehi cāti evamādīhi yathākkamaṃ yojetvāpi etāni upamāto veditabbāni. Ayamettha upamā. Evaṃ ñeyyo pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
根分别论母的义释巴利
Indriyavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《根分别论》的论母,先按含义来说:这里说的“二十二根”,是因为它们具有“根”的意义,所以叫根。那么,这个“根的意义”到底是什么呢?就是:根的表征义、根所教导义、根所见义、根所认可义、根所习用义。这些意义在这里都按各自合适的方式适用。善业和不善业被称为“根”(即主宰者),因为在各种业当中,并没有哪个众生真正拥有主宰地位。正因如此,在这里,由业所生的诸根首先表征出产生它们的那份业,并且被那份业所认可,所以依“根的表征义”和“根的认可义”而称为根。而正自觉者因为具有最高的主宰地位,所以被称为“根”(主宰)。因此,这一切根都是世尊如实开示、完全亲证的,所以依“根所教导义”和“根所见义”而称为根。也正因为如此,有些根是世尊通过行境的亲近而修习的,有些是通过修习的亲近而修习的,所以也依“根所习用义”而称为根。此外,这些根也依增上义,也就是主导的意义,而称为根。巴利
Indriyavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – dvāvīsati indriyānīti ettha indriyaṭṭhasambhavato indriyāni. Ko panesa indriyaṭṭho nāmāti? Indaliṅgaṭṭho, indadesitaṭṭho, indadiṭṭhaṭṭho, indasiṭṭhaṭṭho, indajuṭṭhaṭṭho ca, so sabbopi idha yathāyogaṃ yujjati. Kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ indo nāma kammesu kassaci issariyābhāvato, tenevettha kammasañjanitāni tāva indriyāni attano janakakammaṃ ulliṅgenti, tena ca siṭṭhānīti indaliṅgaṭṭhena, indasiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Sammāsambuddho pana paramissariyabhāvato indo, tato sabbānipetāni indriyāni bhagavatā yathābhūtato pakāsitāni, abhisambuddhāni cāti indadesitaṭṭhena, indadiṭṭhaṭṭhena ca indriyāni. Teneva bhagavatā kānici gocarāsevanāya, kānici bhāvanāsevanāya sevitānīti indajuṭṭhaṭṭhenapi indriyāni. Apica ādhipaccasaṅkhātena issariyaṭṭhenāpi etāni indriyāni.
在“眼根”等词当中,眼等的词义已经在上面说明了。不过在最后三根的前分,因为“我要了知未知的不死境界,或者四圣谛法”这样修行的人心中生起,又因为具备根的意义,所以叫未知当知根。因为能了知,所以这“知”本身就是根,叫已知根。已知者于四圣谛中已完成智的作用、诸漏已尽者的根,叫具知根。在这里,还要知道:在净色根之后,在眼识等心路转起之时,能使色等所缘确定下来,并且令随顺自己本身的锐利或迟钝,这种主导作用应当理解为增上。而意根等则应当理解为在各自了知等特征上的主导作用。其余部分很容易理解。以上就是这里(至此)的词义。巴利
Cakkhundriyantiādīsu cakkhādīnaṃ padattho heṭṭhā pakāsito. Pacchimesu pana tīsu pubbabhāge anaññātaṃ amataṃ padaṃ, catusaccadhammaṃ vā jānissāmīti evaṃ paṭipannassa uppajjanato , indriyaṭṭhasambhavato ca anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Ājānanato aññā eva indriyanti aññindriyaṃ. Aññātāvino catūsu saccesu niṭṭhitañāṇakiccassa khīṇāsavassa indriyanti aññātāvindriyaṃ. Tattha ca pasādindriyānantaraṃ cakkhuviññāṇādivīthicittappavattiyaṃ rūpādīnaṃ niyatabhāvassa, attano tikkhamandatānuvidhānassa ca āpādanato ādhipaccaṃ veditabbaṃ. Manindriyādīnaṃ pana attano attano vijānanādilakkhaṇe ādhipaccaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
从法的分类来看,命根按色与非色分成两种。乐根等五种,因为属于受,所以算作一法;同样,慧根等四种,因为属于无痴,也算作一法。其余诸根则各自是一法。因此,从胜义谛来说,只有十六法被开示为二十二根。而其余在此未被摄取的,是心所、色与涅槃。这就是法的分类。巴利
Dhammabhedato panettha jīvitindriyaṃ rūpārūpavasena dvidhā. Sukhindriyādīni pañca vedanābhāvato ekadhammo, tathā paññindriyādīni cattāri amohabhāvato. Sesāni pana indriyāni ekekadhammā evāti evaṃ paramatthato soḷasa dhammāva dvāvīsatindriyabhāvena desitāni. Sesāni panettha cetasikarūpanibbānāni asaṅgahitānīti ayaṃ dhammabhedo.
从《分别论》的方法来看,这里并没有采用经分别的讲法。为什么呢?因为经里并没有按这样的次第来讲二十二根。经中有的地方说二根,有的地方说三根,有的地方说五根,但像这样连续不间断地讲二十二根的情况,是找不到的。在阿毗达摩分别里,也没有差别。巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha suttantabhājanīyaṃ nāma na gahitaṃ. Kasmā? Suttante imāya paṭipāṭiyā dvāvīsatiyā indriyānaṃ anāgatattā. Suttantasmiṃ hi katthaci dve indriyāni kathitāni, katthaci tīṇi, katthaci pañca, evaṃ pana nirantaraṃ dvāvīsati āgatāni nāma natthi. Abhidhammabhājanīyepi viseso natthi.
在问分的方法中,二十二根里,哪些是善……哪些是无诤?未知当知根是善,忧根是不善,信根、念根、慧根、已知根这四根是善和无记,意根、命根、喜根、舍根、精进根、定根这六根通三种情况,其余十根是无记。六根可以与乐受相应,也可以与不苦不乐受相应,三根通三种情况,命根通三种情况并且不可说,十二根完全不可说。三根是果报,二根是果报法,七色根是非果报非果报法,已知根可以是果报,也可以是果报法,九根通三种情况。九根是已取且执取的,忧根是未执取但执取的,三根是未执取且不执取的,九根通三种情况。忧根是有寻有伺,舍根同样如此,并且也是无寻无伺,九根是无寻无伺,十一根通三种情况。七色根以及乐根、苦根、忧根,这十种是有限的,最后三根是无量的,其余九根通三种情况。其中,喜根只按色界的层面来说是广大的,其余诸根按无色界的层面来说也是广大的,应当这样理解。五根是无见有对,十七根是无见无对。巴利
Pañhāpucchakanaye pana dvāvīsatiyā indriyānaṃ kati kusalā…pe… kati araṇāti? Anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ kusalaṃ, domanassindriyaṃ akusalaṃ, saddhāsatipaññāaññindriyāni cattāri kusalābyākatāni, manajīvitasomanassaupekkhāvīriyasamādhindriyāni cha tidhāpi, sesāni dasa abyākatāni. Cha indriyāni siyā sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā, siyā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya sampayuttāti, tīṇi tidhāpi, jīvitaṃ tidhā ca na vattabbañca, dvādasindriyāni na vattabbāni eva. Tīṇi vipākāni, dve vipākadhammadhammāni, rūpindriyāni satta nevavipākanavipākadhammadhammāni, aññindriyaṃ siyā vipākaṃ, siyā vipākadhammadhammaṃ, navindriyāni tidhāpi. Navindriyāni upādinnupādāniyāni, domanassindriyaṃ anupādinnupādāniyaṃ, tīṇi anupādinnaanupādāniyāni, nava tidhāpi. Domanassindriyaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ, upekkhindriyaṃ tathā ca avitakkaavicārañca, nava avitakkaavicārāni, ekādasa tidhāpi. Satta rūpindriyāni ceva sukhadukkhadomanassindriyāni cāti dasa parittāni, pacchimāni tīṇi appamāṇāni, sesāni nava tidhāva. Tattha ca somanassindriyaṃ rūpāvacaravaseneva mahaggataṃ, tadavasesāni arūpāvacaravasenāpīti veditabbaṃ. Pañcindriyāni anidassanasappaṭighāni, sattarasa anidassanaappaṭighāneva.
慧根等四根是因,其余的不是因……忧根是有诤,意根、命根、喜根、舍根、精进根、定根这六根通于有诤和无诤两类,其余十五根是无诤。这就是问分的提问方式。巴利
Paññindriyādīni cattāri hetū, sesā na hetū…pe… domanassindriyaṃ saraṇaṃ, manajīvitasomanassaupekkhāvīriyasamādhindriyāni dvidhāpi, sesāni pannarasa araṇānevāti ayaṃ pañhāpucchakanayo.
对于这些根,则有超越巴利经典的抉择。
现在,应当从次第的角度来了知;在这里,想要获得善巧的人应当了解。巴利
Indriyesu panetesu, pāḷimuttavinicchayo; Kamato dāni viññeyyo, tattha kosallamicchatā.
关于次第,这也是教说的次第。其中,先要遍知内在的法,然后才能获得圣者的境地,所以最先宣说属于自身相续的眼根等。这个人的自体,是依着什么法才被称为“女人”或“男人”的呢?为了指出“这就是那个”,接下来宣说女根和男根。这两种根都依靠命根才能维持活动,为了让人了解这一点,接下来宣说命根。只要它们还在活动,这些感受就不会停止。凡是所感受到的,其性质都不外乎乐与苦——为了让人了解这一点,接下来宣说乐根等。然而,为了灭除这些法,应当修习这些法;为了显示修行的方法,接下来宣说信等。为了显示修行不会白费——“依照这种修行,这个法会最先在自己身上显现”——接下来宣说未知当知根。因为它是那修行的果,而且紧接着就应当修习,所以接下来宣说已知根。此后,通过修习而证得这个法;一旦证得,就没有任何还需要做的事了。为了让人了解这一点,最后宣说了作为究竟安稳的具知根。应当知道,这就是依据次第,脱离巴利文的抉择道理。巴利
Kamatoti ayampi desanākkamova. Tattha ajjhattadhamme pariññāya ariyabhūmipaṭilābho hotīti attabhāvapariyāpannāni cakkhundriyādīni paṭhamaṃ desitāni. So manussattabhāvo yaṃ dhammaṃ upādāya ‘‘itthī’’ti vā ‘‘puriso’’ti vā saṅkhaṃ gacchati, ‘‘ayaṃ so’’ti nidassanatthaṃ tato itthindriyaṃ, purisindriyañca. So duvidhopi jīvitindriyapaṭibaddhavuttīti ñāpanatthaṃ tato jīvitindriyaṃ. Yāva tassa pavatti, tāva etesaṃ vedayitānaṃ anivatti. Yañca kiñci vedayitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ sukhaṃ dukkhanti ñāpanatthaṃ tato sukhindriyādīni. Tannirodhatthaṃ pana ete dhammā bhāvetabbāti paṭipattidassanatthaṃ tato saddhādīni. ‘‘Imāya paṭipattiyā esa dhammo paṭhamaṃ attani pātubhavatī’’ti paṭipattiyā amoghabhāvadassanatthaṃ tato anaññātaññassāmītindriyaṃ. Tasseva phalattā, tato anantaraṃ bhāvetabbattā ca tato aññindriyaṃ. Ito paraṃ bhāvanāya imassa adhigamo, adhigate ca pana imasmiṃ natthi kiñci uttari karaṇīyanti ñāpanatthaṃ ante paramassāsabhūtaṃ aññātāvindriyaṃ desitanti evaṃ kamato pāḷimuttavinicchayanayo viññeyyo.
缘行相分别论母的义释巴利
Paccayākāravibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
在《缘相分别论母》中,先从含义上说:在“无明缘”等语句里,无明就是:对不该知道的身恶行等法却去知道、获得;或者对应该知道的身善行等法却不知道;或者让诸法的如实自性变得不被了知;或者让有情在无边无际的轮回中奔驰;或者在不存在的对象上奔驰,在存在的对象上却不奔驰。果依凭此而来,所以叫“缘”,也就是对诸法的生起和安住起资助作用的法。无明本身就是缘,所以叫“无明缘”;因此说“以无明为缘”。彻底造作有为法,就是“行”。巴利
Paccayākāravibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – avijjāpaccayātiādīsu avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindati paṭilabhati, vindiyaṃ vā kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindati, dhammānaṃ vā yathāsabhāvaṃ aviditaṃ karoti, antavirahite vā saṃsāre satte javāpeti, avijjamānesu vā javati, vijjamānesu vā na javatīti avijjā. Paṭicca phalameti etasmāti paccayo, dhammānaṃ uppattiyā, ṭhitiyā ca upakārako dhammo. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo, tasmā avijjāpaccayā. Saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti saṅkhārā.
从这里往后,“行缘识”等句子,应当依照前面已经说过的道理来理解。至于还没有解释过的部分:能了知,所以叫“识”。倾向、朝向,所以叫“名”;会变坏、会损毁,所以叫“色”;名和色,以及名色,合起来以部分同形省略的方式理解为“名色”。能延展、扩展,并且延展之后能引导,所以叫“处”;第六处和六处合起来就是“六处”,应当按省略的方式理解。碰触、接触,所以叫“触”。感受、领纳,所以叫“受”。到处渴求、贪着,所以叫“渴爱”。紧紧抓取,所以叫“取”。存在,并且使存在,所以叫“有”。产生、出生就是“生”。衰老就是“老”。以此而死,所以叫“死”。忧愁就是“忧”。悲泣哀号就是“悲”。使痛苦,或者依生起与安住两方面从两种途径凿损,所以也叫“苦”。心里不高兴的状态就是“愁”。极度疲惫、极度苦恼就是“恼”。生起就是产生。而且不只是忧等,“生起”这个词也应当与“无明缘行”等一切句子配合起来理解。这样,就完成了对缘以及缘所生法的确定。巴利
Ito paraṃ saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇantiādīsu vuttaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Avuttesu pana vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, ruppatīti rūpaṃ, nāmañca rūpañca nāmarūpañca nāmarūpanti ekadesasarūpekasesanayena veditabbaṃ. Āye tanoti, āyatañca nayatīti āyatanaṃ, chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatananti ekasesanayena veditabbaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Paritassatīti taṇhā. Upādiyatīti upādānaṃ. Bhavati, bhāvayati cāti bhavo. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti etenāti maraṇaṃ. Socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhayati, uppādaṭṭhitivasena dvidhā khaṇatītipi dukkhaṃ. Dummanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Na kevalañca sokādīheva, atha kho avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantītiādinā sabbapadehipi sambhavanti-saddassa yojanā kātabbā. Evaṃ hi paccayapaccayuppannavavatthānaṃ kataṃ hoti.
“如是”这一词,是在指出已经说明过的方式,借此表示:只是以无明等作为原因,而不是以大自在天创造等作为原因。“此”指的是前面所说的。“纯”是指不混杂的,或者指全部的。“苦蕴”是指苦的聚集,不是指众生,也不是指乐、净等。“集”就是生起,“有”就是产生。以上是这里词语的含义。巴利
Evanti niddiṭṭhanayanidassanaṃ, tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa, sakalassa vā, dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa, na sukhasubhādīnaṃ. Samudayoti nibbatti, hotīti sambhavati. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
从法的分类来说,这里的“无明”指的是:按经教的讲法,是对苦等四谛的无知;按论教的讲法,是对过去、未来等八种情况的无知。而“行”则分为三种:福行、非福行、不动行;又分身行、语行、心行三种,合计六种。其中,八种欲界善的思和五种色界善的思,这十三种思叫作福行;十二种不善的思叫作非福行;四种无色界善的思叫作不动行。为了说明这三类行是依什么门径生起的,所以这里说到了行的三种分类。巴利
Dhammabhedato panettha avijjāti suttantapariyāyena dukkhādīsu catūsu, abhidhammapariyāyena pubbantādīhi saddhiṃ aṭṭhasu vā ṭhānesu aññāṇaṃ. Saṅkhārā pana puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhārā tayo, kāyavacīcittasaṅkhārā tayo cāti chabbidhā. Tattha aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā, pañca rūpāvacarakusalacetanā ceti terasa cetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro nāma. Dvādasa akusalacetanā apuññābhisaṅkhāro nāma. Catasso arūpāvacarakusalacetanā āneñjābhisaṅkhāro nāma. Imesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ eva dvārato pavattidassanatthaṃ ayaṃ saṅkhārādittiko vutto.
八种欲界善思和十二种不善思,在身门生起时,是身行;在语门生起时,是语行;这些思以及只在意识门生起的色界、无色界善思,在意识门生起时,是心行。不过,这里的神通思和掉举思,虽然就它们不作为结生识之缘这一点来说应当排除,但因为它们也是从无明缘而生起的,所以在这里仍应纳入。因此,这三类其实已经包含在前面的三类里了。从义理上说,应当知道:只有世间的善思和不善思才是“无明缘行”。这是按经分别的方式来说的。如果按论分别的方式来说,因为在每一个心识刹那中都完整摄取了世间与出世间的十二支缘起,所以应当知道一切思都是行。同样,对于识、名色等,也应当知道是依与一切心相应来分类的。不过,我们接下来只按经分别的方式来显示。巴利
Aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalacetanā ceva dvādasākusalacetanā ca kāyadvāre pavattiyaṃ kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīdvāre pavattiyaṃ vacīsaṅkhāro, etā ceva manodvāre pavattiyaṃ, manodvāre eva pavattanakā rūpārūpakusalacetanā ca cittasaṅkhāroti vuccanti. Abhiññācetanā, panettha uddhaccacetanā ca parato paṭisandhiviññāṇapaccayabhāve apanetabbāpi avijjāpaccayā sambhavato idha gahetabbāvāti ayaṃ tiko purimattikameva pavisatīti atthato lokiyakusalākusalacetanāva avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti veditabbaṃ. Idañca suttantabhājanīyanayena, abhidhammabhājanīyanayena pana lokiyalokuttare ekekacittakkhaṇe dvādasaṅgassa paṭiccasamuppādassa gahaṇato sabbāpi cetanā saṅkhārāti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ viññāṇanāmarūpādīsupi sabbacittasampayuttavasena ca dhammabhedo veditabbo. Suttantabhājanīyanayeneva pana dassayissāma.
以行为缘而有识,这里只是指眼识等六种、三十二种世间异熟识;至于出世间识,因为和轮回的论述不相应,所以没有取来。以识为缘而有名色,这里的名,就是与一切世间识相应的三种无色蕴;色,就是一切四大种以及所造色。六处,就是包括意处在内的六根。触,就是眼触等六种异熟触;受也一样。渴爱,按色渴爱等分类就是六种贪。取,按欲取等分类就是四种,只是贪和见。有则有两种:业有和生有。其中,业有就是三界的善与不善思,以及和它相应的贪欲等;生有就是由业所生的五蕴。按分类来说,有欲有、色有、无色有三种,想有、无想有、非想非非想有三种,一蕴有、四蕴有、五蕴有三种,一共九种。生等支前面已经说过。其中,取了生,也就取了识、名色、六处、触、受,因为这些和生不相离;同样,取了老死,也就取了这些,因为这些就是它们的果报差别。而忧等,则是和老死这第十二支合在一起说,并不是单独作为一支。为什么要这样?为了显示轮回不断。因为被老死所逼的愚者才会生起忧等,由此无明也就成立——因为不离无明,也因为无明生起;又由无明缘行,这样因果相续,轮回就是不断的、无始的、无边的、无尽的。巴利
Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇañca cakkhuviññāṇādichabbidhaṃ bāttiṃsalokiyavipākaviññāṇameva hoti, lokuttarāni pana vaṭṭakathāya na yujjantīti na gahitāni. Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ pana sabbalokiyaviññāṇasampayuttā tayo arūpino khandhā. Rūpaṃ sabbāni bhūtupādāyarūpāni. Saḷāyatanaṃ manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni. Phasso cakkhusamphassādiko chavipākaphasso, tathā vedanāpi. Taṇhā rūpataṇhādibhedato chabbidho lobho. Upādānaṃ kāmupādānādito catubbidhā lobhadiṭṭhiyova. Bhavo pana duvidho kammabhavo, upapattibhavoti. Tattha kammabhavo tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā ca taṃsampayuttā abhijjhādayo ca. Upapattibhavo pana kammābhinibbattā pañcapi khandhā. So pabhedato kāmarūpārūpabhavā tayo, saññā asaññā nevasaññānāsaññā bhavā tayo, ekacatupañcavokārabhavā tayoti navavidho niddiṭṭho. Jātiādīni pubbe vuttāni. Tesu jātiggahaṇena viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanāva gahitā tadavinābhāvato. Tathā jarāmaraṇaggahaṇenāpi tesaññeva pākabhedattā. Sokādayo pana jarāmaraṇena dvādasamena aṅgena ekasaṅkhepaṃ katvā vuttā, na visuṃ aṅgabhāvena. Kimatthanti ce? Bhavacakkassa avicchedadassanatthaṃ. Sokādito hi avijjā siddhā hoti avijjāvippayogato , avijjāsamuppattito ca. Jarāmaraṇabbhāhatassa hi bālasseva te sambhavanti, tehi ca avijjāya siddhāya puna avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti evaṃ hetuphalaparamparāya bhavacakkaṃ avicchinnaṃ, anādikaṃ, apariyantaṃ, apariyosānañca hoti.
如果是这样,为什么无明被说在最前面呢?这是为了显示它是主要的。因为无明是三种轮转的主要因:它存在,轮转才存在;它灭尽,轮转才灭尽。应当知道,按照经分别的教法,以无明等十二支来说明时,一切法都只是世间法——它们既是缘,也是缘所生。而按照论教的方式,出世间法也包括在内。这就是这里关于法的分类。巴利
Yadi evaṃ, kasmā avijjā ādito vuttāti? Padhānadassanatthaṃ pana ādito vuttā. Tiṇṇaṃ hi vaṭṭānaṃ avijjā padhāno hetu tassā bhāve bhāvato, nirodhena ca nirujjhanato. Evaṃ avijjādīhi dvādasahi aṅgehi suttantabhājanīyanayena sabbe lokiyadhammāva paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena vuttāti veditabbā. Abhidhammapariyāyena pana lokuttarāpīti ayamettha dhammabhedo.
不过,在这里,从分别论的方式来看,并没有问答的程式;应当知道,即使依经分别的方式,对法的分类也只是按照前面所说的方式详细分别过了。而在论分别中——巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha pañhāpucchakanayo natthi, suttantabhājanīyanayāpi dhammabhede vuttanayeneva vitthārato vibhattāti veditabbo. Abhidhammabhājanīye pana –
无明缘行,行缘识,识缘名,名缘第六处,第六处缘触,触缘受,受缘渴爱,渴爱缘取,取缘有,有缘生,生缘老死。这样,这整个纯苦蕴就集起了。巴利
‘‘Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmaṃ, nāmapaccayā chaṭṭhāyatanaṃ, chaṭṭhāyatanapaccayā phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ, upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jāti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ, evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hoti.
以无明为缘而有行……中略……以识为缘而有名,以名为缘而有触……中略……这样生起。巴利
‘‘Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro…pe… viññāṇapaccayā nāmaṃ, nāmapaccayā phasso…pe… samudayo hoti.
以无明为缘……(中略)……以识为缘而有名色,以名色为缘而有第六处,以第六处为缘而有触……(中略)……这样就有了集起。巴利
‘‘Avijjāpaccayā…pe… viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ, nāmarūpapaccayā chaṭṭhāyatanaṃ, chaṭṭhāyatanapaccayā phasso…pe… samudayo hoti.
以无明为缘……以识为缘,有名色;以名色为缘,有六处;以第六处为缘,有触……这样生起。巴利
‘‘Avijjāpaccayā …pe… viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ, nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanaṃ, chaṭṭhāyatanapaccayā phasso…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti (vibha. 243) –
这样,缘的四组之后,又按照“无明缘行,行以无明为因”等(《分别论》244)所说的方式,说了因的四组;再按照“无明缘行,行与无明相应”等(《分别论》245)所说的方式,说了相应的四组;再按照“无明缘行,行缘无明”等(《分别论》246)所说的方式,说了相互缘的四组。像这样,宣说了以无明为根本的四组四法。同样,从“行缘无明”等开始,以行为根本,一直到以取为根本,在八个处所中各有四组四法,总共三十二组四法,先立为论母列出,然后在不善心、善心、异熟心、唯作心,以及世间心、出世间心中,针对每一心,按照已列出的三十六或三十二论母四法,详细地随宜分别了缘相。而且,这个缘相不只存在于种种不同的心中,也存在于单一心中;不只存在于轮回的心中,也存在于离轮回的心中,因为无渴爱的缘故。因此,为了毫无遗漏地显示那一心刹那的缘相,才这样宣说。正因如此,这里不说“无明缘诸行”,而说“无明缘行”,用单数,因为在一心刹那中不存在多个思。其中,这第一组四法里,第一项在名色处取名,在六处处取第六处,这是依通于色界、无色界等一切有的共相,以及依摄属一心刹那的方式来取法,而舍弃了色法,因为色法不通于一切有,且属于多个心刹那。第二项在名色处取名,在“名缘触”处只取触,这是为了显示触即使没有六处也能以其他特殊缘生起,也是依照《大缘经》的方式(《长部》2.95等)来说的。第三项在六处处只取第六处,这是依胎生者六处尚未圆满的情况,以及色界众生等来说的。第四项按照“名缘六处,六处缘触”,像这样也以其余诸处显示六处特别是触的缘,这是依化生者、六处圆满者以及欲界众生来说的。第二组四法等也是这样。巴利
Evaṃ paccayacatukkaṃ, puna ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro avijjāhetuko’’tiādinā (vibha. 244) vuttanayeneva hetucatukkaṃ, puna ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro avijjāsampayutto’’tiādinā (vibha. 245) sampayuttacatukkaṃ, puna ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro, saṅkhārapaccayāpi avijjā’’tiādinā (vibha. 246) aññamaññapaccayacatukkanti evaṃ avijjāmūlakāni cattāri catukkāni vuttāni. Evaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā avijjā’’tiādinā saṅkhārādimūlakādiupādānamūlakapariyosānāni aṭṭhasu padesu cattāri cattāri catukkānīti bāttiṃsa catukkāni mātikaṃ katvā nikkhipitvā puna akusalakusalavipākakiriyacittesu lokiyalokuttaresu ekekasmiṃ citte yathānikkhittehi chattiṃsabāttiṃsamātikācatukkehi vitthārato yathānurūpaṃ paccayākāro vibhatto. Idañca yasmā na kevalaṃ ayaṃ paccayākāro nānācittesu eva hoti, ekacittepi hotiyeva. Nāpi vaṭṭacitte eva hoti, taṇhābhāvato vivaṭṭacittepi, tasmā taṃ nippadesato ekacittakkhaṇikaṃ paccayākāraṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Teneva hettha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti avatvā ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro’’ti ekavacanena vuttaṃ ekacittakkhaṇe bahucetanābhāvā. Tattha yadetaṃ paṭhamacatukkaṃ, tattha paṭhamavāro nāmarūpaṭṭhāne nāmaṃ, saḷāyatanaṭṭhāne chaṭṭhāyatanañca gahetvā rūpārūpādisabbabhavasādhāraṇavasena, ekacittakkhaṇapariyāpannadhammaggahaṇavasena ca rūpaṃ chaḍḍetvā vutto rūpassa sabbabhavāsādhāraṇattā, bahucittakkhaṇikattā ca. Dutiyo nāmarūpaṭṭhāne nāmaṃ, ‘‘nāmapaccayā phasso’’ti saḷāyatanaṭṭhāne phassameva gahetvā phassassa saḷāyatanaṃ vināpi paccayavisesasambhavadassanavasena ceva mahānidānasuttanayadassanavasena (dī. ni. 2.95 ādayo) ca vutto. Tatiyo saḷāyatanaṭṭhāne chaṭṭhāyatanameva gahetvā gabbhaseyyakānaṃ aparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ, rūpabhavikādīnañca vasena vutto. Catuttho ‘‘nāmapaccayā saḷāyatanaṃ, saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’ti evaṃ itarāyatanehipi saḷāyatanassa visesato phassapaccayataṃva dassetvā opapātikānaṃ, paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ kāmabhavikānañca vasena vutto. Evaṃ dutiyacatukkādīsupi.
在这里,无论在哪里,因为愁等所有这些法都不可能在同一心刹那中生起,也不会在一切心中和一切有中生起,所以没有取它们。而这里的生、老、死只是非色法的特相,它们虽然也并非只限于一心刹那,但由于被包含在心刹那中,所以从间接的意义上把它们当作缘所生法来取,以圆满支分。这里所说的“有”,是指远离取等缘的四种非色蕴;而在“以渴爱为缘而有取”这一句中,应当排除欲取,只取其余三种取。由于两个具有同一特相的法不可能在同一刹那中生起,所以在远离贪根的嗔根心、痴根心,以及善心和无记心中,依“以受为缘而有嗔恚、疑、掉举”,如此在渴爱所在之处,随相应情况取嗔恚等三法。在这些心中,排除了疑的以及见不相应的心中,在取所在之处取了“胜解”。但因为胜解与疑不可能同时存在,所以也取了“以疑为缘而有有”。在取所在之处也取了“胜解”。在这里,对世间的善法和无记法,是依亲依止缘说它们以无明为缘。至于出世间法,因为未断无明的人是为了断除无明、为了寂止无明而修习出世间法,所以是依超越的方式说以无明为缘,而不是依俱生缘。正因如此,在解说这些法的章节中,没有分开解释“其中什么是无明”,而是解释“其中什么是无明缘行”(《分别论》240)。至于唯作法,则无论如何都不以无明为根本,所以依“以行为缘而有识”等,说了以行为根本等的方式,而不是以无明为根本。此外,对世间的善法等,因为那些法属于苦谛,所以作了“如此,这整个苦蕴便生起”(《分别论》225)这样的归结;对出世间的善法等,则说“如此,这些法……”。这就是从世间到出世间的教说差别。以上是《分别论·阿毗达摩分别》中的方式。巴利
Sabbatthāpi cettha yasmā sokādayo sabbe ekacittakkhaṇe na sambhavanti, sabbasmiñca citte, bhave ca nappavattanti, tasmā na gahitā. Jātijarāmaraṇāni panettha arūpadhammānaṃ lakkhaṇamattāni, tāni ca acittakkhaṇamattānipi samānāni cittakkhaṇe antogadhattā pariyāyato paccayuppanne katvā aṅgaparipūraṇatthaṃ gahitāni. Bhavoti cettha upādānādipaccayavirahitā cattāro arūpino khandhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādānanti ettha kāmupādānaṃ vajjetvā tīṇi upādānāni eva gahetabbāni . Dvinnampi ekalakkhaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ ekakkhaṇe asambhavā lobhamūlavirahitesu dosamohamūlesu ceva kusalābyākatesu ca cittesu vedanāpaccayā paṭighaṃ vicikicchā uddhaccanti evaṃ taṇhāṭhāne yathāyogaṃ paṭighādayo tayo. Tesu vicikicchāvajjitesu ceva diṭṭhivippayuttesu ca upādānaṭṭhāne adhimokkho gahito. Vicikicchāya pana saddhiṃ adhimokkhassāpi asambhavā vicikicchāpaccayā bhavoti ca gahito. Upādānaṭṭhāne ca adhimokkho ca gahito. Lokiyānañcettha kusalābyākatānaṃ upanissayavasena avijjāpaccayatā vuttā. Lokuttarānaṃ pana yasmā appahīnāvijjo avijjāya pahānatthaṃ, paṭippassambhanatthañca lokuttaraṃ bhāveti, tasmā samatikkamanavasena avijjāpaccayatā vuttā, na sahajātavasena. Teneva tesaṃ niddesavāresu ‘‘tattha katamā avijjā’’ti avibhajitvā ‘‘tattha katamo avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro’’ti (vibha. 240) vibhattaṃ. Kiriyadhammānaṃ pana kenaci pariyāyena avijjāmūlakattaṃ natthīti ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’ntiādinā saṅkhāramūlakādiko nayo vutto, na avijjāmūlako. Apica lokiyakusalādīsu tesaṃ dhammānaṃ dukkhasaccapariyāpannattā ‘‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti (vibha. 225) evaṃ appanā katā, lokuttarakusalādīsu ‘‘evametesaṃ dhammāna’’nti. Ayaṃ lokiyato lokuttarānaṃ desanāya visesoti ayaṃ abhidhammabhājanīye nayo.
现在,从缘的方式、作者等方面来说,是空的;
从根本、世、连接、概要、行相、轮转来区分。
这里也应从“如象”的比喻和甚深理趣的区分来理解。
应当根据具体情况来了知,这是圣典之外的判定。巴利
Idāni paccayanayā, kārakādīhi suññato; Mūladdhasandhisaṅkhepākāravaṭṭavibhāgato. Vāraṇopamatopettha, gambhīranayabhedato; Yathārahaṃ vijānīyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,缘的方式分为总体与差别两种。其中,从总体上说明诸法仅仅依缘而存在的,是总体上的缘的方式。从差别上说,则是指在《发趣论》中出现的因缘等二十四缘当中,按照各自相应的方式,说明诸法仅仅由特定缘的差别所生起的状态。而这二十四缘的分类,将在对《发趣论》论母含义的注释中显现出来。其中,从总体上说应当知道:行等法仅仅以无明等缘的状态而存在。为什么呢?因为,如果有人对四圣谛、对前际等还没有断除无明,那么他对于苦,由于对前际等的无知,便不知道这样一个道理:那在三有之中充满生、老、病、死等无数过患的、被称为福果的行之变异苦,本身就是苦。于是他反而以乐想去追求它,通过身、语、意三门造作福行、不动行。对于集,他由于无知,在作为苦因的渴爱及其资具中,看不到由苦因所导致的地狱等苦;也看不到在作为苦因的欲乐受用等当中的过患。正因为他把它当作乐因,又被烦恼所制伏,于是造作三种行。对于灭和道,他由于无知,把并非灭的各种趣的差别当作灭,或者把并非灭道的祭祀、苦行等当作灭道,于是造作三种行。对于缘起、依缘而生的诸法,他由于无知,便虚妄地分别:众生无因无缘而生,死后就不存在了;或者自我知道或不知道,它自己造作诸行,它自己在结生时生起,它的微细主宰等以羯罗蓝等状态形成身体,使诸根完备,它自己诸根完备后接触、感受、渴爱,做取等;或者一切众生都是由命运、结合、存在所转变的。他就这样被无明所蒙蔽——巴利
Tattha paccayanayo sāmaññato, visesato cāti duvidho hoti. Tattha tabbhāvabhāvimattatāpakāsako sāmaññato paccayanayo. Visesato pana paṭṭhāne āgatesu hetupaccayādicatuvīsatiyā paccayesu yathānurūpaṃ paccayavisesuppannamattatāpakāsako. Sā ca nesaṃ catuvīsatiyā paccayānaṃ vibhāgatā paṭṭhānamātikatthasaṃvaṇṇanāya āvi bhavissati. Tattha sāmaññato saṅkhārādayo avijjādipaccayabhāve eva bhāvinoti veditabbā. Yassa hi catūsu saccesu, pubbantādīsu ca avijjā appahīnā hoti, so dukkhe tāva pubbantādīsu ca aññāṇena tīsu bhavesu jātijarārogamaraṇādianekādīnavavokiṇṇaṃ puññaphalasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhāravipariṇāmadukkhaṃ dukkhato ajānanto sukhasaññāya patthetvā tīhi dvārehi puññāneñjābhisaṅkhāre ārabhati. Samudaye aññāṇena dukkhahetubhūtesupi taṇhāparikkhāresu dukkhahetukaṃ āpāyikādidukkhaṃ, dukkhahetubhūtesu kāmūpasevanādīsu ca ādīnavaṃ apassanto sukhahetusaññāya ceva kilesābhibhūtatāya ca tividhepi saṅkhāre ārabhati. Nirodhe, pana magge ca aññāṇena anirodhabhūte gativisese nirodhasaññī, nirodhassa ca vā amaggabhūtesupi yaññāmaratapādīsupi nirodhamaggasaññī hutvā tividhepi saṅkhāre ārabhati. Idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannesu dhammesu aññāṇena ‘‘ahetū appaccayā sattā uppajjanti, na honti paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vā ‘‘attāva jānāti vā na jānāti vā, sova saṅkhāre saṅkharoti, sova paṭisandhiyaṃ uppajjati, tassa aṇuissarādayo kalalādibhāvena sarīraṃ saṇṭhāpentā indriyāni sampādenti, sova indriyasampanno phusati, vedayati, taṇhiyati, upādānādīni ca karotī’’ti vā ‘‘sabbe sattā niyatisaṅgatibhavapariṇatā’’ti vā vikappeti. So evaṃ avijjāya andhīkato –
就像天生眼盲的人,身边没有向导一样;
有时走正道,有时也走邪道。
“ 愚人在轮回中不断流转,同样没有引导者;
他有时造作福业,有时也造作非福业。”巴利
‘‘Yathāpi nāma jaccandho, naro apariṇāyako; Ekadā yāti maggena, ummaggenāpi ekadā. ‘‘Saṃsāre saṃsaraṃ bālo, tathā apariṇāyako; Karoti ekadā puññaṃ, apuññamapi ekadā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅgārapadaniddesa) –
按照上面说的方式,造作三种行。那么这里只有无明是诸行的缘吗?难道不是从一个因只生一个果,不会从一个因生多个果,也不会从多个因生一个果,而是从多个因生多个果吗?确实如此。不过这里是为了说明无明是主因、明显、不共,所以在众多因中,仍然只把无明单独说成是缘,就像“触缘受”“由痰所起的病”等说法一样。因为无明是诸行的主因,对诸行来说很明显,而且也是渴爱等其他因的不共之因——即使对漏尽者而言依处、所缘等条件不存在,诸行也不会生起。因此应当知道,在这里,流转中的诸行存在,就是因为无明存在。同样,识的存在也是因为已积集的业存在;如果没有业,识就不生起,否则就会有过失:一切处、一切众生的所有异熟识都会同时生起。所以应当知道,识的存在就是因为行的存在。就像这里一样,上面名色等法的存在,也应当依照各自相应的情况,以识等的存在而存在。这就是一般意义上的缘起方式。巴利
Vuttanayena tividhe saṅkhāre abhisaṅkharotīti. Kiṃ panettha ekāva avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo hoti, nanu ekasmā kāraṇā ekaṃva kāriyaṃ uppajjati, anekaṃ kāriyaṃ na uppajjati, anekasmā vā ekanti, anekasmā kāraṇā anekaṃ kāriyaṃ uppajjatīti? Saccaṃ, padhānattapākaṭattaasādhāraṇattadīpanatthaṃ panettha anekesu kāraṇesupi ekā avijjā eva paccayabhāvena niddiṭṭhā ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā (udā. 3), semhasamuṭṭhānā ābādhā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 10.60; mahāni. 5; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 128) viya. Avijjā hi padhāno hetu, saṅkhārānaṃ pākaṭo, asādhāraṇo ca taṇhādihetūnampi hetuttā, na vatthārammaṇādīni khīṇāsavassa tesaṃ sambhavepi saṅkhārānaṃ abhāvāti. Evaṃ tāvettha vaṭṭasaṅkhārānaṃ avijjāya eva bhāve bhāvo veditabbo. Tathā viññāṇassāpi upacitakammābhāve abhāvato, sabbattha sabbesañca sabbavipākaviññāṇuppattippasaṅgato ca saṅkhārānaṃ eva bhāve bhāvo veditabbo. Yathā cettha, evaṃ uparipi nāmarūpādīnaṃ viññāṇādibhāve bhāvo yathānurūpaṃ anubhavayuttīhi ñātabboti ayaṃ sāmaññato paccayanayo.
特别来说,无明对福行,首先以所缘缘和亲依止缘两种方式作为缘。具体来说:以无明为所缘,通过观照等方式生起时,对欲界的福行,无明以所缘缘为缘;以神通心了知有痴心的时候,对色界的福行,无明首先以所缘缘为缘。然而,有人本是为了超越无明,却因被无明所迷,希求欲界和色界的成就,而造作欲界、色界福行;对这样的人,无明以亲依止缘为缘。对于非福行:以无明为所缘而生起贪等烦恼时,无明以所缘缘等为缘;因被无明所迷而造作杀生等行为时,无明以依止缘为缘;对第二速行心等,则以无间缘、亲依止缘、习行缘、有缘、离去缘为缘;造作任何一种不善时,则以因缘、俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘为缘——就这样以多种方式作为缘。对于不动行,则只以一种亲依止缘为缘。巴利
Visesato pana avijjā puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ tāva ārammaṇapaccayena, upanissayapaccayena cāti dvidhā paccayo hoti. Sā hi avijjaṃ ārabbha sammasanādivasena uppattiyaṃ kāmāvacarānaṃ, abhiññācittena samohacittassa jānanakāle rūpāvacarānañca puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ tāva ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti, avijjāsamatikkamanatthāya pana avijjāsammūḷhatāya kāmarūpabhavasampattiyo patthetvāva kāmarūpāvacarapuññāni karontassa upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti. Apuññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ panesā avijjaṃ ārabbha rāgādīnaṃ uppajjanakāle ārammaṇādipaccayena avijjāsammūḷhatāya pāṇātipātādīni karontassa nissayapaccayena, dutiyajavanādīnaṃ anantarūpanissayāsevananatthivigatapaccayehi yaṃ kiñci akusalaṃ karontassa hetusahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehīti evaṃ anekadhā paccayo hoti, āneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ pana ekena upanissayapaccayeneva paccayo hoti.
在“行缘识”这一句里,三种行对识,在三有中的结生和转起阶段,随各自情况,以业缘和亲依止缘这两种方式作为缘。按照阿毗达摩分别论的方法,对俱生的识来说,则以俱生、相互、依止、相应、业、有、不离等缘作为缘。巴利
Saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇapade pana tayopi saṅkhārā viññāṇassa yathārahaṃ tīsu bhavesu paṭisandhipavattīsu kammapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena cāti dvidhā paccayā honti. Abhidhammabhājanīyanayena sahajātassa viññāṇassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttakammatthiavigatādipaccayehi paccayā honti.
在“识缘名色”这一句里,识分为异熟与非异熟两类。它对纯粹的名,或与色混合的名色,在结生和转起时,随各自情况,以俱生、相互、依止、相应、异熟、食、根、有、不离去这些缘,或成九种缘,或成八种缘。结生时,异熟识对依处色,以俱生、相互、依止、异熟、食、根、不相应、有、不离去缘,共九种方式作为缘。除了依处色以外,对其余的色,则去掉相互缘,以其余八种方式作为缘。而行作识在一蕴有和五蕴有中,按照经教的说法,以亲依止缘的力量作为业生色的缘。在转起时,一切识都随各自情况,作为各自名色的缘。在这里应当知道:无色有中,识只是名的缘;无想有中,识只是色的缘;五蕴有中,识是名色的缘。正因为这样,才有“名与色,以及名色”这样的词源解释。巴利
Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpapade pana viññāṇaṃ vipākabhūtaṃ, avipākabhūtañca nāmassa kevalassa vā rūpamissakassa vā paṭisandhipavattīsu sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttavipākaāhāraindriyaatthiavigatapaccayehi yathārahaṃ navadhā, aṭṭhadhā vā paccayo hoti. Paṭisandhiyaṃ vipākaviññāṇaṃ vatthurūpassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākaāhāraindriyavippayuttaatthi avigatapaccayehi navadhā paccayo hoti. Ṭhapetvā pana vatthurūpaṃ sesarūpassa teheva aññamaññapaccayarahitehi aṭṭhahi paccayo hoti. Abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ pana ekavokārapañcavokārabhavesu kammajarūpassa suttantikapariyāyena upanissayavasena paccayo hoti. Pavattiyaṃ pana sabbampi viññāṇaṃ tassa tassa nāmarūpassa yathārahaṃ paccayo hoti. Tattha arūpabhave viññāṇaṃ nāmasseva, asaññibhave rūpasseva, pañcavokārabhave nāmarūpassa paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ. Teneva nāmañca rūpañca nāmarūpañca nāmarūpanti nibbacanaṃ katanti.
在“以名色为缘而有六处”这一句里,名有异熟和非异熟两种。在无色界中,名作为第六处的缘,最少时以俱生、相互、依止、相应、异熟、有、不离去这七种方式起作用。对于眼处等其余五处,在五蕴有的结生时刻,名作为四大种的伴随者,以俱生、依止、异熟、不相应、有、不离去这六种方式起作用。其中,有些是以因缘的方式,有些是以食缘的方式,应当根据这些来理解在各种情况下最高和最低的差别。在转起阶段,对于眼等五处,异熟和非异熟的名以后生、不相应、有、不离去这四种方式起作用。如此,应当知道,名本身就是六处的缘。巴利
Nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanapade pana nāmaṃ vipākabhūtaṃ, avipākabhūtañca arūpabhave chaṭṭhāyatanassa avakaṃsato sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttavipākaatthiavigatavasena yathārahaṃ sattadhā paccayo hoti. Itaresaṃ panetaṃ pañcannaṃ cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ pañcavokārabhave paṭisandhiyaṃ catumahābhūtasahāyaṃ hutvā sahajātanissayavipākavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena chadhā paccayo hoti. Kiñci panettha hetupaccayena, kiñci āhārapaccayena cāti tesaṃ vasena sabbavāresu ukkaṃsāvakaṃso veditabbo. Pavatte pana cakkhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ vipākamavipākampi nāmaṃ pacchājātavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena catudhā paccayo hotīti. Evaṃ tāva nāmameva saḷāyatanassa paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ.
不过,色作为依处时,在结生那一刻,以俱生、相互、依止、不相应、有、不离去这六种方式,成为第六处的缘。四大种色在结生和转起时,以俱生、依止、有、不离去这四种缘,成为眼等五处的缘。而色命根则以根、有、不离去这三种方式为缘。食也同样以食、有、不离去这三种方式为缘。不过,食和色命根只在转起时才有,结生时没有。眼处等这五处,在转起时——不是结生时——以依止、前生、根、不相应、有、不离去这六种方式,成为被称为五识的第六意处的缘。同样,对于没有五识的意处,依处色以依止、前生、不相应、有、不离去这五种方式为缘。应当知道,色就是这样成为第六处和六处的缘。而被称为三蕴和依处色的名色,在结生时,则随其相应,以俱生、相互、依止、相应、不相应、异熟、有、不离去等方式,成为第六处的缘。应当知道,名、色以及名色,随其相应,成为第六处和六处的缘。巴利
Rūpaṃ pana vatthubhūtaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ chaṭṭhāyatanassa sahajātaaññamaññanissayavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena chadhā paccayo hoti. Catumahābhūtarūpaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ, pavatte ca sahajātanissayaatthiavigatapaccayehi catudhā paccayo hoti. Rūpajīvitindriyaṃ pana indriyaatthiavigatavasena tividhā. Tathā āhāro āhāratthiavigatavasena. So ca āhārūpajīvīnaṃ pavatteyeva, no paṭisandhiyaṃ. Tāni pana pañca cakkhāyatanādīni pañcaviññāṇasaṅkhātassa chaṭṭhassa manāyatanassa nissayapurejātaindriyavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena chadhā paccayā honti pavatteyeva, no paṭisandhiyaṃ. Tathā pañcaviññāṇavirahitamanāyatanassa vatthurūpaṃ nissayapurejātavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena pañcadhā paccayo hotīti. Evaṃ rūpameva chaṭṭhāyatanassa, saḷāyatanassa ca paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ. Khandhattayavatthurūpasaṅkhātaṃ pana nāmarūpaṃ chaṭṭhāyatanassa paṭisandhiyaṃ sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttavippayuttavipākaatthiavigatādivasena yathārahaṃ paccayo hotīti. Evaṃ nāmañca rūpañca nāmarūpañca yathārahaṃ chaṭṭhāyatanassa, saḷāyatanassa ca paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ.
在“以六处为缘而有触”这一段里,第六处有异熟和非异熟两种,它在一切情况下都作为相应触的缘,方式有九种或八种,依据俱生等关系来定。眼处等五处,在转起时,依次作为眼触等五种触的缘,方式有六种,依据依止、前生、根、不相应、有、不离去这些关系。色处等五处,对它们则作为所缘前生、有、不离去这三种缘,方式有三种。而对意触来说,这些处以及法所缘,同样如此,并且仅以所缘增上,以多种方式成为它的缘。应当知道,第六处和六处,对六种触也都是缘。巴利
Saḷāyatanapaccayā phassapade pana chaṭṭhāyatanaṃ vipākaṃ, avipākañca sabbattha sampayuttaphassassa sahajātādivasena navadhā, aṭṭhadhā vā paccayo hoti. Cakkhāyatanādīni pañca yathākkamaṃ pavatte cakkhusamphassādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ nissayapurejātaindriyavippayuttaatthiavigatavasena chadhā, rūpāyatanādīni pañca tesaṃ ārammaṇapurejātaatthiavigatavasena tidhā. Manosamphassassa pana tāni, dhammārammaṇañca tathā ca ārammaṇādhipatimattena cāti bahudhā paccayā honti. Evaṃ chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca chabbidhassāpi phassassa paccayo hotīti veditabbaṃ.
在“以触为缘而有受”这一节里,一切触对于俱生的诸受,都可以作为缘,方式有八种或七种:俱生、相互、依止、异熟、食、相应、有、不离去。对于不是俱生的受,则只以亲依止缘的方式作为缘。巴利
Phassapaccayā vedanāpade sabbopi phasso sahajātānaṃ vedanānaṃ sahajātaaññamaññanissayavipākaāhārasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena aṭṭhadhā, sattadhā vā paccayo hoti, asahajātānaṃ upanissayavasenevāti.
在“以受为缘而有渴爱”这一部分,异熟受对于被随眠缠住的渴爱来说,以亲依止缘的方式、以及俱生等方式,成为它的缘。然而,因为:巴利
Vedanāpaccayā taṇhāpade vipākavedanā anusayapatitāya taṇhāya upanissayavasena, sahajātādivasena ca paccayo hoti. Yasmā pana –
受苦的人渴望快乐,快乐的人却还想要更多。
不过,舍因为寂静,就被说成是乐。
因此,这三种受都以渴爱为缘。巴利
Dukkhī sukhaṃ patthayati, sukhī bhiyyopi icchati; Upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā; Taṇhāya paccayā tasmā, honti tissopi vedanāti. (visuddhi. 2.644);
在“以渴爱为缘而有取”这一节里,不与取俱生的渴爱,对四种取来说,通过亲依止缘和无间缘等方式成为缘;而与取俱生的渴爱,对除了欲取之外的三种取来说,则通过因缘、俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘这七种方式成为缘。巴利
Taṇhāpaccayā upādānapade taṇhā asahajātā catunnampi upādānānaṃ upanissayavasena ceva anantarādivasena ca, sahajātā pana kāmupādānavajjitānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ hetusahajāta aññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena sattadhā paccayo hoti.
在“以取为缘而有有”这一节里,四种取对于不是俱生的所有业有和生有,只是以亲依止缘的方式成为缘;而对于俱生的业有,则以因缘、俱生缘等方式成为缘。巴利
Upādānapaccayā bhavapade catubbidhampi upādānaṃ asahajātassa sabbakammabhavassa ceva upapattibhavassa ca upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti, sahajātassa pana kammabhavassa hetusahajātādivasena paccayo hoti.
在“以有为缘而有生”这一句里,这里说的“有”指的只是业有;而业有对生来说,依业缘和亲依止缘这两种方式成为缘。巴利
Bhavapaccayā jātipade bhavoti kammabhavova adhippeto, so ca jātiyā kammapaccayaupanissayapaccayavasena dvidhā paccayo hoti.
在“以生为缘而有老死等”这一句中,生对于老死以及愁等,仅仅因为它们是依生而存在,按照经教的方式,只是以亲依止缘的层面成为缘——这就是这里所说的缘的方式。巴利
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇādipade jāti pana jarāmaraṇānaṃ, sokādīnañca tabbhāvabhāvībhāvamattato suttantikanayena upanissayakoṭiyāva paccayo hotīti ayaṃ tāvettha paccayanayo.
无明等这十二法,因为是这样以缘和缘所生的方式彼此相连、不依赖其他而持续不断地无始流转,所以它们离于别的作者——比如梵天神之类的作者,也离于自性、极微、时节等原因,也离于他人所构想、呈作者与受者相的我,也离于自己。这些法不是“我”,不在“我”中,不具有“我”;它们空于“我”,或空于“我所”,或空于恒常性,或空于美好性,或空于快乐性——这就是空于作者等。巴利
Kārakādīhi suññato panete avijjādayo dvādasa dhammā yasmā evaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena aññamaññaṃ paṭibaddhā aññanirapekkhā hutvā avicchinnā anādikā pavattanti, tasmā tato aññena brahmādinā kārakena, pakatiaṇukālādihetunā vā kārakavedakarūpena paraparikappitena attanā vā rahitā. Na cete attā, na attani, na attavanto, suññā ete attena vā attaniyena vā dhuvabhāvena vā subhabhāvena vā sukhabhāvena vāti ayaṃ kārakādīhi suññatā.
从根、时、连结、略说、行相、轮转的分别来说:在这里,先从根来说,应当知道无明和渴爱这两种法是根。从时来说,这里应当知道无明和行这两支属于过去时,识等直到有的八支属于现在时,生和老死这两支属于未来时,这样就是三时。从连结来说,应当知道行与结生识之间是一个因果连结,受与渴爱之间是一个果因连结,有与生之间是一个因果连结,这样就是三连结。从略说来说,依连结的开头和结尾所划分,有四种略说。也就是:无明和行是第一略说,识、名色、六处、触、受是第二略说,渴爱、取、有是第三略说,生、老死是第四略说,应当这样知道四种略说。巴利
Mūladdhasandhisaṅkhepākāravaṭṭavibhāgatoti ettha mūlato tāva avijjā, taṇhā cāti dve dhammā mūlanti veditabbā. Addhato panettha avijjā, saṅkhārāti dve aṅgāni atīto addhā, viññāṇādīni bhavāvasānāni aṭṭha paccuppanno addhā, jāti ceva jarāmaraṇañcāti dve anāgato addhāti tayo addhā veditabbā. Sandhito pana saṅkhārānaṃ, paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ca antarā eko hetuphalasandhi, vedanāya ca taṇhāya ca antarā eko phalahetusandhi, bhavassa ca jātiyā ca antarā eko hetuphalasandhi cāti tayo sandhī veditabbā. Saṅkhepato pana sandhīnaṃ ādipariyosānavavatthitā cattāro saṅkhepā honti. Seyyathidaṃ – avijjāsaṅkhārā eko saṅkhepo, viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanā dutiyo, taṇhupādānabhavā tatiyo, jātijarāmaraṇāni catutthoti evaṃ cattāro saṅkhepā veditabbā.
那么,从行相方面来说:巴利
Ākārato panettha –
过去有五因,现在有五果;
现在有五因,未来有五果。巴利
Atīte hetuyo pañca, idāni phalapañcakaṃ; Idāni hetuyo pañca, āyatiṃ phalapañcakanti. –
这样就成为二十种行相。巴利
Evaṃ vīsati ākārā honti.
在这里,按自性来说的是无明和行;由于把它们包含进来,与它们不相分离的渴爱、取、有也被包含进来了——这五种法就叫作过去的因。按自性来说的识等五种法,现在就叫作果五法。按自性来说的渴爱、取、有,由于把它们包含进来,与它们不相分离的无明和行也被包含进来了——这五种法现在就叫作因。以生等名称来说的识等五种法,就叫作未来的果五法。应当这样了知二十种行相。再者,在这里从轮转来说,行和有属于业轮转,无明、渴爱、取属于烦恼轮转,其余的属于果报轮转,这样就有三种轮转。只要那些烦恼轮转还没有被圣道断除,这个有轮就会一直不停地流转。以上就是这里对根本、时节、连结、略说、行相和轮转的分别。巴利
Ettha hi sarūpato vuttā avijjāsaṅkhārā, tesaṃ gahaṇena tadavinābhāvato gahitā taṇhupādānabhavāti ime pañca dhammā atīte hetuyo nāma, sarūpato vuttā viññāṇādayo pañca dhammā idāni phalapañcakaṃ nāma, sarūpato pana vuttā taṇhupādānabhavā, tesaṃ gahaṇena tadavinābhāvato gahitā avijjāsaṅkhārāti ime pañca idāni hetuyo nāma. Jātiādiapadesena vuttā viññāṇādayo pañca dhammā āyatiṃ phalapañcakaṃ nāmāti evaṃ vīsati ākārā veditabbā. Vaṭṭato panettha saṅkhārabhavā kammavaṭṭaṃ, avijjātaṇhupādānā kilesavaṭṭaṃ, sesāni vipākavaṭṭanti tīṇi vaṭṭāni honti. Yāva ca tesu kilesavaṭṭaṃ ariyamaggena na upacchijjati, tāva idaṃ bhavacakkaṃ anupacchinnaṃ pavattatīti ayamettha mūladdhasandhisaṅkhepākāravaṭṭavibhāgo.
关于“遮止之喻”这个比喻,这里先就“遮止”来说:“无明缘行”这句,是为了遮止认为无因或邪因的见解;“行缘识”这句,是为了遮止断灭见和认为自我转移的见解;“识缘名色”这句,是通过显示被计执为自我的事物其实是分离的,来遮止密集想;“名色缘六处”等句,则是为了遮止这样的见解:自我在看……乃至……自我在识知、触、感受、渴爱、执取、存在、出生、衰老、死亡。这就是这里对邪见的遮止。巴利
Vāraṇopamatoti ettha vāraṇato tāva – ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti idamahetukavisamahetukadassananivāraṇaṃ, ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ucchedaattasaṅkantidassananivāraṇaṃ, ‘‘viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti attāti parikappitavatthubhedadassanato ghanasaññānivāraṇaṃ, ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādi attā passati…pe… vijānāti phusati, vedayati, taṇhiyati, upādiyati, bhavati, jāyati, jīyati, mīyatīti evamādidassananivāraṇanti idamettha micchādassananivāraṇaṃ.
在这里,用譬喻来说:无明就像盲人,行就像他踉跄跌倒,识就像他摔倒,名色就像因此生出的肿疮,六处就像肿疮破裂后的伤口,触就像伤口被碰到,受就像由此产生的疼痛,渴爱就像想治好疼痛的欲望,取就像抓取不适宜的东西,有就像涂抹不适宜的药,生就像肿疮因此发生病变,老死就像那病变彻底溃烂。或者,从遮蔽如实见等角度来说,这些无明等法也应当通过眼翳等譬喻来了知。这就是这里的譬喻。巴利
Upamāto panettha andho viya avijjā, tassa upakkhalanaṃ viya saṅkhārā, patanaṃ viya viññāṇaṃ, tena gaṇḍapātubhāvo viya nāmarūpaṃ, tassa gaṇḍabhedapīḷakā viya saḷāyatanaṃ, tassa saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya phasso, tajjanitadukkhaṃ viya vedanā, dukkhassa paṭikārābhilāso viya taṇhā, asappāyaggahaṇaṃ viya upādānaṃ, asappāyālepanaṃ viya bhavo, tena gaṇḍavikārapātubhāvo viya jāti, tabbikārabhedo viya jarāmaraṇaṃ. Yathāsabhāvadassananivāraṇādito vā ete avijjādayo akkhipaṭalādi upamāhipi veditabbāti ayamettha upamā.
关于甚深类别的区分:在这里,首先应当知道,这些无明等法各自都有法甚深、义甚深、教说甚深和通达甚深。
这些无明等法,以什么样的方式、在什么样的状态下成为行等果的缘,这个“缘”的意义难以理解,所以是甚深,这就是这里的“法甚深”。“法”就是因的意思,因为经中说“对因的智是法无碍解”。老死等果,由生等缘而生起、集起的意义难以理解,所以是甚深,这就是“义甚深”。“义”就是果的意思,因为经中说“对因和果的智是义无碍解”。而那些因和果,以各种方式毫无颠倒地加以宣说,完全是一切知智的境界,所以是甚深,这就是“教说甚深”。而这些无明、行等的无见、造作等自性,因为智慧浅陋的人难以彻知,所以是甚深,这就是“通达甚深”。以上就是这里关于甚深类别的区分。巴利
Gambhīranayabhedatoti ettha gambhīrabhedo tāva imesaṃ avijjādīnaṃ paccekaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīratā veditabbā. Ime hi avijjādayo dhammā yenākārena yadavatthā ca saṅkhārādīnaṃ phalānaṃ paccayā honti, so nesaṃ paccayaṭṭho duravabodhato gambhīroti ayamettha dhammagambhīratā. Dhammoti hetu ‘‘hetumhi ñāṇaṃ dhammapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 720) vacanato. Jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ phalānaṃ jātiādīhi paccayehi sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho duravabodhato gambhīroti ayaṃ atthagambhīratā. Atthoti phalaṃ ‘‘hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 720) vacanato. Tesaṃ pana hetūnaṃ, phalānañca tena tenākārena aviparītato desanāpi sabbaññutaññāṇasseva gocarato gambhīrāti ayaṃ desanāgambhīratā. Yo panesaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ adassanāyūhanādisabhāvo, so mandapaññehi duppariyogāhattā gambhīroti ayaṃ paṭivedhagambhīratāti ayamettha gambhīrabhedo.
在这里,“理趣的分别”应当依据四种义理趣来理解:一性理趣、差异性理趣、无作用理趣、法如性理趣。其中,所谓“一性理趣”,就像种子经过芽等阶段而长成大树一样,依“无明缘行,行缘识”这样的方式,相续不断绝。正见的人因为通过因果关联而了知相续不断绝,所以舍断断见;邪见的人则因为把依因果关联而持续生起的相续不断执取为一性,所以执取常见。巴利
Nayabhedo panettha ekattanayo nānattanayo abyāpāranayo evaṃdhammatānayoti imesaṃ catunnaṃ atthanayānaṃ vasena veditabbo. Tattha hi ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti evaṃ bījassa aṅkurādibhāvena rukkhabhāvappatti viya santānānupacchedo ekattanayo nāma. Yaṃ sammā passanto hetuphalasambandhena santānānupacchedāvabodhato ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, micchā passanto hetuphalasambandhena pavattamānassa santānānupacchedassa ekattaggahaṇato sassatadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyati.
不过,对无明等法各自特征的确定,就叫作差异性理趣。正确看见它的人,因为见到一次次新生的生起,就舍断了常见;错误看见它的人,把落在同一相续中的法执取为各不相同,就好像相续已经断裂一样,于是执取断见。巴利
Avijjādīnaṃ pana yathāsakaṃ lakkhaṇavavatthānaṃ nānattanayo nāma. Yaṃ sammā passanto navanavānaṃ uppādadassanato sassatadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, micchā passanto ekasantānapatitassa bhinnasantānasseva nānattaggahaṇato ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyati.
对于无明,并不存在“诸行应该由我来生起”,或者“诸行的识应该由我们来生起”这类造作活动,这就叫无作用理。
能正确观察这一点的人,因为明白没有作者,所以断除了我见;错误观察的人,则因为不承认“即使没有造作活动,无明等法的因性仍然由自性法则成立”这一点,所以执取无作用见。巴利
Avijjāya pana ‘‘saṅkhārā mayā uppādetabbā, saṅkhārānaṃ vā viññāṇaṃ amhehī’’ti evamādibyāpārābhāvo abyāpāranayo nāma. Yaṃ sammā passantokārakassa abhāvāvabodhato attadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, micchā passanto yo asatipi byāpāre avijjādīnaṃ sabhāvaniyamasiddho hetubhāvo, tassa aggahaṇato akiriyadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyati.
不过,诸行等的产生只是由无明等这些因缘,就像酪等的产生只是由乳等一样,而不是其他事物的产生——这就是所谓的“法性理”。能正确观察这一点的人,因为随顺因缘而了知果报,就会舍弃无因见和无作用见;错误观察的人,不把握随顺因缘的果报生起,反而执取无论从何处、对任何事物都不生起,于是执取无因见和决定论。这就是这里理趣的分别。应当这样了知这离文抉择。巴利
Avijjādīhi pana kāraṇehi saṅkhārādīnaṃyeva sambhavo khīrādīhi dadhiādīnaṃ viya, na aññesanti ayaṃ evaṃdhammatānayo nāma. Yaṃ sammā passanto paccayānurūpato phalāvabodhato ahetukadiṭṭhiṃ, akiriyadiṭṭhiñca pajahati, micchā passanto paccayānurūpaṃ phalappavattiṃ aggahetvā yato kutoci yassa kassaci asambhavaggahaṇato ahetukadiṭṭhiṃ ceva niyatavādañca upādiyatīti ayamettha nayabhedoti evaṃ vijānīyo pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
念处分别论母的义释巴利
Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《念处分别》的论母,先从含义上说:“四”是数量限定,用它表明既不比这少,也不比这多。“念处”在这里有两种:念的所缘境也是念处,念本身也是念处。因为在“诸比丘,我将宣说四念处的集起与灭没”等经文里,念的所缘境被称为“念处”。它的意思是:依它而安立,所以叫“处”。什么安立呢?是念。念的处所,就是念处。或者说,主要安立之处就是处,念的处所就是念处。而在“四念处已修习、已多作,能圆满七觉支”等经文里,则是指念本身。它的意思是:安立故为处,也就是现起、进入、跃入而转起的意思。念本身以“处”之义成为念处。或者,念以忆念为义,它以现起为义而成为处,所以是念处,这才是这里所要表达的意思。如果是这样,为什么用复数说“念处”呢?因为念有多种。由于所缘不同,那些念确实有很多。巴利
Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo, tena na tato heṭṭhā, na uddhanti dīpeti. Satipaṭṭhānāti ettha dve satipaṭṭhānā satigocaropi satipi. ‘‘Catunnaṃ, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānānaṃ samudayañca atthaṅgamañca desessāmī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.408) hi satigocaro ‘‘satipaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati, tassattho patiṭṭhāti tasminti paṭṭhānaṃ, kā patiṭṭhāti? Sati. Satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Padhānaṃ ṭhānanti vā paṭṭhānaṃ, satiyā paṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrentī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.147) pana sati. Tassattho patiṭṭhātīti paṭṭhānaṃ, upaṭṭhāti okkantitvā pakkhanditvā pavattatīti attho. Satiyeva paṭṭhānatthena satipaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā saraṇaṭṭhena sati, sā ca upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṭṭhānanti satipaṭṭhānaṃ, idamidha adhippetaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā satipaṭṭhānāti bahuvacanaṃ kataṃ? Satiyā bahuttā. Ārammaṇabhedena hi bahukā tā satiyo.
这里说的“在此”,是指在这套教法之中。这句话要表明:能依内等种种方式,修成四十四种念处的这个人,他所依靠的就是这套教法本身,而不是别的教法。正如经中所说:“比丘们,只有在这里才有沙门……其他外道教说中,沙门是空无的。”巴利
Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane, tena ajjhattādivasena sabbappakāracatucattālīsavidhasatipaṭṭhānanibbattakassa puggalassa nissayabhūtaṃ sāsanameva, nāññaṃ sāsananti dīpeti. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo…pe… suññā parappavādā samaṇehi aññehī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.214; ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241).
所谓“比丘”,是指能观见轮回中怖畏的人。由此说明:虽然世尊坐在天界为天众宣说念处时,除了天众以外,并没有哪一位比丘坐在他面前,但不管是天人还是人,是在家人还是出家人,只要能正确观见轮回中的怖畏,并按照所教导的方法去修行,就可以称为比丘,而不是别的什么人。正如经中所说:“即使打扮得漂漂亮亮……”巴利
Bhikkhūti saṃsāre bhayaṃ ikkhanako. Tena kiñcāpi bhagavato devaloke nisīditvā satipaṭṭhānaṃ desentassa santike devagaṇaṃ muñcitvā ekabhikkhupi nisinno nāma natthi, tathāpi devo vā hotu manusso vā gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā, saṃsāre bhayanti sammā ikkhamāno yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānova bhikkhu nāma hoti, nāññoti dasseti. Yathāha ‘‘alaṅkato cepī’’ti (dha. pa. 142).
“内在”是指自己内部。“身”在这里:可厌的毛发等东西聚集而来,所以叫“来处”;哪些东西来集呢?就是毛发等可厌之物,因此可厌之物来集之处就叫“身”。另一种说法是,从肢体和毛发等集合的意义上,也叫“身”,即色身,也就是自己的身体。“随观身者”是指有随观身习惯的人。先说了“于身”,又再说“随观身者”,这第二次提“身”,是为了表明:并不是在身中随观脱离肢体的单一法,也不是随观脱离毛发等的男人女人,也不是随观脱离四大与所造色的单一法,而是像随观车的零件、城的各部分、剖析芭蕉树干那样,依次随观肢体、毛发等四大与所造色的集合。因为在这里,除了所说的诸法集合之外,确实看不到男人女人等或其他任何法。然而愚者对所说的诸法集合本身,以种种方式执取为净等邪执;而这位瑜伽行者却于其中唯是随观身者,也就是随观无常、苦、无我、不净。或者,大念处中所说的入出息等十四种身,全部都是在此身中随观的,因此“于身随观身”等含义,也应这样理解。巴利
Ajjhattanti niyakajjhattaṃ. Kāyeti ettha āyanti tatoti āyo. Ke āyanti? Kucchitā kesādayo, iti kucchitānaṃ āyoti kāyo. Atha vā aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ, kesādīnañca samūhaṭṭhenapi kāyo, rūpakāyo, tasmiṃ attano kāyeti attho. Kāyānupassīti kāyaṃ anupassanasīlo. ‘‘Kāye’’ti ca vatvā puna ‘‘kāyānupassī’’ti dutiyakāya-ggahaṇaṃ ‘‘evaṃ na kāye aṅgapaccaṅgavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, nāpi kesalomādivinimuttaitthipurisānupassī, na ca bhūtupādāyavinimuttaekadhammānupassī, atha kho rathasambhāranagarāvayavakadalikkhandhavibhāgānupassako viya yathākkamaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgakesādibhūtupādāyasamūhānupassī evā’’ti dassanatthaṃ kataṃ. Tathā hettha yathāvuttadhammasamūhavinimutto itthipurisādiko, añño vā koci dhammo na dissati, yathāvuttadhammasamūhamatteyeva pana bālā tathā tathā subhādito ca micchābhinivesaṃ karonti, ayaṃ pana yogī tattha kāyānupassī eva aniccadukkhaanattāsubhānupassī evāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yvāyaṃ mahāsatipaṭṭhāne assāsapassāsādiko cuddasavidho kāyo vutto, tassa sabbassa imasmiṃyeva kāye anupassanato ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti evamādināpi attho daṭṭhabbo.
“住”是指活动:在四种威仪中,用一种威仪打断由另一种威仪带来的身体不适,让自身不至于倒下,保持并持续下去,这就是它的意思。“于外身”是指在别人的身体上。“于内外身”是指有时在自身、有时在别人的身体上。因为有时在内外身上,身随观也能在同一刹那生起,但这里说的是熟练于业处的人前后交替活动的情形。“炽然”是指以摄持身体的精进而具足精进。因为精进能烧尽烦恼,所以称为“炽然”,而他有这种精进,因此称为“炽然”。“正知”是指具备摄持身的正知。“具念”是指具备摄持身的念。然而,由于此修行者以念摄取所缘、以慧随观,并以精进而不中途停顿,因此应当知道:为了显示借由哪些法的威力使念处得以成就,故说“炽然、正知、具念”。巴利
Viharatīti iriyati, catūsu iriyāpathesu ekenāgataṃ sarīrabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā apatamānaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati, pavattetīti attho. Bahiddhā kāyeti parassa kāye. Ajjhattabahiddhā kāyeti kālena attano, kālena parassa kāye. Kālena hi ajjhattabahiddhākāyesupi ekasmiṃ khaṇe kāyānupassanā uppajjati, paguṇakammaṭṭhānassa pana aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakālo ettha kathito. Ātāpīti kāyapariggāhakavīriyena vīriyavā. So hi yasmā kilesānaṃ ātāpanato ātāpo vuccati vīriyaṃ, so cassa atthi, tasmā ātāpīti vuccati. Sampajānoti kāyapariggāhakena sampajaññena samannāgato. Satimāti kāyapariggāhikāya satiyā samannāgato. Ayaṃ pana yasmā satiyā ārammaṇaṃ pariggahetvā paññāya anupassati, vīriyena ca antarā vosānaṃ nāpajjati, tasmā yesaṃ dhammānaṃ ānubhāvena taṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ sampajjati, tesaṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ātāpī sampajāno satimā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
这样,先说明了身随观念处以及与之相应的组成部分,现在为了说明断除的部分,所以说“应当调伏世间的贪欲与忧恼”。其中,“应当调伏”是指以分断调伏或以镇伏调伏来调伏。“世间”是指前面所说的有内在等区别的身体,这个身体正是以坏灭与变坏之义而称为世间。不过在《分别》中,因为色身上被断除的贪欲等,在受等上面也同样被断除,所以说五取蕴就是“世间”。在这个世间中,应当调伏被称为贪欲与忧恼的欲贪和嗔恚,这就是这句话的意思。又应当知道,通过显示这两种强力法在诸盖中的断除,其余诸盖的断除也就一并被说明了。特别地,这里通过调伏贪欲与忧恼,依次说明了断除以身体的圆满与失坏为根源的贪著与抗拒、断除对自我的贪爱与对不净修法的不乐、以及断除把不存在的功德说成存在和去除实有的过失;由此,显示了瑜伽修行者在修行中所产生的果,以及修行能力。巴利
Iti kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, sampayogaṅgañca dassetvā idāni pahānaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha vineyyāti tadaṅgavinayena vā vikkhambhanavinayena vā vinayitvā. Loketi yvāyaṃ ajjhattādibhedo kāyo vutto, sveva idha lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko nāma. Vibhaṅge pana yasmā rūpakāye pahīnaabhijjhādayo vedanādīsupi pahīyanti eva, tasmā pañcapi upādānakkhandhā ‘‘loko’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ loke abhijjhādomanassasaṅkhātaṃ kāmacchandabyāpādaṃ vineyyāti sambandho. Imassa ca nīvaraṇesu balavadhammadvayassa pahānadassanena sesanīvaraṇānampi pahānaṃ vuttaṃyevāti veditabbaṃ. Visesena cettha abhijjhādomanassavinayena yathākkamaṃ kāyasampattivipattimūlānaṃ anurodhavirodhānaṃ, attaabhiratitadasubhākārādibhāvanānabhiratīnaṃ, abhūtaguṇapakkhepabhūtadosāpanayanānañca pahānaṃ vuttaṃ, tena yogāvacarassa yogānubhāvanibbattaphalaṃ, yogasamatthatā ca dīpitā hoti.
在“于内受”等句中,“内”等词也应当按前面所说的方式来理解。不过在这里,“受”指的是三种世间受,心和法也是这样,它们的详细分类会在《分别》的理路中显现出来。这里只需要说明这样的理路:怎样随观受等而成为受随观者。也就是说,在诸受中,乐受应当随观为苦,苦受应当随观为刺,其余的受应当随观为无常。正如所说:巴利
Ajjhattaṃ vedanāsūtiādīsupi ajjhattādīni vuttanayena veditabbāni. Ettha pana vedanāti tisso vedanā lokiyā, tathā cittaṃ, dhammā ca, tesaṃ vibhāgo vibhaṅganaye āvi bhavissati. Kevalaṃ panettha yathā vedanādayo anupassanto vedanādianupassī nāma hoti, so nayo dassetabbo. Seyyathidaṃ – vedanāsu tāva sukhā vedanā dukkhato, dukkhā sallato, itarā ca aniccato anupassitabbā. Yathāha –
“ 凡是把乐看成苦,把苦看成刺的人,
他把不苦不乐、寂静的它看作无常。”巴利
‘‘Yo sukhaṃ dukkhato adda, dukkhamaddakkhi sallato; Adukkhamasukhaṃ santaṃ, addakkhi naṃ aniccato’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.253; itivu. 53).
一切受都应该以苦的角度来观察,因为经中说:“无论什么感受,我都说它是苦。”这样观察的人,无论是依照无常等七种随观来观察,还是去审察“谁在感受这个受?这个受是谁的?这个受因为什么而生起?”然后观察到“并没有任何众生之类在感受,这个受也不属于任何众生之类,只是依靠处所、所缘等因缘,这个受才生起”——这样的人就叫做受随观者。或者,在乐受等生起的当下,由于苦受等不可能同时存在,于是观察到“无常、不稳固、会变坏”——这样观察的人也叫做受随观者。按照同样的方法,遵循巴利经典的思路,对其余的心和法的观察方式也应该了解。特别要指出的是,在这里,对心以无常的方式观察,对法以无我的方式观察,这样观察的人就叫做心随观者和法随观者。其余部分很容易理解。以上就是这里的词义解释。巴利
Sabbā eva etā dukkhato anupassitabbā ‘‘yaṃ kiñci vedayitaṃ, taṃ dukkhasminti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.259) vacanato. Evaṃ anupassanto pana aniccādisattānupassanāvasena vā anupassantopi ‘‘imaṃ vedanaṃ ko vedayati, kassāyaṃ vedanā, kiṃ kāraṇāyaṃ vedanā’’ti upaparikkhitvā ‘‘na koci sattādiko vedayati, na kesañci sattādīnaṃ vedanā, vatthārammaṇādikāraṇā panāyaṃ vedanā uppajjatī’’ti anupassantopi vedanānupassī nāma hoti. Atha vā sukhādīnaṃ uppattikkhaṇe dukkhādīnaṃ asambhavā aniccā addhuvā vipariṇāmadhammāti evaṃ vā anupassanto vedanānupassī nāma hoti. Imināva nayena pāḷinayānusārena sesacittadhammānampi anupassanākāro veditabbo. Visesato panettha cittesu aniccatāvasena, dhammesu anattatāvasena ca anupassanto cittānupassī, dhammānupassī ca nāma hotīti veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
不过在这里并没有法的区分。从皈依的角度来说,念只有一个;只是从所缘的角度,才说为“四念处”。巴利
Dhammabhedo panettha natthi, saraṇavasena ca ekāva sati ārammaṇavasena ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’ti vuttāti.
按照《分别论》的论述方式,在经分别里,先说第一念处:就内身、外身、内外身,以头发等身体组成部分为所缘来详细说明。同样地,第二念处是就内受等各类受,各各按有味与无味,依乐受、苦受、不苦不乐受各有两种来详细说明;第三念处是依有贪与离贪、有嗔与离嗔、有痴与离痴、收摄与散乱、广大与不广大、有上与无上、得定与不得定、解脱与不解脱这十六种差别来了知心,从而详细说明;第四念处则是依五盖和七觉支的生起与不生起、生起与断除、已断除与不再生起、修习与圆满之因,以及依禅定,来详细说明。这就是经分别的方法。巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha suttantabhājanīye tāva ajjhattabahiddhātadubhayakāye kesādikoṭṭhāsabhāvanāvasena paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vitthāritaṃ. Tathā ajjhattādīsu paccekaṃ sāmisanirāmisavasena duvidhānaṃ sukhadukkhaadukkhamasukhavedanānaṃ vasena dutiyaṃ, sarāgavītarāgasadosavītadosasamohavītamohasaṃkhittavikkhittamahaggataamahaggatasauttarānuttarasamāhitāsamāhitavimuttāvimuttabhedato soḷasavidhehi cittapajānanavasena tatiyaṃ, pañcanīvaraṇānaṃ, sattabojjhaṅgānañca sambhavāsambhavauppādapahānapahīnānuppattibhāvanāpāripūrihetujjhānavasena catutthaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ vitthāritaṃ. Ayaṃ suttantabhājanīyanayo.
不过在阿毗达摩分别里,先列出“四念处。在此,比丘于身随观身而住,于受……于法随观法而住”这样的论母之后,在《法集论》所说方式的广释中,对八种出世间心,就只以与它们相应的念来详细分别。巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīye pana tāva ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā. Idha bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati vedanāsu…pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharatī’’ti (vibha. 380) evaṃ mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ vuttanayassa vitthāresu aṭṭhasu lokuttaracittesu sampayuttasativaseneva vitthārato vibhattā.
在问答的理路中,对四念处也是按“几种是善……略……几种是无诤”来分别的:可能是善,也可能是无记……略……只是无所执取、非所执取,只是无杂染、非有杂染……略……只是不可见、无障碍。不是因,只是无因……略……是无上、只是无诤。这是仅按出世间来分别的。因为正自觉者在经分别里,说的是世间与出世间混合的四念处;但在论分别和问答里,只说出世间。而在这些四念处中,世间念处只能在不同的心里生起,因为是用一个心提起身,用另一个心提起受等。出世间念处则是在道刹那的同一个心里就具足四种。因为在道心的一个刹那,以涅槃为所缘,同一个念由于能断除对身等所起的净、乐、常、我的颠倒,以成就四种作用的缘故,而得到四个名称。这就是这里的分别理路。巴利
Pañhāpucchakanayepi catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ kati kusalā…pe… kati araṇā? Siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā…pe… anupādinnaanupādāniyāva, asaṃkiliṭṭhaasaṃkilesikāva…pe… anidassanaappaṭighāva. Na hetū ahetukāva…pe… anuttarā araṇāvāti lokuttaravaseneva vibhattā. Sammāsambuddhena hi suttantabhājanīyasmiññeva lokiyalokuttaramissakā satipaṭṭhānā kathitā, abhidhammabhājanīyapañhāpucchakesu pana lokuttarāyeva. Tesu ca lokiyā nānācittesu eva labbhanti. Aññeneva hi cittena kāyaṃ paggaṇhanti, aññena vedanādayoti. Lokuttarā pana cattāropi maggakkhaṇe ekacitteyeva labbhanti. Ekasmiñhi maggacittakkhaṇe ārammaṇato nibbānārammaṇā ekāva sati kāyādīsu subhasukhaniccaattavipallāsasamucchedakatāya catukiccasādhanaṭṭhena cattāripi nāmāni labhatīti ayamettha vibhaṅganayo.
于四念处依次第,无减无增亦复然;
当知离巴利之趣,欲得善巧当于此中求。巴利
Kamato satipaṭṭhāne, anūnādhikatopi ca; Pāḷimuttanayo ñeyyo, tattha kosallamicchatā.
在这里,先说次第:这一段本身也是按说法次第来的,而且那个次第也是按明显与不明显来说的。因为在这些念处当中,色业处是明显的,所以先说身随观。接下来是无色业处。在那里,体验所缘时生起的受是明显的,所以紧接着说受随观;了知所缘的识是明显的,所以接下来是心随观;当心变得明显时,依止于心的那些微细法也会变得明显,所以最后说法随观。这就是这里所说的次第。巴利
Tattha kamato tāva ayampi desanākkamova, sopi pākaṭāpākaṭavasena vutto. Imāsu hi rūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭanti paṭhamaṃ kāyānupassanā vuttā. Tato arūpakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tatthāpi ārammaṇaṃ anubhavantī uppajjamānā vedanā pākaṭāti anantarā vedanānupassanā, tato ārammaṇaṃ vijānantaṃ viññāṇaṃ pākaṭanti cittānupassanā, citte pākaṭe tannissitā sukhumāpi dhammā pākaṭā hontīti ante dhammānupassanā vuttā. Ayaṃ tāvettha kamo.
关于“不多不少”:那么,这里世尊为什么只说四个念处,既不多也不少呢?这是依照净化之道,针对贪行者、见行者、止乘者和观乘者,按他们根性迟钝或锐利而分成两类来说的。因为对根性迟钝的贪行者来说,粗显的身随观念处是净化之道;对根性锐利的来说,微细的受随观念处是净化之道。对根性迟钝的见行者来说,不太细密分别的心随观念处是净化之道;对根性锐利的来说,极为细密分别的法随观念处是净化之道。对根性迟钝的止乘者来说,不费力就能证得所缘相的第一念处是净化之道;对根性锐利的来说,第二念处是净化之道。对根性迟钝的观乘者来说,第三念处是净化之道;对根性锐利的来说,第四念处是净化之道。就这样,根据所化众生的意乐而说了四种。或者,为了断除净、乐、常、我这四种颠倒,为了断除四暴流、四轭、四漏、四缚、四取、四非行,也为了遍知四种食,才只说四种,不多不少。这就是这里“不多不少”的意思。应当这样了知论藏之外的解释方法。巴利
Anūnādhikatoti ettha pana kasmā bhagavatā cattārova satipaṭṭhānā vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti? Taṇhācaritadiṭṭhicaritasamathayānikavipassanāyānikānaṃ mandatikkhavasena dvidhā pavattānaṃ visuddhimaggavasena. Mandassa hi taṇhācaritassa oḷārikaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa sukhumaṃ vedanānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, diṭṭhicaritassāpi mandassa nātippabhedagataṃ cittānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, tikkhassa atippabhedagataṃ dhammānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo. Samathayānikassa ca mandassa akicchena adhigantabbanimittaṃ paṭhamaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ visuddhimaggo, tikkhassa dutiyaṃ, vipassanāyānikassāpi mandassa tatiyaṃ, tikkhassa catutthaṃ visuddhimaggoti veneyyajjhāsayato cattāro vuttā. Subhasukhaniccaattabhāvavipallāsappahānatthaṃ vā caturoghayogāsavaganthaupādānaagatippahānatthampi catubbidhāhārapariññatthañca cattārova vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti ayamettha anūnādhikatā. Evaṃ pāḷimuttanayo ñeyyo.
正勤分别论母义释巴利
Sammappadhānavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于正勤分别论母的含义,先从义理上说:正勤就是作为因的勤、作为方法的勤。因为如理地精勤,所以是最上的勤,也就是精进力,意思是精进努力。这里说的比丘,是指在这教法中修行的人。未生,就是还没有产生。恶,就是低劣。不善法,就是从不善巧所生起的法。为令不生,就是为了不让它产生。生起欲,就是生起、引发那种称为想要去做的善欲。努力,就是付出行动、奋力去做。发勤精进,就是做出身体和心方面的精进。策励心,就是用与彼俱生的精进举起心。勤,就是作勤精进。又这四个词应当依次与精进的习近、修习、多作、恒作相应配合。巴利
Sammappadhānavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – sammappadhānāti kāraṇappadhānā upāyappadhānā. Yoniso padahanato paramaṃ dhānaṃ padhānaṃ, padhānavīriyānīti attho. Idha bhikkhūti imasmiṃ sāsane paṭipannako bhikkhu. Anuppannānanti anibbattānaṃ. Pāpakānanti lāmakānaṃ. Akusalānaṃ dhammānanti akosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Anuppādāyāti na uppādanatthāya. Chandaṃ janetīti kattukamyatāsaṅkhātaṃ kusalacchandaṃ janeti uppādeti. Vāyamatīti payogaṃ parakkamaṃ karoti. Vīriyaṃ ārabhatīti kāyikacetasikavīriyaṃ karoti. Cittaṃ paggaṇhātīti teneva sahajātavīriyena cittaṃ ukkhipati. Padahatīti padhānavīriyaṃ karoti. Paṭipāṭiyā panetāni cattāripi padāni vīriyasseva āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammasātaccakiriyāhi yojetabbāni.
“已生”是指已经进入不能被说成“未生”的状态。“为了断除”是为了舍弃。“未生之善法”是指还没有产生、由善巧所生的法。“为了生起”是为了令其产生。“已生”是指已经产生的。“为了住立”是为了保持。“为了不忘失”是为了不遗失。“为了倍复增长”是为了再三地生起。“为了广大”是为了变得广大。“为了修习”是为了增长。“为了圆满”是为了完全充满。剩下的按文句本身就很浅显易懂。巴利
Uppannānanti anuppannāti avattabbataṃ āpannānaṃ. Pahānāyāti pajahanatthāya. Anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānanti anibbattānaṃ kosallasambhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ. Uppādāyāti uppādanatthāya. Uppannānanti nibbattānaṃ. Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthāya. Asammosāyāti anassanatthaṃ. Bhiyyobhāvāyāti punappunaṃ bhavanāya. Vepullāyāti vipulabhāvāya. Bhāvanāyāti vaḍḍhiyā. Pāripūriyāti paripūraṇatthāya. Sesaṃ padato uttānameva.
不过,从含义上说,这里“未生起的恶”等句中,应当知道烦恼的未生起,要么是因为没有现行,要么是因为所缘未曾被体验过。否则,在无始轮回中,根本不存在所谓“未生起的不善法”。但在善法方面,则有以对三宝的净信、观等还灭亲依止善等为方式的未生起善法。假如那些善法过去也曾生起过,那么一切众生在此之前就都应该已经漏尽,因为那些善法是决定能令漏尽现起的。其中,有一类众生在行仪与经教、头陀支、定、观、新业处等某一种上恒常精勤、努力、策励,又因为从梵天界而来,所以在烦恼方面未曾得到熏习,烦恼便不现行;但后来他舍弃了行仪与经教等,变得懈怠,又依止恶知识等而在烦恼方面得到熏习,于是由于不如理作意和失念,烦恼便生起。这样,首先应当知道烦恼的未生起是因没有现行。巴利
Atthato panettha ‘‘anuppannānaṃ pāpakāna’’ntiādīsu asamudācāravasena vā ananubhūtārammaṇavasena vā kilesānaṃ anuppatti veditabbā. Aññathā hi anamatagge saṃsāre anuppannā akusaladhammā nāma natthi. Kusaladhammesu pana ratanattayappasādavipassanādivivaṭṭūpanissayakusalādivasena anuppannāpi atthi. Tesampi uppannapubbatte sati sabbasattānaṃ ito pubbe ca āsavakkhayappasaṅgato. Ekantappavattasādhakā tesaṃ. Tattha ekaccassa vattaganthadhutaṅgasamādhivipassanānavakammesu aññatarasmiṃ niccappayuttassa, ghaṭato, vāyamato ca brahmalokā āgatattā bhavavasena kilesesu aladdhāsevanassa sattassa kilesā na samudācaranti, aparabhāge panassa vattādīni vissajjetvā kusītassa carato ceva akalyāṇamittādito kilesesu laddhāsevanassa ca ayonisomanasikāraṃ, sativossaggañca āgamma uppajjanti. Evaṃ tāva asamudācāravasena kilesānaṃ anuppatti veditabbā.
另外,有些人在那一个生命形态中,得到了以前从未经历过的、属于天界等各种类别的可爱所缘,然后因为对那个所缘不如理作意、忘失正念,烦恼就生起了;如果得不到这样的所缘,就应该知道,烦恼是因为所缘从未被经历过而不生起。巴利
Ekaccassa pana tasmiṃ attabhāve ananubhūtapubbaṃ dibbādibhedaṃ manāpiyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ labhitvā tattha ayonisomanasikārasativossagge āgamma kilesā uppajjanti, alabhitvā evaṃ ananubhūtārammaṇavasena kilesānaṃ anuppatti veditabbā.
对于“已生的恶”这句话,这里“已生”有四种:按正在生起、已生已去、已作机会、已得地来分。它们的具体区分在《已生三法》里已经说过了。另外还有四种“已生”:按现行、已被执取为所缘、未被镇伏、未被断除来分。其中,只有当下正在生起的,才叫“现行已生”。其余的都很容易理解。不过,在这里这些“已生”当中,所谓正在生起、已生已去、已作机会、现行这四种“已生”,并不是道等所能断除的;因此,这里是针对被称为已得地、已被执取为所缘、未被镇伏、未被断除的这四种“已生”,才说“为了断除已生的恶”。巴利
‘‘Uppannānaṃ pāpakāna’’nti ettha pana catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ vattamānabhūtāpagataokāsakatabhūmiladdhavasena, tesaṃ vibhāgo uppannattike vuttova. Aparampi catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ samudācāraārammaṇādhiggahitaavikkhambhitaasamugghātitavasena. Tattha sampati vattamānaṃyeva samudācāruppannaṃ nāma. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva. Yasmā panettha imesu uppannesu vattamānabhūtāpagataokāsakatasamudācārasaṅkhātaṃ catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ na maggādivajjhaṃ, tasmā bhūmiladdhaārammaṇādhiggahitaasamugghātitasaṅkhātaṃ catubbidhaṃ uppannaṃ sandhāyettha ‘‘uppannānaṃ pāpakānaṃ pahānāyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
那么,在道刹那,怎么会有为了尚未生起的善法生起而付出的精进呢?又怎么会有为了已生起的善法保持不退而付出的精进呢?其实精进就在道本身的运作之中。因为道正在运作时,由于它以前从未生起过,所以被称为“未生”;而它的这种运作,本身就是“住立”。这就是这里逐词解释的含义。巴利
Kathaṃ pana maggakkhaṇe anuppannānaṃ kusalānaṃ uppādāya vāyāmo hoti, kathañca uppannānaṃ ṭhitiyāti? Maggappavattiyā eva. Maggo hi pavattamāno pubbe anuppannapubbattā anuppanno nāma vuccati. Yā cassa pavatti, ayameva ṭhiti nāmāti ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
不过,这里也是把同一个精进按作用的不同,说成四种,这就是此处不依经而依论所作的判定。巴利
Dhammabhedo panetthāpi ekasseva vīriyassa kiccabhedato catudhā vuttāti ayamettha pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
从分别方式来看,在经分别里,四正勤先按与世间和出世间善心相应的精进力,连同不善等词条,做了详细分别。但在阿毗达摩分别的问难部分,它们只按与出世间善心相应来分别,没有收入与果心相应的。正因如此,在问难中才说“唯是善,唯是能感果报之法,唯是减损之行,唯是有学”等等。这里其余的判定,应依照念处中所述的方式来理解。巴利
Vibhaṅganayato pana suttantabhājanīye tāva cattāro sammappadhānā lokiyalokuttarakusalacittasampayuttavīriyavasena akusalādipadehi saddhiṃ vitthārato vibhattā. Abhidhammabhājanīyapañhāpucchakesu panete lokuttarakusalacittasampayuttavaseneva vibhattā, phalacittasampayuttā pana na gahitā. Teneva pañhāpucchake ‘‘kusalā eva, vipākadhammadhammā eva, apacayagāminova, sekhāvā’’tiādinā vuttā. Seso panettha vinicchayo satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayānusārena veditabbo.
神足分别论母的义释巴利
Iddhipādavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
在《神足分别论母》中,说到“四神足”时,这里的“ijjhatī”就是成就,意思是成就、圆满、产生。成就本身就是足,所以叫神足,意思是神足这一部分。或者说,众生依靠它而成就、增长、达到殊胜,所以叫成就;依靠它而到达,所以叫足,意思是依止和证得的方法。成就的足,就是神足。说到“具足欲定勤行”时:这里的“欲定”,就是以欲为因,或者以欲为增上而得到的定;它说的正是这样一种定——以“想要去做”的欲作为主导而证得。“勤行”就是作为勤的诸行;它说的正是能完成四种作用的四正勤精进。“具足”就是具备那欲定和勤行。说到“神足”时,按照上面所说的含义,它指的正是上述那些以“成就”为名、与近行定等善心相应的欲、定、勤行;另外,也指以依止之义作为“足”的其他心和心所聚。“修习”就是增长,意思是在自己的相续中反复生起。按照这个方法,其余几项的含义也应该这样理解。其中,“观”就是慧。其余部分根据文句本身就很容易理解。巴利
Iddhipādavibhaṅgamātikāya pana cattāro iddhipādāti ettha ijjhatīti iddhi, samijjhati nipphajjatīti attho, iddhi eva pādo iddhipādo, iddhikoṭṭhāsoti attho. Ijjhanti vā etāya sattā iddhā vuddhā ukkaṃsagatā hontītipi iddhi, pajjanti etenāti pādo, patiṭṭhā adhigamūpāyoti attho, iddhiyā pādo iddhipādo. Chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārasamannāgatanti ettha chandahetuko, chandādhiko vā samādhi chandasamādhi, kattukamyatāchandaṃ adhipatiṃ karitvā paṭiladdhasamādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Padhānabhūtā saṅkhārā padhānasaṅkhārā, catukiccasādhakassa sammappadhānavīriyassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samannāgatanti tena chandasamādhinā, padhānasaṅkhārena ca upetaṃ. Iddhipādanti yathāvuttatthena ‘‘iddhī’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatānaṃ upacārajjhānādikusalacittasampayuttānaṃ chandasamādhipadhānasaṅkhārānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena pādabhūtasesacittacetasikarāsiṃ. Bhāvetīti vaḍḍheti, attano santāne punappunaṃ janetīti attho. Iminā nayena sesesupi attho veditabbo. Tattha vīmaṃsāti paññā. Sesaṃ padato suviññeyyameva.
从义理上说,这里讲的是什么?讲的是四位比丘达到顶峰的业处。就像四位大臣的儿子,都想要得到官位而各自努力:一个靠承事侍奉,一个靠勇武,一个靠出身门第,一个靠谋略之力。他们就这样各自凭自己的因缘讨得国王欢心,从而获得官位。同样,比丘们也以欲、精进、心、观这四者中的某一个作为首要的重任、作为前导,而成为出世间的法的生起者。在这里,欲、定、勤行这三法,既是神足,也是神足之足;其余与它们相应的四蕴则只是神足之足。应当如此理解:在其余与增上相应的心法中,应知为神足之足。巴利
Atthato panettha tena kiṃ kathitaṃ? Catunnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ matthakappattaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathitaṃ. Yathā hi catūsu amaccaputtesu ṭhānantaraṃ patthetvā vicarantesu eko upaṭṭhānena, eko sūrabhāvena, eko jātisampattiyā, eko mantabalenāti evaṃ te paccekakāraṇena rājānaṃ ārādhetvā ṭhānantaraṃ pāpuṇanti, evaṃ bhikkhūpi chandavīriyacittavīmaṃsāsu ekekaṃ jeṭṭhaṃ dhuraṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā lokuttaradhammanibbattakā honti. Ettha ca chando samādhi padhānasaṅkhāroti tayo dhammā iddhīpi honti iddhipādāpi, sesā pana sampayuttā cattāro khandhā iddhipādā eva. Evaṃ sesādhipatiyuttacittesupi iddhipādāti veditabbā.
另外,在禅修与观慧当中,前面的准备阶段就是神足的基础;真正获得的结果,就是神足。初禅等的前期准备工作,叫做神足的基础;初禅等本身,叫做神足。初道等的前期观慧,叫做神足的基础;初道等本身,叫做神足。也可以从获得的角度来说明:初禅等和初道等,叫做神足的基础;第二禅等和第二道等,叫做神足。以上就是这里词语含义的要点。巴利
Apica jhānavipassanāsu pubbabhāgo iddhipādo. Yo paṭilābho, sā iddhi. Paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ hi pubbabhāgaparikammāni iddhipādo nāma, paṭhamajjhānādayo iddhi nāma. Paṭhamamaggādīnaṃ pubbabhāgavipassanā iddhipādo nāma, paṭhamamaggādayo iddhi nāma. Paṭilābhavasenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati. Paṭhamajjhānādayo hi paṭhamamaggādayo ca iddhipādo nāma, dutiyajjhānādayo, dutiyamaggādayo ca iddhi nāmāti ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
这里法的分类,正依分别的方式就会很清楚。因为在经分别里,先说了欲等词的分別之后,最后说:“神足就是如是者的受蕴……中略……识蕴。修习神足,就是亲近、修习、多作这些法,因此称为修习神足。”这样一来,一切世间和出世间的法都被说成是神足。巴利
Dhammabhedo panettha vibhaṅganayeneva pākaṭo bhavissati. Tattha hi suttantabhājanīye tāva chandādīnaṃ padānaṃ vibhaṅgaṃ vatvā ante ‘‘iddhipādoti tathābhūtassa vedanākkhandho…pe… viññāṇakkhandho. Iddhipādaṃ bhāvetīti te dhamme āsevati bhāveti bahulīkaroti, tena vuccati iddhipādaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (vibha. 434) evaṃ sabbe lokiyalokuttaradhammā iddhipādoti vuttā.
不过在《阿毗达摩分别》里,先把“欲”等词分别开来讲,最后说:“神足就是如此状态下的触……乃至……策励、不散乱。”这样把一切出世间善法都说成是神足之后,又安立论母:“欲神足、精进神足、心神足、观神足”,然后说:“其中,什么是欲神足?这里,比丘在某个时候修习出世间禅……乃至……在那个时侯的欲、欲性……乃至……这叫作欲神足”等等,由此说明:只有与出世间善心相应的欲、精进、心、观才是神足。同样,在问分中也说:只是善的,只是无见无对的;观神足是因,其余的不是因……乃至……心神足不可说,其余的是与心相应……乃至……只是无上的,只是无诤的。这里剩下的内容和念处里所说的相同。至于巴利之外的义理,在这里也没有引述。巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīye pana chandādīni padāni vibhajitvā ante ‘‘iddhipādoti tathābhūtassa phasso…pe… paggāho avikkhepo’’ti (vibha. 447) evaṃ sabbe lokuttarakusaladhammā iddhipādāti vatvā puna ‘‘chandiddhipādo vīriyiddhipādo cittiddhipādo vīmaṃsiddhipādo’’ti (vibha. 457) mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘tattha katamo chandiddhipādo? Idha bhikkhu yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ jhānaṃ bhāveti…pe… yo tasmiṃ samaye chando chandikatā…pe… ayaṃ vuccati chandiddhipādo’’tiādinā lokuttarakusalacittasampayuttachandavīriyacittavīmaṃsā eva iddhipādāti vuttā. Tathā pañhāpucchakepi kusalā eva, anidassanaappaṭighā eva, vīmaṃsiddhipādo hetu, sesā na hetū…pe… cittiddhipādo na vattabbo, sesā cittasampayuttā…pe… anuttarāva, araṇāvāti. Sesamettha satipaṭṭhāne vuttasadisameva. Pāḷimuttakanayo panetthāpi na uddhaṭoti.
觉支分别论母的义释巴利
Bojjhaṅgavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
在《觉支分别》的论母中,先就含义来说——“七觉支”这里,觉的支分,或者觉者的支分,就是觉支。这段话要表达的是:圣弟子依靠在道的那一刹那生起的、能对治昏沉和掉举等种种障碍的、由念和择法等七种法组成的法聚而觉悟,从烦恼的沉睡中醒来,或者通达诸谛;这个被称为“法聚”的觉,它的支分就是觉支,就像禅支、道支一样。再者,那位依照上述方式、通过这个法聚而觉悟的圣弟子被称为“觉者”,这位觉者的支分就是觉支,就像军队的支分、车乘的支分等一样。此外,也应该按照《无碍解道》的方法,比如“导向觉悟所以是觉支”等,来理解觉支的含义。殊胜的、美好的觉支就是正觉支;念本身就是正觉支,所以是念觉支。其余各支也是这样。其中,择法就是从不常等角度去审察、思择、了知诸法,或者众生通过它来择法,这就是智慧。舍就是对诸法保持平等心,因为不偏于减损也不偏于增益,以审虑的方式处于中立,这就是舍,也就是中舍性。因为舍觉支的特相就是审虑。其余的内容很容易理解。以上就是这里的词义。这里关于法的分类也很容易理解。巴利
Bojjhaṅgavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – satta bojjhaṅgāti ettha bodhiyā, bodhissa vā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yāya eva dhammasāmaggiyā maggakkhaṇe uppajjamānāya līnuddhaccādianekesaṃ upaddavānaṃ paṭipakkhabhūtāya satidhammavicayādisattavidhāya dhammasāmaggiyā ariyasāvako bujjhati, kilesaniddāya uṭṭhahati, saccāni vā paṭivijjhati, tassā dhammasāmaggisaṅkhātāya bodhiyā aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā jhānaṅgamaggaṅgāni viya. Yo panesa yathāvuttappakārāya etāya dhammasāmaggiyā bujjhatīti katvā ariyasāvako ‘‘bodhī’’ti vuccati, tassa bodhissa aṅgāti bojjhaṅgā senaṅgarathaṅgādayo viya. Apica ‘‘bodhāya saṃvattantīti bojjhaṅgā’’tiādinā paṭisambhidānayenāpi bojjhaṅgattho veditabbo. Pasattho, sundaro vā bojjhaṅgo sambojjhaṅgo, satiyeva sambojjhaṅgo satisambojjhaṅgo. Evaṃ sesesupi. Tattha dhamme vicināti aniccādito parivīmaṃsati jānāti, dhamme vā etena sattā vicinantīti dhammavicayo, paññā. Upekkhati samarasānaṃ dhammānaṃ hāpanavaḍḍhane avāvaṭatāya paṭisaṅkhānākārena majjhattā hotīti upekkhā, tatramajjhattatā. Paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇo hi upekkhāsambojjhaṅgoti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho. Dhammabhedopettha suviññeyyova.
从分别法来看,在这里的经分别中,首先按世间与出世间来分别;在其余部分中,则按出世间善的果报来分别。但在问分中则说:可能是善,也可能是无记;喜觉支只与乐受相应,其余诸支则依两种方式……喜觉支只与乐俱行,其余诸支则可依三种方式;无见无对;择法觉支是因,其余诸支不是因……只属于色界,只属于无诤。其余内容与念处中所说的方法相同。这就是此处的分别法。巴利
Vibhaṅganayato panettha suttantabhājanīye tāva lokiyalokuttaravasena sesesu lokuttarakusalavipākavasena vibhattā. Pañhāpucchake pana siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, pītisambojjhaṅgo sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttova, sesā dvīhi…pe… pītisambojjhaṅgo sukhasahagatova, sesā tidhāpi, anidassanaappaṭighā, dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgo hetu, sesā na hetū…pe… rūpāvacarāva, araṇāvāti. Sesaṃ satipaṭṭhāne vuttanayameva. Ayamettha vibhaṅganayo.
依次第、依限量,依因与地之分别,
依远离,当知离巴利圣典之决断。巴利
Kamato tāvattato ca, hetubhūmivibhāgato; Vivekato ca viññeyyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,先说次第:这里的次第就是说法本身的次第。因为念觉支对一切觉支都有帮助,所以最先说念觉支。接着,一个安住在念中的人,会用智慧去抉择诸法;已经抉择了诸法的人,就会发起精进;已经发起精进的人,就会生起喜;心里有喜的人,身体和心都会变得轻安;身体轻安的人,就会感到快乐;感到快乐的人,心就会入定;心已入定的人,就能很好地以舍心旁观那心。因此,择法觉支等就按这个顺序依次宣说。这就是这里的次第。巴利
Tattha kamato tāva ayampi desanākkamova. Sabbesaṃ hi bojjhaṅgānaṃ upakārattā satisambojjhaṅgo paṭhamaṃ vutto, tato yasmā upaṭṭhitasatiko dhamme paññāya pavicināti, pavicitadhammo vīriyaṃ ārabhati, āraddhavīriyassa pīti uppajjati, pītimanassa kāyopi cittampi passambhati, passaddhakāyassa sukhino cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitacitto taṃ cittaṃ sādhukaṃ ajjhupekkhitā hoti, tasmā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo yathākkamaṃ vuttāti ayaṃ tāvettha kamo.
那么,为什么这里只说七支,不多不少呢?因为要对治昏沉和掉举,也因为它们遍及一切。这里,有三支觉支是对治昏沉的。就像经中所说:“比丘们,当心昏沉时,那时就适合修习择法觉支,适合修习精进……喜觉支。”有三支是对治掉举的。就像经中所说:“比丘们,当心掉举时,那时就适合修习轻安觉支,适合修习定……舍觉支。”而在这里,有一支就像用盐调味一切菜肴一样,在一切觉支中都是需要的。就像经中所说:“比丘们,我说念是遍及一切的。”这样,因为对治昏沉和掉举,也因为遍及一切,所以说只有七支。这就是关于数量的道理。巴利
Tāvattato pana kasmā te satteva vuttā, anūnā anadhikāti? Līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato, sabbattikato ca. Ettha hi tayo bojjhaṅgā līnassa paṭipakkhā. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmiṃ ca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriya…pe… pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Tayo uddhaccassa paṭipakkhā. Yathāha – ‘‘yasmiṃ ca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhi…pe… upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Eko panettha loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu sabbabojjhaṅgesu icchitabbo. Yathāha – ‘‘satiñca khvāhaṃ, bhikkhave, sabbatthikaṃ vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234). Evaṃ līnuddhaccapaṭipakkhato ca sabbatthikato ca satteva vuttāti ayaṃ tāvattato.
关于因与地的分别,这里先讲因的分别。
有四种法能帮助念觉支生起:念与正知、远离失念的人、亲近保持正念的人、内心倾向于念觉支。
同样,有七种法能帮助第二觉支(择法觉支)生起:多向人请教、清洁依处、调平衡诸根、远离智慧低劣的人、亲近有智慧的人、反复观察甚深智慧所行的境界、内心倾向于择法觉支。
其中,让内在和外在的身体以及衣钵等资具变得清净,就叫作清洁依处。
同样,有十一种法能帮助第三觉支(精进觉支)生起:观察恶趣的怖畏、观察(诸佛所行的)道路、观察法嗣的广大、观察导师(佛陀)的广大、观察出身族姓的广大、观察同修梵行者(僧团)的广大、看见(精进的)功德利益、恭敬对待钵食、远离懈怠的人、亲近已发起精进的人、内心倾向于精进觉支。
其中,反复观察“诸佛等所走过的道路,我也应当去走”,这叫观察道路。心想“我要让施主所布施的钵食产生大果报”,以此来调伏自己,这叫恭敬对待钵食。
同样,有十一种法能帮助第四觉支(喜觉支)生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念,这七种;远离粗涩的人、亲近柔和的人、反复观察能引发净信的经典、内心倾向于喜觉支。
同样,有七种法能帮助第五觉支(轻安觉支)生起:受用精细的食物、受用舒适的气候和姿势所带来的安乐、两种中舍的运用、远离身体躁动的人、亲近身体轻安的人、内心倾向于轻安觉支。
有十一种法能帮助第六觉支(定觉支)生起:清洁依处、调平衡诸根、善巧于相,以及在适当的时候对心进行策励、抑制、使欢喜、保持中舍,这四种;远离心未得定的人、亲近已得定的人,这两种;反复观察禅那与解脱、内心倾向于定觉支。
其中,善巧于取遍相等相,就叫作善巧于相。
有五种法能帮助第七觉支(舍觉支)生起:远离对有情和种种行(造作)执着的人、亲近对有情和种种行抱中庸态度的人,各两种;内心倾向于舍觉支。
以上是简略说明,详细内容应当从《迷惑冰消》的《分别论注》中获取。这就是此处关于因的分别。巴利
Hetubhūmivibhāgatoti ettha hetuvibhāgato tāva – cattāro satisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti satisampajaññaṃ muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanatā upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tathā satta dhammā dutiyassa paripucchakatā vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā paññavantapuggalasevanā gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ sarīraparikkhārabhūtānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ vatthuvisadakiriyā nāma. Tathā ekādasa dhammā tatiyassa apāyabhayagamanavīthidāyajjamahattasatthumahattajātimahattasabrahmacārimahattānaṃ paccavekkhaṇatā ānisaṃsadassāvitā piṇḍapātāpacāyanatā kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha ‘‘buddhādīhi gatamaggo mayā gantabbo’’ti paccavekkhaṇā vīthipaccavekkhaṇā nāma. ‘‘Dāyakehi dinnapiṇḍapātassa mahapphalataṃ sampādessāmī’’ti attānaṃ damanaṃ piṇḍapātāpacāyanaṃ nāma. Tathā ekādasa dhammā catutthassa buddhadhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatopasamānussatiyo satta, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā siniddhapuggalasevanatā pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tathā satta dhammā pañcamassa paṇītabhojanasevanatā, utusukhairiyāpathasukhasevanatā dve majjhattappayogatā sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā santakāyapuggalasevanatā tadadhimuttatāti. Ekādasa dhammā chaṭṭhassa vatthuvisadakiriyā indriyasamattapaṭipādanā nimittakusalatā samaye cittassa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanajjhupekkhanā catasso , asamāhitasamāhitapuggalānaṃ parivajjanasevanatā dve, jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā tadadhimuttatāti. Tattha kasiṇādinimittānaṃ uggahaṇakusalatā nimittakusalatā nāma. Pañca dhammā sattamassa sattasaṅkhārakelāyanamajjhattapuggalānaṃ parivajjanasevanatā dve dve, tadadhimuttatāti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana sammohavinodaniyā vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāya gahetabboti ayamettha hetuvibhāgo.
不过,从地的区分来看,这些觉支属于欲界,或者属于出世间。在欲界中,只有在强有力的观照等心里才能获得觉支,在其他欲界心里则得不到。但在出世间心里,则一切出世间心中都能获得。在色界和无色界心里,则完全得不到,因其非菩提分法。不过,有些长老认为,在作为观基础的遍处、不净、梵住禅那中也能列举出觉支,而注释师们并没有否定这种说法。因此,按照他们的见解,觉支也可以属于色界,但无论从哪种角度来说都不属于无色界。这就是这里关于地的区分。巴利
Bhūmivibhāgato panete kāmāvacarā, lokuttarā vā honti, kāmāvacaresu balavavipassanādīsu eva bojjhaṅgā labbhanti, na itaresu. Lokuttaresu pana sabbattha labbhanti, rūpāvacarārūpāvacaracittesu sabbathā na labbhanti abodhipakkhikattā. Keci pana therā vipassanāpādakesu kasiṇāsubhabrahmavihārajjhānesupi bojjhaṅge uddharanti, na ca te paṭisiddhā aṭṭhakathācariyehi, tasmā tesaṃ matena rūpāvacarāpi honti, na kenaci pariyāyena arūpāvacarāti ayamettha bhūmivibhāgo.
这里说的“远离”,是指远离的状态。这种远离有五种,分别是:彼分远离、镇伏远离、正断远离、安息远离、出离远离。彼分远离就是观;镇伏远离就是八种等至;正断远离就是道;安息远离就是果;出离远离就是舍离一切相的涅槃。其中,这些觉支依止于彼分远离、正断远离、安息远离和出离远离。具体来说,在观照的刹那,它们从作用上依止于彼分远离,从意向上依止于出离远离;在道的阶段,从作用上依止于正断远离,从所缘上依止于出离远离;在果的刹那,从作用上依止于安息远离,从所缘上也依止于出离远离。有些长老认为,在作为观足处的色界禅那的刹那,它们也依止于镇伏远离。所以,它们也依止于五种远离。以上就是关于远离的内容。巴利原文以外的抉择应如此了知。巴利
Vivekatoti ettha vivekoti vivittatā, svāyaṃ pañcavidho tadaṅgavikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭipassaddhinissaraṇavivekavasena. Tadaṅgavivekoti vipassanā, vikkhambhanavivekoti aṭṭha samāpattiyo, samucchedavivekoti maggo, paṭipassaddhivivekoti phalaṃ, nissaraṇavivekoti sabbanimittanissaṭaṃ nibbānaṃ. Tatrime tadaṅgasamucchedapaṭipassaddhinissaraṇavivekanissitā honti. Tathā hete vipassanākkhaṇe kiccato tadaṅgavivekanissitā, ajjhāsayato nissaraṇavivekanissitā. Maggakāle pana kiccato samucchedavivekanissitā, ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitā, phalakkhaṇe kiccato paṭipassaddhivivekanissitā. Ārammaṇato nissaraṇavivekanissitā ca honti. Kesañci therānaṃ mate vipassanāpādakarūpāvacarajjhānakkhaṇe vikkhambhanavivekanissitāvāti pañcavivekanissitāpi hontīti ayamettha viveko. Evaṃ viññeyyo pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
道支分别论母义释巴利
Maggaṅgavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于道支分别的论母,先从含义上说:所谓“圣”,是因为远离了各道所应断的烦恼,又能成就圣者的品质,所以叫圣;具有八支,所以叫八支道;被希求涅槃的人所寻求,或者它寻求涅槃,或者它灭除烦恼而前行,所以叫“道”。所谓“即此”,如果有人问“那是什么”,现在为了说明这个道就像四支组成的军队一样,只是各支的集合,离开了支就不存在,所以说“正见……乃至……正定”。其中,正确地看见,就是正见,也就是慧。正确地思惟、考虑,就是正思惟,也就是寻。其余的道支很容易理解。此后,法的分类和分别的方法,与在觉支中所说的相似。巴利
Maggaṅgavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – ariyoti taṃtaṃmaggavajjhakilesehi ārakattā , ariyabhāvakarattā ca ariyo, aṭṭha aṅgāni assāti aṭṭhaṅgiko, nibbānatthikehi maggīyati, nibbānaṃ vā maggati, kilese vā mārento gacchatīti maggo. Seyyathidanti so katamoti ce, idāni svāyaṃ maggo caturaṅginī viya senā aṅgamattameva hoti, aṅgavinimutto natthīti dassento ‘‘sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhī’’ti āha. Tattha sammā passatīti sammādiṭṭhi, paññā. Sammā saṅkappeti takketīti sammāsaṅkappo, vitakko. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Tato dhammabhedopi vibhaṅganayopi bojjhaṅgesu vuttasadiso.
不过在《分别论》的阿毗达摩分别里,则把除去三种远离(正语、正业、正命)的五支道也分别解说了。这是就五支的作用被特别强调、以及三种远离虽未明说而自然具足这一点来说的。但应当知道,由于不存在没有远离的出世间道,所以那(五支道)也是八支的。巴利
Abhidhammabhājanīye pana viratittayavajjito pañcaṅgikopi maggo vibhatto, tañca pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ kiccādhikataṃ, viratīnañca avuttasiddhataṃ sandhāya, virativajjitassa pana lokuttaramaggassa abhāvā sopi aṭṭhaṅgikovāti veditabbo.
在问分里也一样:正思惟只与乐受相应,其余道支则与两种受相应。正思惟是无寻唯伺,只与喜俱行、与乐俱行,不与舍俱行;其余道支则与喜、乐、舍三种都相应。正见是因,其余道支不是因,这就是差别所在。其余部分都相同。现在:巴利
Pañhāpucchakepi sammāsaṅkappo sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttova, sesā dvīhi. Sammāsaṅkappo avitakkavicāramatto, pītisahagato sukhasahagatova, na upekkhāsahagato, sesā tidhāpi. Sammādiṭṭhi hetu, sesā nahetūti ayaṃ viseso. Sesaṃ samameva. Idāni pana –
从次序的角度,从作用的差别,从地的差别与远离。
在道支当中,应当理解:这是脱离巴利的判定。巴利
Kamato kiccabhedato, bhūmibhedavivekato; Maggaṅgesu vijānīyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,先说顺序,这本身就是说法次第。世尊之所以首先宣说正见,是因为对于为证得涅槃而修行的人来说,正见像智慧之灯、智慧之剑,能破除无明的黑暗,带来很大利益。接着宣说正思惟,因为正思惟对如实照见的正见有很大帮助,就像金匠翻动金币的手一样。这正思惟对正见有帮助,对正语也同样有帮助。正如经中所说:“居士,先思考、审虑之后,才开口说话。”所以紧接着是正语。又因为人们用言语安排之后,才在世间从事各种事务,所以紧接着是正业。只有舍弃身、语两种恶行,圆满身、语两种善行的人,才能圆满以正命为第八支的戒,而不是别人能做到的,所以在正语、正业这两者之后宣说正命。为了显示“即使有了清净的见和戒,也不应就此满足,还要发起这份精进”,所以紧接着是正精进。为了显示即使已经发起精进,也应当在身体等各方面很好地安立正念,所以紧接着是正念。正念很好地安立之后,心才能专注在一个所缘上,所以紧接着宣说正定。这就是这里的顺序。巴利
Tattha kamato tāva ayampi desanākkamova. Bhagavatā hi nibbānādhigamāya paṭipannassa paññāpajjotapaññāsatthatāya avijjandhakāravidhamanato bahūpakārattā paṭhamaṃ sammādiṭṭhi desitā. Tato heraññikassa kahāpaṇaparivattakahattho viya yathāsabhāvadassanassa sammādiṭṭhiyā bahūpakārattā sammāsaṅkappo. Svāyaṃ yathā sammādiṭṭhiyā, evaṃ sammāvācāyapi upakārako. Yathāha ‘‘pubbe kho, gahapati, takketvā vicāretvā pacchā vācaṃ bhindatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.463), tasmā tadanantaraṃ sammāvācā. Yasmā pana vācāya saṃvidahitvā loke kammante payojenti, tasmā tadanantaraṃ sammākammanto. Kāyavacīduccaritaṃ pahāya ubhayasucaritaṃ pūrentasseva yasmā ājīvaṭṭhamakaṃ sīlaṃ pūrati, na itarassa, tasmā tadubhayānantaraṃ sammāājīvo vutto. Evaṃ ‘‘visuddhadiṭṭhisīlenāpi ettāvatā paritosaṃ akatvā idaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhitabba’’nti dassetuṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāvāyāmo. Āraddhavīriyenāpi kāyādīsu sati sūpaṭṭhitā kātabbāti dassanatthaṃ tadanantaraṃ sammāsati. Sūpaṭṭhitāya satiyā ekattārammaṇe cittaṃ samādhātuṃ sakkāti tadanantaraṃ sammāsamādhi vuttoti ayaṃ tāvettha kamo.
从作用来看,这每一支各有三种作用。比如正见,它一方面和其他与自身对立的烦恼一起断除邪见,一方面从所缘上亲证灭谛,一方面从不愚痴上通达其余诸谛。正思惟等也是如此,以断除邪思惟等各自对应的方式,随相应的情况来理解它们的作用。特别是这里,正思惟令俱生法朝向所缘,正语令执持,正业令生起,正命令净化,正精进令策励,正念令现前,正定令等持。这就是此处所说的作用。巴利
Kiccato panesaṃ ekekassa tīṇi tīṇi kiccāni, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi tāva aññehipi attano paccanīkakilesehi saddhiṃ micchādiṭṭhiṃ pajahati, ārammaṇato nirodhasaccaṃ sacchikaroti, asammohato sesasaccāni paṭivijjhati. Evaṃ sammāsaṅkappādīnaṃ micchāsaṅkappapajahanādivasena yathānurūpanti kiccatā veditabbā. Visesato panettha sammāsaṅkappo sahajātadhamme abhiniropeti, sammāvācā pariggaṇhāti , sammākammanto samuṭṭhāpeti, sammāājīvo vodāpeti, sammāvāyāmo paggaṇhāti, sammāsati upaṭṭhāpeti, sammāsamādhi samādahatīti idamettha kiccaṃ.
从差别来看,在道前阶段,正见依“于苦之智”等对四圣谛的智,有不同的刹那、不同的所缘、不同的名称;第二支正思惟则依出离思惟、无瞋思惟、无害思惟而有差别;正语、正业、正命这三支,依远离四种语恶行、三种身恶行和邪命,以远离的思及远离本身而有差别;第六、第七支正精进和正念,依四正勤和四念处,有不同的刹那、不同的所缘、不同的名称。但在证道之时,这些正见等道支是同一刹那、同一所缘。从作用来说,它们在道前阶段得到不同的名称;而正定无论在道前阶段还是在证道刹那,都依四禅或五禅而有不同的刹那、不同的名称,但在证道刹那则是同一所缘。因为对某位行者来说,初道依其基础禅那等来决定,或是初禅等,或是第二禅等中的某一禅那;第二道等则或与初道相同的禅那,或与初道不同的禅那。所以即使在证道时,正定也有不同的刹那、不同的名称。这就是此处的差别。巴利
Bhedato pana pubbabhāge sammādiṭṭhi ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādinā catūsu saccesu ñāṇavasena nānakkhaṇā nānārammaṇā nānānāmā hoti, dutiyo pana nekkhammaabyāpādaavihiṃsāsaṅkappavasena, viratiyo catubbidhavacīduccaritatividhakāyaduccaritamicchājīvaviramaṇasaṅkhātacetanāvasenapi virativasenapi, chaṭṭhasattamā catubbidhasammappadhānasatipaṭṭhānavasena nānakkhaṇā nānārammaṇā nānānāmā honti. Maggakāle panete sammādiṭṭhiādayo ekakkhaṇā ekārammaṇā. Kiccato pana tāni pubbabhāge nānānāmāni labhanti, sammāsamādhi pana pubbabhāgepi maggakkhaṇepi catukkapañcakajjhānavasena nānakkhaṇo nānānāmo, maggakkhaṇe pana ekārammaṇo hoti. Ekassa hi paṭhamamaggo pādakajjhānādiniyamato paṭhamajjhānādiko vā dutiyajjhānādīsu aññatarajjhāniko vā, dutiyamaggādayopissa paṭhamamaggasadisajjhānikā vā visadisajjhānikā vāti so maggakālepi nānakkhaṇo nānānāmo vāti ayamettha bhedo.
关于“地”和“远离”的判定,应当依照觉支中所述的方式来理解。这就是对超出圣典文句的判定的理解方式。巴利
Bhūmito ca vivekato ca vinicchayo bojjhaṅgesu vuttānusārena veditabboti evaṃ vijānīyo pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
禅那分别论母的义释巴利
Jhānavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于禅那分别论母,先按含义来说:在“以巴帝摩卡防护而住”等语句中,“巴帝摩卡”就是学处戒。因为谁保护、守护它,它便使那人从地狱等苦中解脱出来,所以称为“巴帝摩卡”。防护,或者通过它来防护,就是“律仪”。巴帝摩卡本身就是律仪,所以叫“巴帝摩卡律仪”。这个名称,指的就是巴帝摩卡律仪戒本身——对在甘马语结束时成就之人来说,它按含义是指思等体性。以它来防护,也就是关闭了身和语的活动,所以叫“以巴帝摩卡律仪防护”。“住”就是行动、持续进行。“具足行处与行境”中,因为应当行持故称“行处”;牛群在那里行走的地方叫“行境”,也就是牛行走的场所。不过由于相似,一切活动范围也都应当理解为“行境”。它们的具体区分,应当按解说中所说的方式来理解。巴利
Jhānavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvutotiādīsu pātimokkhanti sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Taṃ hi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehi, tasmā ‘‘pātimokkha’’nti vuccati. Saṃvaraṇaṃ, saṃvaranti vā tenāti saṃvaro, pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro, kammavācāpariyosāne ijjhanakassa atthato cetanādirūpassa pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tena saṃvuto pihitakāyavacīpayogoti pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto. Viharatīti iriyati pavatteti. Ācāragocarasampannoti ettha ācaritabbato ācāro, gāvo caranti etthāti gocaro, gunnaṃ caraṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃsadisatāya pana sabbopi pavattivisayo gocaroti veditabbo. Tesaṃ vibhāgo niddese vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
具足行处与行境:有行处,也有非行处。其中,什么是非行处?身的违犯、语的违犯、身语的违犯,这称为非行处。一切破戒也都是非行处。在这里,有人靠竹施、叶施……乃至花施、果施、沐浴施、齿木施,或者靠谄媚、豆汤式的讨好、抚爱侍奉、被差使跑腿,或者靠任何一种被佛陀呵斥的邪命来过活,这称为非行处。巴利
‘‘Ācāragocarasampannoti atthi ācāro, atthi anācāro. Tattha katamo anācāro? Kāyiko vītikkamo, vācasiko vītikkamo, kāyikavācasiko vītikkamo, ayaṃ vuccati anācāro, sabbampi dussīlyaṃ anācāro, idhekacco veḷudānena vā patta…pe… pupphaphalasinānadantakaṭṭhadānena vā cāṭukamyatāya vā muggasupyatāya vā pāribhaṭutāya vā jaṅghapesanikena vā aññataraññatarena vā buddhapatikuṭṭhena micchāājīvena jīvikaṃ kappeti, ayaṃ vuccati anācāro.
在这里,什么是正行?就是身体上的不违犯等等。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo ācāro? Kāyiko avītikkamo’’tiādinā (vibha. 513) –
以所说的相反方式指出了行为。巴利
Vuttavipariyāyena ācāro niddiṭṭho.
行境:有行境,也有非行境。其中,什么是非行境?在这里,有些人以妓女为行境,或以寡妇……乃至以成年未婚女子、黄门、比丘尼、酒馆为行境;或者与国王、国王的大臣、外道、外道的弟子进行不随顺的交往而共住;又或者亲近、结交、侍奉那些没有信仰、没有净信……的家族,这就叫作非行境。巴利
‘‘Gocaroti atthi gocaro, atthi agocaro. Tattha katamo agocaro? Idhekacco vesiyāgocaro vā hoti, vidhavā…pe… thullakumārīpaṇḍakabhikkhunīpānāgāragocaro vā, saṃsaṭṭho viharati rājūhi rājamahāmattehi titthiyehi titthiyasāvakehi ananulomikena saṃsaggena, yāni vā pana tāni kulāni assaddhāni appasannāni…pe… tathārūpāni kulāni sevati bhajati payirupāsati, ayaṃ vuccati agocaro.
在这里,什么是行境?就是像“有人不以妓女为行境”等这样的说法。巴利
‘‘Tattha katamo gocaro? Idhekacco na vesiyāgocaro hotī’’tiādinā (vibha. 514) –
以相反的方式说明了行境。巴利
Vuttavipariyāyena gocaro niddiṭṭho.
另外,在这里应当从相反的一面来理解身行与语行的正行:比如在长老比丘面前行走、坐下、经行、碰撞、压制别人等身体上的轻慢动作,以及不先请问长老比丘就说法、毁辱别人等言语上的轻慢动作,这些都属于不如法的行为,与它们相反的就是应当理解的身行与语行的正行。再者,比丘心怀恭敬、顺从,具足惭与愧,善着下衣、善披上衣,前进等动作令人欢喜,眼睛下垂而行,具足威仪,于增上威仪及微小学处中审慎实行,常常保持尊重之心而住,这就称为正行。行处则有三种:依止行境、守护行境、近缚行境。其中,具足十种论事功德的善知识,称为依止行境。在村落等处,以垂目而不东张西望、不环视四方而行,称为守护行境。四念处则称为近缚行境,心所系着之处就在这里。应当知道,这里的行境有这三种。以此正行与行境而具足,就称为具足正行与行境。巴利
Apicettha therānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ purato gamananisīdanacaṅkamanaghaṭṭanābhibhavanādikāyikācittīkārakiriyānañceva there bhikkhū anāpucchā dhammakathanakhuṃsanādivācasikācittīkārakiriyānañca anācārānaṃ paṭipakkhavasena kāyikavācasiko ācāro veditabbo. Apica bhikkhu sagāravo sappatisso hirottappasampanno sunivattho supāruto pāsādikena abhikkantādinā okkhittacakkhu iriyāpathasampanno ābhisamācārikesu sakkaccakārī garucittīkārabahulo viharati, ayaṃ vuccati ācāro. Gocaro pana tividho upanissayagocaro ārakkhagocaro upanibandhagocaroti. Tattha dasakathāvatthuguṇasamannāgato kalyāṇamitto upanissayagocaro nāma. Antaragharādīsu okkhittacakkhutādīhi disā vidisā anoloketvā gamanaṃ ārakkhagocaro nāma. Cattāro pana satipaṭṭhānā upanibandhagocaro nāma. Yattha cittaṃ upanibandhati, ayaṃ tividhopettha gocaroti veditabbo. Imināti iminā ācārena, gocarena ca samannāgato ācāragocarasampanno nāma.
对于极微小的过失,就是指极其微小的过错。见怖畏,就是有见怖畏的习惯,就像把极微小的尘埃看成须弥山一样,把哪怕最轻微的恶作、恶说也看成等同于巴拉基格,从过失和怖畏的角度来看待,这就是它的意思。于诸学处受持而学,就是对于诸学处中任何应当学的,都好好受持、把握而学。巴利
Aṇumattesu vajjesūti aṇuppamāṇesu dosesu. Bhayadassāvīti bhayadassanasīlo, aṇumattaṃ reṇuṃ sinerusadisaṃ passanto viya sabbalahukampi dukkaṭadubbhāsitamattaṃ pārājikasadisaṃ katvā vajjato bhayato dassanasīloti attho. Samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesūti yaṃ kiñci sikkhāpadesu sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ suṭṭhu ādāya gahetvā sikkhati.
在诸根上守护好门:就是在以意识为第六的六根上,用被称为不执取色等所缘之相的念来防护,从而关好根门。在饮食上知道适量:就是在接受和受用钵食时,通过省察的智慧以及少欲等来知道适量。这里应当知道,这是以钵食来代表对四种资具的受用。或者,因为是要吃的东西所以叫“食”,应当知道这同样是指对四种资具的受用。初夜和后夜:这里,以半夜为分界,夜的前半叫初夜,这个说法涵盖了初夜分和饭后时分;夜的后半叫后夜,这个说法涵盖了后夜分和饭前时分。不过,后夜分是比丘消除睡眠疲劳的时间,所以没有包括在内。巴利
Indriyesu guttadvāroti manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu rūpādiārammaṇanimittādīnaṃ aggahaṇasaṅkhātasatisaṃvarena pihitadvāro. Bhojane mattaññūti piṇḍapāte paṭiggahaṇaparibhogesu paccavekkhaṇañāṇavasena ceva appicchatādīhi ca mattajānanako, piṇḍapātavasena cettha catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā bhuñjitabbato bhojananti catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pubbarattāpararattanti ettha aḍḍharattisaṅkhātāya rattiyā pubbe pubbarattaṃ, iminā paṭhamayāmañceva pacchābhattañca gaṇhāti. Rattiyā pacchā apararattaṃ, iminā pacchimayāmañceva purebhattañca gaṇhāti. Pacchimayāmo panassa bhikkhuno niddākilamathavinodanokāsoti na gahito.
致力于觉醒实践:所谓致力于觉醒实践,就是投入于以不净观为内容的修行乐处,并反复修习;也就是藉经行与静坐、以如理作意,为净除障碍法而净化内心,于此精勤不懈。这就是它的含义。持续精勤与明察:由于应当不间断地令其生起,所以称为持续的精进;由于已经达到成熟,所以称为明察的智慧;致力于这两者,就是这里的语义关联。通过这一点说明:只有具足精进与智慧的人,才能成就觉醒实践。巴利
Jāgariyānuyogamanuyuttoti asubhabhāvanāsaṅkhātassa bhāvanārāmassa anuyogasaṅkhātaṃ āsevanabhāvanaṃ anuyutto caṅkamananisajjāhi yonisomanasikārena āvaraṇīyehi dhammehi cittaparisodhane yuttappayuttoti attho. Sātaccaṃ nepakkanti satataṃ pavattayitabbato sātaccasaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ, paripākagatattā nepakkasaṅkhātañca paññaṃ anuyuttoti sambandho. Iminā vīriyapaññāhi yuttasseva jāgariyānuyogasiddhīti dasseti.
现在,为了具体说明那种致力于觉醒的修行,说了“菩提分法”等话。“菩提分法”是指:属于名为四圣谛觉悟的道智这一分组的、四念处等三十七种法。不过在《义释》里,因为世间修习时,殊胜的菩提分法——七觉支有能力在同一所缘上生起,所以只列出了七觉支。但要通过它们含摄其余诸法,应当知道其余诸法也已被包含在内。“于前进、返回等”中,前进指向前走,返回指折返;这两者在站立、坐下、躺卧时,也因身体向前或向后的趋近与远离而可得。“是正知而行者”,就是以正知做一切事,或者说是正知的实行者。在这里,因为正知与念不相分离,提到正知时,念也已被提到。因此,其《义释》中说:“具念、正知地前进”等。巴利
Idāni taṃ jāgariyānuyogaṃ sarūpato dassento ‘‘bodhipakkhikānaṃ dhammāna’’ntiādimāha. Bodhipakkhikānaṃ dhammānanti catusaccāvabodhasaṅkhātassa maggañāṇassa pakkhe bhavānaṃ catusaccasatipaṭṭhānādisattatiṃsadhammānaṃ. Niddese panassa lokiyabhāvanāya visesabodhipakkhiyadhamme ekārammaṇe pavattanasamatthatāya satta bojjhaṅgā eva niddiṭṭhā. Tesaṃ gahaṇena pana sesānampi tattha gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. So abhikkante paṭikkantetiādīsu abhikkantaṃ vuccati purato gamanaṃ, paṭikkantaṃ nivattanaṃ, tadubhayañca ṭhānanisajjāsayanesupi purato, pacchato ca kāyassa abhigamanaapagamanavasena labbhati. Sampajānakārī hotīti sampajaññena sabbakiccakārī, sampajaññasseva vā kārī, sampajañña-ggahaṇena cettha avippayogato satipi gahitāva hoti. Tenevassa niddese ‘‘sato sampajāno abhikkamatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在“前视”等说法中,“前视”是指向正前方看。“环视”是指向旁边看。不过应当知道,提到这两种,向下看、向上看、向后看这些观看方式,即称为olokita、ullokita、apalokita的,也就都包括进去了。巴利
Ālokitetiādīsu ālokitaṃ nāma purato pekkhanaṃ. Vilokitaṃ nāma anudisāpekkhanaṃ. Imesaṃ pana dvinnaṃ gahaṇena heṭṭhā upari pacchato pekkhanasaṅkhātāni olokitullokitāpalokitānipi gahitānīti veditabbāni.
在弯曲和伸展时,指的是肢体的弯曲和伸展。在持用桑喀帝衣、钵和衣时,这里所谓“持用”,是指桑喀帝等衣以穿着和披覆的方式受用,钵以接受布施食物等方式受用。在吃时,指吃团食等食物。在喝时,指喝粥等饮品。在咀嚼时,指嚼食糕饼等硬食。在尝味时,指尝蜂蜜、糖浆等。在大小便时,指大便和小便。在行走时,指走路。在站立时,指站着。在坐着时,指坐下。在躺卧时,指躺下睡觉。在醒着时,指保持清醒。这里还应知道:以托钵行走等为缘,所以说“在前行时”;而在精舍里,则是以经行等威仪为缘,所以说“在行走时”等。在说话时,指讲话。在沉默时,指不说话。巴利
Samiñjitepasāriteti pabbānaṃ samiñjane, pasāraṇe ca. Saṅghāṭipattacīvaradhāraṇeti ettha saṅghāṭicīvarānaṃ nivāsanapārupanavasena, pattassa bhikkhāpaṭiggahaṇādivasena ca paribhogo dhāraṇaṃ nāma. Asiteti piṇḍapātādibhojane. Pīteti yāguādipāne. Khāyiteti piṭṭhakhajjādikhādane. Sāyiteti madhuphāṇitādisāyite. Uccārapassāvakammeti uccārassa ca passāvassa ca karaṇe. Gateti gamane. Ṭhiteti ṭhāne. Nisinneti nisajjāya. Sutteti sayane. Jāgariteti jāgaraṇe. Ettha ca bhikkhācāragamanādivasena ‘‘abhikkante’’ti vuttaṃ. Vihāre pana caṅkamanādiiriyāpathavaseneva ‘‘gate’’tiādi vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Bhāsiteti kathane. Tuṇhībhāveti akathane.
不过,对于这一切前进等动作,应当一一了解四种正知:有益正知、适宜正知、行处正知、不痴正知。其中,当想要前进等的心生起时,不单凭心的驱使就去做行走等,而是先审察“我去那里有什么利益”,这样审察见塔等种种利益,就叫有益正知。在这些有益的行为中,再审察生命和梵行的障碍、毁坏头陀实践的因素,以及一切身心杂染的有无,这样审察适宜与否,就叫适宜正知。这样把握了有益和适宜之后,不舍弃在三十八种业处或毗婆舍那中自己所乐修习的、名为行处的业处,而去做前进等动作,就叫行处正知。而在前进等动作中,盲目愚昧的凡夫会迷惑地认为“自我在前进等,我在做”,不这样迷惑,而是以智慧如实了知:“由于想前进等的心活动、风大的扩散等诸因缘和合,这个名为身体、由骨聚构成的东西在前进等,除此之外,并没有另一个内在的自我或众生在前进、返回……乃至在沉默”,这样以智慧如实了知,就叫不痴正知。这里是简略说明,详细内容应取自《迷惑冰消》。巴利
Sabbesu pana tesu abhikkantādīsu paccekaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ asammohasampajaññanti catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha abhikkamitukāmatādicitte uppanne cittavaseneva gamanādiṃ akatvā ‘‘kiṃ nu me tattha gatena attho’’ti pariggaṇhitvā cetiyadassanādino tassa tassa atthassa pariggaṇhanaṃ sātthakasampajaññaṃ nāma. Sātthakesu panetesu gamanādīsu jīvitabrahmacariyantarāyānañceva sallekhapaṭipattivighātakarānaṃ kāyikacetasikaparikkilesānañca sabbesānaṃ sabbhāvābhāvaṃ pariggahetvā sappāyapariggaṇhanaṃ sappāyasampajaññaṃ nāma. Evaṃ pariggahitasātthakasappāyassa pana aṭṭhatiṃsāya kammaṭṭhānesu, vipassanāya vā attano abhirucitaṃ kammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ gocaraṃ avissajjetvāva abhikkamādīnaṃ karaṇaṃ gocarasampajaññaṃ nāma. Abhikkamādīsu pana andhabālaputhujjanā ‘‘attā abhikkamādīni karoti, ahaṃ karomī’’ti vā sammuyhanti, tathā asammuyhitvā ‘‘abhikkamitukāmatādicittakiriyavāyodhātu vipphārādikāraṇasāmaggiyā ayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāto aṭṭhisaṅghāṭo abhikkamādīni karoti, tato añño abbhantare attā vā satto vā abhikkamanto vā paṭikkamanto vā…pe… tuṇhī bhavanto vā natthī’’ti evamādinā yāthāvato jānanavasena paññāya pavattanaṃ asammohasampajaññaṃ nāma. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 508) gahetabbo.
现在,如果一个人内心不具备前面所说的这些功德,那么住在森林里对他就不合适,就像对猴子之类的动物一样不合适,连近行定都不会在他心中生起。但如果一个人具备这些功德,那么住在森林里对他就很合适。因为他能在那里成就各种类型的禅那,既能庄严森林住和住林者,也能让整个教法生起净信。因此,为了指出这类比丘的亲近处、修行方法和适宜的住处,才说“他亲近远离的坐卧处”等。其中,“远离的”就是空寂的。“坐卧处”是人们躺卧和安坐的地方,也就是床座等和精舍等。正因如此,在解释这个词语时说“床、凳”等。巴利
Idāni yasmā yassa abbhantare yathāvuttā ettakā guṇā natthi, tassa araññavāso pana makkaṭādīnaṃ viya anucchaviko na hoti, upacāramattampissa jhānaṃ na uppajjati. Yassa pana santi, tassa araññavāso anucchaviko hoti. So hi tattha sabbappakārajjhānaṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkoti, araññavāsañceva āraññake ca upasobheti, sakalañca sāsanaṃ pasādeti, tasmā evarūpassa bhikkhuno upāsanaṭṭhānayogapathaṃ sappāyasenāsanaṃ dassento ‘‘so vivittaṃ senāsanaṃ bhajatī’’tiādimāha. Tattha vivittanti suññaṃ. Seti ceva āsati ca etthāti senāsanaṃ, mañcādi, vihārādi ca. Tenevassa niddese ‘‘mañco pīṭha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
现在,为了说明它还有另一种分类,又说了“阿兰若”等话。其中,“阿兰若”按律藏的用法,是指除了村庄和村庄周边以外剩下的地方;按经藏的用法,是针对住在阿兰若的比丘,说以五百弓为最近限度之外才算阿兰若;按阿毗达摩的用法,则从村庄门槛之外开始,一切都应看作“阿兰若”。因为《分别论》里说“走出门槛之外”。“山谷”是指被水冲刷、被水冲裂的山地,人们也叫它“深谷”或“河湾”。在那里,坐在像银板一样的沙岸上,在像宝盖一样的树荫深处,面对像宝石堆一样流动的水,凉风吹拂,修沙门法的人心就能专一。“山洞”是指两座山之间的空隙,或者同一座山里像隧道一样的大洞。“林野”是指越过村庄边界、人们不常到的地方,那里不耕种也不播种。所以注释里说“林野是远方坐卧处的同义词”等等。巴利
Idāni aññampissa pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘arañña’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha araññanti vinayapariyāyena tāva ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ, suttantapariyāyena ca āraññakaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchimaṃ araññanti vuttaṃ, abhidhammapariyāyena pana gāmadvārassa indakhīlato bahi sabbaṃ ‘‘arañña’’nti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā’’ti (vibha. 529) hi vuttaṃ. Kandaranti kaṃ vuccati udakaṃ, tena daritaṃ udakena bhinnaṃ pabbatapadesaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘nitumba’’ntipi ‘‘nadīkuñja’’ntipi vadanti. Tattha hi rajatapaṭṭasadisavālikāpuline maṇivitānasadise sandacchāye vanagahane nisīditvā maṇikkhandhasadise udake sandamāne sītena vātena bījiyamānassa samaṇadhammaṃ karoto cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti. Giriguhanti dvinnaṃ pabbatānamantaraṃ, ekasmiññeva vā umaṅgasadisaṃ mahāvivaraṃ. Vanapatthanti gāmantaṃ atikkamitvā manussānaṃ anupacāraṭṭhānaṃ, yattha na kasanti na vapanti. Tenevassa niddese ‘‘vanapatthanti dūrānametaṃ senāsanānaṃ adhivacana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
露地是指没有遮盖的地方。不过,如果有人愿意,也可以在那里搭个衣棚住下。草堆是指干草堆。人们从大草堆里抽出干草,做成像石窟一样的住处;或者把干草铺在灌木丛等上面,然后坐在下面,这段话就是针对这种情况说的。少声等语中,因为没有说话的声音,所以叫少声。因为没有城镇的喧闹声,也没有野兽和鸟类的叫声,所以叫少噪声。无人风是指没有来往人群身体所带的风,所以叫无人风;也有人读作无人语,意思是坐卧处内部没有人群说话的声音。适于独处是指:因为远离人的隐秘行为,所以叫人隐密;又因为从各处退离之后,心能完全沉入业处,与名为独处的修习相应,所以叫适于独处。亲近就是结合的意思。入林等语中,除了林和树下之外,其余一切坐卧处都被空屋所包含。巴利
Abbhokāsanti acchannaṃ. Ākaṅkhamāno panettha cīvarakuṭiṃ katvā vasati. Palālapuñjanti palālarāsiṃ. Mahāpalālapuñjato hi palālaṃ nikkaḍḍhitvā pabbhāraleṇasadise ālaye karonti, gacchagumbādīnampi upari palālaṃ pakkhipitvā heṭṭhā nisīdanti, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Appasaddantiādīsu vacanasaddena virahitattā appasaddaṃ. Nagaranigghosasaddena ceva migapakkhinigghosena ca rahitattā appanigghosaṃ. Vijanavātanti anusañcarakajanassa sarīravātena virahitattā vijanavātaṃ, ‘‘vijanavāda’’ntipi pāṭho. Senāsanassa anto janavādasaddena rahitanti attho. Manussānaṃ rahassa kiriyārahattā manussarāhasseyyakaṃ, tato tato paṭinivattitvā sammadeva kammaṭṭhāne cittassa līyanato paṭisallānasaṅkhātassa vivekassa bhāvanārāmassa anurūpattā paṭisallānasāruppaṃ. Bhajatīti sambandho. Araññagatotiādīsu araññaṃ, rukkhamūlañca ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sabbampi senāsanaṃ suññāgārena saṅgahitaṃ.
盘腿坐下是指把双腿从四周盘起来、绑成坐姿。把身体挺直是指把上半身竖直,让十八节脊椎的尖端对尖端、一节对一节地摆正。因为这样坐着的时候,皮、肉、筋腱不会弯曲;由于它们不弯曲为缘,就不会在每一刹那生起受,因此心变得专一,业处也随之增长。把念安放在面前是指把念立在业处面前,或者放在嘴巴附近。因此它的义释里说:“这个念已建立、善建立,在鼻端或在口相。”(Vibh.537)这里说的口相,就是上唇正中间的部位,也就是鼻息所触之处。或者,依照《无碍解道》中所说:“‘pari’是摄持之义,‘口’是出离之义,‘念’是现前之义,因此称为‘面前建立念’。”(Paṭi. Ma. 1.164)这里也应按照《无碍解道》所说的方式理解其义。其简要含义是:“作起摄持与出离之念。”巴利
Pallaṅkaṃābhujitvāti samantato ūrubaddhāsanaṃ bandhitvā. Ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyāti uparimakāyaṃ ujuṃ ṭhapetvā, aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇṭake koṭiyā koṭiṃ paṭipādetvā. Evaṃ nisinnassa hi cammamaṃsanahārūni na paṇamanti, athassa tesaṃ apaṇamanapaccayā khaṇe khaṇe vedanā na uppajjanti, tato cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuddhiṃ upagacchati. Parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti kammaṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ satiṃ paṭṭhapetvā, mukhasamīpe vā katvā. Tenevassa niddese ‘‘ayaṃ sati upaṭṭhitā hoti sūpaṭṭhitā, nāsikagge vā mukhanimitte vā’’ti (vibha. 537) vuttaṃ. Mukhanimittanti cettha uttaroṭṭhassa vemajjhapadeso, yattha nāsikāvāto paṭihaññati. Atha vā ‘‘parīti pariggahaṭṭho, mukhanti niyyānaṭṭho, satīti upaṭṭhānaṭṭho, tena vuccati parimukhaṃ sati’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.164) vaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttanayenapettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho ‘‘pariggahitaniyyānaṃ satiṃ katvā’’ti.
在“贪欲存在于世间”等说法中,“贪欲”是指心朝向目标不断盘算、思量,也就是贪。世间是指会坏灭、会被破坏的意思,也就是五取蕴。这句话的意思是:要从这些五取蕴中把欲贪压伏下去。这里说的“离贪欲”,只是从压伏的角度来说的,并不是指像眼识等那样与贪欲相应的心。以心是指以这样的心;处于这种状态而安住,就是这句话的意思。离贪欲就是远离贪欲。净化心是指:当贪欲被舍离之后,不再重新抓取它,这样使它彻底解脱,就是这句话的意思。嗔恚是指以此使心败坏,像腐坏的酸粥等那样舍弃了本来状态。因为变质而败坏,或者去败坏、毁灭别人,所以叫嗔害;这两者都是嗔的同义词。由于这里是按照一切业处共通的方式来开示的,所以没有说“以慈心悲悯一切众生”,而只说到“无嗔心”为止。巴利
Abhijjhaṃloketiādīsu abhimukhaṃ jhāyati cintetīti abhijjhā, rāgo. Lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko, pañcupādānakkhandhā. Tesu kāmacchandaṃ vikkhambhetvāti attho. Vikkhambhanavaseneva vigatābhijjhena, na cakkhuviññāṇādisadisenāti attho. Cetasāti cittena, itthambhūto viharatīti attho. Abhijjhāyāti abhijjhāto. Cittaṃ parisodhetīti yathā naṃ sā muñcitvā na puna gaṇhāti, evaṃ parimocetīti attho. Byāpajjati iminā cittaṃ pūtikummāsādayo viya pakatiṃ jahātīti byāpādo. Vikārappattiyā padussati, paraṃ vā padūseti vināsetīti padoso, ubhayampetaṃ kodhassevādhivacanaṃ. Yasmā cetaṃ sabbakammaṭṭhānasādhāraṇavasena desīyati, tasmā ‘‘sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī’’ti evaṃ mettāvasena avatvā ‘‘abyāpannacitto’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ.
昏沉是心的病,睡眠是心所的病。所谓“作光明想”,就是无论夜里还是白天,都具备看见光明的想;然而,为了以这种光明想特别驱除昏沉与睡眠,念与正知是需要的,所以说“具念且正知”。巴利
Thinaṃ cittassa gelaññaṃ, middhaṃ cetasikānaṃ. Ālokasaññīti rattiyampi divāpi diṭṭhaālokasañjānanasaññāya samannāgato, tāya pana ālokasaññāya thinamiddhavinodanassa visesato satisampajaññaṃ icchitabbanti āha ‘‘sato sampajāno’’ti.
不掉举,就是心不散乱;同样地,内心寂静。度疑,就是超越了疑惑而安住。于善法无疑惑,是指在无过失的诸法中,远离了那种被称为“如何如何者”的疑,即不再有“这个怎样、那个怎样”这样的念头。这样显示了五盖的断除之后,现在说“他舍断这五盖”等,是因为:未断盖的人不能生起禅那——心被欲贪等散乱于种种所缘,就无法专注于单一对象而入定,也不能迈向超越欲界。其中所说的“他”,是指这样的人:如前所述,他依止戒等功德,前往树林等适合的住处;在随顺自己性行的业处上持续修习,没有昏沉、没有掉举;他生起近行定,断除了五盖,为了证得初禅而努力精进。这里“他”就是这个意思。巴利
Anuddhatoti avikkhitto tathā eva ajjhattaṃ vūpasantacitto. Tiṇṇavicikicchoti vicikicchaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhito. Akathaṃkathī kusalesu dhammesūti anavajjadhammesu ‘‘kathaṃ ime, kathaṃ ime’’ti evaṃ pavattanato kathaṃkathīsaṅkhātāya vicikicchāya virahito. Evaṃ pañcanīvaraṇappahānaṃ dassetvā idāni yasmā appahīnanīvaraṇassa jhānaṃ na uppajjati, na hi kāmacchandādīhi nānāvisayavikkhittacittaṃ ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati, na kāmadhātusamatikkamanāya vā paṭipajjati, tasmā ‘‘so ime pañca nīvaraṇe pahāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha soti yo yathāvuttasīlādiguṇe patiṭṭhāya araññādianurūpasenāsanagato attano cariyānukulakammaṭṭhāne līnuddhaccarahitāya sātaccakiriyāya uppāditupacārajjhānena pahīnapañcanīvaraṇo paṭhamajjhānādhigamāya vāyamati, soti attho.
“心的杂染”,是指让心变得不明净。“令智慧羸弱”:因为这些盖生起时,会阻碍尚未生起的世间与出世间智慧生起;对于已经生起的世间八等至,或者作为神通的智慧,则会斩断其根基,使其退失,所以称为“令智慧羸弱”。在“离诸欲……”等句中,“诸欲”指所依欲和烦恼欲。“离”就是远离、没有、离开的意思。这里用表示决定意义的“即”字来说明:就像只有舍弃黑暗,灯才能亮起来一样,只有舍弃与禅那相违的诸欲,才能证得初禅。后一句也要引入这个“即”字,连成“即离诸不善法”。因为如果还没有离开欲以外的其他不善法——也就是被称为盖的那些法,就不可能成就并安住于禅那。另外,这两句中的“离”,在这里指的是除了身远离等、彼分远离等当中的彼分出离远离之外的一切远离。因为说到离所依欲,就是指身远离;说到离烦恼欲和其他不善法,就是指心远离、依止远离,以及镇伏等远离。由于出世间禅也包含在内,应当这样理解。这样一来,这两句就依次说明了欲贪盖及其余诸盖的镇伏等。对于暴流等,也应当按相应情况这样配合。巴利
Cetaso upakkileseti cittassa appabhassarabhāvakaraṇe. Paññāya dubbalīkaraṇeti yasmā ime nīvaraṇā uppajjamānā anuppannāya lokiyalokuttarāya paññāya uppajjituṃ na denti, uppannāya pana lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpattiyā, abhiññābhūtāya vā mūlaṃ upacchinditvā pātenti, tasmā ‘‘paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā’’ti vuccanti. Vivicceva kāmehītiādīsu kāmehīti vatthukāmakilesakāmehi. Viviccevāti viviccitvā vinā hutvā, apakkamitvāti attho. Niyamatthena panettha eva-kārena jhānapaṭipakkhabhūtānaṃ kāmānaṃ pariccāgeneva paṭhamajjhānādhigamo, andhakārapariccāgeneva dīpappavatti viyāti dasseti. Uttarapadepi cesa eva-kāro ānetvā ‘‘vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī’’ti sambandhitabbo. Na hi sakkā kāmato aññehi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusaladhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Padadvayepi pana ‘‘viviccā’’ti iminā kāyavivekādīsu, tadaṅgavivekādīsu ca tadaṅganissaraṇavivekavajjitā sabbepi vivekā idha adhippetā. Vatthukāmavivekavacanato hi kāyaviveko vutto, kilesakāmehi pana sesākusalehi ca vivekavacanato cittaupadhivivekā, vikkhambhanādivivekā ca vuttā. Lokuttarajjhānampi saṅgahitattā daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evametena padadvayena yathākkamaṃ kāmacchandanīvaraṇasesanīvaraṇavikkhambhanādiko vutto. Evaṃ oghādīsupi yathārahaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
说到这里,已经显示了初禅的断除支;现在为了显示相应支,所以说了“有寻有伺”等话。其中,因为和寻、伺一起运作,就像树和花、果一起存在一样,所以这个禅那称为“有寻有伺”。“离生”在这里,“离”就是远离,意思是诸盖的离去;或者“离”指已离,意思是已经远离诸盖的、与禅那相应的心法聚。因此,从远离而生,或者在那远离中生起,就叫“离生”。“喜乐”在这里,“喜”指达到安止的遍满喜,“乐”指与它相应的乐受。这喜和这乐属于这个禅那,或者存在于这个禅那中,所以这个禅那称为“喜乐”。或者,“喜”和“乐”合为“喜乐”,离生的喜乐属于它,或者存在于它中,就是离生喜乐;这样,按一个词连写来说,本应说“离生喜乐”(vivekajapītisukha),但加上尼伽诃多(鼻音)后,说“离生喜乐”(vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ)也可以。正如禅那一样,喜乐也同样是离生的。初禅:按数目顺序是第一,按生起顺序也是第一。由于对所缘的专注,或者由于烧尽敌对法,所以是禅那;以这个方法,在上面的“第二禅”等中,也应知道其义。证得而住:这样,已经证得断五支、具足五支、具三种善、成就十相的初禅后,以与其相应的威仪安住而转起之义。这里,心一境性虽然在“有寻有伺”这个文句中未列出,但因为在《分别论》中说“禅那即寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性”,所以它也是禅支。巴利
Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’ntiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha vitakkena ca vicārena ca saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena, phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘savitakkaṃ savicāra’’nti vuccati. Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho, tasmā vivekato, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ. Pītisukhanti ettha pītīti appanāppattā pharaṇāpīti, sukhañca taṃsampayuttaṃ, iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ ‘‘pītisukha’’nti vuccati. Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ, vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ assa, asmiṃ vāti vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ, evaṃ ekapadavasena ‘‘vivekajapītisukha’’nti vattabbe niggahītāgamaṃ katvā ‘‘vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntipi vattuṃ yujjati. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampi vivekajameva hotīti. Paṭhamaṃ jhānanti gaṇanānupubbato paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppattitopi paṭhamaṃ. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānato, paccanīkajhāpanato vā jhānaṃ, iminā nayena upari ‘‘dutiyaṃ jhāna’’ntiādīsu attho veditabbo. Upasampajja viharatīti evaṃ pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ adhigantvā tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena pavattatīti attho. Ettha ca cittekaggatā kiñcāpi ‘‘savitakkasavicāra’’nti imasmiṃ pāṭhe na niddiṭṭhā, tathāpi vibhaṅge ‘‘jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 569) vuttattā aṅgameva.
这样显示了初禅的证得之后,现在,紧接着证得初禅的人,以转向、入定、出定、决意、观察这五种自在,使初禅变得自在,从初禅出定后,看到它的过失——因为它以近处的五盖为敌,又具有粗显的寻、伺所导致的扰动——于是消除对它的贪恋,为了断除寻等粗显的禅支、获得喜等微细的禅支,反复将心作意于同一个业处,第二禅就生起;为了通过补特伽罗的安立来显示以它为依止的出世间禅,说了“由寻与伺的寂止”等话。其中,“寂止”就是超越,意思是说在第二禅的刹那,寻与伺不再出现。“内”是指在自身中生起,即在自己的相续中生起的意思。“清净”是因为与称为信的清净相应,禅那本身也清净,就像因为与蓝色相应而称为蓝布一样。“心一境”在这里,因为不被寻与伺所覆盖,所以一生起就是最上、最殊胜的,这就是一境,也就是定。第二禅修习、增长这个一境,所以称为心一境性。然而这个一境,因为是心的,不是众生的,也不是命我的,所以说为“心一境性”。巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā idāni tadanantaraṃ adhigatapaṭhamajjhānassa taṃ āvajjanasamāpajjanavuṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇasaṅkhātāhi pañcahi vasīhi vasībhūtaṃ katvā tato vuṭṭhāya tattha āsannanīvaraṇapaccatthikatāya ceva oḷārikavitakkavicārakkhobhasamaṅgitāya ca dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya vitakkādibhedoḷārikaṅgappahānāya, pītiādisantaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ punappunaṃ manasikaroto dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ uppajjati, tappādakañca lokuttarajjhānaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena dassetuṃ ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vūpasamāti samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ajjhattanti attani jātaṃ, attasantāne nibbattanti attho. Sampasādananti saddhāsaṅkhātasampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Ekodibhāvanti ettha vitakkavicārehi anajjhāruḷhattā eko aggo seṭṭho udetīti ekodi, samādhi. Taṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti dutiyajjhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa, na jīvassa, tasmā etaṃ ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’nti vuttaṃ.
难道这种信在初禅里就没有吗?这个叫“一趣”的定在初禅里也没有吗?那为什么偏偏对第二禅才这样说呢?回答说:因为在第二禅里,没有寻和伺的扰动,所以信和定特别强而有力,因此才偏偏对第二禅这样说。“无寻无伺”:因为通过修行已经断除了寻和伺,所以在这个禅里没有寻和伺;或者说,这个禅本身就不具有寻和伺。要知道,这不像第三禅等那样,也不像眼识等那样,是因为完全没有、根本不生起才说没有,所以“由寻与伺的止息”这句话是在说明原因。“定生”:指从初禅的定生起,或者从与定相应的状态生起。为了赞叹这个心因为没有寻等扰动而具有的功德,才特别说它是“定生”。“成就而住”:意思是,这样证得了已经断除两支、具足三支、具足三种善等的第二禅之后,按照前面所说的方式安住、运作。巴利
Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi, atha kasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti? Vuccate – imasmiñhi jhāne vitakkavicārakkhobhābhāvena balavatī saddhā, samādhi ca, tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti. Avitakkaṃ avicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā natthi etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko vicāro, na tatiyajjhānādi viya, cakkhuviññāṇādi viya ca abhāvappattito, tasmā imassa ‘‘vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā’’ti idaṃ kāraṇavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito, sampayuttasamādhito vā jātaṃ, vitakkādikkhobhābhāvena cetassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva ‘‘samādhija’’nti vuttaṃ. Upasampajja viharatīti evaṃ duvaṅgavippahīnaṃ tivaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇādiyuttaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ adhigantvā vuttanayena vattatīti attho.
这样显示了第二禅的证得之后,现在接着说明:对已证得第二禅的人,按前面所说的方式让禅定达到自在,然后在这第二禅中看到它的过患——因为寻和伺是它的近敌,又因为它还带有粗显的喜支——于是断除了对它的贪恋。为了舍弃那粗显的禅支、获得其余寂静的微细禅支,他一次又一次地把心作意于同一个所缘,第三禅就生起了,以它为近因的出世间禅也生起了。为了显示这些,所以说“由离喜……”等话。其中,离染就是离贪,就是超越,因此说“由离”。这个“ca”字把“寻与伺的寂止”也一并收进来,意思是“由离喜,以及由寻与伺的寂止”。这样说,是为了阐明它的来路之道,也是为了表达赞叹。“他住于舍”中:从观的角度,以不偏袒的方式去看,这称为舍,也就是中舍性。由于具足了那清净的、以离喜为立足处的、强有力的舍,具足第三禅的人就被称为“具舍者”。不过,这舍因为没有了寻等的扰动,只有在这里功用才如此显著,而不是在初禅等中。“具念与正知”:这是以人为安立处而说念与正知。应知,这也是为了显示这个特殊义理才唯独在这里宣说:依靠念与正知之力而安立的、与喜俱行的乐,就像被绳索之力从母牛身边拉开的小牛犊,不再趋向于喜;而且在这样极为甘美的乐中,修行者不会生起贪染,否则就不会这样。为了显示这一点,就在这里说了。“以身体感受乐”中:虽然具足第三禅的人并没有感受乐的执取,但即便如此,因为他以名身与极微妙的乐相应,由那极微妙的乐所生起的极微妙的色触及了他的色身,由于这种触及,即使从禅定中出来,他也能感受身体的乐,因此为了显示这个意思,说“以身体感受乐”。“那……”等中,“那”即“因为”,意思是“因为它是禅定的因”。“那”指那位具足第三禅的人,佛陀等圣者们宣说、赞叹他。怎样赞叹呢?“具舍、具念、乐住”。这样,已舍弃一支、具足二支、具有三种善等的第三禅,他证得并安住其中,这就是意思。不过,《分别论》中说“禅定就是舍、念、正知、乐、心一境性”,那是为了显示有辅助因素的禅定,才用这种方便说法。然而,若依止观相以及乐与心一境性来说,应当知道这禅定只是二支的。正如说“禅定是二支的”等。巴利
Evaṃ dutiyajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā idāni tadanantaraṃ adhigatadutiyajjhānassa taṃ vuttanayeneva vasībhūtaṃ katvā tattha āsannavitakkavicārapaccatthikatāya ceva oḷārikapītaṅgasamaṅgitāya ca dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya tadoḷārikaṅgappahānāya sesasantaṅgapaṭilābhāya tadevārammaṇaṃ punappunaṃ manasikaroto tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ uppajjati, tappādakañca lokuttaraṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pītiyā ca virāgā’’tiādimāha. Tattha virajjanaṃ virāgo, samatikkamo, tasmā virāgā. Ca-kārena vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti ‘‘pītiyā ca virāgā, vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā’’ti. Idañcetassa āgamanamaggaparidīpanatthaṃ, vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañca vuttaṃ. Upekkhako viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhati apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti upekkhā, tatramajjhattatā. Tāya visadāya pītivirāgapadaṭṭhānāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī ‘‘upekkhako’’ti vuccati, vitakkādikkhobhābhāvena panesā ettheva paribyattakiccā jātā, na paṭhamajjhānādīsūti. Sato ca sampajānoti puggalādhiṭṭhānena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ, idañca satisampajaññabaleneva ṭhitaṃ taṃpītisahacaritaṃ sukhaṃ, tato apanītaṃ vaccho viya bandhanabalena dhenuṃ pītiṃ na upagacchati, imasmiñca sati atimadhure sukhe yogino na sārajjanti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi, evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ atipaṇītaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhitena tassa atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭṭho, yassa phuṭṭhattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi kāyikasukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya, tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetī’’ti āha. Yaṃ tantiādīsu yanti yasmā, yaṃ jhānahetūti attho. Tanti taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgipuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti pasaṃsanti. Kinti? ‘‘Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī’’ti. Evaṃ ekaṅgavippahīnaṃ duvaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇādiyuttaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ adhigantvā pavattatīti attho. Yaṃ pana jhānaṃ vibhaṅge ‘‘jhānanti upekkhā sati sampajaññaṃ sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā’’ti (vibha. 591) vuttaṃ, taṃ saparikkhāraṃ jhānaṃ dassetuṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Upanijjhānalakkhaṇānaṃ pana sukhacittekaggatānaṃ vasena duvaṅgikamevetaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘duvaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hotī’’tiādi (vibha. 624).
这样显示了第三禅的证得之后,现在接着说明:证得第三禅的人令那禅定变得自在,从那里出定,按照上面所说的方式见到过患,断除贪欲,为了舍断粗显的乐支,以及为了获得被称为舍与一境性的其余寂静支,就作意同一个相,第四禅便生起,以它为近因的出世间禅也生起。为了以人为立足点来显示这些,所以说“由断乐……”等。其中,“由断乐、断苦”是指断除身体的乐与身体的苦。“喜与忧的灭没”是指心乐与心苦的先前断除。“先前”是指那是在先前,而不是在第四禅的刹那,这是意思。那么,何时断除它们呢?在四禅的近行刹那。因为苦、忧、乐、喜依次在初禅等四禅的近行刹那才被断除。如果是这样,那么为什么说“远离……初禅具足住,此处所生的苦根无余灭尽……第四禅具足住,此处所生的喜根无余灭尽”,这样只在诸禅中说到灭尽呢?因为说的是殊胜的灭尽。在近行刹那中所有的灭尽,那只是灭尽,不是殊胜的灭尽,而那殊胜的灭尽只在诸禅的刹那中。正因为如此,才在处处作“无余”的表述。然而,在处处虽已断除的这些受,在这里为了以不苦不乐受的难知特相,通过排除苦等而显示乐,为了赞叹那禅定,以及为了显示那禅定的诸缘,而被综合在一起。正如说:“贤友,有四种缘,对于不苦不乐的心解脱的等至,贤友,此处比丘由断乐……”等。巴利
Evaṃ tatiyajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā idāni tadanantaraṃ adhigatatatiyajjhānassa taṃ vasībhūtaṃ katvā tato vuṭṭhāya tattha vuttanayena dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya oḷārikasukhaṅgappahānāya, upekkhekaggatāsaṅkhātasesasantaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva nimittaṃ manasikaroto catutthaṃ jhānaṃ uppajjati, tappādakañca lokuttaraṃ, taṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhassa ca pahānā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikassa sukhassa, dukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇeti attho. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikassa sukhassa, dukkhassa ca pubbeva pahānā. Kadā pana tesaṃ pahānaṃ hotīti? Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Dukkhadomanassasukhasomanassāni hi yathākkamaṃ paṭhamādicatunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe eva pahīyanti. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā panesa ‘‘vivicceva…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, etthuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhassa vuttattā. Upacārakkhaṇesu hi yo nirodho, so nirodho eva, nātisayanirodho, so pana jhānakkhaṇesu eva. Tato eva hi tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti, tattha tattha pana pahīnāpi etā vedanā ettha duviññeyyalakkhaṇāya adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya dukkhādibyatirekena sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ, vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcassa jhānassa samāhaṭā, paccayadassanatthañcassa. Yathāha – ‘‘cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā, idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.458).
舍念清净:这是由被称为中舍性的舍所生起的念的清净。因为无杂染,所以那是清净的。而且在这里,不仅由舍所生的念是清净的,一切相应法也都是清净的,不过这个开示是以念为首来说的。具足而住:意思是,这样舍断一支、具足两支、具备三种善等的第四禅,证得之后,以与它相应的行住坐卧方式持续安住。巴利
Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti tatramajjhattatāsaṅkhātāya upekkhāya janitasatiyā pārisuddhi. Nirupaklesatāya hi taṃ parisuddhattaṃ. Na kevalañcettha upekkhāya sati eva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena panāyaṃ desanā katāti. Upasampajja viharatīti evaṃ ekaṅgavippahīnaṃ duvaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇādiyuttaṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ adhigantvā tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena pavattatīti attho.
这样显示了色界与出世间的四种禅之后,现在要显示无色界禅。先说其中的第一种:已经证得色界第四禅的人,看到肉身有种种过患——被杖打、被刀砍等等伤害,还有眼病等各种疾病。为了超越肉身,他在除了空遍以外的其余九种遍里,选取其中一种,生起第四禅。可是,这个禅的所缘——遍相色,也和肉身相似。这就像在森林里被蛇追赶、因为害怕而逃跑的人,把绳子、棕榈叶等看成跟蛇相似的东西一样。所以,想要超越肉身的人要用五种方式把这个禅修到自在,再从那个禅出定。出定之后,他看见这个禅的过患:它以应当厌离的色的相似相为所缘,近在眼前的喜又是它的仇敌;于是他除尽了欣求。禅支上没有需要超越的东西,他便作意空无边处为寂静,而空无边处的本质正是超越所缘;他把遍相扩展到轮围世界的边际,或者随自己的意愿扩展到多大都行。之后,他或者不作意遍相,而作意被那个遍相所触及的空间,念“虚空、虚空”;或者作意“无边的虚空”;或者揭开遍相,再对揭开遍相后所现的虚空相反复作意“虚空”。这样,空无边处就生起了。为了显示这一点,所以说“完全超越色想”等。巴利
Evaṃ rūpāvacaralokuttaracatukkajjhānaṃ dassetvā idāni arūpāvacarajjhānaṃ dassento yaṃ tattha paṭhamaṃ, evaṃ adhigatarūpāvacaracatutthajjhānassa karajarūpe daṇḍādānādīnañceva cakkhurogādiābādhānañca vasena diṭṭhādīnavassa karajarūpassa samatikkamāya ākāsakasiṇavirahitesu navasu kasiṇesu aññatarasmiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ uppādetvā tassārammaṇabhūtaṃ kasiṇapaṭibhāgarūpampi karajarūpapaṭibhāgatāya, araññe sappānubandhassa bhayena palāyato rajjutālapaṇṇādiṃ sappapaṭibhāgatāya viya samatikkamitukāmassa pañcahākārehi taṃ jhānaṃ vasībhūtaṃ katvā tato vuṭṭhāya tattha nibbejanīyarūpapaṭibhāgārammaṇatāya, āsannasomanassapaccatthikatāya ca dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya aṅgesu samatikkamitabbābhāvena ārammaṇasamatikkamabhūtaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ santato manasikaritvā cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ vā yattakaṃ vā icchati, tattakaṃ kasiṇaṃ pattharitvā vā kasiṇaṃ amanasikaritvā tena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ ‘‘ākāso ākāso’’ti vā ‘‘ananto ākāso’’ti vā manasikārena kasiṇaṃ ugghāṭetvā vā taṃ kasiṇugghāṭimākāsanimittaṃ ‘‘ākāso’’ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“一切”是指以一切方式,或者指全部、没有剩余。“色想”是以想为代表而说的,包括由善、异熟、唯作而有的十五种色界禅那,以及它们的所缘。因为色界禅那也以想为代表而说为“于色之想,即色想”,而遍相所缘也因为是色的缘故,其想就名为“色想”,所以称为“色想”。“超越”是指离染和灭尽。但在《分别论》中,当想被超越时,所缘也就被超越了,因此说“对于已入定者、已往生者或现法乐住者”等等,只说了想的超越;对于所缘还没有离染的人,想的超越根本不存在,所以也应该从所缘超越的角度来解释这个含义。巴利
Tattha sabbasoti sabbākārena, sabbāsaṃ vā anavasesānanti attho. Rūpasaññānanti saññāsīsena vuttānaṃ kusalavipākakiriyavasena pañcadasarūpāvacarajjhānānañceva tadārammaṇānañca. Rūpajjhānampi hi ‘‘rūpe saññā rūpasaññā’’ti evaṃ saññāsīsena vuccati, tadārammaṇakasiṇampi rūpanti saññā nāmamassāti ‘‘rūpasañña’’nti vuccati. Samatikkamāti virāgā, nirodhā ca. Vibhaṅge pana saññāsu samatikkantāsu ārammaṇaṃ samatikkantameva hotīti ‘‘samāpannassa vā upapannassa vā diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārissa vā’’tiādinā (vibha. 602) saññānameva samatikkamo vutto, ārammaṇe avirattassa saññāsamatikkamo natthevāti taṃ samatikkamavasenāpi atthavaṇṇanā kātabbāva.
“有对想的息灭”:由眼等所依与色等所缘的碰触而生起的五双识之想,就是有对想;这些想的息灭,就是有对想的息灭。这些想,即使对已入色界禅那的人也不存在,但那并不是因为它们已被断除才不存在。因为色界的修习并不导向离色——这些想的生起恰恰依靠色;而这里的修习却导向离色,因此在这里可以说它们已被断除。“种种想的不作意”:对于行于种种境域,或依种种意识界而生起的四十四种欲界想,不作意、不转向。在这里,对于色想与有对想,由于在由此禅那所生的生存状态中也不会生起,所以说“超越、息灭”,也就是说它们不存在。而“种种想的不作意”,应当知道是因为依八种欲界善、九种唯作、十种不善,这二十七种想在无色生存中仍可能由作意而生起,因此只说对它们不作意。巴利
Paṭighasaññānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ, rūpādīnañca ārammaṇānaṃ paṭighātena samuppannā dvipañcaviññāṇasaññā paṭighasaññā, tāsaṃ atthaṅgamā. Kiñcāpi tā rūpāvacarajjhānasamāpannassāpi na santi, atha kho na pahīnattā na santi. Na hi rūpavirāgāya rūpāvacarabhāvanā saṃvattati, rūpāyattāva etāsaṃ pavatti, ayaṃ pana bhāvanā rūpavirāgāya saṃvattati, tasmā tā ettha pahīnāti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārāti nānatte gocare pavattānaṃ, nānattānaṃ vā manoviññāṇadhātuvasena pavattānañca catucattālīsakāmāvacarasaññānaṃ amanasikārā anāvajjanā. Ettha ca rūpapaṭighasaññānaṃ iminā jhānena nibbattabhavepi anuppattito ‘‘samatikkamā atthaṅgamā’’ti evaṃ abhāvo eva vutto. ‘‘Nānattasaññānaṃ amanasikārā’’ti aṭṭhakāmāvacarakusalānaṃ navakiriyānaṃ dasākusalānaṃ vasena sattavīsatisaññānaṃ arūpabhavepi manasikārena uppattisambhavato tāsaṃ amanasikārā icceva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“无边虚空”这句话里,它没有生起也没有消失可以被了知,所以叫“无边”。“虚空”指的是去掉遍相之后的虚空,这里应该知道,无边性是通过作意而来的。所以《分别论》里说:“他把心安放在那虚空中……遍满无边,因此称为无边虚空。”这是说明它修习的方式。“空无边处”这句话里,它没有边际,所以是无边;虚空本身就是无边,所以是虚空无边;虚空无边就是空无边;那空无边本身,以住立的意义和生起汇集的意义而称为“处”,这个禅那以空无边为所缘,连同与它相应的法,所以叫“空无边处”。成就它之后,按前面说的方式安住,就是这句话的意思。巴利
Ananto ākāsoti ettha nāssa uppādanto vā vayanto vā paññāyatīti ananto. Ākāsoti kasiṇugghāṭimākāso vuccati, manasikāravasenapettha anantatā veditabbā. Teneva vibhaṅge vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃ ākāse cittaṃ ṭhapeti…pe… anantaṃ pharati, tena vuccati ananto ākāso’’ti (vibha. 605). Idaṃ panassa bhāvanākāradassanaṃ. Ākāsānañcāyatananti ettha nāssa antoti anantaṃ ākāsameva anantaṃ ākāsānantaṃ, ākāsānantameva ākāsānañcaṃ, tadeva ākāsānañcaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena, sañjātisamosaraṇaṭṭhena ca āyatanaṃ, taṃ ārammaṇamassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassāti ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ. Taṃ upasampajja vuttanayena viharatīti attho.
这样显示了空无边处的证得之后,现在为了说明紧接着已证得初无色定者的那识无边处,先让他把那个定修到自在,然后看到它的过患:它和邻近的色界禅那敌对,又以类似色法的虚空为所缘。于是他调伏了对它的欲求,为了超越它,对遍满虚空而转起的识反复作意“无边的识”,识无边处就生起了。为了说明这一点,所以说“完全超越空无边处”等等。这里,按前面所说的方式,禅那也是空无边处,所缘也是空无边处。因为所缘按前面的方式,既是空无边,又因它是初无色定的所缘,所以按前面所说的方式也是处,因此称为“空无边处”。应当知道,这样以两者都不转起、不作意而合为一,所以说“完全超越空无边处”。巴利
Evaṃ ākāsānañcāyatanādhigamaṃ dassetvā idāni yaṃ tadanantaraṃ adhigatapaṭhamāruppassa taṃ vasībhūtaṃ katvā tattha āsannarūpajjhānapaccatthikatāya, rūpapaṭibhāgākāsārammaṇatāya ca dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya taṃ samatikkamāya ākāsaṃ pharitvā pavattaṃ viññāṇaṃ ‘‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’’nti punappunaṃ manasikaroto viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaso ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkammā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pubbe vuttanayena jhānampi ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ ārammaṇampi. Ārammaṇampi hi purimanayena ākāsānañcañca taṃ paṭhamāruppassa ārammaṇattā vuttanayena āyatanañcāti ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatana’’nti vuccati. Iti ubhayassāpi appavattikaraṇena, amanasikaraṇena ca ekajjhaṃ katvā ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ samatikkammā’’ti idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“无边的识”:这里说的就是那个初无色定的识,它遍满虚空、以无边的方式生起,而修行者这样作意“无边的识”;或者,是就作意本身而说为无边。因为在《分别论》中也说“遍满无边”。 “识无边处”:按照这里所说的方式,无边就是无边际,识与无边际,本来应该说“识无边”,但依照惯用语而说成“识无边”;那本身就是处,就是所缘,所以叫“识无边处”。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Anantaṃviññāṇanti taññeva paṭhamāruppaviññāṇaṃ ākāsaṃ anantato pharitvā pavattaṃ ‘‘anantaṃ viññāṇa’’nti evaṃ manasikarototi vuttaṃ hoti, manasikāravasena vā anantaṃ. Vibhaṅgepi hi ‘‘anantaṃ pharatī’’ti (vibha. 610) vuttaṃ. Viññāṇañcāyatananti ettha vuttanayena anantameva ānañcaṃ, viññāṇañca taṃ ānañcañcāti viññāṇānantanti vattabbe ruḷhito ‘‘viññāṇañca’’nti vuttaṃ, tadeva āyatanamārammaṇamassāti viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
这样说明了识无边处之后,现在为了显示无所有处:把随后证得的第二无色定修到自在,再看到它的过失——它靠近空无边处,因而与空无边处敌对,又以空无边处为所缘;于是耗尽对它的贪欲,为了超越它,便对初无色定的识的不存在反复作意:“没有,没有”“空,空”“远离,远离”。无所有处就这样生起了。为了显示这一点,所以说“完全超越”等语。这里也应当按前面所说的方式理解:禅那的超越,以及以它为所缘的识无边处的超越。“没有一切”的意思是:像这样作意“没有,没有,空,空,远离,远离”。巴利
Evaṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ dassetvā idāni yaṃ tadanantaraṃ adhigatadutiyāruppassa taṃ vasībhūtaṃ katvā tattha āsannākāsānañcāyatanapaccatthikatāya, tadārammaṇatāya ca dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya taṃ samatikkamāya paṭhamāruppaviññāṇābhāvaṃ ‘‘natthi natthī’’ti vā ‘‘suññaṃ suñña’’nti vā ‘‘vivittaṃ vivitta’’nti vā punappunaṃ manasikaroto ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaso’’tiādimāha. Idhāpi vuttanayena jhānassa, tadārammaṇassa ca viññāṇañcāyatanassa samatikkamova veditabbo. Natthi kiñcīti ‘‘natthi natthi, suññaṃ suññaṃ, vivittaṃ vivitta’’nti evaṃ manasikarototi attho.
“无所有处”在这里的意思是:它没有任何所有物,所以叫“无所有”;也就是说,连一丝一毫的残余都不存在。无所有的状态就是“无所有性”,这是对空无边处的识消失之后的称呼;以无所有性为处、为所缘,所以叫“无所有处”。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Ākiñcaññāyatananti ettha nāssa kiñcananti akiñcanaṃ, antamaso bhaṅgamattampissa avasiṭṭhaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti, akiñcanassa bhāvo ākiñcaññaṃ, ākāsānañcāyatanaviññāṇāpagamassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, ākiñcaññaṃ āyatanamārammaṇamassāti ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
这样说明了无所有处的证得之后,现在为了说明紧接着证得的第三无色定——把已经证得的无所有处修到纯熟自在,看出它因为靠近识无边处而有敌对性的过患,于是断除对它的贪欲,为了超越它,就一再作意无所有处是“寂静、寂静”,这时非想非非想处就生起了——为了说明这一点,所以说“完全地……”等话。其中,“非想非非想处”是这样:因为粗显的想不存在,而微细的想还存在,所以与它相应的禅那之法,其想既不是“有想”,也不是“无想”,这就叫“非想非非想”;这同一个法,又因为属于法处、意处的范畴,所以叫“处”,合起来就是“非想非非想处”。巴利
Evaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanādhigamaṃ dassetvā idāni yaṃ tadanantaraṃ adhigatatatiyāruppassa taṃ vasībhūtaṃ katvā tattha āsannaviññāṇañcāyatanapaccatthikatāya dosaṃ disvā nikantiṃ pariyādāya taṃ samatikkamāya tadeva ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ ‘‘santaṃ santa’’nti punappunaṃ manasikaroto nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbaso’’tiādimāha. Tattha nevasaññānāsaññāyatananti oḷārikāya saññāya abhāvato, sukhumāya ca bhāvato nevassa sasampayuttadhammassa jhānassa saññā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññaṃ, tadeva dhammāyatanamanāyatanapariyāpannattā āyatananti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ.
或者,这里所说的“想”,因为不能执行粗显之想的作用,所以是“非想”;又因为行蕴只剩下极微细的状态而仍然存在,所以是“非非想”;合起来就是“非想非非想”。而这个非想非非想,从它作为相应诸法的安立处来说,又是“处”,所以叫“非想非非想处”。而且在这里,不只是想如此,触也是“非触非非触”,心也是“非心非非心”,其余相应法也一样,不过应当知道,这个开示是以想为代表来说的。其中,“以仅存行蕴的极微细状态”是指行蕴达到了极度微细的状态。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Atha vā yāyamettha saññā, sā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthatāya nevasaññā, saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvena vijjamānattā nāsaññāti nevasaññānāsaññā, nevasaññānāsaññā ca sā sampayuttadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṭṭhena āyatanañcāti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ. Na kevalañcettha saññāva edisī, api tu phassopi nevaphasso nāphasso, cittampi nevacittaṃ nācittaṃ, evaṃ sesasampayuttadhammāpi, saññāsīsena panāyaṃ desanā katāti veditabbā. Tattha saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvenāti accantasukhumabhāvappattasaṅkhārabhāvena. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
这段的总义说明,从一开始依次是:用“在此,比丘以巴帝摩卡防护而防护”等话,指出在教法中,对能生起世间和出世间禅那的人来说,作为其基础的戒当中,巴帝摩卡防护戒的清净。用“住”,说明具备与那种戒相应的安住方式。用“具足行处与行境”,说明活命遍净戒以及有助于它的法。用“于微细罪”等话,说明不违犯前面所说的那些戒,并且完全受持它们,没有剩余。用“守护根门”,说明根律仪戒。用“于食知量”,说明资具依止戒以及知足等功德。用“初夜后夜”等话,说明安住于戒和头陀支、乐于修习的人,有助于修习的那些法。用“菩提分”等话,说明修行具有通向决择的性质。用“他于前进”等话,说明为了不失去前面所说的功德,也为了获得接下来要说的功德,而与念相应。用“他远离”等话,说明选择适合修习的住处。用“他前往林野”等话,说明开始修习禅那的方式。用“他断除贪欲”等话,说明由于致力于修习禅那而断除五盖的人,生起近行定。用“他对此五盖”等话,说明他进一步向上精勤时,生起色界和无色界禅那的次第。以上是这里的词义。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha ādito paṭṭhāya piṇḍatthappakāsanā – ‘‘idha bhikkhu pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto’’tiādinā sāsane lokiyalokuttarajjhānanibbattakapuggalassa patiṭṭhābhūtasīlesu pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlavisuddhiṃ upadisati. ‘‘Viharatī’’ti iminā tadanurūpavihārasamaṅgibhāvaṃ. ‘‘Ācāragocarasampanno’’ti iminā ājīvapārisuddhisīlaṃ, tadupakārake ca dhamme. ‘‘Aṇumattesū’’tiādinā yathāvuttasīlehi acavanaṃ, tesañca anavasesato samādānaṃ. ‘‘Indriyesu guttadvāro’’ti iminā indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ. ‘‘Bhojane mattaññū’’ti iminā paccayasannissitasīlaṃ, santosādiguṇañca. ‘‘Pubbarattāpararatta’’ntiādinā sīladhutaṅgesu patiṭṭhitassa bhāvanārāmassa tadupakārake dhamme. ‘‘Bodhipakkhikāna’’ntiādinā paṭipattiyā nibbedhabhāgiyataṃ. ‘‘So abhikkante’’tiādinā yathāvuttaguṇānaṃ aparihānāya, vakkhamānānañca paṭilābhāya satisampayogaṃ. ‘‘So vivitta’’ntiādinā bhāvanānurūpasenāsanapariggahaṃ. ‘‘So araññagato’’tiādinā jhānabhāvanārambhappakāraṃ. ‘‘So abhijjha’’ntiādinā jhānabhāvanābhiyogena pahīnapañcanīvaraṇassa upacārajjhānuppattiṃ. ‘‘So ime pañca nīvaraṇe’’tiādinā tassa uparūpari vāyamato rūpārūpajjhānuppattikkamaṃ upadisati. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
不过,法的分类在这里的分别说示方法中会变得很清楚。因为在三种方法中,与广大、出世间的善心、异熟心、唯作心相应的禅支——也就是寻、伺、喜、乐、舍、一境性这些禅法——已经按不同方法分别说明了;而其余与禅那相应的欲界法,才在这里被收进去。虽然这里也提到了巴帝摩卡防护戒等,但要知道,那些是为了显示禅那的前行修习,以及依与禅那相应的法才说的,并不是在这里被收进去。巴利
Dhammabhedo panettha vibhaṅganaye pākaṭo bhavissati. Tīsu hi nayesu mahaggatalokuttarā kusalavipākakiriyacittasampayuttā vitakkavicārapītisukhaupekkhāekaggatāsaṅkhātā jhānadhammā nānānayehi vibhattā, jhānasampayuttā pana sesakāmāvacaradhammāva idha saṅgahitā. Kiñcāpi panettha pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlādayopi vuttā, tathāpi te jhānānaṃ pubbabhāgappaṭipattidassanavasena ceva jhānasampayuttadhammavasena ca vuttā, idha pana na saṅgahitāti veditabbā.
在问分里,则可能是善,也可能是无记;前三种禅那与乐受相应,第四禅与不苦不乐受相应,但这里的舍受不应说;可能是果报,也可能是果报法;初禅除去寻和伺,是有寻有伺,但这里的寻只是无寻唯伺,伺则不应说;三种禅那是无寻无伺;两种禅那除去喜,是喜俱行;三种禅那除去乐,是乐俱行;第四禅除去舍,是舍俱行;第三禅中的乐和舍,在这里不应说……可能是广大,可能是无量;前三种禅那可能是无量所缘,也可能不应说;第四禅在三个方面都不应说;前三种禅那可能是道因,可能是道增上,也可能不应说;第四禅在三个方面也都不应说……喜是外所缘;第四禅在三个方面也都不应说……是不可见、无对、非因……不是心也不是心所,是无诤。其余部分很容易理解。不过这里并没有超出巴利圣典的方法,从这以后,即使不说这么多,也只在实际存在的地方才加以说明。巴利
Pañhāpucchake pana siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, tīṇi jhānāni sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā, catutthaṃ adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya sampayuttaṃ, upekkhā panettha vedanā na vattabbā, siyā vipākā, siyā vipākadhammadhammā, paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicāravajjitaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ, vitakko panettha avitakkavicāramatto, vicāro na vattabbo, tīṇi jhānāni avitakkaavicārā, dve jhānāni pītivajjitāni pītisahagatāni, tīṇi sukhavajjitāni sukhasahagatāni, catutthaṃ upekkhāvajjitaṃ upekkhāsahagataṃ, tatiyajjhāne sukhaṃ, upekkhā ca idha na vattabbaṃ…pe… siyā mahaggatā, siyā appamāṇā, tīṇi siyā appamāṇārammaṇā, siyā na vattabbā, catutthaṃ tidhāpi na vattabbañca, tīṇi siyā maggahetukā, siyā maggādhipatino, siyā na vattabbā, catutthaṃ tidhāpi na vattabbañca…pe… pīti bahiddhārammaṇāni, catutthaṃ tidhāpi na vattabbañca…pe… anidassanaappaṭighā na hetū…pe… nocittacetasikā araṇāti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Pāḷimuttanayo panettha natthi, ito paraṃ pana ettakampi avatvā vijjamānaṭṭhāne eva vakkhāma.
无量分别论母义释巴利
Appamaññāvibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
在《无量分别论》的论母中,先从义理上说:在“四无量”等语句里,因为遍满的无量性,所以称为无量。这些心依所缘而遍满无量的众生,或者对单一众生以无余遍满的方式而无量地遍满,因此,由于遍满的无量性,就称为“无量”;也可以依众生的无量性来说。与慈俱行,就是具有慈心。一个方向,指东方等四方中的任何一个方向,这是就遍满该方向所包含的众生而说的。遍满,就是接触之后取为所缘。而住,就是持续运作。同样地,第二等方向也是如此。意思是:就像遍满一个方向之后,紧接着同样地遍满第二、第三、第四个方向。如此,上、下、横向:就是按这个方法,依次以与慈俱行的心遍满上方、下方以及中间方向而住,这是其义。到这里为止,显示的是逐一取每个方向之后,有限定地遍满慈心。巴利
Appamaññāvibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – catasso appamaññāyotiādīsu pharaṇaappamāṇavasena appamaññāyo. Etā hi ārammaṇavasena appamāṇe vā satte pharanti, ekasattamhi vā anavasesapharaṇavasena appamāṇato pharantīti evaṃ pharaṇaappamāṇavasena ‘‘appamaññāyo’’ti vuccanti, satta appamāṇavasenāpi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Mettāsahagatenāti mettāya samannāgatena. Ekaṃ disanti puratthimādīsu catūsu disāsu yaṃ kiñci ekaṃ disaṃ, taṃdisāpariyāpannasattapharaṇavasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Pharitvāti phusitvā ārammaṇaṃ katvā. Viharatīti pavatteti. Tathā dutiyantiādīsu. Yathā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā, tatheva tadanantaraṃ dutiyaṃ, tatiyaṃ, catutthañcāti attho. Iti uddhamadho tiriyanti eteneva nayena uparimaṃ disaṃ, heṭṭhimaṃ disaṃ, anudisañca anukkamena mettāsahagatena cetasā pharitvā viharatīti attho. Ettāvatā ekamekaṃ disaṃ pariggahetvā odhiso mettāpharaṇataṃ dassitaṃ.
“一切处”等词,是为了显示无分别地遍及一切而说的。其中,“一切处”就是一切地方。“以一切处的自己性”,是指在一切低劣、中等、优越、朋友、敌人、中立等各类众生中,以自己那样的平等性——不作区分而视同自己,这就是所说的意思。或者,“以一切处的自己性”是指以全部的心意,连一丝一毫也不向外散乱,这是它的意思。“一切有”是指拥有一切众生,也就是与一切众生相连。“世间”是指众生世间。再次说“与慈俱行”,这是为了显示它与“广大”等修饰语的关联,或者作为总结。其中,由于遍满,应当知道是“广大”;由于禅那的层次,是“大”;由于熟练,以及由于以无量众生为所缘,是“无量”;由于断除了嗔恚这个敌对者,是“无怨”;由于断除了忧恼,应当知道是“无苦、安稳、无恼”。同样地,在“与悲俱行”等句中,也应当这样理解其义。以上就是这里对这些词的含义的解释。巴利
Sabbadhītiādi pana anodhiso dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha sabbadhīti sabbattha. Sabbattatāyāti sabbesu hīnamajjhimukkaṭṭhamittasapattamajjhattādippabhedesu attatāya, tesu vibhāgaṃ akatvā attasamatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā sabbattatāyāti sabbena cittabhāvena, īsakampi bahi avikkhepamānoti attho. Sabbāvantanti sabbasattavantaṃ, sabbasattayuttanti attho. Lokanti sattalokaṃ. Puna ‘‘mettāsahagatenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘vipulenā’’tiādīhi visesanehi sambandhadassanavasena vā vuttaṃ, nigamanavasena vā. Tattha pharaṇavasena vipulatā veditabbā. Bhūmivasena pana mahaggatatā. Paguṇavasena, appamāṇasattārammaṇavasena ca appamāṇatā. Byāpādapaccatthikappahānena averatā. Domanassappahānena niddukkhatā, saṅkhatatā, abyāpajjatā ca daṭṭhabbā. Evaṃ karuṇāsahagatenātiādīsupi attho veditabboti ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
不过,这里诸法的差别其实很容易了解。但按照《分别论》的方法,在三种色界善心、异熟心、唯作心中,与慈等梵住相应、对有情而作为慈等梵住的无嗔、悲、喜、舍这四个法,是以多种方式分别说明的;而与它们相应的欲界法,在这里则没有取入。在无色界和出世间法中,这些无量心根本不存在。在《问分》中,这些法可能是善的,也可能是无记的。前三种与乐受相应,第四种与不苦不乐受相应。在异熟三法中,三者都有;舍是无寻无伺的,其余三种则三种情况都有;它们唯是广大法;在“小所缘”“过去所缘”等三法中,它们不可说;它们只以外为所缘;它们是不可见、无对碍的;慈是因,其余三种不是因;它们不是心,而是心所;它们属于色界;它们是有上的。其余的很容易了解。巴利
Dhammabhedo panettha suviññeyyova. Vibhaṅganayena pana tīsu rūpāvacarakusalavipākakiriyācittesu sampayuttā sattesu mettādibrahmavihārabhūtā adoso karuṇā muditā tatramajjhattatāti cattāro dhammā nānānayehi vibhattā, taṃsampayuttā pana kāmāvacarabhūtā ca etā idha na gahitā. Arūpāvacaralokuttaresu panetā appamaññā natthevāti. Pañhāpucchake panetā tāva siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā. Tisso sukhāya, catutthā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā. Vipākattike tidhāpi, upekkhā avitakkaavicārā, sesā tidhāpi, mahaggatāva, parittārammaṇaatītārammaṇattikesu na vattabbāva, bahiddhārammaṇāva, anidassanaappaṭighāva, mettā hetu, sesā na hetū, no cittā, cetasikā, rūpāvacarā, sauttarāva. Sesaṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
学处分别论母义注释巴利
Sikkhāpadavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《学处分别》的论母,先从含义上说:“学处”就是应当学习的条目,也就是应当学习的部分,这是它的意思。再者,一切善法因为应当学习,所以称为“学”;因为它们是这些学的立足处,所以称为“处”;而在五戒当中,任何一支都算是学处。在杀生等条目中,对生命极度地伤害,就是杀生,意思是杀害生命。这里说的“生命”,从世俗说法看是有情,从究竟意义看是命根。对于这个生命,怀着“这是生命”的认知,生起要断绝命根的加行,经由身门或语门中的某一门而转起的杀害思,就是杀生,因此称为杀生。离,就是远离,依照前面所说的方法,它本身就是学处,所以称为离学处。不与取,就是没有给予的、他人所摄持的;对他人所摄持而未给予之物加以取受,就是不与取。若说取他人的东西,就是偷盗、贼行。从含义上说,对他人所摄持之物作如是认知,而取受它的加行所生起的偷盗思,就是不与取。欲,就是事欲。邪行,就是由烦恼欲而作的卑劣行为;对于男子来说,是母亲等所守护等类所说的女子,对于女子来说,是从自己已定属的男子之外的其他男子等所说的不可行处,越轨而行,就是所说的邪行。从含义上说,在不可行的事上,以行淫之道与非道之道的加行所生起,或安忍之相所转起的淫欲思,就是欲邪行。虚妄,就是不实、不真的事;说,就是明知其不实之后,仍以真实、真确的方式使人知道。从相上说,知道事不真实之后,想要以真实的方式使他人知道,能破坏其利益的以身语加行所生起的思,就是妄语。酒,有饼酒、糕酒、饭酒、投麯混合而成的酒、以种种原料混合而成的酒,共五种酒。末罗耶,有花酒、果酒、糖酒、蜜酒、以种种原料混合而成的酒,共五种酒。这两者都因为能令人醉,所以称为酒;以何种思饮用那酒,那思因为能导致放逸,所以是放逸处,因此称为酒末罗耶放逸处。其余部分应当很容易理解。以上就是这里所说的词义。巴利
Sikkhāpadavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – sikkhāpadānīti sikkhitabbapadāni, sikkhākoṭṭhāsāti attho. Apica sabbepi kusalā dhammā sikkhitabbato sikkhā, tāsaṃ patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena padaṃ, pañcasu pana sīlaṅgesu yaṃ kiñci aṅgaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīsu pāṇassa atīva pāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadhoti attho. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ, tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto, tasmā pāṇātipātā. Veramaṇīti virati, sā eva vuttanayena sikkhāpadanti veramaṇisikkhāpadaṃ. Adinnanti na dinnaṃ, parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitassa adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ. Parassa haraṇaṃ theyyaṃ corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthato pana parapariggahite tathāsaññino tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Kāmesūti vatthukāmesu. Micchācārāti kilesakāmavasena lāmakācārā, purisassa māturakkhitādisaṅkhātāsu, itthiyā attano niyamitapurisato parapurisasaṅkhātesu ca agamanīyaṭṭhānesu vītikkamācārāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthato pana agamanīyavatthūsu maggenamaggappaṭipādanopakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā, adhivāsanākārappavattā vā methunacetanā kāmesumicchācāro. Musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu, vādoti tassa abhūtataṃ ñatvāva bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ ñatvā tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa atthabhañjakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. Surāti piṭṭhasurā pūvasurā odanasurā kiṇṇapakkhittā sambhārasaṃyuttāti pañca surā. Merayanti pupphāsavo phalāsavo guḷāsavo madhvāsavo sambhārasaṃyuttoti pañca āsavā. Tadubhayampi madanīyaṭṭhena majjaṃ, yāya cetanāya taṃ majjaṃ pivati, sā pamādakāraṇattā pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyamevāti ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
法的区分在《分别论》的方法中会变得清楚。后面也是这样。在这里的分别论方法中,没有经分别;但在论分别里,这五条学处是依与欲界善心相应的诸远离,在第一轮中以多种方式被分别;同样在第二轮中,依思而被分别。不过在这里,与远离和思相应的法并不是学处,而是与学处相应。同样在第三轮中,是依触等一切法,以多种方式被分别的。巴利
Dhammabhedo pana vibhaṅganaye pākaṭo bhavissati. Evaṃ uparipi. Vibhaṅganayesu cettha suttantabhājanīyaṃ natthi, abhidhammabhājanīye panetāni pañca sikkhāpadāni kāmāvacarakusalacittasampayuttānaṃ viratīnaṃ vasena nānappakārato paṭhamavāre vibhattāni, tathā dutiyavāre cetanāvasena, viraticetanāsampayuttā panettha dhammā na sikkhāpadāni, sikkhāpadasampayuttā pana honti, tathā tatiyanaye phassādīnaṃ sabbesaṃ dhammānaṃ vasena nānappakārato vibhattāti.
在问难部分中,则是仅依已成为直接学处的诸远离,而对思以及触等属于间接学处的分类加以分别说明。在那里,五学处纯粹是善的,可能是与乐受相应,可能是与不苦不乐受相应……只以有限的事物为所缘,只以现在的事物为所缘,只以外在的事物为所缘,只是无见无对的,不是因,是有因的,不是心,是心所,属于欲界,只是有上的,只是无诤的。在这里,那些被说成以有情为所缘的学处,因为具远离自性,所以它们只把被称为“有情”的有限事物、只把现在的事物作为所缘,因此应当知道它们也被说成“以有限的事物为所缘”。现在,对于应当远离的杀生等——巴利
Pañhāpucchake pana cetanāya, phassādīnañca pariyāyasikkhāpadattā nippariyāyasikkhāpadabhūtānaṃ viratīnaṃ vaseneva vibhattāni. Tattha hi pañca sikkhāpadāni kusalā eva, siyā sukhāya, siyā adukkhamasukhāya sampayuttā…pe… parittārammaṇāva, paccuppannārammaṇāva, bahiddhārammaṇāva, anidassanaappaṭighāva, na hetū, sahetukā, no cittā, cetasikā, kāmāvacarā , sauttarāva, araṇāvāti. Ettha ca yāni sikkhāpadāni sattārammaṇāni vuttāni, tāni ca viratisabhāvattā yasmā ‘‘satto’’ti saṅkhaṃ gate parittadhamme eva paccuppanne eva dhamme ārammaṇaṃ karonti, tasmā parittārammaṇāti ca vuttāti veditabbā. Idāni viramitabbapāṇātipātādīnaṃ –
从法、业道、所缘、受、根、业的角度来说;
应当从有过失之支等方面来理解,这是超出巴利原文的判定。巴利
Dhammakammapathālamba-vedanāmūlakammato; Sāvajjaṅgādito ñeyyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,先从法的角度来说:这杀生等五种,其自性就是思。从业道的角度来说,它们就是五种业道。从所缘的角度来说:杀生以命根为所缘,不与取以有情为所缘,或者以诸行为所缘,妄语也是这样,邪淫以男女为所缘,饮酒以诸行为所缘。从受的角度来说:杀生是苦受,不与取通于三受,妄语也是这样,邪淫则依乐受与舍受而成为两种受,饮酒也是这样。从根的角度来说:第一种以嗔和痴为根,第二种可能是以贪和痴为根,也可能是以嗔和痴为根,妄语也是这样,邪淫则唯以贪和痴为根,饮酒也是这样。从业的角度来说:在这里,妄语是语业,其余的都只是身业。巴利
Tattha dhammato tāva – pañcapete pāṇātipātādayo cetanāsabhāvāva honti. Kammapathato pañca kammapathāva. Ārammaṇato pana pāṇātipāto jīvitindriyārammaṇo, adinnādānaṃ sattārammaṇaṃ, saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ vā, tathā musāvādo, micchācāro itthipurisārammaṇo, surāpānaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇaṃ. Vedanāto pana pāṇātipāto dukkhavedano, adinnādānaṃ tivedanaṃ, tathā musāvādo, micchācāro pana sukhamajjhattavasena dvivedano, tathā surāpānaṃ. Mūlato pana paṭhamo dosamohamūlo, dutiyaṃ siyā lobhamohamūlaṃ, siyā dosamohamūlaṃ, tathā musāvādo, micchācāro pana lobhamohamūlova, tathā surāpānaṃ. Kammato panettha musāvādo vacīkammaṃ, sesā kāyakammameva.
从有过失的角度来看,杀生对非人众生来说过失小,对人类的众生来说过失大。在这些当中,对体型小的众生过失小,对体型大的众生过失大。为什么?因为加行大。即使加行相同,对德行少的众生过失小,对德行大的众生过失大。当身体和德行都相等时,由于烦恼和加行的软弱或强烈,过失小或大;而对漏尽者,则是更大的过失。不与取则依物品的劣胜、以及物主有无德行和是否属于自己而有不同。在那里也应当知道,依所取的对象不同,过失有小有大;对漏尽者所拥有的物品,则是更大的过失。邪淫则依对破戒者或有戒者的对象侵犯而有不同。在那里也应当知道,依所侵犯的对象不同,过失有小有大;侵犯漏尽者的对象,则是更大的过失。妄语则依所破坏的利益大小、物主有无德行以及是否属于自己而有不同。再者,出于不愿给与自己之物,或以开玩笑的意图而说“没有”等,过失小;以未见说“见”等,以伪证等方式而说,过失大;说了妄语而破僧,则是更大的过失。饮酒从一滴开始,依所饮的量不同而过失小,饮得多则过失大,而饮到足以引起身体变异的量,则是更大的过失。巴利
Sāvajjato pana pāṇātipāto tāva amanussake pāṇe appasāvajjo, manussake mahāsāvajjo. Tesu ca khuddakasarīre appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi appaguṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ, upakkamānañca mudutibbatāya appamahāsāvajjo hoti, khīṇāsave pana mahāsāvajjataroti. Adinnādānaṃ vatthuno hīnappaṇītatāya ceva guṇavirahitatabbantasantakatāya ca. Tatthāpi taṃ taṃ upādāyupādāya ca appamahāsāvajjaṃ, khīṇāsavasantake mahāsāvajjataranti veditabbaṃ. Micchācāro dussīlasīlavantavatthuvītikkamanena. Tatthāpi taṃ taṃ upādāyupādāya ca appamahāsāvajjo, khīṇāsavavatthuvītikkamane mahāsāvajjataroti ca veditabbo. Musāvādo yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appamahantataṃ, vatthusāmino guṇavirahitataṃ, tabbantatañca upādāyupādāya appamahāsāvajjo hoti. Apica attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya, hasādhippāyena vā ‘‘nattheta’’ntiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃ ‘‘diṭṭha’’ntiādinā kūṭasakkhiādibhāvena vā pavatto mahāsāvajjo, musā vatvā pana saṅghabhedane mahāsāvajjataro. Surāpānaṃ bindumattato paṭṭhāya taṃ taṃ upādāyupādāya appasāvajjaṃ, bahuke mahāsāvajjaṃ, kāyavikārajananapahonakapāne pana mahāsāvajjatarameva.
从组成部分来看,杀生有五支:有情、知道是有情、想杀害的心、加行、由此导致死亡。加行有六种:亲手、指使、投掷、固定设置、咒术、神通。不与取有五支:属于他人所摄之物、知道是他人所摄、偷盗的心、加行、由此取走。同样有亲手等六种加行。这些加行则按偷盗、诈取等相应方式发生。邪淫有三支:不可行淫的对象、行淫的心、以道入道。加行只有一种:亲手。其余各项的加行也应这样理解。妄语有四支:不实之事、欺诳的心、与此相应的努力、他人知道那件事。饮酒有二支:属于酒等其中之一、吞咽。巴利
Aṅgādito pana pāṇātipātassa pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacittaṃ upakkamo tena maraṇanti pañca aṅgāni. Sāhatthiko āṇattiko nissaggiko thāvaro vijjāmayo iddhimayoti cha payogā. Adinnādānassa parapariggahitatā tathāsaññitā theyyacittaṃ upakkamo tena haraṇanti pañca aṅgāni. Sāhatthikādayo cha eva payogā. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahārādīnaṃ vasena pavattā. Micchācārassa agamanīyavatthutā sevanacittaṃ maggena maggappaṭipattīti tīṇi aṅgāni. Sāhatthiko ekova payogo. Evaṃ sesānampi payogo veditabbo. Musāvādassa atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti cattāri aṅgāni. Surāpānassa surādīnaṃ aññataratā ajjhoharaṇanti dve aṅgānīti.
像这样,了解了杀生等从法等方面加以辨析之后,现在对于离杀生等五种——巴利
Evaṃ pāṇātipātādīnaṃ dhammādito vinicchayaṃ ñatvā idāni pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādīnaṃ pañcannampi –
从法、业道、所缘、受持和加行方面;
要从破损的情况来理解,这是超出圣典范围的决断。巴利
Dhammakammapathālamba-samādānapayogato; Khaṇḍato ca vijānīyo, pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
在这里,关于法与业道的判定,和前面所说的一样。但从所缘来看,这些戒是以命根等各自所违犯的具体对象为所缘。从受持来看,在一个人面前,或者自己说“我受持五戒”,无论是一次性总受还是逐条分别受,这样受持时,这些戒就算是已受持了。从加行来看,全部都是亲手所做的加行。从破损来看,居士违犯哪一条,就只有那一条破损,其余的不破损。居士没有固定受持的戒,能护持哪条就护持哪条。但沙弥如果违犯一条,全部戒就都破了。应当这样了知:这是超出圣典的判定。巴利
Tattha dhammakammapathato vinicchayo vuttanayova. Ārammaṇato panetāni jīvitindriyāditaṃtaṃvītikkamitabbavatthārammaṇāni. Samādānato ekassa santike vā sayameva vā ‘‘pañca sīlāni adhiṭṭhahāmī’’ti ekato vā pāṭiekkaṃ vā samādiyantena etāni samādinnāneva honti. Payogato pana sabbānipi sāhatthikapayogāneva. Khaṇḍato gahaṭṭhā yaṃ yaṃ vītikkamanti, taṃ tadeva khaṇḍaṃ hoti, netare. Gahaṭṭhā anibaddhasīlā honti, yaṃ yaṃ sakkonti, taṃ tadeva gopenti. Sāmaṇerānaṃ pana ekasmiṃ vītikkamite sabbānipi bhijjantīti evaṃ vijānīyo pāḷimuttavinicchayo.
无碍解分别论母义注释巴利
Paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
先从义理上解释《无碍解分别论母》:所谓“四无碍解”,就是四种区分。不过在释义里,从“于义之智是义无碍解”等说法来看,它是依智来解说的,所以应当知道,这只是智,不是别的什么。义无碍解,就是以义为对象的智的区分;也就是以能够标记、阐明、确定义之差别的作用,对义生起区分之智,这就是它的意思。其余几句也是同样的道理。这里,“义”指因之果。因为果从因的角度,是可被寻求、可被达到、可被生起的,所以被称为“义”。若从区分来说,它也有五种:任何缘所生法、涅槃、所说的义、果报、作用。巴利
Paṭisambhidāvibhaṅgamātikāya atthato tāva – catasso paṭisambhidāti cattāro pabhedā. Niddese pana ‘‘atthe ñāṇaṃ atthappaṭisambhidā’’tiādinā (vibha. 718) ñāṇavasena niddiṭṭhattā ñāṇasseva, na aññassa kassacīti veditabbaṃ. Atthapaṭisambhidāti atthavisayañāṇappabhedā, atthappabhedasallakkhaṇavibhāvanavavatthānakaraṇasamatthatāvasena atthe pabhedagataṃ ñāṇanti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca atthoti hetuphalaṃ. So hi hetuvasena araṇīyato gantabbato, uppādetabbato ca ‘‘attho’’ti vuccati. Pabhedato panesopi pañcavidho hoti yaṃ kiñci paccayuppannaṃ, nibbānaṃ, bhāsitattho, vipāko, kiriyāti.
“法”是缘,因为它确实能决定果、推动果、生起果并让果达到,所以被称为“法”。不过从分类来看,这也有五种:任何一种能产生果的因、圣道、所说之言、善、不善。巴利
Dhammoti paccayo, so hi phalaṃ vidahati pavatteti uppādeti ceva pāpeti cāti ‘‘dhammo’’ti vuccati. Pabhedato panesopi pañcavidho hoti yo koci phalanibbattako hetu, ariyamaggo, bhāsitaṃ, kusalaṃ, akusalanti.
所谓“辞”,是指能表达上面所说的诸法和诸义、被称为“自性语”的音声。以这些法、义、辞为所缘,观察时,在种种分别中生起的智,就叫作“词无碍解”。巴利
Niruttīti yathāvuttānaṃ dhammānaṃ, atthānañca vācako sabhāvaniruttisaṅkhāto saddo. Imā dhammatthaniruttiyo ārammaṇaṃ katvā paccavekkhantassa tattha tattha pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ niruttipaṭisambhidā nāma.
在这里,词无碍解以声音为所缘,不以概念施设为所缘。因为证得词无碍解的人听到“触、受”这类词时,知道“这是自性语”;而听到“触者、受者”这类词时,知道“这不是自性语”。所谓“自性语”,就是摩揭陀语。正自觉者们用这种语言把三藏佛语编成经典传承下来;梵天神们以及在没有村落的森林中长大、从没听过任何言语的孩童,也凭自己的本性说这种语言;在恶趣、人间和天界,摩揭陀语也都广泛流行。后来从它衍生出安达卡语、耶瓦那语、达米拉语等地方语言,以及梵语等十八种大语言。因为其他语言都在变化,它却不随之变化,任何时候都安住于自己的本性,所以叫“自性语”。它也被称为梵语行或圣语。对于用这种摩揭陀语编成经典的佛语,证得词无碍解的人,声音一入耳就是戏论的展开。声音刚触到耳朵,意义就以百种方式、千种方式呈现出来。但如果经典是用别的语言编成的,他们的心就不能这样迅速契入,必须艰难地学习。凡夫即使学完整个佛语,也没有所谓的证得词无碍解;没有圣弟子是不证得词无碍解的。证得词无碍解的人,能根据名、动词、前缀、虚词等的区别来了知其他声音——哪有不知道的道理?从听到声音就能知道“这是自性语,这不是自性语”的那一刻起,他也能了知这些区别。应当知道,这并不是词无碍解的职能范围。巴利
Ettha ca niruttipaṭisambhidā saddārammaṇā, na paññattārammaṇā, paṭisambhidāpatto hi ‘‘phasso vedanā’’tiādikaṃ saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘ayaṃ sabhāvaniruttī’’ti jānāti, ‘‘phassā vedano’’tiādikaṃ pana ‘‘na sabhāvaniruttī’’ti jānāti. Sabhāvaniruttīti (vibha. aṭṭha. 718) ca māgadhikā bhāsā, yāya sammāsambuddhā tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ tantiṃ āropenti, brahmāno ca agāmake araññe kiñci vacanaṃ asutvā vaḍḍhitadārakā ca attano dhammatāya bhāsanti, yā ca apāyesu manusse devaloke ceva māgadhabhāsā ussannā, pacchā ca tato andhakayonakadamiḷādidesabhāsā ceva sakkatādiaṭṭhārasamahābhāsā ca nibbattā, sā hi yasmā itarāsu bhāsāsu parivattantāsupi na parivattati, sabbakālaṃ attano sabhāve eva tiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘sabhāvaniruttī’’ti vuccati. Yā brahmavohāro, ariyavohāroti ca vuccati, tāya pana māgadhabhāsāya tantiṃ āruḷhassa buddhavacanassa paṭisambhidāpattānaṃ sotapathāgamanameva papañco . Sote pana saṅghaṭṭitamatte eva nayasatena nayasahassena attho upaṭṭhāti. Aññāya pana bhāsāya tantiṃ āruḷhaṃ taṃ tesaṃ cittaṃ sahasā nārohati, kicchena uggahetabbaṃ hoti, puthujjanānañca sakalaṃ buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvāpi paṭisambhidāpatti nāma natthi, ariyasāvako no paṭisambhidāpatto nāma natthi, paṭisambhidāpatto aññaṃ saddaṃ nāmākhyātopasagganipātabhedato jānāti, na jānātīti? Yadaggena saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘ayaṃ sabhāvanirutti, ayaṃ na sabhāvaniruttī’’ti jānāti, tadaggena etampi jānissati, na cetaṃ paṭisambhidākiccanti veditabbaṃ.
所谓“辩无碍解”,是指以法、义等为对象的遍一切处智。以那个智为所缘来观察时,在种种分类中生起的智,就叫作“辩无碍解”。这四种无碍解通过证得、受持教法、恭敬闻法、询问义理以及前世积累的修行这五种原因而变得明晰;应当知道,它们在有学地和无学地这两种情况下会呈现出差别。以上就是这个词在这里的含义。巴利
Paṭibhānanti dhammatthādivisayaṃ sabbatthakañāṇaṃ, taṃ ñāṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā paccavekkhantassa pabhedagataṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭibhānapaṭisambhidā nāma, imā catassopi paṭisambhidā adhigamena pariyattiuggahaṇena sakkaccadhammassavanena atthaparipucchāya pubbayogenāti pañcahi kāraṇehi visadā honti, sekhabhūmiyaṃ, asekhabhūmiyañcāti dvīsu ṭhānesu pabhedaṃ gacchantīti veditabbā. Ayaṃ tāvettha padattho.
在这里,法的分类在分别释的体系里也会变得清楚。因为在三种分别释当中,法无碍解、辞无碍解、辩无碍解这三者,都是依据与欲界速行相应的智,连同它们各自所缘的分类,以种种方式加以分别说明的。而义无碍解则是依据那些智,以及八种出世间心相应的智,连同它们各自所缘的分类来分别说明的。因为出世间智也是以所证得的涅槃这一真实之义为所缘,所以称为义无碍解。巴利
Dhammabhedo panetthāpi vibhaṅganaye pākaṭo bhavissati. Vibhaṅganayesu hi tīsupi dhammaniruttipaṭibhānapaṭisambhidā tissopi kāmāvacarajavanasampayuttañāṇānaṃ vasena tabbisayappabhedena saddhiṃ nānappakārato vibhattā. Atthapaṭisambhidā pana tesaṃ ñāṇānañceva aṭṭhalokuttaracittasampayuttānañca vasena tabbisayappabhedena saddhiṃ. Lokuttarañāṇānipi hi maggappattabbatāya atthabhūtanibbānārammaṇattā ‘‘atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti vuccati.
在提问部分里,这些法有时是善的,有时是无记的。三种无碍解有时是异熟法法,有时既不是异熟也不是异熟法法;义无碍解在这三种情况下也一样。三种无碍解是有限的,义无碍解有时有限,有时无量。辞无碍解以有限的事物为所缘,也以外在的事物为所缘;其余的无碍解在这三种情况下也一样。辞无碍解只以现在的事物为所缘;义无碍解在这三种情况下通三种以及不可说,诸无碍解是不可见、无对的,是因,是有因的。三种无碍解是有上的,义无碍解在两种情况下也一样,诸无碍解皆是无诤的。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Pañhāpucchake pana siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, tisso paṭisambhidā siyā vipākadhammadhammā, siyā nevavipākanavipākadhammadhammā, atthapaṭisambhidā tidhāpi, tisso paṭisambhidā parittā, atthapaṭisambhidā siyā parittā, siyā appamāṇā , niruttipaṭisambhidā parittārammaṇā, bahiddhārammaṇā ca, sesā tidhāpi, niruttipaṭisambhidā paccuppannārammaṇāva, atthapaṭisambhidā tidhāpi na vattabbā ca, anidassanaappaṭighā, hetū, sahetukā, tisso paṭisambhidā sauttarā, atthapaṭisambhidā dvidhāpi, araṇā cāti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
《智分别》论母的义理注释巴利
Ñāṇavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《智分别》论母,先从义理上说:“一种”就是以一种方式,或者以一个部分。“智之事”这里,智以及它作为种种成就的所依,就叫“智之事”。“五识”就是眼识等五种。在“非因、无因”等地方,应当依照下面《因双》等所说的方式,在一切处了知其中的含义。另外,在《因双》等当中,五识不能说成是“因法”,也不能说成是“有因法”,而完全只是“非因”,只是“无因”。这样一来,“如实显示事之慧”这句话,就与后面一种分别末尾将要说的内容相关联。以这种方法,在一切处都应随其所应了知其中的含义。“非心所”:唯是心,因为与五识相应之法于此不被执取的缘故。巴利
Ñāṇavibhaṅgamātikāya pana atthato tāva – ekavidhenāti ekappakārena, ekakoṭṭhāsena vā. Ñāṇavatthūti ettha pana ñāṇañca taṃ vatthu ca nānappakārānaṃ sampattīnanti ñāṇavatthu. Pañca viññāṇāti cakkhuviññāṇādīni pañca. Na hetū ahetukātiādīsu heṭṭhā hetudukādīsu vuttanayānusārena sabbattha attho veditabbo. Apica hetudukādīsu pañca viññāṇā hetū dhammāti vā sahetukā dhammāti vā na vattabbā, ekantena pana na hetū eva, ahetukā evāti. Evaṃ ‘‘yāthāvakavatthuvibhāvanā paññā’’ti iminā upari ekavidhaparicchedāvasāne vakkhamānena sambandhoti. Iminā nayena sabbattha yathānurūpaṃ attho veditabbo. Tattha ca acetasikāti cittāni eva pañcaviññāṇasampayuttānaṃ idha aparāmaṭṭhattā.
“已生事、已生所缘”是从刹那现在的角度排除未来。因为它们不会在未来五种事与所缘中生起。“前生事、前生所缘”是排除俱生。因为它们不依赖俱生的事与所缘而生起。“内事”是指以内在的五种净色为事而生起。在这里,五识本身就是内的,也是依内事;意识依于心脏,是内的,却依外事;与五识相应的三蕴是外的,却依内事;与意识相应的三蕴是外的,也依外事——应当知道这样四类。巴利
Uppannavatthukā uppannārammaṇāti khaṇapaccuppannavasena anāgatapaṭikkhepo. Na hi tāni anāgatesu pañcasu vatthārammaṇesu uppajjanti. Purejātavatthukā purejātārammaṇāti sahuppattipaṭikkhepo. Na hi tāni sahuppannaṃ vatthārammaṇaṃ paṭicca uppajjanti. Ajjhattikavatthukāti ajjhattajjhattabhūte pañca pasāde vatthuṃ katvā uppajjanakā. Ettha ca pañca viññāṇā sayampi ajjhattikā, ajjhattikavatthukā ca, manoviññāṇaṃ hadayanissitaṃ ajjhattikaṃ, bāhiravatthukaṃ, pañcaviññāṇasampayuttā tayo khandhā bāhirā, ajjhattikavatthukā, manoviññāṇasampayuttā tayo khandhā bāhirā, bāhiravatthukāti evaṃ catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ.
所依不混杂、所缘不混杂,意思是所依和所缘都不是已经灭去的。因为那些识并不是依靠已经灭去的所依和所缘而生起的。所依不同、所缘不同,意思是它们依次固定在眼与色等各自特定的所依和所缘上,所以彼此的所依不同,所缘也不同。因为眼识不会舍弃眼而把耳等其他东西当作所依,也不会舍弃色而把声等其他东西当作所缘来生起,其他诸识也是如此。它们不经验彼此的行境,这句话正是在说明它们的所缘各不相同。不是没有引转就能生起,意思是在没有引转时它们不生起,在没有被五门引转所引转的境域中它们不生起。不是没有作意,这句话正是以另一种方式说明这一点。不是无间隔,意思是它们不会彼此无间隔地生起。不是无前无后,意思是它们即使在同一刹那也不俱生。不仅这些,其他诸识也不会两个或更多同时生起,应当知道只有一个识一个识地生起。正如所说:“一个心生起,另一个心灭去”等。不是彼此无间,这句话正是说明有间隔性。巴利
Asambhinnavatthukā asambhinnārammaṇāti aniruddhavatthārammaṇā. Na hi tāni niruddhavatthārammaṇaṃ paṭicca uppajjanti. Nānāvatthukā nānārammaṇāti tāni yathākkamaṃ cakkhurūpādiniyatekekavatthārammaṇatāya aññamaññaṃ bhinnavatthukā, bhinnārammaṇā ca. Na hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ cakkhuṃ muñcitvā sotādīsu aññataraṃ vatthuṃ katvā rūpaṃ muñcitvā saddādīsu aññatarārammaṇaṃ paṭicca uppajjati, na itarāni cetarāni. Na aññamaññassa gocaravisayaṃ paccanubhontīti iminā ca nesaṃ nānārammaṇataṃyeva vibhāveti. Na asamannāhārā uppajjantīti anāvajjane na uppajjanti, pañcadvārāvajjanena anāvajjite visaye na uppajjantīti attho. Na amanasikārāti tamevettha pariyāyantarena vibhāveti. Na abbokiṇṇāti aññamaññaṃ nirantarā hutvā na uppajjanti. Na apubbaṃ acarimanti ekakkhaṇepi saha na uppajjanti. Na kevalañca etāni, aññānipi viññāṇāni dve vā taduttariṃ vā ekato na uppajjanti, ekekameva pana viññāṇaṃ uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘aññaṃ uppajjate cittaṃ, aññaṃ cittaṃ nirujjhatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.214; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.109; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.368; vibha. aṭṭha. 523). Na aññamaññassa samanantarāti iminā anabbokiṇṇatāya eva vibhāvanā.
“无功用”是指它成为非转向的,站在转向的位置却无法执行转向的作用。所谓“不了知任何法”,意思是:就像“诸法以心为先导”所说的那样,任何人以五识都不能了知、不能达成哪怕一个善法或不善法。所谓“除了仅撞击之外”,是说除了色等所缘仅仅撞击、仅仅进入感知范围之外,即使是比较敏锐的人,以五识对进入感知范围的所缘,也只能做到了知而已,不能再进一步了知善或不善法。巴利
Anābhogāti anāvajjanabhūtā āvajjanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā āvajjanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na samatthāti attho. Na kañci dhammaṃ paṭivijānātīti ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (dha. pa. 1-2) evaṃ vuttaṃ ekampi kusalākusalaṃ dhammaṃ kocipi puggalo na paṭivijānāti, tehi viññāṇehi na sādhetīti attho. Aññatraabhinipātamattāti ṭhapetvā rūpādiārammaṇānaṃ abhinipātamattaṃ āpāthagamanamattaṃ, byattataropi puggalo pañcaviññāṇehi āpāthagatārammaṇapaṭivijānanamattato aññaṃ kusalākusalapaṭivijānanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkotīti attho.
“在五种识的无间之后”也包括意界之后。这里的“也”字是集合的意思,因此要这样理解:不只是意界之后,在它之后的以五门识为起点、直到彼所缘为终点,也不能了知任何善或不善的法。虽然在五门中会有善、不善等速行生起,但它们应当被看作像虚花一样没有实际作用。在“不作出任何威仪”等说法中,道理也是一样。因为五门识不能通过行走等作出任何威仪,不能发起身业和语业,不能生起表色,不能执取善或不善的法,不能进入世间定或出世间定,不能从定中出来,不能从这一有死去,不能投生到另一有。这一切作用都只通过意门心发生。正如这些作用在五门识那里不存在,决定趣入等也同样不存在。因为没有人能通过五门速行趣入邪性决定或正性决定,这些心也不是以名称、种姓、遍等概念,或以三相等为所缘而生起。在“不入睡”等说法中,一切五门心都不能入眠,也不能见到任何梦。因为当睡着的人诸根被大灯光、乐器声等粗显的色等五所缘触碰时,最初五门转向心不能令有分转动,只有意门转向心能令它转动;那个心生起后,意门速行快速运行,然后沉入有分。到了第二次,随其相应,某种五门转向心令有分转动,之后以彼所缘为终点的各门路心依次运行,然后沉入有分。到了第三次,意门转向和速行生起,就在那个刹那,对色等五所缘的确定发生,有情也从睡眠中醒来。如此,觉醒也只是通过意门心而发生。巴利
Pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ samanantarāpīti manodhātuyāpi. Api-saddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho, tena na kevalaṃ manodhātuyāva, tato parehipi pañcadvārikaviññāṇehi tadārammaṇapariyosānehi na kiñci kusalākusalaṃ dhammaṃ paṭivijānātīti ayamattho dassitoti gahetabbo. Kiñcāpi pañcadvāre kusalākusalādīni javanāni uppajjanti, tathāpi tāni moghapupphāni viya abbohārikānīti daṭṭhabbāni. Na kañci iriyāpathaṃ kappetītiādīsupi eseva nayo. Na hi pañcadvārikaviññāṇehi gamanādīsu kañci iriyāpathaṃ kappeti, na kāyavacīkammaṃ paṭṭhapeti, na viññattiṃ vā samuṭṭhāpeti, na kusalākusalaṃ dhammaṃ samādiyati, na lokiyalokuttaraṃ samādhiṃ samāpajjati, na tato vuṭṭhāti, na bhavato cavati, na bhavantare uppajjati, sabbampetaṃ kiccaṃ manodvārikacitteneva hoti. Yathā cetesaṃ etāni kiccāni natthi, evaṃ niyāmokkamanādīnipi. Na hi koci pañcadvārikajavanehi micchattaniyāmaṃ, sammattaniyāmaṃ vā okkamati, na cetāni nāmagottaṃ vā kasiṇādipaññattiṃ vā tilakkhaṇādiṃ vā ārabbha bhavanti. Na supatītiādīsu sabbehi pañcadvārikacittehi na niddaṃ okkamati, na kiñci supinaṃ passati. Niddāyantassa hi indriyesu mahāpadīpaturiyasaddādioḷārikehipi rūpādipañcārammaṇehi ghaṭṭitesu paṭhamaṃ pañcadvārikāni āvajjanāni bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭetuṃ na sakkonti, manodvārikameva āvajjanaṃ sakkoti, tasmiñca uppanne manodvārikajavanaṃ javitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Dutiyavāre pana pañcadvārikaāvajjanesu yaṃ kiñci yathārahaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ āvaṭṭeti, tato tadārammaṇapariyosānāni taṃtaṃdvārikavīthicittāni yathākkamaṃ pavattitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otaranti. Tatiyavāre pana manodvārikāvajjanajavanāni pavattanti, tasmiṃ khaṇe rūpādipañcārammaṇavavatthānaṃ hoti, satto ca niddāya paṭibuddhoti, evaṃ manodvārikacitteneva paṭibujjhati.
梦其实也是通过那个(意门心)见到的,不是通过五门识见到的。而见到梦的人,通过四种原因见梦:或者因为界扰动,或者因为曾经经历过,或者因为天神示现,或者因为前兆。这些原因混杂在一起时,梦就呈现多种多样。其中,因风、胆等界扰动而见到的梦,以及因曾经经历过而见到的梦,不是真实的。因天神示现而见到的梦,可能真实,也可能虚假——因为发怒的天神甚至会颠倒示现。因前兆而见到的梦,则完全是真实的,就像菩萨、憍萨罗王等人所见的五梦、十六大梦一样。而这四种梦,只有有学人和凡夫才能见到,无学圣者见不到,因为他们已经断除了颠倒。那么,见梦的人到底是在睡着时见,还是醒着时见?这里要说:如果说是睡着时见,那么梦具有善、不善等自性,而有分心并没有这种自性,这就与阿毗达摩相违。如果说是醒着时见,那么梦中造作的不成实效的违犯,也应该像所有成办的违犯一样完全是过失,这样一来就没有无犯的余地了,这就与律相违。又没有第三种方式可以让人见梦,难道因此就得出梦不存在的结论吗?不会。为什么?因为有这样的话:“被猿眠所覆者,大王,在梦中见。”(《米林达王问经》)所谓猿眠,就像猿猴的睡眠一样,反复夹杂善等心,所以轻浅易转;被这种猿眠所覆,就在睡眠中见梦。因此,梦有善的,也有不善的,依转向和彼所缘而言,也有无记的。梦中造的善或不善,因为力量微弱,不能牵引结生,但会在现生中受报。关于“如实显明事理的智慧”这一项,这里说:五识的“如所说非因之义”“非因之义”……乃至“不见梦的状态”,这些就是“如实状态”,它能显明各自如实的事理,所以叫“如实显明事理的智慧”。这样,以一种方式成为智的事体,就是以所说的这一种方式、这一种行相、这一个部分成为智的事体。巴利
Supinampi hi teneva passati, na pañcadvārikena, tañca panetaṃ supinaṃ passanto catūhi kāraṇehi passati dhātukkhobhato vā anubhūtapubbato vā devatopasaṃhārato vā pubbanimittato vā. Imesaṃ pana saṃsaggasannipātatopi bahudhā papañcenti. Tattha yaṃ vātapittādidhātukkhobhato, anubhūtapubbato ca supinaṃ passati, na taṃ saccaṃ. Yaṃ devatopasaṃhārato passati, taṃ saccaṃ vā hoti alikaṃ vā. Kuddhā hi devatā viparītampi katvā dassenti. Yaṃ pubbanimittato passati, taṃ ekantasaccameva bodhisattakosalarājādīnaṃ pañcasoḷasamahāsupināni viya. Tañca panetaṃ catubbidhaṃ supinaṃ sekhaputhujjanāva passanti, na asekhā pahīnavipallāsattā. Kiṃ panetaṃ passanto sutto passati paṭibuddho vā? Kiñcettha, yadi sutto passati, supinassa kusalādisabhāvato, bhavaṅgassa ca tadabhāvā abhidhammavirodho āpajjati. Atha paṭibuddho, supinaṃ passantena katassa abbohārikassāpi vītikkamassa sabbohārikasseva ekantasāvajjattā anāpatti na siyāti vinayavirodho āpajjati. Pakārantaro ca natthi, yena supinaṃ passeyyāti supinassa abhāvova āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati. Kasmā? Yasmā kapimiddhapareto passati ‘‘kapimiddhapareto kho, mahārāja, supinaṃ passatī’’ti (mi. pa. 5.3.5) vacanato, yā pana niddā makkaṭaniddā viya punappunaṃ kusalādicittavokiṇṇattā lahuparivattā, taṃ kapimiddhaṃ, tena sutto supinaṃ passati, tasmā supino kusalopi hoti akusalopi, āvajjanatadārammaṇavasena abyākatopi, supine ca kataṃ kusalākusaladubbalatāya paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ na sakkoti, pavatte vedanīyaṃ pana hoti. ‘‘Yāthāvakavatthuvibhāvanā paññā’’ti ettha yo pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ yathāvutto na hetukaṭṭho, ahetukaṭṭho…pe… na supinaṃ passanaṭṭho, so yāthāvaṭṭho, taṃtaṃyāthāvatthuṃ vibhāvetīti yāthāvakavatthuvibhāvanā paññā. Evaṃ ekavidhena ñāṇavatthūti evaṃ vuttena ekena pakārena ekena ākārena, ekakoṭṭhāsena ñāṇavatthu hotīti.
在《双集》中,说到“产生义的慧”时,这里的“义”是指《义无碍解分别》中所说的五种义中随相应的义;它能产生、令生起、令转起这个义,所以叫“产生义的慧”,也就是与四地善心相应的慧,以及与作为无学神通等至的前行等的欲界唯作心相应的慧。因为在那些心里,只有与善相应的慧能产生、令生起自己那一地所摄的、称为果报的义;而与欲界唯作相应、作为前行等的唯作神通等至,则产生、令生起称为阿拉汉果的义,所以这些被称为“产生义的慧”。不过在注释书中,虽然巴利文没有明说,三地中唯作速行的慧,依无间等缘产生紧随自己之后的唯作之义,也被称为“产生义的慧”。“被产生之义的慧”,是指产生俱生的果报义之后而安住,或者以自己的诸因而被产生、被生起、被推动,自身也成为义,所以叫“被产生之义的慧”,也就是与四地果报心以及唯作神通等至相应的慧。不过在注释书中,虽然巴利文没有明说,其余与唯作相应的慧,也各以自己的因缘而被产生,自身也成为义,所以被称为“被产生之义的慧”。其余部分则容易理解。巴利
Dukesu atthajāpikāti ettha atthapaṭisambhidāvibhaṅge vuttesu pañcasu atthesu yathānurūpaṃ atthaṃ jāpeti janeti pavattetīti atthajāpikā, catubhūmakakusalacittesu ceva asekhānaṃ abhiññāsamāpattīnaṃ parikammādibhūtakāmāvacarakiriyācittesu ca sampayuttā paññā. Tāsu hi yasmā kusalasampayuttāva paññā attano attano bhūmipariyāpannaṃ vipākasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ jāpeti janeti. Kāmāvacarakiriyāsampayuttā pana parikammādibhūtā abhiññāsamāpattikiriyā arahattaphalasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ jāpeti janeti, tasmā etā atthajāpikāti vuttā. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana pāḷiyaṃ avuttāpi tīsu bhūmīsu kiriyajavanapaññā anantarādipaccayavasena attano anantaraṃ kiriyatthaṃ jāpetīti ‘‘atthajāpikā’’tveva vuttā. Jāpitatthā paññāti sahajātaṃ vipākatthaṃ jāpetvā ṭhitā, attano vā kāraṇehi jāpitā janitā pavattitā sayampi atthabhūtāti jāpitatthā. Catubhūmakavipākesu ca kiriyābhiññāsamāpattīsu ca sampayuttā paññā. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana pāḷiyaṃ avuttā sesakiriyāsampayuttāpi paññā yathāsakaṃ kāraṇehi jāpitā, sayañca atthabhūtāti ‘‘jāpitatthā’’tveva vuttā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在三法组中,关于“思所成”这一组:不从他处看见或听闻,仅凭自己的本性,以“若如此,则如此”的方式思惟,由此生起的思所成随觉之慧——在无过失的业处、技艺处、明处这些地方生起的慧,以及业自性智和随顺谛智,都称为思所成慧。
其中,木匠活、清理花朵这类低等的业,与耕种、经商这类高等的业,就是“业处”;竹编、纺织这类低等的技艺,与印算、计数、书写这类高等的技艺,就是“技艺处”;蛇坛护咒这类如法的明术,就是“明处”。在这些当中,仅靠思惟之力生起的慧,即是思所成慧。
菩萨等人为利益众生,以智慧之力思惟过去未曾见过、未曾听过的种种无过失的业、技艺及相关器具的做法,然后将其造作出来。他们也能创造出蛇坛护咒这类明术。即使是这样创造出来的东西,也与先学习过再做的人所做出来的技艺一样。
“业自性智”,就是了知善业是众生自己的、不善业不是自己的,如此了知的慧;或者说,善业才是众生自己的,因为依它而维持生活,而非依其他,如此了知的慧也是业自性智。“随顺谛智”,就是观智,因为它随顺道谛这一究竟真理,所以称为随顺谛智。这两种智也不是从别人那里听来的,而是靠思惟之力生起的,所以属于思所成智。
这种智并非随便哪个众生都能生起,只有那些有名声、有福德的大士才能生起。其中,随顺谛智只有最后一生中的两位菩萨才能生起,应当知道。
“闻所成慧”,是从别人那里听闻之后,依听闻而生起的,就是前面所说的业处等那些慧。不过,没有从别人那里听到,而是看到别人在做业处等事情,或者看到已经做好的,或者自己学会之后得到的慧,也称为“闻所成慧”。这两种——思所成和闻所成——都属于欲界。
“修所成慧”,则是依思所成或闻所成所推动的欲界前分修习成熟之后,生起的广大界与出世间速行心的慧。巴利
Tikesu pana cintāmayattike parato adisvā asutvāva attano dhammatāya ‘‘evaṃ sati evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ cintāmayaanubuddhiyā uppāditā anavajjakammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānesu paññā ceva kammassakatañāṇaṃ, saccānulomikañāṇañca cintāmayā nāma paññā. Tattha vaḍḍhakikammapupphachaḍḍakakammādi hīnañceva kasivāṇijjādi ukkaṭṭhañca kammameva kammāyatanaṃ. Naḷakārapesakārasippādi hīnañceva muddāgaṇanālekhādi ukkaṭṭhañca sippameva sippāyatanaṃ. Nāgamaṇḍalaparittādi dhammikavijjāva vijjāṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu cintābaleneva uppannā paññā. Bodhisattādayo hi sattahitāya adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ taṃtaṃanavajjakammasippatadupakaraṇakaraṇappakārañca ñāṇabalena cintetvā nipphādenti. Nāgamaṇḍalaparittādivijjampi uppādenti, evaṃ katānipi tāni pubbe uggaṇhitvā karontehi katasippasadisāneva honti. Kammassakatañāṇaṃ nāma kusalakammaṃ sattānaṃ sakaṃ, akusalaṃ no sakanti evaṃ jānanapaññā. Atha vā kusalakammameva sattānaṃ sakaṃ tadāyatthavuttitāya, nāññanti evaṃ jānanapaññāpi. Saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Taṃ hi maggasaccassa paramatthasaccassa anulomanato ‘‘saccānulomika’’nti vuccati. Idampi hi ñāṇadvayaṃ parato asutvā cintābalena uppāditaṃ cintāmayañāṇameva hoti. Idañca na yesaṃ kesañci sattānaṃ uppajjati, abhiññātānaṃ pana puññavantānaṃ mahāsattānameva uppajjati. Tatthāpi saccānulomikañāṇaṃ pacchimabhavikānaṃ dvinnaññeva bodhisattānaṃ uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ. Sutamayā paññāti parato sutvā sutavasena uppāditā yathāvuttakammāyatanādipaññāva. Parato asutvā pana kammāyatanādi parena kayiramānaṃ, kataṃ vā disvā uggahetvā vā paṭiladdhāpi paññā ‘‘sutamayā’’tveva vuccati. Tadubhayāpi cintāmayā, sutamayā ca kāmāvacarāva. Bhāvanāmayā pana paññā cintāmayavasena, sutamayavasena vā pavattitakāmāvacarapubbabhāgabhāvanānipphattiyā samuppannā mahaggatalokuttarajavanapaññā.
在布施所成的三法组里,以施舍所应施之物而现起的,是布施所成慧;以圆满戒行而现起的,是持戒所成慧;这两者都只属于欲界。而这里的修习所成慧,则是以止与观而现起的四地慧。在《分别论》的解说中,虽然只说“入定者的慧”,只说到广大慧与出世间慧,但那是以最殊胜的情况来说的。至于欲界的前分修习,以及随念和近行修习,应当知道它们也摄入修习所成慧中。而在前面的三法组里,由于这些慧已摄入思所成慧,所以不另摄入修习所成慧;即使在那里,也应当知道唯摄由修习力所成办者。巴利
Dānamayattike deyyadhammapariccāgavasena pavattā dānamayā, sīlapūraṇavasena pavattā sīlamayā, tadubhayāpi kāmāvacarāva. Bhāvanāmayā panettha samathavipassanāvasena pavattā catubhūmakapaññā. Niddese panassa kiñcāpi ‘‘samāpannassa paññā’’ti (vibha. 768) evaṃ mahaggatalokuttarapaññāva vuttā, tathāpi taṃ ukkaṭṭhavasena vuttaṃ. Kāmāvacarānaṃ pana pubbabhāgabhāvanānaṃ, anussatiupacārabhāvanānañca bhāvanāmaye saṅgahoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purimattike panetāsaṃ cintāmaye saṅgahitattā bhāvanāmaye asaṅgaho, tatthāpi bhāvanābalanipphannānameva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
在增上戒三法组里,巴帝摩卡防护戒因为是观慧的因,比其余的戒更殊胜,所以叫增上戒;与它相应的慧,就是增上戒慧。作为观之基础的八等至,因为比其余的心更殊胜,所以叫增上心;与它相应的慧,就是增上心慧,这里是以心为首来指称定。与观相应的道果慧,因为比其余的慧更殊胜,所以叫增上慧。而这(增上慧)为使教说具有同味/一致性,被称为“增上慧之慧”。戒、心、慧各有两种:戒、心、慧,以及增上戒、增上心、增上慧。其中,前一类依次是五戒十戒、作为轮回所依的八等至、顺决择分的知业自作智。这些法即使在如来尚未出世时,也存在于菩萨、苦行者与游行者、转轮王等人的时期中;而后一类所说的其余诸法,只有在如来出世时才广泛流传,未出世时则没有,应当这样理解。在这里,以三宝为对象,通过布施、恭敬等方式,以及通过皈依、听闻正法等方式而生起的、成为还灭依托的善法,也应当知道已经包含在增上戒和增上慧之中了。巴利
Adhisīlattike pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ vipassanāhetuttā sesasīlato adhikaṃ sīlanti adhisīlaṃ, tasmiṃ sampayuttā paññā adhisīle paññā. Vipassanāpādikā pana aṭṭha samāpattiyo sesacittehi adhikattā adhicittaṃ, tasmiṃ paññā adhicitte paññā, cittasīsena cettha samādhi niddiṭṭho. Savipassanā pana maggaphalapaññā sesāhi adhikattā adhipaññā nāma. Sā ca adhipaññāya paññāti desanāya samarasatāya vuttā. Sīlādayo ‘‘sīlaṃ cittaṃ paññā, adhisīlaṃ adhicittaṃ adhipaññā’’ti paccekaṃ duvidhā honti. Tesu purimā pañcasīladasasīlāni, vaṭṭapādikaaṭṭhasamāpattiyo, nibbedhabhāgiyakammassakatapaññā ca yathākkamaṃ honti. Te ca dhammā anuppannepi tathāgate bodhisattānaṃ, tāpasaparibbājakānaṃ, cakkavattirājādīnañca kāle pavattanti, pacchimā pana vuttāvasesā uppanne eva tathāgate vitthārikā honti, no anuppanneti veditabbo. Ettha ca ratanattaye dānāpacāyanādivasena, saraṇagamanasaddhammasavanādivasena ca pavattā vivaṭṭūpanissayabhūtā kusaladhammāpi adhisīlaadhipaññāsu gahitā evāti gahetabbā.
在“增长善巧”这一三法组里,“增长”就是增多。它有两种:一种是从断除不善等无益之事而来,一种是从生起善等有益之事而来。“衰退”就是不增长。它也有两种:一种是从断除善等有益之事而来,一种是从生起不善等无益之事而来。在这两者当中,善巧就是善性之慧。衰退善巧只有智者才有,因为他知道“这样作意等运作时,衰退就生起,增长就消退”,所以能依这两方面来行动。所谓“方便善巧”,这里的方便是指在紧急事务等场合中,能了知适时生起的方便的那种慧。应当知道,这三种慧都是欲界慧。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Āyakosallattike āyoti vaḍḍhi, sā akusalādianatthahānito, kusalādiatthuppattito ca duvidhā. Apāyoti avaḍḍhi, sāpi kusalādiatthahānito, akusalādianatthuppattito ca duvidhā. Tesu kosallaṃ, kusalasabhāvā paññā. Apāyakosallaṃ paññavato eva ‘‘evaṃ manasikārādippavattiyaṃ avaḍḍhi uppajjati, vaḍḍhi parihāyatī’’ti ñatvā tadubhayapaṭipattisambhavato. Upāyakosallanti atra upāyo accāyikakiccādīsu ṭhānuppattikaupāyajānanapaññā, tividhāpi cetā kāmāvacarapaññāti veditabbā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在四法组当中,第一组的业自性智和随顺谛智已经说过了;但在这里,除了随顺谛智以外,一切有漏的善慧都应被理解为业自性智。在四道和四果当中,与道相应的慧就是道智,与果相应的慧就是果智。巴利
Catukkesu pana paṭhame kammassakatañāṇaṃ saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇañca vuttameva, idha pana ṭhapetvā saccānulomikañāṇaṃ sabbāpi sāsavā kusalā paññā kammassakatañāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Catūsu maggesu, phalesu ca paññāva maggasamaṅgissa ñāṇaṃ, phalasamaṅgissa ñāṇañcāti.
在四圣谛这一组里,只有圣道和圣果的智慧,因为是靠同一次通达四谛而取得的,所以在“苦智”等四种场合中被纳入。欲界的智虽然也能以四谛为所缘而生起,但这里要强调的是通达的作用,因此应当知道,在圣典中并没有把它算进去。巴利
Saccacatukke ariyamaggaphalapaññāva catūsu saccesu ekapaṭivedhavasena ‘‘dukkhe ñāṇa’’ntiādinā catūsu ṭhānesu gahitā. Kiñcāpi hi kāmāvacarañāṇampi catūsu saccesu ārammaṇavasena pavattati, paṭivedhakiccavasena pana idhādhippetattā pāḷiyaṃ taṃ na gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
在法这一组里,道与果中的慧,称为法智。其中,道智是以同一通达四谛法的方式了知四谛法,所以称为法智。果智则应当理解为以灭谛的方式了知诸法。然而,省察智由道的力量所产生,以总摄过去与未来通达谛理的方式而运行,这称为随智。它生起的行相应当这样理解:诸圣者以何种理趣了知过去时的四谛法,他们也同样了知这四谛;未来时也将同样了知。以有贪等的方式区分他人心而生起的智,称为他心智。除了法智、随智、他心智之外的一切世间慧,因共许为智,所以称为世俗智。巴利
Dhammacatukke maggaphalesu paññā dhamme ñāṇaṃ nāma. Tesu hi maggañāṇaṃ tāva catusaccadhammānaṃ ekapaṭivedhavasena jānanato ‘‘dhamme ñāṇa’’nti vuccati. Phalañāṇaṃ pana nirodhasaccavasena dhamme ñāṇanti veditabbaṃ. Maggānubhāvanibbattaṃ pana atītānāgatesu saccapaṭivedhanayasaṅgahaṇavasena pavattaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ anvaye ñāṇaṃ nāma. Tassa ca yehi nayehi ariyā atītamaddhānaṃ catusaccadhammaṃ jāniṃsu, tepi imaññeva catusaccaṃ evameva jāniṃsu, anāgatamaddhānampi jānissantīti evaṃ jānanavasena pavatti ākāro veditabbo. Sarāgādivasena paracittaparicchedañāṇaṃ pariye ñāṇaṃ nāma. Dhammanvayapariyañāṇāni pana ṭhapetvā sabbalokiyapaññāñāṇanti sammatattā sammutimhi ñāṇanti sammutiñāṇaṃ nāma.
在积集这一组里,欲界善的慧是导向积集,不是导向损减。因为它确实在积累死与结生,而不是在损减。道智则是导向损减,不是导向积集。色界和无色界善的慧,既导向积集,也导向损减。因为它以镇伏的方式,损减烦恼以及以烦恼为根的异熟法。其余的无记慧,既不导向积集,也不导向损减。巴利
Ācayacatukke kāmāvacarakusale paññā ācayāya no apacayāya. Sā hi cutipaṭisandhiṃ ācinoti eva, no apacinoti. Maggapaññā pana apacayāya no ācayāya. Rūpārūpakusalapaññā ācayāya ceva apacayāya ca. Sā hi vikkhambhanavasena kilese ca tammūlake ca vipākadhamme apacinoti. Sesā abyākatā paññā nevācayāya no apacayāya.
在厌离组中,色界初禅的慧导向厌离,不导向通达。因为它是由离欲而获得的,所以生起对烦恼的厌离;但由于还没有达到神通基础的状态,所以不导向神通通达。第四禅的慧导向通达,不导向厌离。因为它既能作为神通的基础,也能达到神通的状态,所以导向通达。在初禅的刹那,因为已厌离五盖,所以不导向厌离。第二禅和第三禅的慧,因为与喜相应,所以应当归入初禅;或者因为无寻,应当归入第四禅。道慧则既导向厌离,也导向通达。这里应当知道,它以通达四谛的方式导向厌离,也以获得六神通的方式导向通达。其余的世间和出世间慧,既不导向厌离,也不导向通达。巴利
Nibbidācatukke rūpāvacarapaṭhamajjhānapaññā nibbidāya no paṭivedhāya. Sā hi kāmavivekena pattabbattā kilesanibbidāya pavattati, abhiññāpādakabhāvaṃ pana appattatāya nevābhiññāpaṭivedhāya saṃvattati. Catutthajjhānapaññā paṭivedhāya no nibbidāya. Sā hi abhiññāpādakabhāvenāpi abhiññābhāvappattiyāpi paṭivedhāya saṃvattati. Paṭhamajjhānakkhaṇe eva nīvaraṇanibbindanattā no nibbidāya. Dutiyatatiyajjhānapaññā pana somanassasahagatatāya paṭhamajjhānasannissitā vā avitakkatāya catutthajjhānasannissitā vā kātabbā. Maggapaññā pana nibbidāya ceva paṭivedhāya ca. Ettha hi catusaccapaṭivedhavasena nibbidāya cevetāsaṃ chaḷabhiññāppattiyā paṭivedhāya ca saṃvattanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesā lokiyalokuttarā paññā neva nibbidāya no paṭivedhāya.
在退分这一组里,“亲近退失”就叫退分;其余几组也是这样。这里说的“通达”,指的是圣道,因为它是能生起彼通达的观之足处。所谓“通达分”,在四种情况里,说的都是色界和无色界的善智慧。应当知道:这些智慧如果从自己的自性上退失,成为向下坠落的条件,就是退分;如果成为近伺察的条件,就是胜进分;如果因为对禅那的贪爱很强,而对殊胜或退失都不在意,安住在自己的分位上,就是住分;只有成为作为圣道亲依处的观之足处时,才是通达分。巴利
Hānabhāgiyacatukke hānaṃ bhajatīti hānabhāginī, evaṃ sesesupi. Nibbedhoti cettha ariyamaggo tannibbattakavipassanāpādakattā. Nibbedhabhāginīti catūsupi ṭhānesu rūpārūpakusalapaññāva vuttā. Tāni hi attano sabhāvā parihāyitvā heṭṭhā orohaṇapaccayabhūtā hānabhāginī. Upanijjhānapaccayabhūtā visesabhāginī, taṃ pana jhānanikantiyā balavatāya visesaṃ, hāniṃ vā anussukkitvā ṭhitikoṭṭhāsikā ṭhitibhāginī, ariyamaggapadaṭṭhānavipassanāpādakabhūtāva nibbedhabhāginī ca hontīti veditabbā.
四种无碍解,就是义无碍解、法无碍解、词无碍解和辩无碍解。四种行道,就是苦行道迟通达等,和前面所说的一样。四种所缘,就是小、小所缘等,也按照前面所说的方式来理解。在老死等四法组里,四种联结同样是只依道智来说的。剩下的内容很容易明白。巴利
Catasso paṭisambhidāti atthadhammaniruttipaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāva. Catasso paṭipadāti dukkhāpaṭipadādandhābhiññādayo heṭṭhā vuttāva. Cattāri ārammaṇānīti parittā, parittārammaṇātiādikā heṭṭhā vuttanayāva. Jarāmaraṇādicatukkesupi maggañāṇavaseneva catasso yojanā vuttā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
在五法组里,所谓“五支正定”,就是具备经中所说的五种智支的定,即:喜遍满、乐遍满、心遍满、光明遍满、观察相。其中,在初禅和二禅中,以遍满的喜生起的慧,叫做喜遍满;在初禅、二禅、三禅中,以遍满的乐生起的慧,叫做乐遍满。能遍满他人之心而生起的他心智,叫做心遍满。在光明遍满中生起的天眼智,叫做光明遍满。观察智则叫做观察相。在这里,喜遍满和乐遍满好比两条腿,心遍满和光明遍满好比两只手,观察相好比头,作为神通基础的禅那好比躯干。世尊就是这样把五支正定展示成一个四肢俱全的人。应当知道,以此定而说的支,即是这五种智支。巴利
Pañcakesu pana pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhīti pītipharaṇatā sukhapharaṇatā cetopharaṇatā ālokapharaṇatā paccavekkhaṇanimittanti evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttehi pañcahi ñāṇaṅgehi samannāgato samādhi. Tattha pītiṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti dvīsu jhānesu paññā pītipharaṇatā nāma, sukhaṃ pharamānā uppajjatīti tīsu jhānesu paññā sukhapharaṇatā nāma. Paresaṃ cetopharamānā uppajjatīti cetopariyañāṇaṃ cetopharaṇatā nāma. Ālokapharaṇe uppajjatīti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ ālokapharaṇatā nāma. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ nāma. Ettha ca pītipharaṇatā, sukhapharaṇatā ca dve pādā viya, cetopharaṇatā, ālokapharaṇatā ca dve hatthā viya, paccavekkhaṇanimittaṃ sīsaṃ viya, abhiññāpādakajjhānaṃ majjhimakāyo viya. Iti bhagavā pañcaṅgikaṃ sammāsamādhiṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasampannaṃ purisaṃ viya katvā dasseti. Iminā ca samādhinā aṅgāni pañca ñāṇaṅgāni vuttānīti veditabbāni.
具有五种智的正定,也就是:巴利
Pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhīti –
这个定是当下就带来快乐的,将来也会结出快乐的果报——像这样,只有自己亲自证知的智慧会生起。这个定是圣洁的、远离杂染的……是大丈夫所修习的……是寂静的、殊妙的、已经获得止息的、达到心一境性的,不是靠刻意造作、压制、阻挡才进入的……而我确实是带着正念进入这个定,也带着正念从这定出来——像这样,只有自己亲自证知的智慧会生起。巴利
‘‘‘Ayaṃ samādhi paccuppannasukho ceva āyatiñca sukhavipāko’ti paccattaññeva ñāṇaṃ uppajjati, ‘ayaṃ samādhi ariyo nirāmiso’ti…pe… ‘mahāpurisasevito’ti…pe… ‘santo paṇīto paṭipassaddhiladdho ekodibhāvādhigato na sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato’ti…pe… ‘so kho panāhaṃ imaṃ samādhiṃ satova samāpajjāmi, sato vuṭṭhahāmī’ti paccattaññeva ñāṇaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (vibha. 804) –
与巴利经典中所说的五种省察智相应,被称为阿拉汉果的等至果定,就是这样的。
它在入定的每一个刹那都因乐而成为现法乐住。而先前每一次的定乐,以及由自身所生起的后后定乐,在出果等至时以殊妙之色触遍全身,成为极其殊胜的身识乐之缘,所以未来会生起乐果。依此道理,也是未来有乐果,这是一支。
因为远离烦恼,所以是圣洁的;因为没有欲贪、有贪、世间贪,所以是离染,这是一支。
因为是诸佛等大丈夫所修习的,所以不是劣士所修习的,这是一支。
因为所缘寂静,又因一切烦恼的扰恼已止息,所以是寂静的;以不可扰动的意义来说是殊胜的;因为已获得烦恼止息的状态,所以是已得止息。此定是以专一性而证得的。而有漏的有学之定则不同:它需要以有行、加功用行,先镇伏敌对法、遮止烦恼,然后才能证得;此定不是这样以有行镇伏遮止而证得的。此定是此人所证的。
如此,漏尽者因念已圆满,按所限定的时间,正念而入此定,正念而出此定,这是一支。由于以这五支从一切方面相应,所以称为五智正定。巴利
Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ vuttehi pañcahi paccavekkhaṇañāṇehi yutto arahattaphalasaṅkhāto samāpattiphalasamādhi. So evaṃ hi appitappitakkhaṇe sukhattā paccuppannasukho, purimo purimo pacchimassa pacchimassa samādhisukhassa ceva attanā samuṭṭhāpitampi paṇītarūpena phuṭṭhasakalakāyatāya phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhitakāle atipaṇītaṃ kāyaviññāṇasukhassa paccayattā āyatiṃ sukhavipāko uppajjati, imināpi pariyāyena āyatiṃ sukhavipākoti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, kilesehi ārakattā ariyo kāmāmisavaṭṭāmisalokāmisānaṃ abhāvā nirāmisoti ekaṃ, buddhādīhi mahāpurisehi sevitattā akāpurisasevisoti ekaṃ, aṅgārammaṇe santatāya, sabbakilesadarathasantatāya ca santo atappanīyaṭṭhena paṇīto kilesapaṭipassaddhibhāvassa laddhattā paṭipassaddhaladdho ekodibhāvena ca adhigato appaguṇasāsavasamādhi viya sasaṅkhārena sappayogena paccanīkadhamme niggayha kilese vāretvā anadhigatattā na sasaṅkhāraniggayhavāritagato. Puggalassāyaṃ samādhīti evaṃ khīṇāsavassa sativepullappattiyā yathāparicchinnakālavasena imaṃ samādhiṃ satova samāpajjati, uṭṭhahati cāti ekamaṅganti imehi pañcahi aṅgehi sabbākārato yuttattā ‘‘pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhī’’ti vuccati.
在六法中,六种神通各自的智是:神变智、天耳界智、他心智、宿住随念智、死生智、漏尽智。以上所说的这些智,就是与六神通心相应的智。其中最后一种属于出世间,其余几种属于色界第五禅。巴利
Chakke chasu abhiññāsu paññāti iddhividhe ñāṇaṃ, dibbasotadhātuyā ñāṇaṃ, cetopariye ñāṇaṃ, pubbenivāsānussatiyaṃ ñāṇaṃ, cutūpapāte ñāṇaṃ, āsavānaṃ khaye ñāṇanti evaṃ vuttāni chaḷabhiññācittasampayuttāni ñāṇāni. Tesu pacchimaṃ lokuttaraṃ, sesāni rūpāvacarapañcamajjhānikānīti.
在七十七智事中,对“无明缘行”的省察智是一个,对“无明不存在时行不存在”的省察智是一个,这样就是两个智;同样,对过去也有两个,对未来也有两个,一共六个。这六种智,再加上以“灭法”等方式进行的省察智,合起来就是七个智。这样,在其余各支直到“生”支中也是如此。因此,在十一种缘起支中,每一支都依三时(过去、现在、未来)以随顺智和逆向智,再加上它们的坏灭观智,每一支各成七智,总共就是七十七智。巴利
Sattake sattasattati ñāṇavatthūnīti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘asati avijjāya natthi saṅkhārā’’ti ekanti dve ñāṇāni, evaṃ atītepi dve, anāgatepi dveti cha, taṃ chabbidhampi ñāṇaṃ ‘‘khayadhamma’’ntiādinā paccavekkhaṇañāṇena saddhiṃ satta ñāṇāni. Evaṃ sesesupi jātipariyosānesu cāti evaṃ ekādasasu paṭiccasamuppādaṅgesu paccekaṃ kālattayepi anvayabyatirekañāṇaṃ tesaṃ vayadassanañāṇassa ca vasena satta satta katvā sattasattati ñāṇāni.
在九法当中,关于九种次第住的等至,慧有九种:对于进入灭尽定者,因为必须依照次第而安住、必须依照次第而令生起,所以在被称为次第住的色界与无色界等至中,与之相应的慧有八种;紧接着触证灭尽并从中出定者,将灭尽省察为寂静的省察智,则是第九种。巴利
Navake navasu anupubbavihārasamāpattīsu paññāti nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjantassa anupaṭipāṭiyā vihātabbato uppādetabbato anupubbavihārasaṅkhātāsu rūpārūpasamāpattīsu sampayuttā aṭṭha paññā ceva tadanantaraṃ nirodhaṃ phusitvā vuṭṭhitassa nirodhaṃ santato paccavekkhaṇañāṇañcāti nava.
在《十集》中说到“如来”:就像维巴斯等过去的古仙人那样而来,正自觉者也是这样而来的。“如来力”:是其他人不具备、只属于如来的诸力;或者也可以理解为,就像过去诸佛的诸力是由福德积累的圆满而来,这些力也是这样而来的。其中,如来的力有两种:身力和智力。在这两者当中,身力应当依照大象族类的次第来理解。古人们曾这样说:巴利
Dasake tathāgatassāti yathā vipassīādayo pubbakā isayo āgatā, tathā āgatassa sammāsambuddhassa. Tathāgatabalānīti aññehi asādhāraṇāni tathāgatasseva balāni, yathā vā pubbabuddhānaṃ balāni puññussayasampattiyā āgatāni, tathā āgatāni balānītipi attho. Tattha duvidhaṃ tathāgatassa balaṃ kāyabalaṃ, ñāṇabalañca. Tesu kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ porāṇehi –
“ 黑羯罗婆象、恒河象、般达罗象、昙婆象、宾伽罗象,
香象、吉祥象、金象、伍波萨他象、六牙象,这十种。”巴利
‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 760; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.22; a. ni. 10.21; udā. aṭṭha. 75; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 1.39; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.44; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 81);
这十种象族是这样的:其中,黑象族是普通象族。十个人的体力,等于一头黑象的力气;那十头黑象的力气,等于一头恒河象的力气;那十头恒河象的力气,等于一头白象的力气;那十头白象的力气,等于一头黄褐象的力气;那十头黄褐象的力气,等于一头花色象的力气;那十头花色象的力气,等于一头香象的力气;那十头香象的力气,等于一头吉祥象的力气;那十头吉祥象的力气,等于一头金象的力气;那十头金象的力气,等于一头伍波萨他象的力气;那十头伍波萨他象的力气,等于一头六牙象的力气;那十头六牙象的力气,就称为如来的那拉亚纳力。按普通象来算,这是百亿头象的力气;按人来算,这是千亿个人的力气。这就是如来的身力。至于十力、四无畏等无数千种智慧,则叫做智力。这里指的正是智力。因为智以不可动摇和支撑之义,被称为力。巴利
Imāni hi dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ, yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakahatthino balaṃ, yaṃ tesaṃ dasannaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ tambassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthino, tesaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ hemassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ uposathassa, tesaṃ dasannaṃ balaṃ chaddantassa, yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa nārāyaṇabalanti vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. Yāni pana dasabalacatuvesārajjādīni anekāni ñāṇasahassāni, etaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma. Idhāpi ñāṇabalameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāṇañhi akampiyaṭṭhena, upatthambhanaṭṭhena ca balanti vuttaṃ.
具足哪些力呢?就是具足十种智力。“牛王立处”就是最殊胜的立足之处。另外,统领百头牛的牛中之首叫usabha,统领千头牛的牛中之首叫vasabha;或者说统领百头牛的叫usabha,统领千头牛的叫vasabha,一切牛中最殊胜的叫nisabha——它通体白色,令人欢喜,能背负沉重负担,能承受一切危险,即使上百个雷同时炸响也不为所动,这里所说的“usabha”指的就是这种nisabha。这也是它的同义词。属于usabha的,就叫āsabha。“处”是指具足牛王之力者用四蹄压稳大地、安住不动的立足之处,而这个立足之处就像牛王的一样,所以叫āsabha。正如被称为nisabha的usabha具足牛王之力,用四蹄压稳大地,以不动的姿态站立;同样,如来具足十力,以四无畏为足,踏稳八种众会的大地,在有天有人的世间中,不被任何人所压制,以不动的姿态安住。他对这一点加以宣称、认可、不否认,并把它归于自己,所以说“宣称牛王立处”。巴利
Yehibalehi samannāgatoti yehi dasahi ñāṇabalehi upeto. Āsabhaṇṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho. Vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho nisabho, seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho sabbaparissayasaho asanisatasaddehipi akampanīyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti tassa nisabhabalasamannāgatassa catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānaṃ, idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ. Yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi hi dasabalasamannāgato catuvesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci appadhaṃsiyo acalena ṭhānena tiṭṭhati, tañcesa paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti attani āropeti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti (vibha. 760).
“于众中”是指在八种众会之中。“作狮子吼”是指发出最殊胜的吼声、无畏的吼声,或者发出类似狮子吼的声音。这个含义应当依据《狮子吼经》来说明。又或者,正如狮子因为能忍受、能摧伏而被称为“狮子”,同样,如来也因为能忍受世间法、能摧破外道的言论而被称为“狮子”,并发出这样的吼声。巴利
Parisāsūti aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena dīpetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato ca hananato ca ‘‘sīho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgatopi lokadhammānaṃ sahanato, parappavādānañca hananato ‘‘sīho’’ti vuccati, tassa nādaṃ nadati.
在“梵轮”等说法里,“梵”是最上、清净的意思。“轮”这个字,在“诸比丘,有这四种轮,具备这些轮的天与人……”等处,表示成就;在“足底生有轮……”等处,表示相;在“如轮随运载者的脚”处,表示车轮;在“四轮九门”处,表示威仪;在“为一切众生转轮”处,表示布施;在“天的轮宝出现”处,表示宝轮;在“贪求之人的头顶上轮在旋转”处,表示胸轮;在“即使以利刃为边的轮”处,表示武器轮;在“雷轮”处,表示雷电圜;在“我所转的轮”处,表示法轮。而在这里,则用于法轮之义。巴利
Brahmacakkantiādīsu brahmanti uttamaṃ visuddhaṃ. Cakka-saddo panāyaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussāna’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.31) sampattiyaṃ dissati. ‘‘Pādatalesu cakkāni jātānī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.35; 3.204; ma. ni. 2.386) lakkhaṇe. ‘‘Cakkaṃva vahato pada’’nti (dha. pa. 1) ettha rathaṅge. ‘‘Catucakkaṃ navadvāra’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.29) ettha iriyāpathe. ‘‘Cakkaṃ pavattaya sabbapāṇina’’nti (jā. 1.7.149) ettha dāne. ‘‘Dibbaṃ cakkaratanaṃ pāturahosī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.85) ettha ratanacakke. ‘‘Icchāhatassa posassa, cakkaṃ bhamati matthake’’ti (jā. 1.1.104; 1.5.103) ettha uracakke. ‘‘Khurapariyantena cepi cakkenā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.166) ettha paharaṇacakke. ‘‘Asanicakka’’nti (dī. ni. 3.61; saṃ. ni. 2.162) ettha asanimaṇḍale. ‘‘Mayā pavattitaṃ cakka’’nti (su. ni. 562) ettha dhammacakke. Idha pana dhammacakke pavattati.
法轮有两种:证悟智和教说智。其中,由智慧所培育、能给自己带来圣果的出世间智,是证悟智;由悲悯所培育、能给弟子们带来圣果的欲界智,是教说智。不过这两种智都是不与他人共有的,唯独是诸佛亲生的智慧。他使这法轮转动、生起、阐明、广泛传播,这就是“转法轮”的意思。巴利
Dhammacakkañca duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañca desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ lokuttaraṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ kāmāvacaraṃ desanāñāṇaṃ, ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaññeva orasañāṇaṃ, taṃ pavatteti uppādeti vibhāveti vitthārikaṃ karotīti attho.
现在,为了详细解释最初列出的十种智,也就是“如来力”,经文说“哪十种呢?在此,如来……”等等。其中,“以处为处”就是“以因为因”。所谓因,是因为果依止于它,依靠它才得以生起和持续,所以称为“处”。“以非处为非处”就是“以非因为非因”。“以彼智……”即是以那种智如实了知,这也就是如来的处非处智,名为如来力。这是其义。如是于上一切处,应当了知句子的连接。然而,在此,世尊如何以处为处、以非处为非处而如实了知呢?此非处、无此道理:见具足的人若将任何行执为常……乃至……若将任何法执为我,若杀母、杀父……乃至……杀阿拉汉,若以恶心出如来血,若破僧,若另立大师,若生第八有,此非处不存在;而凡夫则能做这一切,此是处存在——他如实了知。同样,若于一个世界中有二位正自觉者无前无后而出现,或二转轮王出现,此非处不存在;而一者出现,此是处存在——他了知。同样,若身恶行等三种恶行产生可爱果报,而善行产生不可爱果报,此非处不存在;反之,它们的果报产生,此是处存在——他了知。诸法以诸法为因、为缘而生起,那即是处,其他是非处——他如实了知。然而,在此,这是依义注的简要抉择。“以乐执取”一语,是依“一向乐的我”等见的颠倒,以乐的方式执取而言。然而,依想颠倒和心颠倒,即使是圣弟子,被烦恼之热所制伏,如被醉象所怖,如欲净者之于粪坑,也会将某些行执为乐。在执取为我的部分,为了摄受遍处等施设以及涅槃,不说“行”而说“某些法”。巴利
Idāni yāni dasa ñāṇāni ādito ‘‘tathāgatabalānī’’ti nikkhittāni, tāni vitthāretuṃ ‘‘katamāni dasa? Idha tathāgato’’tiādimāha. Tattha ṭhānañca ṭhānatoti kāraṇañca kāraṇato. Kāraṇaṃ hi yasmā tattha phalaṃ tiṭṭhati tadāyattavuttitāya uppajjati ceva pavattati ca, tasmā ṭhānanti vuccati. Aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānatoti akāraṇañca akāraṇato. Yampīti yena ñāṇena yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, idampi ṭhānāṭhānañāṇaṃ tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ nāma hotīti attho. Evaṃ uparipi sabbattha yojanā veditabbā. Kathaṃ panettha bhagavā ṭhānañca ṭhānato, aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti? Aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo kañci saṅkhāraṃ niccato upagaccheyya…pe… kañci dhammaṃ attato upagaccheyya, mātaraṃ jīvitā voropeyya, pitaraṃ…pe… arahantaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, paduṭṭhacittena tathāgatassa lohitaṃ uppādeyya, saṅghaṃ bhindeyya, aññaṃ satthāraṃ uddiseyya, aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ nibbatteyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, puthujjano panetaṃ sabbaṃ kareyyāti ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti pajānāti, tathā yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyuṃ, tathā dve rājāno cakkavattī uppajjeyyuṃ, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, eko pana uppajjati, ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti pajānāti, tathā yaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ duccaritānaṃ iṭṭho vipāko, sucaritānañca aniṭṭho vipāko nibbatteyyāti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati, tabbiparīto pana nesaṃ vipāko nibbatteyyāti ṭhānametaṃ vijjatīti, ye ye dhammā yesaṃ yesaṃ dhammānaṃ hetū paccayā uppādāya, taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ, itare aṭṭhānanti yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, ettha panāyaṃ saṅkhepato aṭṭhakathāvinicchayo. ‘‘Sukhato upagaccheyyā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ekantasukhī attā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.27) diṭṭhivipallāsavasena sukhato gāhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, saññācittavipallāsavasena pana ariyasāvakopi kilesapariḷāhābhibhūto mattahatthiparitāsito viya, sucikāmo gūthakūpaṃ viya kañci saṅkhāraṃ sukhato upagacchati, attato upagamanavāre kasiṇādipaṇṇattiyā, nibbānassa ca saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘‘saṅkhāra’’nti avatvā ‘‘kañci dhamma’’nti vuttaṃ.
在“母亲”等语句中,虽然圣弟子即使被人砍头,也不会为了哪怕一只小虫而杀生,或者在偷盗等任何会导致堕入恶趣的恶行中,即使在未来世也不可能去做,但这里举出五无间业,是为了显示凡夫状态的极大过患。因为凡夫状态确实充满过失,甚至到了会造下无间业的地步。在这里,只有人杀死同样是人身的生母或生父,即使对方正处于转变性别之际,夺去其生命,这个业才成为无间业。但如果是畜生身的母亲或父亲,或者自己身为畜生而杀死人身的母亲、父亲,或者畜生身的母亲、父亲,夺去其生命,都不会触及无间业;不过这个业很重,紧挨着无间业。杀死人身的阿拉汉,也才触及无间业。如果在他还是凡夫时打了他,后来他证得阿拉汉果,因那次伤害导致的病痛而死,那么打人者就成了杀阿拉汉者;但杀死夜叉身的阿拉汉则不算。杀死其他圣者,即使对方是人,也没有无间业,但其业与无间业相似。如果布施给凡夫的物品,在他证果后受用,那仍是布施给凡夫的;杀死其他圣者没有无间业,但其业很重。在这里应当了解“羊”等四例:以“我要杀羊”的意图,却误杀了躺在羊位置上的母亲、父亲或阿拉汉,则触及无间业;以杀羊的意图,或以杀母等的意图,却杀了羊,则不触及无间业;以杀母等的意图,杀死了他们,则确实触及无间业。盗贼四例等也应同样理解。巴利
Mātarantiādīsu kiñcāpi ariyasāvako sīsacchedaṃ pāpuṇantopi kunthakipillikaṃ upādāya pāṇātipātaṃ, adinnādānādīsu vā yaṃkiñci duccaritaṃ apāyahetubhūtaṃ kātuṃ bhavantarepi na sakkoti, puthujjanabhāvassa pana mahāsāvajjatādassanatthamettha pañcānantariyāneva uddhaṭāni. Sāvajjo hi puthujjanabhāvo, yatra hi nāma ānantariyānipi karissatīti. Ettha ca manussabhūtasseva manussabhūtaṃ janikaṃ mātaraṃ, pitaraṃ vā api parivattaliṅgaṃ jīvitā voropentassa kammaṃ ānantariyaṃ hoti. Tiracchānabhūtaṃ pana mātaraṃ, pitaraṃ vā sayaṃ vā tiracchānabhūto manussabhūtaṃ, tiracchānabhūtaṃ vā jīvitā voropento ānantariyaṃ na phusati, kammaṃ pana bhāriyaṃ, ānantariyaṃ āhacceva tiṭṭhati. Arahantampi manussabhūtameva ghātento ānantariyaṃ phusati. Tassa ca puthujjanakāle pahāraṃ datvā arahattaṃ patvā tasmiṃ teneva rogena matepi arahantaghātako hoti, na yakkhabhūtaṃ arahantaṃ, sesaariyapuggale vā manussabhūtepi ghātento, kammaṃ pana ānantariyasadisaṃ hoti. Yaṃ pana puthujjanakāle dinnaṃ dānaṃ arahattaṃ patvā paribhuñjati, puthujjanasseva taṃ dinnaṃ hoti, sesaariyapuggale mārentassa ānantariyaṃ natthi, kammaṃ pana garukaṃ hoti. Ettha ca eḷakādicatukkaṃ veditabbaṃ – ‘‘eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti hi abhisandhinā eḷakaṭṭhāne nipannaṃ mātaraṃ, pitaraṃ, arahantaṃ vā mārento ānantariyaṃ phusati, eḷakābhisandhinā vā mātādiabhisandhinā vā eḷakaṃ mārento ānantariyaṃ na phusati, mātādiabhisandhinā te eva mārento phusateva. Esa nayo coracatukkādīsupi.
关于出佛身血:如来身不可毁坏,即使他人以嗔恨心加害,也不会割破皮肤或流血。但提婆达多掷出石头,石头碎裂后碎片击中佛身,在体内某一处只像小苍蝇吸吮那么一点点血不均匀地积聚,做这种事的人就犯下无间业。然而像吉瓦咖那样以柔软心为佛排出淤血、让佛感到舒适,就不是无间业,反而生起福德。世尊般涅槃之后,破坏塔、砍伐菩提树、对舍利加以损害,不构成无间业,但那种业与无间业相似。不过,如果菩提树的枝条妨碍了塔,或者妨碍了安置舍利的佛像,就可以截断那枝条;如果妨碍塔的地基,就可以破坏地面通过;如果妨碍菩提树根,就可以截断树根搬走。即使有鸟栖息在枝条上,在塔上拉粪,也应当截断那枝条。因为受用塔比起肉身塔来,肉身塔更为重大。如果妨碍的是没有安置舍利的像堂或菩提堂,就不应截断枝条;但如果是为了吸收养分的枝条,或者是腐烂处,就可以截断,如同护理身体一样,这样做只会生起福德。巴利
Lohituppāde tathāgatassa abhejjakāyatāya kuddhacittassa parassa upakkamena cammacchedo, lohitapaggharaṇaṃ vā natthi, devadattena pana paviddhasilāto bhijjitvā gatasakkhalikappahārena viya sarīrassa antoyeva ekasmiṃ ṭhāne yathā khuddikamakkhikāpivanamattampi lohitaṃ visamaṃ samosarati, tathā karontassa ānantariyaṃ hoti, na pana jīvakasseva muducittena duṭṭhalohitaṃ nīharitvā phāsukaṃ karontassa , puññameva panassa hoti, parinibbute bhagavati cetiyaṃ bhindantassa, bodhiṃ chindantassa, dhātūsu upakkamantassa ca ānantariyaṃ na hoti, kammaṃ pana ānantariyasadisaṃ hoti. Bodhirukkhassa pana thūpaṃ vā sadhātukaṃ paṭimaṃ vā bādhayamānaṃ sākhaṃ, cetiyavatthuṃ bhinditvā gacchantaṃ bodhimūlañca chinditvā harituṃ vaṭṭati. Sacepi sākhāya nilīnā sakuṇā cetiye vaccaṃ pātenti, chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Paribhogacetiyato hi sarīracetiyameva mahantataraṃ. Dhātunidhānarahitaṃ paṭimāgharaṃ vā bodhigharaṃ vā bādhentaṃ sākhaṃ chindituṃ na vaṭṭati, ojoharaṇasākhaṃ, panassa pūtiṭṭhānaṃ vā chindituṃ vaṭṭati, sarīrapaṭijaggane viya puññameva hoti.
在僧团分裂这件事上,当同一界内同住的僧众还同住在一起时,有人另外拉出一群别众,用五种方式分裂僧团,这就构成破僧,也构成无间业。经里确实这样说过:“优波离,僧团以五种行相而分裂。是哪五种?以甘马、以诵戒、以宣说、以告示、以取筹。”其中,“以甘马”是指用白、白二、白四等甘马中的任何一种甘马。“以诵戒”是指诵巴帝摩卡。“以宣说”是指用种种理由讲说,显示“非法是法、法是非法”等十八种破僧事。“以告示”是指以“你们岂不知我等多闻等德行?如我之人,如何会执取非律、违逆师教?何以不惧恶趣?”等言词,于耳边作口业分裂而告示。“以取筹”是指以如是宣说与告示坚固其心,成不退转,而后说“取此筹”而行取筹。巴利
Saṅghabhede samānasaṃvāsasīmāya samānasaṃvāsake saṅghe ekato ṭhite visuṃ vaggasaṅghaṃ gahetvā pañcahi kāraṇehi saṅghaṃ bhindantassa saṅghabhedo hoti ānantariyakammañca. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘pañcahi, upāli, ākārehi saṅgho bhijjati. Katamehi pañcahi? Kammena uddesena voharanto anussāvanena salākaggāhenā’’ti (pari. 458). Tattha kammenāti apalokanādīsu catūsu aññatarena kammena. Uddesenāti pātimokkhuddesena. Voharanto kathayanto tāhi tāhi upapattīhi ‘‘adhammaṃ dhammo’’tiādīni aṭṭhārasa bhedakaravatthūni dīpento. Anussāvanenāti ‘‘nanu tumhe jānātha mayhaṃ bahussutādibhāvaṃ, kathaṃ hi nāma mādiso uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ satthusāsanaṃ gāheyya, kimahaṃ apāyato na bhāyāmī’’tiādinā nayena kaṇṇamūle vacībhedaṃ katvā anussāvanena. Salākaggāhenāti evaṃ vohārānussāvanehi tesaṃ cittaṃ upatthambhetvā anivattidhammaṃ katvā ‘‘gaṇhatha imaṃ salāka’’nti salākaggāhena.
在这里,只有甘马或诵戒才是判定破僧的标准,而说、告示和取筹只是前行步骤。即使这些前行步骤已经完成,僧团也还没有破裂。只有当通过说和告示,让四位或更多比丘取筹,执取别众,另行做甘马或诵戒时,这才叫做僧团破裂。如果以不破裂为前提,怀着和合想而做,就没有破僧,也没有无间业;人数不够而做,同样如此。经中这样说:“优波离,一边有四人,一边有四人,第九人告示……”等等。巴利
Ettha ca kammameva uddeso vā pamāṇaṃ, vohārānussāvanasalākaggāhā pana pubbabhāgā. Tesu nipphannesupi abhinnova hoti saṅgho. Yadā pana vohārānussāvanehi cattāro vā atireke vā bhikkhū salākaṃ gāhetvā vaggaṃ saṅghaṃ gahetvā visuṃ kammaṃ vā uddesaṃ vā karoti, tadā saṅgho bhinno nāma hoti. Abhedapurekkhārassa pana samaggasaññāya vaṭṭati. Samaggasaññāya hi karontassa neva bhedo hoti, na ānantariyaṃ, tathā tato ūnaparisāya karontassa. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ ‘‘ekato, upāli, cattāro honti ekato cattāro, navamo anussāvetī’’tiādi (cūḷava. 351).
在这五种无间业里,破僧是语业,其余的是身业;不过这些全都可能从身门生起,也可能从语门生起。因为即使有人用手势搞分裂,破僧也能从身门生起。而且这里的破僧,其果报会持续一劫。只有到劫坏灭时,才能从破僧业中解脱;其余那些业并没有这样的固定规则。造下这五种业的人,只有破僧业会在地狱里成熟受报,其余那些则归入“有业却没有业报”等等之类。没有破僧的时候,就是出佛身血;没有出佛身血的时候,就是杀阿拉汉;没有杀阿拉汉的时候,就是杀母或杀父;杀母或杀父时,则是对其中戒德更胜者。其中前四种,是一切在家众和出家众都共通的;但破僧只属于正常状态的比丘,对其他人不共通。因为比丘尼也不能破僧,其他人就更不用说了。应当知道,这五种业都与苦受相应,也都以嗔为根。巴利
Imesu pana pañcasu ānantariyesu saṅghabhedo vacīkammaṃ, sesāni kāyakammāni, sabbāneva kho tāni kāyadvāratopi vacīdvāratopi samuṭṭhahanti. Saṅghabhedopi hi hatthamuddāya bhedaṃ karontassa kāyadvāratopi samuṭṭhāti, saṅghabhedo cettha kappaṭṭhitiyo. Kappavināse eva hi saṅghabhedato muccati, sesānaṃ pana tathā niyamo natthi. Yena ca pañcapetāni kammāni katāni honti, tassa saṅghabhedova niraye vipaccati, sesāni ‘‘ahosi kammaṃ nāhosi kammavipāko’’ti evamādīsu saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Saṅghabhedābhāve lohituppādo, tadabhāve arahantaghāto , tadabhāve mātughāto, pitughāto vā, tasmimpi sīlasampannatare. Purimāni cettha cattāri sabbesaṃ gahaṭṭhapabbajitānaṃ sādhāraṇāni, saṅghabhedo pana pakatattassa bhikkhunova, asādhāraṇo aññesaṃ, bhikkhunīpi hi saṅghaṃ na bhindati, pageva itare. Pañcapi cetāni dukkhavedanāsampayuttāni, dosamūlāni cāti veditabbāni.
“应生第八有”:在这里,圣弟子对第八有的不执取是由什么决定的?由内观决定。谁的观智锐利,他只生一次有就证得阿拉汉,这叫“一种子”。谁的观智迟钝,他在第二……乃至第六有证得阿拉汉,这叫“家家”。谁的观智极其迟钝,他不超越第七有,就在那里必定证得阿拉汉,这叫“七返极”。即使他在第七有中入睡时,有雷电或山顶落到他头上,他也会在那一刻证得阿拉汉而入般涅槃。正是就最高限度不超越第七有而言,才说“必定以正觉为归宿”。巴利
Aṭṭhamaṃ bhavaṃ nibbatteyyāti ettha ariyasāvakassa aṭṭhamabhavāgahaṇaṃ kena niyāmitanti? Vipassanāya. Yassa hi sā tikkhā, so ekaṃ eva bhavaṃ nibbattitvā arahattaṃ patvā ekabījī nāma hoti. Yassa mandā, so dutiye…pe… chaṭṭhe vā bhave arahattaṃ patvā kolaṃkolo nāma hoti. Yassa pana atimandā, so sattamaṃ bhavaṃ nātikkamati, tattha niyamena arahattaṃ pāpuṇitvā sattakkhattuparamo nāma hoti. Sacepi hissa sattame bhave niddaṃ okkantassa matthake asani vā pabbatakūṭo vā pateyya, tasmimpi kāle arahattaṃ patvāva parinibbāti. Uttamakoṭiyā hi sattamabhavānatikkamanaññeva sandhāyeva ‘‘niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.66; 2.169; saṃ. ni. 5.998) vuttoti.
在一个世界界中不会同时出现两位阿拉汉、正自觉者。所谓“一万个轮围”称为诞生田,就是一个世界界;因为在教令所行的世界界中,根本不可能有佛陀出现。这里并不是普遍地禁止两位佛陀出现,而只是就诞生田作出这一禁止。除了这个轮围之外,别的轮围里不会有佛陀出现,因为成佛之因、无始以来的佛陀相续等,本来就是这样的。也正因为如此,众生不能全部彻底地证入涅槃。如果一切轮围中都有佛陀出现,那么一切众生早就应该全部彻底地证入涅槃了;但事实并不是这样。所以应当知道:在无始以来的佛陀相续中,具备成劫所依条件的众生所居住的地方,正是这个轮围,佛陀只在这里出现。即使在这里,佛陀也是极难遇到的;正因为极难遇到,所以这里即使经过无数劫,也可能一直没有佛陀出世。如果佛陀容易遇到,那么在一个住劫的无数劫中,甚至可以有六十四位佛陀出现,因为中间劫有佛陀间隔的缘故。而在贤劫中,也只有五位佛陀出现。既然在这里佛陀都如此难遇,又怎么会出现在别的轮围中呢?佛陀难遇,是因为因缘难遇,所以佛陀只在这个轮围中出现。即使在这里,佛陀也不是出现在天界或梵天界,而只出现在人间。因为只有在这里,承载三种正法的僧宝才完全显现;在其他世界则完全没有这样的可能。巴利
Ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhātiādīsu dasasahassacakkavāḷasaṅkhātaṃ jātikhettaṃ ekā lokadhātu nāma āṇāvisayakhettesu buddhuppattisaṅkāya evābhāvato. Tattha dvinnaṃ buddhānaṃ uppattipaṭisedhaṃ akatvā jātikhette eva kato. Ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā na uppajjanti buddhattahetūnaṃ anādibuddhaparamparādīnaṃ tathābhāvā. Tato eva hi sattā niravasesato nibbutiṃ na pāpuṇanti. Yadi hi sabbacakkavāḷesu buddhā uppajjeyyuṃ, sabbe sattā ito pubbe niravasesato nibbutiṃ pāpuṇeyyuṃ, na ca taṃ atthi, tasmā anādibuddhaparamparāya vivaṭṭūpanissayasampannānaṃ nivāsabhūte imasmiṃ cakkavāḷe eva uppajjantīti veditabbā. Te cetthāpi dullabhā, tesaṃ dullabhattā evettha kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyampi buddhuppādarahitaṃ hoti. Yadi ca te sulabhā bhaveyyuṃ, ekasmiṃ vivaṭṭaṭṭhāyiasaṅkhyeyye catusaṭṭhibuddhānampi uppajjituṃ sakkā bhaveyya antarakappassa buddhantarattā. Bhaddakappesu cettha pañca buddhā eva uppajjanti. Kathaṃ panetthāpi dullabhatarā cakkavāḷantaresu uppajjeyyuṃ, buddhānañca dullabhatā kāraṇadullabhatāya, tasmā imasmiññeva cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjanti? Etthāpi na devabrahmalokesu, manussaloke eva pana uppajjanti ettheva sabbaso tividhasaddhammādhārassa saṅgharatanassa pātubhāvato, itaralokesu niravasesato pakārāsambhavato ca.
如果佛陀投生到天界之类的地方,人们因为害怕,连靠近都做不到,更不用说听法、出家这些事了。正因为这样,我们的菩萨凭借自身色身的威德等种种成就,为了让那些生起“这不是普通人”的疑惑和好奇的人们心服,便按照婴儿仰卧等成长次第渐渐长大,娶妻成家等等。这样示现之后,他虽然出了家,但当他进入王舍城乞食,坐在般荼婆山旁边食用乞食之食的时候,频婆娑罗王也是从各方面仔细观察他是否具有人的本质之后,才敢上前接近,否则是不敢的。佛陀是为了救度世间才出世的,不是为了自己获得恭敬供养等,所以应当知道,佛陀只投生在人间。而且在人间,也只在这个赡部洲;在这个赡部洲,也只在这个中部地区。不只是佛陀,独觉佛、上首弟子、大弟子、转轮王等以及其他有福德的众生,也都只投生在这里。巴利
Yadi hi buddhā devalokādīsu uppajjeyyuṃ, manussā bhayena upasaṅkamitumeva na sakkonti, pageva dhammasavanapabbajjādiṃ kātuṃ, teneva amhākaṃ bodhisatto attano rūpakāyānubhāvādisampattiyā uppannaamanussasaṅkākutūhalaṃ janaṃ nijjhāpetuṃ uttānaseyyakādiniyāmena vaḍḍhitvā dārapariggahādiṃ akāsi, evaṃ katvā pabbajitampi naṃ rājagahe piṇḍāya pavisitvā paṇḍavapabbatapasse nisīditvā piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjantaṃ bimbisāro nānappakārato manussabhāvaṃ vicinitvāva upasaṅkamituṃ visahi, no aññathā. Lokanitthāraṇatthāya hi buddhā uppajjanti, na attano sakkārādiatthāya, tasmā manussesu eva uppajjantīti veditabbo. Tatthāpi imasmiṃ jambudīpe eva, tatthāpi imasmiṃ majjhimapadese eva. Na kevalañca buddhāva, paccekabuddhā, aggasāvakamahāsāvakā ca cakkavattiādayo ca aññepi puññavantasattā ettheva uppajjanti.
“非前非后”在这里是指:从入母胎结生之前,叫“前”;从舍利消失之后,叫“后”;两者之间,叫“非前非后”。在这中间,其他佛陀的出世是被遮止的;但舍利消失之后,其他佛陀的出世就不被遮止了。虽然不被遮止,也应当知道,要经过一个中间劫才会出世。巴利
Apubbaṃ acarimanti ettha mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhiggahaṇato pure pubbaṃ nāma, dhātuantaradhānato pacchā carimaṃ nāma, ubhinnamantarā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ nāma. Etthantare aññassa buddhassa uppatti nivāritā, dhātuantaradhāne pana jāte aññassa uppatti na nivāritā. Kiñcāpi na nivāritā, antarakappaṃ pana khepetvāva uppajjantīti veditabbaṃ.
有五种消失:证得消失、行道消失、教法隐没、形相消失、舍利消失。其中,证得是指道果、神通和无碍解。它衰退的时候,是从无碍解开始衰退的。因为从般涅槃之后,只有一千年还能证得无碍解;再往后还能证得神通,再往后连神通也证不到了,就成了干观漏尽者;再往后是不来者;再往后是一来者;再往后是入流者。即使他们还活着,证得也尚未消失;等到最后一位入流者命终时,证得就叫做消失了。这就是证得消失。巴利
Pañca hi antaradhānāni nāma adhigamaantaradhānaṃ paṭipattiantaradhānaṃ pariyattiantaradhānaṃ liṅgaantaradhānaṃ dhātuantaradhānanti. Tattha adhigamoti maggaphalābhiññāpaṭisambhidāyo, so parihāyamāno paṭisambhidāto paṭṭhāya parihāyati. Parinibbānato hi vassasahassameva paṭisambhidā nibbattetuṃ sakkonti, tato paraṃ abhiññā, tāpi nibbattetuṃ asakkontā sukkhavipassakakhīṇāsavā honti, tato anāgāmino, tato sakadāgāmino, sotāpannā ca honti, tesu dharantesupi adhigamo anantarahitova hoti, pacchimakassa pana sotāpannassa jīvitakkhayena adhigamo antarahito nāma hoti. Idaṃ adhigamaantaradhānaṃ.
从此,他们无法证得道果,就想:“如今我们已没有圣法的证悟了。”于是在禅那和内观上放弃努力,变得懈怠放逸,只守护四遍净戒,彼此之间不举罪、不提醒,成了无悔者。从那时起,他们开始违犯小小戒,接着违犯重罪,只守护巴拉基格。即使他们还在世,行道也尚未消失;但最后一位比丘因为戒坏或命终,行道才名为消失。这叫作行道消失。巴利
Tato maggaphalāni nibbattetuṃ asakkontā ‘‘natthi dāni no ariyadhammapaṭivedho’’ti jhānavipassanāsu vosānaṃ āpajjitvā kosajjabahulā catupārisuddhisīlamattaṃ rakkhanto aññamaññaṃ na codenti, na sārenti, akukkuccakā honti, tato paṭṭhāya khuddānukhuddakāni maddanti, tato garukāpattiṃ āpajjanti, pārājikamattameva rakkhanti, tesu dharantesupi paṭipatti anantarahitāva hoti, pacchimakassa pana bhikkhuno sīlabhedena vā jīvitakkhayena vā paṭipatti antarahitā nāma hoti. Idaṃ paṭipattiantaradhānaṃ nāma.
教理,就是包含义注的三藏佛语。随着时间一代代过去,由于非法之人、争斗时代的国王等缘故,庄稼歉收、物资匮乏,施主们变得贫困,比丘们又为资具所苦,没法收弟子。于是义注失传,只能靠巴利原文来持守教理;再往后,连整部巴利原文也持守不住了。最先失传的是阿毗达摩藏,而且是从末尾开始失传的。也就是说,最先失传的是那部大论,接着双论、论事、人施设论、界论、分别论、法集论依次失传。然后从末尾开始,经藏也失传了:最先失传的是增支部,从十一集一直失传到一集;接着从末尾开始,相应部也失传了,最先失传的是大品,然后是六处品、蕴品、因缘品、有偈品。就这样,中部、长部等也从末尾开始失传。再后来,只剩下律藏,而律藏也从附随开始,一直到大分别都失传了,最后只靠从伍波萨他犍度开始的论母来持守。那时候,只要四句偈还在人间流传,教理就还没有消失;一旦四句偈消失了,教理就名为消失。这叫作教理消失。巴利
Pariyattīti sāṭṭhakathaṃ tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ, gacchante gacchante kāle adhammikehi kaliyugarājādīhi vipannasassādisampattitāya paccayadāyakā duggatā honti, bhikkhū ca paccayehi kilamantā antevāsike gahetuṃ na sakkonti. Tato aṭṭhakathā parihāyati, pāḷivaseneva pariyattiṃ dhārenti, tato pāḷiṃ sakalaṃ dhāretuṃ na sakkonti, paṭhamaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ parihāyati, tañcassa parihāyanaṃ matthakato paṭhāya. Paṭhamameva hi mahāpakaraṇaṃ parihāyati, tato yamakaṃ kathāvatthu puggalapaññatti dhātukathā vibhaṅgo dhammasaṅgaho ca anukkamena parihāyanti, tato matthakato paṭṭhāya suttantapiṭakaṃ parihāyati, paṭhamaṃ hi aṅguttaranikāyo ekādasakanipātato paṭṭhāya yāvaekakanipātā parihāyati, tato matthakato paṭṭhāya saṃyuttanikāyo, paṭhamaṃ hi mahāvaggo parihāyati, tato saḷāyatanavaggo khandhakavaggo nidānavaggo sagāthāvaggoti, evaṃ majjhimanikāyadīghanikāyādayo ca matthakato paṭṭhāya parihāyanti, tato vinayapiṭakameva tiṭṭhati, tampi parivārato paṭṭhāya yāva mahāvibhaṅgā parihāyati, tato uposathakkhandhakato mātikāmattameva dhārenti, tadāpi yāva catuppadikāpi gāthā manussesu pavattati, tāva pariyatti anantarahitāva hoti, tāya antarahitāya pariyatti antarahitā nāma hoti. Idaṃ pariyattiantaradhānaṃ nāma.
时间一天天过去,拿钵、拿袈裟等举止变得不再庄重。他们像尼干陀等外道那样,把葫芦钵之类夹在腋下,或者挂在肩上,或者吊在网袋里到处走。染袈裟也不像样了,染成骆驼骨头一样的颜色就穿着。到后来连染色、缝补都不做了,像游方者那样把布边剪掉,只披一块袈裟布而已。到了更衰败的时候,他们把一小块袈裟布绑在手上或脖子上,去耕田种地,养家糊口。那时候,布施的人还是冲着僧团的名义,把东西布施给他们。世尊就是针对这种情况说的:“阿难,将来会有一些种姓者,脖子上挂着袈裟,却戒行败坏、品行恶劣。人们会冲着僧团的名义,向这些破戒的人布施。阿难,即便如此,我仍然说,以僧团为对象的布施,功德不可计数、不可衡量。”再往后,人们说:“这不过是块没用的碎布,留着它干什么?”就把那块袈裟布剪断,扔到树林里。到了这个时候,就叫做“形相消失”。这就是所谓的形相消失。巴利
Gacchante gacchante kāle pattacīvaraggahaṇādiākappaṃ na pāsādikaṃ hoti, nigaṇṭhādayo viya alābupattādiṃ aggabāhāya pakkhipitvāpi olambitvāpi sikkāya olaggetvāpi vicaranti, cīvararajanampi na sāruppaṃ, oṭṭhaṭṭhikavaṇṇaṃ katvā dhārenti, tato rajanampi ovaṭṭikavijjhanampi na hoti, dasā chetvā paribbājakā viya kāsāvamattameva dhārenti, tato parikkhīṇe kāle khuddakakāsāvakhaṇḍaṃ hatthe vā gīvāya vā bandhitvā kasikammādīni katvā dārabharaṇādiṃ karonti, tadā dakkhiṇaṃ dento jano saṅghaṃ uddissa etesaṃ deti, idaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhavissanti kho panānanda, anāgatamaddhānaṃ gotrabhuno kāsāvakaṇṭhā dussīlā pāpadhammā, tesu dussīlesu saṅghaṃ uddissa dānaṃ dassanti, tadāpahaṃ, ānanda, saṅghagataṃ dakkhiṇaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ appameyyaṃ vadāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.380). Tato ‘‘papañco esa, kiṃ iminā amhāka’’nti taṃ kāsāvakhaṇḍaṃ chinditvā araññe khipanti, etasmiṃ kāle liṅgaṃ antarahitaṃ nāma hoti. Idaṃ liṅgaantaradhānaṃ nāma.
从那以后,这些舍利在各地得不到恭敬供养时,就会依靠诸佛的决意之力,前往能得到恭敬供养的地方。如果到处都得不到供养,所有舍利就会只前往大菩提道场。哪怕只有芥子那么大的舍利,也不会在半路上消失。它们会在菩提道场上,显现出结跏趺坐的佛身庄严,并示现双神变。然后,火界从舍利身中生起,使那佛身归于不可施设、不可得名的状态。那时,一万个世界中的天神就像在般涅槃日那样悲泣,做完礼敬供养之后才离去。这就叫作舍利消失。巴利
Tato tattha tattha sakkārasammānaṃ alabhamānā dhātuyo buddhānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabalena sakkārasammānalabbhamānakaṭṭhānaṃ gamissanti, tato sabbattha alabhamānā sabbadhātuyo mahābodhimaṇḍameva gamissanti. Sāsapamattāpi hi dhātu na antarā nassissati, tā pana bodhimaṇḍe pallaṅkena nisinnabuddhasarīrasiriṃ, yamakapāṭihāriyañca dassessanti, tato dhātusarīrato tejo samuṭṭhāya taṃ sarīraṃ apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gameti, tadā dasasahassacakkavāḷe devatā parinibbānadivase viya paridevitvā pūjāsakkāraṃ katvā pakkamanti. Idaṃ dhātuantaradhānaṃ nāma.
在这五种消失当中,经典教理的消失才是根本。因为经典教理还在时,通达等也不名为消失;经典教理不在时,通达等才名为消失。就像为了让人知道宝瓶的位置,把字刻在石板上,只要那些字还在,宝瓶就不名为消失;一旦那些字消失了,宝瓶才名为消失。应当这样理解其中的道理。正如所说的——巴利
Imassa pañcavidhassa antaradhānassa pariyattiantaradhānameva mūlaṃ. Pariyattiyaṃ hi sati paṭivedhādayopi naṭṭhā nāma na honti, asati naṭṭhāti. Yathā ca nidhikumbhiyā jānanatthāya pāsāṇapiṭṭhe upanibaddhaakkharesu dharantesu nidhikumbhi naṭṭhā nāma na hoti, akkharesu pana naṭṭhesu naṭṭhā, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yathāha –
只要经典还在流传,
只要律还能光显,
他们那时会看见光明,
就像太阳升起的时候。
当经典已不复存在时,
以及当律被遗忘时,
世间将有黑暗,
就像太阳落山的时候。
“ 当经典得到守护而存在时,
修行实践得到守护。
坚定地站在修行道路上的智者,
他们不会从安稳的涅槃中退堕。”巴利
‘‘Yāva tiṭṭhanti suttantā, Vinayo yāva dippati; Tāva dakkhanti ālokaṃ, Sūriye abbhuṭṭhite yathā. ‘‘Suttantesu asantesu, Pamuṭṭhe vinayamhi ca; Tamo bhavissati loke, Sūriye atthaṅgate yathā. ‘‘Suttante rakkhite sante, Paṭipatti hoti rakkhitā; Paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito dhīro, Yogakkhemā na dhaṃsatī’’ti; (A. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.130; sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.438);
应当这样理解:在这五种消失当中,舍利消失之后的那一个,名为最后。巴利
Evamimesu pañcasu antaradhānesu dhātuantaradhānato pacchā carimaṃ nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
为什么两位正自觉者不会一前一后同时出现呢?因为那根本没有意义。确实,一位正自觉者就能对无边世界中的所有众生,如果他们具备足够的根缘,在同一刹那示现神通、宣说一切随顺的法来度化他们,更何况在不同刹那呢?所以,在同一时期有多位正自觉者出现,是毫无意义的。这种无意义,应当从两方面来理解:一是没有稀奇感、不恭敬、争论等过患,二是大地无法承载两位佛陀而崩裂等过患。至于转轮王,在同一个轮围世界里,两位不会同时出现,只会有一位出现。但在不同的轮围世界里,应当知道可以有很多位同时出现。这里“于一个世界”应当理解为“于一个轮围世界”。而这里说的“不一前一后”,应当理解为轮宝出现到消失之间的那段时间。轮宝的消失,是在转轮王命终或出家后的第七天发生。也应当知道,由于他的威力,两位不能在同一处同时出现。剩下的内容就容易理解了。处非处智力是第一。巴利
Kasmā pana dve sammāsambuddhā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ na uppajjantīti? Niratthakatova. Ekova hi sammāsambuddho anantesu cakkavāḷesu sabbasattānampi yadi upanissayo bhaveyya, ekakkhaṇe sapāṭihāriyaṃ sabbānukūlaṃ dhammaṃ desetvā te vinetuṃ sakkoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana nānakkhaṇesu, tasmā ekasmiṃ kāle anekesaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ uppatti niratthikāva. Anatthakatā pana anacchariyaagāravavivādādidosato ceva mahāpathaviyā dvinnaṃ buddhānaṃ dhāraṇe asamatthatāya vikiraṇādidosato ca veditabbā. Cakkavattino pana ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷe dve ekato na uppajjanti, ekova uppajjati. Nānācakkavāḷesu pana bahūpi ekato uppajjantīti veditabbā. Ettha hi ‘‘ekissā lokadhātuyā’’ti etassa ekasmiṃ cakkavāḷeti attho gahetabbo. Apubbaṃ acarimañcettha cakkaratanapātubhāvaantaradhānānaṃ vemajjhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Antaradhānañcassa cakkavattino kālakiriyato, pabbajjāto vā sattame divase hoti, tassa ca ānubhāvena dvinnaṃ ekattha sahaanuppatti ca veditabbā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Ṭhānāṭhānañāṇabalaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
第二,关于“业的取受”,指的是受持之后所造作的善业和不善业;或者业本身就是业的取受。以处和因的方式,也就是从缘的角度以及从被称为因的原因的角度来了知。其中,趣、依报、时节、加行是异熟的缘,业则是因。从这两方面,如实了知业与异熟。怎样了知呢?世尊确实了知:有些人的许多恶业,因为趣、依报、时节、加行都圆满而被挡住,不会成熟;遇到这些方面缺失时,才会成熟。有些人的许多善业,因为这些东西缺失而被挡住,不会成熟;遇到这些方面圆满时,才会成熟。巴利
Dutiye kammasamādānānanti samādiyitvā katānaṃ kusalākusalānaṃ, kammameva vā kammasamādānaṃ. Ṭhānaso hetusoti paccayato ceva hetusaṅkhātakāraṇato ca . Tattha gatiupadhikālapayogā vipākassa paccayā, kammaṃ hetu. Tadubhayato kammavipākaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Kathaṃ? Bhagavā hi ‘‘ekaccassa bahūni pāpakammāni gatiupadhikālapayogānaṃ sampattiyā paṭibāhitāni na vipaccanti, tesaṃ vipattiṃ āgamma vipaccanti, ekaccassa bahūni kalyāṇakammāni tesaṃ vipattiyā paṭibāhitāni na vipaccanti, tesaṃ sampattiṃ āgamma vipaccantī’’ti pajānāti.
在这里,趣的缺失指四种恶道。趣的圆满指人趣和天趣。依报指自体。它的圆满叫依报圆满,不圆满叫依报缺失。时节的圆满指善王、善人时节所摄的圆满时节,与它相反的叫时节缺失。对于每一种业,正确的加行是加行圆满,错误的加行是加行缺失。其中,有些人因为善业而投生到天趣等趣中,依靠那趣的圆满,只有善业成熟。而那些被这趣的圆满所阻碍的不善业,无法在那里成熟。那些不善业,在投生到地狱等恶道时,依靠那趣的缺失,就随其所愿地成熟。而那些被这趣的缺失所阻碍的善业,无法在那里成熟。有些人具备可爱、端正的身体,即使他是奴仆或出身低贱,依靠那依报的圆满,只有善业为他成熟。因为像这样相貌端正的人,人们会认为“这个人与染污的业不相称”,就把他安置在大臣等高位上,甚至把相貌端正的旃陀罗女安置在王后等位置上。而那些被这依报的圆满所阻碍的不善业,无法为他成熟。那些不善业,当处于依报缺失时,就随其所愿地成熟。因为在王族等中出生的人,即使相貌丑陋,也会被安置在低下的位置。有些人投生在初劫之人、转轮王、佛陀、善王善人的圆满时节,依靠那时节的圆满,只有善业成熟,不善业则不成熟。那些不善业,在恶王恶人的恶劣时节,依靠那时节的缺失而成熟,善业则不成熟,因为被那时节的缺失所阻碍。有些人具备持戒、节制等无可指责的加行,或者具备有罪或无罪的加行,并能根据地点和时间运用武器、技艺等能力,依靠那加行圆满,只有善业成熟,不善业则不成熟。那些不善业,依靠与上述相反的加行缺失而成熟,善业则不成熟,因为被那加行缺失所阻碍。因为在战争等中,即使造作杀生等不善业,也只是依靠运用武器、技艺等的加行圆满,而获得将军等大富贵,并不是依靠那不善业。就像在布施、服务等中造作善业,却因为过度努力等加行缺失,而遭受灾祸和毁灭,并不是依靠那善业。如此,世尊如实了知这四种圆满和缺失中,善业与不善业成熟与不成熟的差别。以上是依分别方式对第二个力的说明。巴利
Tattha gativipattīti cattāro apāyā. Gatisampattīti manussadevagatiyo. Upadhīti attabhāvo . Tassa samiddhi sampatti nāma, asamiddhi vipatti nāma. Kālasampattīti surājasumanussakālasaṅkhāto sampannakālo, tappaṭipakkho kālavipatti nāma. Tassa tassa pana kammassa sammāpayogo payogasampatti, micchāpayogo payogavipatti nāma. Tattha hi ekaccassa kusalakammena devagatiādīsu gatiyaṃ nibbattassa taṃ gatisampattiṃ āgamma kusalāni eva vipaccanti. Tāya pana gatisampattiyā paṭibāhitāni akusalāni tattha vipaccituṃ na sakkonti. Tāni puna nirayādīsu apāyesu nibbattassa taṃ gativipattiṃ āgamma yathāsukhaṃ vipaccanti. Tāya pana gativipattiyā paṭibāhitāni kusalāni tattha vipaccituṃ na sakkonti. Ekaccassa dassanīyenābhirūpena kāyena samannāgatassa yadipi so dāso vā hoti hīnajacco vā, taṃ upadhisampattiṃ āgamma kusalāni evassa vipaccanti. Tādisaṃ hi surūpaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ kiliṭṭhakammassa nānucchaviko’’ti uccesu amaccādiṭṭhānesu ṭhapenti, caṇḍālimpi surūpaṃ aggamahesiādiṭṭhānesu ṭhapenti. Tāya pana upadhisampattiyā paṭibāhitāni akusalānassa vipaccituṃ na sakkonti. Tāni pana upadhivipattiyaṃ ca ṭhitassa yathāsukhaṃ vipaccanti. Rājakulādīsu hi uppannampi durūpaṃ hīnesu ṭhapenti. Ekaccassa pana paṭhamakappikānaṃ vā cakkavattirañño vā buddhānaṃ vā surājasumanussānaṃ sampanne kāle nibbattassa taṃ kālasampattiṃ āgamma kusalāni eva vipaccanti, na akusalāni. Tāni puna durājadumanussānaṃ vipanne kāle taṃ kālavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccanti, na pana kusalāni tāya kālavipattiyā paṭibāhitattā. Ekaccassa pana sīlasaṃyamādianavajjapayogena ceva sāvajjena vā anavajjena vā desakālānusārena āyudhasippādipayogasāmatthiyena ca samannāgatassa taṃ payogasampattiṃ āgamma kusalāni eva vipaccanti, na akusalāni. Tāni puna yathāvuttaviparītapayogavipattiṃ āgamma vipaccanti, na pana kusalāni tāya paṭibāhitattā. Yuddhādīsu hi pāṇātipātādiakusalaṃ karontāpi taṃtaṃāyudhasippādipayogasampattiṃ nissāyeva senāpatiṭṭhānādimahāsampattiṃ labhanti, na pana taṃ akusalaṃ nissāya. Yathā dānaveyyāvaccādīsu kusalaṃ karontāpi adhimattavāyāmādipayogavipattiṃ nissāya anayabyasanampi pāpuṇanti, na pana taṃ kusalaṃ nissāya. Evametāhi catūhi sampattīhi, vipattīhi ca kusalākusalānaṃ vipaccanāvipaccanavibhāgaṃ bhagavā yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Ayaṃ tāvettha vibhaṅganayena dutiyabalassa vibhāvanā.
接着,对他来说还有:巴利
Aparena cassa –
曾经有业,也曾经有业的果报;曾经有业,却不曾经有业的果报;曾经有业,现在有业的果报;曾经有业,现在没有业的果报;曾经有业,将来会有业的果报;曾经有业,将来不会有业的果报;现在有业,现在有业的果报;现在有业,现在没有业的果报;现在有业,将来会有业的果报;现在有业,将来不会有业的果报;将来有业,将来会有业的果报;将来有业,将来不会有业的果报。巴利
‘‘Ahosi kammaṃ ahosi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ nāhosi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ atthi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko, ahosi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ natthi kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko, atthi kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko, bhavissati kammaṃ bhavissati kammavipāko , bhavissati kammaṃ na bhavissati kammavipāko’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.234) –
按照《无碍解道》所说的这个方法,也应该理解其阐明方式。其中,在过去世累积所说的业,依靠因缘就在那里给出了果报。针对这一点,说了第一句:“过去有业,过去有异熟。”然而,在过去众多现法受业等当中,有一种现法受业获得条件而给出果报,其余的则不结果。有一种次生受业能牵引结生,有一种无间业能给出地狱的结生,其余的则不结果。在八种等至当中,依靠其中一种而投生到梵天界,其余的则不结果。针对这一点,说了第二句:“过去有业,过去无异熟。”过去所造的业现在给出果报,针对这一点说了第三句。按照前面的方式不成熟,针对这一点说了第四句。将在未来给出果报,针对这一点说了第五句。不成熟,针对这一点说了第六句。现在所累积的业现在当下就给出果报,针对这一点说了第七句。不结果,针对这一点说了第八句。按照这个方法,其余各句的含义也应该这样理解。这是如来的……意思是:这是如来以所有这些方式,如实了知过去、未来、现在各种业与各种异熟的差别的智慧。第二力。巴利
Iminā paṭisambhidāyaṃ vuttenāpi nayena vibhāvanā veditabbā. Tattha yaṃ atītattabhāve āyūhitaṃ kammaṃ vuttaṃ, hetupaccayaṃ āgamma tattheva vipākaṃ adāsi. Idaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ahosi kammaṃ ahosi kammavipāko’’ti paṭhamaṃ padaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ atītesu pana diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīsu bahūsu ekaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ laddhapaccayaṃ vipākaṃ deti, sesāni avipākāni. Ekaṃ upapajjavedanīyaṃ pana paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhati, ekaṃ ānantariyaṃ nirayapaṭisandhiṃ deti, sesāni avipākāni. Aṭṭhasu samāpattīsu ekāya brahmaloke nibbattati, sesā avipākā. Idaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ahosi kammaṃ nāhosi kammavipāko’’ti dutiyaṃ padaṃ vuttaṃ. Yaṃ atītaṃ kammaṃ etarahi vipākaṃ deti, idaṃ sandhāya tatiyaṃ. Yaṃ purimanayena na vipaccati, idaṃ sandhāya catutthaṃ. Yaṃ anāgate vipākaṃ dassati, idaṃ sandhāya pañcamaṃ. Yaṃ na vipaccati, idaṃ sandhāya chaṭṭhaṃ. Yaṃ etarahi āyūhitaṃ kammaṃ etaraheva vipākaṃ deti, idaṃ sandhāya sattamaṃ. Yaṃ na vipaccati, idaṃ sandhāya aṭṭhamaṃ. Iminā nayena sesapadānampi attho daṭṭhabbo. Idaṃ tathāgatassāti idaṃ sabbehi etehi pakārehi atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammantaravipākantarānaṃ yathābhūtato jānanañāṇanti attho. Dutiyabalaṃ.
第三力:关于“趣向一切之道”,是指趣向一切趣以及趣向非趣。“道”就是道路。他如实了知:即使许多人一起造作同一种不善业,比如杀生等,这个人的思将会趣向地狱,那个人的思将会趣向畜生趣,另一个人的思将会趣向饿鬼趣;而在地狱等趣中,这个思又会在这样那样的地方显现这样那样的果报;这个思不能牵引某人的结生,对于由其他业给予结生的人,这个思就会成为微弱的依报。或者,当许多人一起行布施等善业,或者修观时,这个人的思将会趣向人趣,那个人的思将会趣向天趣,在那里也同样显现这样那样的果报;又或者,这个人的观将成就一道、二道、三道或四道,或者伴随四无碍解等,或者不伴随,而另一个人的观则不能成就任何证悟。以这样无数的方式,他如实了知在同一件事中产生的、被称为善与不善的“趣向一切之道”,没有颠倒。这就是第三力。巴利
Tatiye sabbatthagāmininti sabbagatigāminiñca agatigāminiñca. Paṭipadanti maggaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti bahūsupi manussesu pāṇātipātādīsu ekameva akusalaṃ ekato karontesu imassa cetanā nirayagāminī bhavissati, imassa tiracchānayonigāminī, imassa pettivisayagāminī, nirayādīsupi panesā evarūpe evarūpe ṭhāne evañcevañca vipākaṃ dassati, imassa paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhituṃ na sakkoti, aññena kammena dinnapaṭisandhikassa dubbalaṃ upadhivepakkaṃ bhavissati. Bahūsu vā ekato dānādikusalaṃ, vipassanaṃ vā paṭṭhapentesu imassa cetanā manussagatigāminī bhavissati, imassa devagatigāminī, tatthāpi evañcevañca vipākaṃ dassati, imassa vā vipassanā ekaṃ maggaṃ dve vā tayo vā cattāro vā paṭisambhidādisahite vā rahite vā nipphādessati, imassa na kañci paṭivedhaṃ sādhessatītiādinā anantehi ākārehi ekavatthusmimpi uppannaṃ kusalākusalasaṅkhātaṃ sabbatthagāminipaṭipadaṃ aviparītato pajānātīti. Tatiyabalaṃ.
第四力:关于“种种界”,是指由眼界等,或者由欲界等而形成的多种界。“种种界”是指这些界因为各自的特相不同,所以有种种差别。“世间”是指蕴世间、处世间、界世间。他如实了知:按照蕴分别、处分别、界分别等当中所说的方式,对那些界无量无数的差别多样性,没有颠倒地了知。而且,如来不仅仅了知有执取的行世间的多样性,也确实了知无执取的行世间的多样性,后者是独觉等无法通达的。他们只能部分地了知有执取世间的多样性,对无执取世间则完全不了知,这只有一切知佛才能以它为所缘境。如此,因为某一界增盛,这些树木、灌木、藤蔓等的根、干、枝、皮、叶、花、果等的形状、颜色、气味、味道、养分,以及处所和时间,就有无量无数的差别多样性;地、山等也有多样性。能以无量方式了知这些的,只有佛,其他人不能。这是第四力。巴利
Catutthe anekadhātunti cakkhudhātuādīhi, kāmadhātuādīhi vā bahudhātuṃ. Nānādhātunti tāsaññeva dhātūnaṃ vilakkhaṇattā nānappakāraṃ dhātuṃ. Lokanti khandhāyatanadhātulokaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tāsaṃ tāsaṃ dhātūnaṃ khandhāyatanadhātuvibhaṅgādīsu vuttanayena anantappabhedaṃ nānattaṃ aviparītato pajānāti. Na kevalañca tathāgato upādinnakasaṅkhāralokasseva nānattaṃ pajānāti, atha kho anupādinnakasaṅkhāralokassāpi paccekabuddhādīhi paṭivijjhituṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ nānattaṃ pajānātiyeva. Tehi upādinnakalokassāpi nānattaṃ ekadesatova jānanti, anupādinnassa pana neva jānanti, sabbaññubuddhassevetaṃ visayo. Evaṃ hi imāya nāma dhātuyā ussannāya imesaṃ rukkhagacchalatādīnaṃ, khandhadaṇḍavallitacapattapupphaphalādino saṇṭhānavaṇṇagandharasaojāhi, desakālehi ca anantappabhedaṃ nānattaṃ, pathavīpabbatādīnañca nānattaṃ hotīti anantehi ākārehi jānituṃ sakkoti, nāññeti. Catutthabalaṃ.
第五力:关于“种种胜解”,就是指由低劣等胜解而形成的种种胜解状态。他如实了知:在过去、现在、未来三个时期中,具有低劣胜解的人只亲近具有低劣胜解的人,具有殊胜胜解的人也只亲近具有殊胜胜解的人。在这其中,无信的人亲近无信的人,戒行败坏的人亲近戒行败坏的人,持邪见的人亲近持邪见的人;而有信的人亲近有信的人,具足戒行、多闻、布施、智慧等品质的人,也各自亲近与自己同类的人。他以种种方式了知这一点。因为具足信、戒等品质的人,对于自己的阿阇梨和和尚,只要他们缺乏这些品质,就不去亲近;而那些人也同样不亲近他们。只有彼此同类的人才相互亲近。这就是第五力。巴利
Pañcame nānādhimuttikanti hīnādīhi adhimuttīhi nānādhimuttikabhāvaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti tīsupi kālesu hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttike eva sevanti, paṇītādhimuttikā ca paṇītādhimuttike. Tatthāpi assaddhā assaddhe, dussīlā dussīle, micchādiṭṭhikā micchādiṭṭhike, saddhā saddhe, sīlasutacāgapaññādisampannā ca te te eva sevantīti nānappakārato jānāti. Saddhāsīlādisampannā hi tabbirahite attano ācariyupajjhāyepi na sevanti, tepi itare, attanā attanā pana sadise eva sevantīti. Pañcamabalaṃ.
第六力。“其他众生”,指的是主要众生。“其他个人”,指的是比他们更低劣的众生。这两个词其实是同一个意思,只是为了适应不同受化者的根机才分成两种说法。“根之上下”,是指信等诸根的胜劣与增减,这就是它的含义。“如实”,是指依一切众生的住处、随眠、行、胜解等,以一切方式了知信等诸根的锐利与迟钝。其中,“住处”就是居住的地方,是众生心相续一直安住之处。它有两种:流转住处和还灭住处。其中,依常见和断见而转起的一切见取,名为流转住处。从把握有因的名色开始,一切观智以及道智,名为还灭住处。因为道智也有这样的说法:“诸比丘,有十种圣者住处,是诸圣者所曾居住的。”因此道智也是住处。然而,世尊了知众生的这种住处时,即使在两种见智不转起的刹那也能了知。世尊确实如实了知贪欲等烦恼胜解的人。对于“此人是乐于出离等、具有还灭住处者”,世尊是在他亲近出离等时了知;对于“此人是乐于欲乐等、具有流转住处者”,在了知随眠、行等时也是同样的道理。其中,随眠有贪欲随眠等七种。“行”,就是由三门所造作的世间善不善。“胜解”,就是意乐。如此,这里住处随眠智和根上下智这两种智合在一起,成为一种力智。第六力。巴利
Chaṭṭhe parasattānanti padhānasattānaṃ. Parapuggalānanti tato paresaṃ hīnasattānaṃ. Ekatthameva vā etaṃ padadvayaṃ veneyyavasena dvidhā vuttaṃ. Indriyaparopariyattanti saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ parabhāvañca aparabhāvañca, vuddhiñca hāniñcāti attho. Yathābhūtanti sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayacaritādhimuttiādīhi saddhādi tikkhindriyamudindriyataṃ sabbākārato jānāti. Tattha āsayoti nivāsaṭṭhānaṃ, yattha sattānaṃ cittasantānaṃ niccaṃ nivasati. So duvidho vaṭṭāsayo vivaṭṭāsayo ca. Tattha sassatucchedavasena pavattaṃ sabbaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ vaṭṭāsayo nāma. Sappaccayanāmarūpapariggahato paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ, maggañāṇañca vivaṭṭāsayo nāma. Maggañāṇampi hi ‘‘dasayime, bhikkhave, ariyāvāsā, yadariyā āvasiṃsū’’tiādivacanato (a. ni. 10.19) āsayova. Imaṃ pana bhagavā sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānanto ubhinnaṃ diṭṭhiñāṇānaṃ appavattikkhaṇepi jānāti eva. Kāmarāgādikilesādhimuttaññeva hi puggalaṃ bhagavā tatheva jānāti. ‘‘Ayaṃ nekkhammādiabhirato vivaṭṭāsayo’’ti nekkhammādiṃ sevantaññeva jānāti, ‘‘ayaṃ kāmādiabhirato vaṭṭāsayo’’ti anusayacaritādijānanepi eseva nayo. Tattha anusayo kāmarāgānusayādito sattavidho. Caritanti tīhi dvārehi abhisaṅkhatalokiyakusalākusalaṃ. Adhimuttīti ajjhāsayo. Evamettha āsayānusayañāṇaṃ, indriyaparopariyattañāṇañcāti dve ñāṇāni ekato hutvā ekaṃ balañāṇaṃ nāma jātanti. Chaṭṭhabalaṃ.
第七力:关于“禅那、解脱、定、等至”,就是指初禅等四种禅那,“有色者见诸色”等八种解脱,有寻有伺等三种定,以及初禅等至等九种次第等至。“杂染”是指退分法。“清净”是指胜分法。“出起”是指禅那等依之而出起的那个原因。它有两种:清净和有分。因为下地已经熟练的禅那,以自己的清净作为上地禅那的近因,所以称为“出起”;而从各种定中只依有分而出起,所以有分也是出起。但从灭尽定出起时,只有依果等至才能出起。这叫做巴利本文未载的出起。世尊如实以一切方式了知这一切。这是第七力。巴利
Sattame jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnanti paṭhamādīnaṃ catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ, ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ vimokkhānaṃ, savitakkasavicārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ samādhīnaṃ, paṭhamajjhānasamāpattiādīnaṃ navannaṃ anupubbasamāpattīnaṃ. Saṃkilesanti hānabhāgiyadhammaṃ. Vodānanti visesabhāgiyaṃ dhammaṃ. Vuṭṭhānanti yena kāraṇena jhānādīhi vuṭṭhahanti, taṃ kāraṇaṃ. Taṃ pana duvidhaṃ vodānampi bhavaṅgampi. Heṭṭhimaṃ hi paguṇaṃ jhānaṃ attano vodānavasena uparimassa jhānassa padaṭṭhānato ‘‘vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati, tamhā tamhā pana samādhimhā bhavaṅgavaseneva vuṭṭhānato bhavaṅgampi. Nirodhato pana phalasamāpattiyāva vuṭṭhahanti. Idaṃ pāḷimuttakavuṭṭhānaṃ nāma, taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā yathābhūtaṃ sabbākārena pajānāti. Sattamabalaṃ.
第八力是宿住随念。所谓宿住随念,就是回忆过去世曾经住过的诸蕴。他以无数种方式,通过在各各生命状态中存在的名字、姓氏、外貌、饮食、苦乐等,如实了知。这就是第八力。巴利
Aṭṭhame pubbenivāsānussatīti pubbenivutthakkhandhānussaraṇaṃ, taṃ nāmagottavaṇṇāhārasukhadukkhādīhi tattha tattha bhave vijjamānehi anantehi ākārehi yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti. Aṭṭhamabalaṃ.
第九力:死与生。他以天眼智,通过把握众生的色相,看见随业投生的有情——或低劣或优胜、或美丽或丑陋、有无量差别——正在死去、正在出生,从而以一切方式了知。这就是第九力。巴利
Navame cutūpapātanti cutiñca upapātañca, taṃ cavamānaupapajjamānahīnapaṇītasuvaṇṇadubbaṇṇādito anantapabhede yathākammūpage satte dibbacakkhuñāṇena vaṇṇāyatanaggahaṇamukhena disvā sabbākārato pajānātīti. Navamabalaṃ.
第十力:他如实了知“诸漏的灭尽就是涅槃”,也就是以阿拉汉道智通达四圣谛,从而了知诸漏的灭尽。这就是第十力。巴利
Dasame āsavānaṃ khayanti āsavanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ, taṃ arahattamaggañāṇena catusaccapaṭivedhato pajānātīti. Dasamabalaṃ.
“这些”是指前面所说的“如来的十种如来力”,这里是在确认:就是这些。因为,他心智等神通,声闻等人虽然也随各自的程度而具有,但他们只能在自己的范围内知道某一项,并不能以一切方式了知。然而诸佛的智慧,就像一切知智一样,对一切法、在各自的范围内、在一切处、以一切方式、于一刹那间无碍地运转,所以称为“如来力”。如果这样的话,这只是一切知智的不同分类,为什么又要另外分别称为“十力智”呢?因为它们的所缘、作用和地界有差别。在十力智中:第一力只了知因与非因,第二力只了知业与异熟的不同,第三力只了知业的限定,第四力只了知种种不同的因,第五力只了知有情的意乐与胜解,第六力只了知诸根的锐利与迟钝,第七力只了知它们与禅那等相应的杂染等,第八力只了知过去所住蕴的相续,第九力只了知有情的死与结生,第十力只了知谛的分别,而不是其他。巴利
Imānīti yāni heṭṭhā ‘‘tathāgatassa dasa tathāgatabalānī’’ti avoca, imāni tānīti appanaṃ karoti. Yasmā cetopariyañāṇādīni sāvakādīnampi yathārahaṃ vijjamānānipi savisayaṃ kiñcideva jānanti, na ca sabbākārato. Buddhānaṃ pana sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ viya sabbadhammesu yathāsakaṃ visaye sabbattha sabbākārato ekakkhaṇe appaṭihataṃ pavattati, tasmā ‘‘tathāgatabalānī’’ti vuccanti. Yadi evaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo hoti, kasmā pana ‘‘dasabalañāṇānī’’ti visuṃ vibhattānīti? Visayakiccabhūmibhedato nesaṃ aññattā. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva jānāti, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ nānattakāraṇameva, pañcamaṃ sattānaṃ ajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva, nāññaṃ.
然而,一切知智在同一个刹那中,以一切方式了知这些十力智所应了知的以及超出于此的一切过去等类别,但它并不执行十力智的全部作用。因为它不能变成禅那而入定,不能变成神变而施展变化,不能变成道而断尽烦恼。十力智则能随其相应完成这一切。在十力智中,依次前七智属于欲界,接着二智属于色界,最后一智属于出世间;而一切知智只属于欲界。如此,从所缘、作用和地的差别来看,十力智与一切知智是不同的,一切知智是另一种。这是依词义所作的判定。至于从法的分类等方面来说,一切判定都应从一种分类开始,依照这里所说的方式来理解,因为这里没有像经分别等那样的种种分别方式,在此后的分别中也没有。巴利
Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca sabbaṃ atītādibhedaṃ ekakkhaṇe sabbākārato jānāti, etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Taṃ hi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Dasabalañāṇāni pana taṃ sabbaṃ yathārahaṃ kātuṃ sakkonti. Tesu ca paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇāni kāmāvacarāni, tato dve rūpāvacarāni, avasāne ekaṃ lokuttaraṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana kāmāvacaramevāti evaṃ visayakiccabhūmibhedato aññameva dasabalañāṇaṃ. Aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇanti. Ayaṃ tāva padatthānusārato vinicchayo. Dhammabhedādito pana sabbopi vinicchayo ekavidhakoṭṭhāsato paṭṭhāya ettha vuttānusāratova ñātabbo, suttantabhājanīyādayo hi vibhaṅganayabhedā ettha, ito paresu ca vibhaṅgesu natthīti.
《小事分别》论母的义释巴利
Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《小事分别》的论母,这里结合安立与分界,从义理上作出判定。论母中,首先安立了“生慢”等七十三种一集法;接着安立了“忿与恨”等十八种二集法,“不善根”等三十五种三集法,“漏”等十四种四集法,“下分结”等十五种五集法,“诤论根”等十四种六集法,“随眠”等七种七集法,“烦恼事”等八种八集法,“嫌恨事”等九种九集法,“烦恼事”等七种十集法;又依六种十八法,依次安立了一百零八种渴爱行;最后还安立了《梵网经》中所详细开示的六十二种邪见。应当知道,这一切总共安立了八百六十三种烦恼法。以上就是安立与分界。巴利
Khuddakavatthuvibhaṅgamātikāya panāyaṃ nikkhepaparicchedena saddhiṃ atthato vinicchayo. Mātikāya hi ādito tāva – jātimadotiādayo tesattati ekakā nikkhittā, tato kodho ca upanāho cātiādayo aṭṭhārasa dukā, akusalamūlādayo pañcatiṃsa tikā, āsavacatukkādayo cuddasa catukkā, orambhāgiyasaṃyojanādayo pannarasa pañcakā, vivādamūlādayo cuddasa chakkā, anusayādayo satta sattakā, kilesavatthuādayo aṭṭha aṭṭhakā, āghātavatthuādayo nava navakā, kilesavatthuādayo satta dasakā, channaṃ aṭṭhārasakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritāni ca yathākkamaṃ nikkhipitvā ante dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni brahmajālasutte atidassitānīti sabbānipi tesaṭṭhiadhikāni aṭṭhakilesasatāni nikkhittānīti veditabbāni. Ayaṃ tāva nikkhepaparicchedo.
从义理上说,在“生慢”等词中,依出身高贵而生起这样的心:我是刹帝利等四种姓中最殊胜的种姓,这些人不是最殊胜的种姓——像这样以抬高自己、贬低他人的方式生起,具有陶醉心态的慢,就叫生慢。其余各项也应同样理解。其中,依太阳族、迦叶族等高贵族姓而生起的,是族姓慢。依无病、青春,以及“我曾长久安乐地活着,我长久安乐地活着,也将长久安乐地活着”这样的寿命,还有丰厚的利养,依次说为无病慢等。依善妙殊胜的资具利得,以及恭敬、礼拜等尊重待遇,人们以我为首来请教问题,围绕着我同行——依这样的受人推崇、庞大的随从众、清净的随从众,依次应知为恭敬慢等。财富虽然已经包含在利得里,但这里应理解为积蓄的财物;也有人说,也可以依食物、饮料、衣服、装饰、花鬘、香料等受用丰足来说。依身体的美貌和功德上的美名,是容貌慢。依广学多闻、辩才无碍,或者依“我知道容貌、佛的传承、王的传承、地方的传承、村落的传承,知道昼夜的划分、星宿时辰的配合”这样的熟知旧事,依次应知为多闻慢等。依常行乞食、不被人轻视、威仪端庄、有大神通,依次为乞食慢等。名声虽然已经包含在随从众里,但依随从众对自己言听计从而广泛传扬,或者依称誉名声,就是名声慢。依戒行清净、近行定与安止定、技艺精湛、身体高大、身体宽厚丰满,以及身体各肢节无缺无过而圆满,依次应知为戒慢等。巴利
Atthato pana ‘‘jātimado’’tiādīsu jātiuccākulīnataṃ nissāya ‘‘khattiyādīnaṃ catunnampi vaṇṇānaṃ ahaṃ uttamajātiko, ime na uttamajātikā’’ti evaṃ attukkaṃsanaparavambhanavasena uppanno majjanākārappavatto māno jātimado nāma. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Tattha ādiccagottakassapagottādiuttamagottaṃ nissāya gottamado. Nirābādhataṃ, yobbaññaṃ, ‘‘ciraṃ sukhaṃ jīviṃ jīvāmi jīvissāmī’’ti evaṃ jīvitaṃ, bahulābhañca nissāya yathākkamaṃ ārogyamadādayo vuttā. Sukatapaṇītapaccayalābhaṃ, mānanavandanādigarukāraṃ maññeva pamukhaṃ katvā pañhaṃ pucchanti, parivāretvā gacchantīti evaṃ purekkhāraṃ, mahāparivāraṃ, suciparivārañca nissāya yathākkamaṃ sakkāramadādayo ca veditabbā. Bhogo pana kiñcāpi lābhaggahaṇeneva gahito, nihitadhanavasena panettha lābho veditabbo, ‘‘annapānavatthābharaṇamālāgandhādiupabhogasamiddhivasenāpi vattuṃ vaṭṭatī’’tipi vadanti. Sarīravaṇṇaṃ, guṇavaṇṇañca nissāya vaṇṇamado. Bāhusaccaṃ, paṭibhānaṃ, ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ buddhavaṃsaṃ rājavaṃsaṃ janapadavaṃsaṃ gāmavaṃsaṃ rattindivaparicchedaṃ nakkhattamuhuttayogaṃ jānāmī’’ti evaṃ rattaññutaṃ vā nissāya yathākkamaṃ sutamadādayo ca veditabbā. Jātipiṇḍapātikataṃ, anavaññātataṃ, iriyāpathapāsādikataṃ, mahiddhikatañca nissāya yathākkamaṃ piṇḍapātikamadādayo. Kiñcāpi parivāra-ggahaṇena yaso gahito. Parivārassa pana savasavattakabhāvena patthaṭataṃ kittiyasaññeva vā nissāya yasamado. Parisuddhasīlaṃ , upacārappanājhānaṃ, sippakosallaṃ, sarīrassa ārohasampadaṃ, pariṇāhasampadaṃ, anūnaniddosaaṅgapaccaṅgatāya sarīrapāripūriñca nissāya sīlamadādayo veditabbā.
用这个因由展示了有根据的慢之后,现在要说明没有根据的、一般意义上的慢,所以说“mada”。在“pamāda”等词中,对五种欲乐,以心放逸为特质的、作为不修善行和修习恶行之因的、以放逸方式生起的不善心,就叫作放逸,它以失念为特征。就像吃了风大的食物一样,对父母也不肯低头的、以不谦卑为特质的僵硬之慢,叫作thambha,它以心的膨胀为特征。看到别人的家宅、用具等成就,或者智慧上的成就之后,生起想要加倍超过他们的不善心,就叫作sārambha。即使是学习经典,也不应该以争胜心来学,那只会成为不善。它以行为上的争胜为特征。巴利
Iminā ettakena ṭhānena savatthukaṃ mānaṃ dassetvā idāni avatthukameva sāmaññato mānaṃ dassento ‘‘mado’’ti āha. Pamādotiādīsu pañcakāmaguṇesu cittavossaggasaṅkhāto sucaritāsevanāya, duccaritasevanāya ca hetubhūto pamajjanākārappavatto akusalacittuppādo pamādo nāma, svāyaṃ sativossaggalakkhaṇo. Vātabharitabhattā viya mātāpitūsupi anoṇatabhāvasaṅkhāto kakkhaḷamāno thambho nāma, svāyaṃ cittassa uddhumātabhāvalakkhaṇo. Aññesaṃ gehādiupakaraṇasampadaṃ, vijjāsampadaṃ vā disvā taddiguṇasamārambhanavasappavatto akusalacittuppādo sārambho nāma. Ganthopi hi sārambhavasena uggahetuṃ na vaṭṭati, akusalameva hoti. Svāyaṃ karaṇuttariyalakkhaṇo.
在任何地方、任何对象上都有欲求,这就是“贪得无厌之人”;这种状态就是“贪得无厌性”。对“大贪得无厌”等词,也应这样理解其含义。其中,对已经得到的任何东西都不满足、以不断希求更多更多的方式生起的贪,就是“贪得无厌性”。由于这种贪,自己得到的即使再好也显得差,别人得到的即使再差也显得好。它的特征就是不断希求更多的利得。有一种贪,它以彰显已有的功德的方式生起,并且对由此产生的即使极大的事物也不满足——这种以不满足的方式生起的贪,就是“大贪得无厌”。具有这种贪的人,对资具永远难以满足,就像火对燃料、大海对水一样。而对现有功德的推崇,以及在接受和享用时不识适量,这就是“大贪得无厌”的特征。巴利
Atra atra visaye icchā assāti atriccho, puggalo, tassa bhāvo atricchatā. Evaṃ mahicchatādīsupi attho veditabbo. Tattha yaṃ yaṃ laddhaṃ, tena tena asantussitvā aparassa aparassa patthanāvasena pavatto lobho atricchatā. Yāya attanā laddhaṃ paṇītampi lāmakaṃ viya khāyati, parena laddhaṃ lāmakampi paṇītaṃ viya khāyati. Sāyaṃ aparāparalābhapatthanālakkhaṇā. Santaguṇavibhāvanāvasappavatto ceva taduppannehi atimahantehipi vatthūhi asantussanākārappavatto ca lobho mahicchatā. Yāya samannāgato puggalo paccayehi duppūro aggi viya upādānena, samuddo viya ca udakena. Yā cāyaṃ santaguṇasambhāvanatā, paṭiggahaṇe ca paribhoge ca amattaññutā, etaṃ mahicchatālakkhaṇaṃ.
而“恶欲”(pāpicchatā)则是:对实际上并不存在的信、戒等功德,以及世间与出世间的道、果等功德,加以吹嘘宣扬而转起的贪;以及面对由此而生的即使极其广大的资具,仍然不满足的那种行相。对不存在的功德加以推崇,在受取和受用时不知节制,这就是“恶欲”的特征。巴利
Asantānaṃ pana saddhāsīlānaṃ, maggaphalādīnañca lokiyalokuttarānaṃ guṇānaṃ vibhāvanāvasappavatto ceva taduppannehi atimahantehipi paccayehi asantussanākārappavatto ca lobho pāpicchatā. Yā cāyaṃ asantaguṇasambhāvanatā, paṭiggahaṇe ca paribhoge ca amattaññutā etaṃ pāpicchatālakkhaṇaṃ.
“角”:以刺穿之义称为角,这是对被称为俗家状态的烦恼之角的称呼;从实质上说,它就是指以装扮、修饰等方式活动的贪。“争吵”:就是互相谩骂,从实质上说,它是指在住处像狗一样彼此计较“这是你的东西,这是我的东西”,以这种争吵的方式活动的嗔。“轻浮”:就是浮躁不定,这是对衣钵等资具以及对自己身体以装饰、庄严、玩弄的方式活动的贪;具有这种贪的人,即使老了也像年轻人一样。“不相顺的行为”:就是不合宜的行为、不合宜的举动,它是对值得尊重的人也不恭敬,以违逆执取的方式活动的嗔;具有这种嗔的人,即使对生病了的父母、师长、戒师等人也不看一眼,为了利养恭敬而与他们争吵,对他们不生惭愧,对塔寺等也不作恭敬。“不乐”:就是在偏僻的住处以及止观中不欢喜、厌倦,它是以这种方式活动的不善心生起。“懒惰”:就是懈怠。“欠伸”:就是以身体弯曲等状态而颤动,名为欠伸。“食昏”:就是因食物昏沉而身体不堪能。“以及心下沉”:就是心收缩。从实质上说,这一切也都是以昏沉睡眠而使心呈现病态。巴利
Siṅganti vijjhanaṭṭhena siṅgaṃ, nāgarikabhāvasaṅkhātassa kilesasiṅgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, taṃ atthato siṅgārakaraṇavasappavatto lobhova. Tintiṇanti khīyanaṃ, taṃ atthato nivāsaṭṭhāne sunakhānaṃ viya aññamaññaṃ sattānaṃ ‘‘tava santakaṃ, mama santaka’’nti khiyyanākārappavatto dosova. Cāpalyanti capalatā, taṃ pattacīvarādiparikkhārānaṃ, attabhāvassa ca maṇḍanavibhūsanakeḷāyanavasappavatto rāgova, yena samannāgato jiṇṇopi daharo viya hoti. Asabhāgavuttīti visabhāgavutti visabhāgakiriyā, sā garuṭṭhāniyesupi anādaravasena vipaccanīkaggāhitāvasappavatto dosova , yāya samannāgato gilānepi mātāpituācariyupajjhāyādike na oloketi, tehi saddhiṃ lābhasakkārakāraṇā kalahaṃ karoti, tesu hirottappaṃ, cetiyādīsu cittīkārañca na paccupaṭṭhapeti. Aratīti pantesu senāsanesu, samathavipassanāsu ca anabhiramaṇā ukkaṇṭhitatā, sā tathāpavatto akusalacittuppādo. Tandīti ālasyaṃ. Vijambhitāti kāyassa ānamanādiākārena phandanā vijambhanā. Bhattasammadoti bhattamucchāya kāyassa akammaññatā. Cetaso ca līnattanti cittasaṅkoco. Atthato panetāni sabbānipi thinamiddhavasena cittassa gilānākārova.
诡诈等项中,一个依附着利养、恭敬和名声、怀着恶欲的人,用各种手段让人惊异叹服,这就叫诡诈。它有三种:受用资具型、暗示型、威仪造作型。
其中,有人被邀请接受衣等资具时,他明明正需要,却依靠恶欲而拒绝;他知道那些居士对自己已有稳固的信心后,他们又用种种方法献上殊胜的衣等,心里想:“这位尊者真是少欲,什么都不肯接受,要是他能接受一点点,我们可就得到大利益了。”这时,他为了表示自己愿意摄受他们而接受,从此以后,这甚至成为他们以车载之量前来供养的原因,这种令人惊异叹服的行为,就叫受用资具型的诡诈。
又,正是那个怀着恶欲的人,说出“穿这样衣的人,是个有大威德的沙门”这类话,以暗示自己已证得上人法,用这样那样的方式让人惊异叹服,这就叫暗示型的诡诈。
又,正是那个怀着恶欲的人,为了让人以为“此人是得定者”,决意安立行、住等威仪姿态,以此让人惊异叹服,这就叫威仪造作型的诡诈。巴利
Kuhanātiādīsu lābhasakkārasilokasannissitassa pāpicchassa tena tena upāyena vimhāpanā kuhanā nāma. Sā tividhā paccayapaṭisevanasāmantajappanairiyāpathasaṇṭhāpanavasena. Tattha cīvarādīhi nimantitassa tadatthikasseva sato pāpicchataṃ nissāya paṭikkhipanena, te ca gahapatike attani suppatiṭṭhitasaddhe ñatvā puna tesaṃ ‘‘aho ayyo appiccho na kiñci paṭiggaṇhituṃ icchati, suladdhaṃ vata no assa, sace appamattakaṃ kiñci paṭiggaṇheyyā’’ti nānāvidhehi upāyehi paṇītāni cīvarādīni upanāmentānaṃ tadanuggahakāmataññeva āvikatvā paṭiggahaṇena ca tato pabhuti api sakaṭabhārehi upanāmanahetubhūtaṃ vimhāpanaṃ paccayapaṭisevanasaṅkhātā kuhanā nāma. Pāpicchasseva pana sato ‘‘yo evarūpaṃ cīvaraṃ dhāreti, so samaṇo mahesakkho’’tiādinā uttarimanussadhammādhigamaparidīpanavācāya tathā tathā vimhāpanaṃ sāmantajappanasaṅkhātā kuhanā nāma. Pāpicchasseva pana sato samāhitasseva sambhāvanādhippāyakatena paṇidhāya saṇṭhapitena gamanādiiriyāpathena vimhāpanaṃ iriyāpathasaṇṭhapanasaṅkhātā kuhanā nāma.
而通过“招呼、攀谈”等说法,则正好显示了与前面所说因缘相关的言语。“顺情说爱语、谄媚、像绿豆汤一样、如保姆般怀抱”,这些就叫作招呼攀谈。其中,从“招呼”等词本身开始,就是攀谈。顺情说爱语,是不顾及合不合真实、合不合法,就一再地说讨人喜欢的话。谄媚,是低声下气的行为,把自己摆在低下的位置来说话做事。像绿豆汤一样,是像绿豆汤那样,说些内容空洞不实的话。如保姆般怀抱,是像用怀抱等方式照料别人家孩子那样的保姆职责。这样一来,这所有行为上的差别,都叫作“攀谈”。而能让别人产生“该布施”的想法的身业和语业,叫作“作相”,也就是所谓的“说亲厚话、暗示的身表业”。用辱骂、贬低、指责等方式,让施主害怕被说坏话,这样去压迫别人,叫作“压榨”。因为这就好比用竹片刮去涂敷的油脂一样,用这种方式刮除、擦去别人的德行;又好比为了找香味而把香料捣碎一样,把别人的德行压碎、碾细来求取利养,所以叫作“压榨”。在某一户人家得到了利养,又为了通过布施而在别处得到利养,也就是以利养去贪求利养,这叫作“以利养贪求利养”。应当知道,这诡诈等五种,都是如此这般生起的贪等不善心的生起。至于“我更优胜”等十二种慢,按照下面结缚品里所说的,就很容易理解。其中,最初的三种慢,是不依赖他人,只依种姓、家族、容貌、财富、技艺、学问等慢的对象来说的;之后的九种慢,则是依赖比自己优胜或与自己相似、低劣的人来说的。巴利
Ālapanātiādinā pana vuttapaccayapaṭisaṃyuttā vācāyeva dassitā. Anuppiyabhāṇitā, cāṭukamyatā, muggasūpyatā, pāribhaṭayatā ca ālapanā nāma. Tattha ālapanātiāditova lapanā. Anuppiyabhāṇitāti saccānurūpaṃ, dhammānurūpaṃ vā anapaloketvā punappunaṃ piyabhaṇanaṃ. Cāṭukamyatāti nīcavuttitā, attānaṃ heṭṭhato ṭhapetvā pavattanaṃ. Muggasūpyatāti muggasūpasadisatā, apakkamuggasadisena appasaccena samannāgatavacanatā. Pāribhaṭayatāti kuladārakānaṃ aṅkena pariharaṇādikaṃ paribhaṭassa kiccaṃ. Evamayaṃ sabbopi kiriyābhedo ‘‘lapanā’’tveva vuccati. Paresaṃ pana paccayadānasaññājanakaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ nemittikatā nāma, yā ‘‘parikathobhāsanimittakamma’’nti vuccati. Akkosanavambhanagarahaṇādīhi yathā dāyako avaṇṇaṃ bhāyati, evaṃ taṃ nippīḷanaṃ nippesikatā nāma. Ayaṃ hi yasmā veḷupesikāya viya abbhaṅgaṃ imāya parassa guṇaṃ nippeseti nipuñchati, yasmā vā gandhajātaṃ pisitvā gandhamagganā viya paraguṇe nippisitvā vicuṇṇetvā esā lābhamagganā hoti, tasmā ‘‘nippesikatā’’ti vuccati. Ekasmiṃ pana kule laddhāmisaṃ aññattha dānavasena lābhena lābhassa patthanā lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanā nāma. Ime ca kuhanādayo pañcapi tathā tathā pavattā lobhādiakusalacittuppādāti veditabbā. ‘‘Seyyohamasmī’’tiādayo dvādasa mānā heṭṭhā saṃyojanagocchake vuttānusārena suviññeyyāva. Tattha ca ādito tayo mānā puggalaṃ anissāya jātigottarūpabhogasippasutādimānavatthuvaseneva kathitā, tato paraṃ pana nava mānā seyyasadisahīnapuggale nissāya kathitā.
用这十二个词说明了有所依的慢之后,现在为了显示无所依的慢,就说了“慢”等。接下来,在“过慢”等当中,以“在出身等方面没有人能和我相比”这种心态,超越他人、以计度分别的方式生起的慢,叫做过慢。生起“这些人以前和我差不多,现在我最殊胜,他们比我低劣”这样的慢,就像重担一样,叫做慢过慢。以轻视自己为方式生起的慢,叫做卑慢,它和“我是低劣的”这种心态相似。在还没有证得的圣法上,生起“我已经证得了”的慢,因为属于增上型的慢,叫做增上慢。不过,这种增上慢不会在入流者等圣弟子身上生起,比如不会以“我是一来者”这样的方式出现,因为他们已经通过省察道、果、涅槃所断的烦恼和残余的烦恼,对圣德的通达完全没有疑惑。破戒的人根本不会生起这种慢;持戒但已经舍弃了业处的人也不会生起;只有戒行清净,并且获得了清净的止、获得了清净的观,或者止观两者都获得的人,才会生起。其中,止观两者都获得的人,因为烦恼已被极大地镇伏、诸行已被善加打磨,就会以增上慢安住在阿拉汉的果位上;其他的人应当知道,是安住在入流者等果位上。在五蕴上以“我存在”等方式生起的慢,叫做我慢。凭借伤害他人的恶业、技艺、明处等,以“我更优胜”等方式自我吹嘘而生起的慢,叫做邪慢。巴利
Evametehi dvādasahi padehi savatthuke māne kathetvā idāni avatthukaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘māno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ atimānotiādīsu ‘‘jātiādīhi mayā sadiso natthī’’ti atikkamitvā maññanāvasena pavatto māno atimāno nāma. ‘‘Ime mayā pubbe sadisā, idāni ahaṃ seṭṭho, ime hīnatarā’’ti uppanno māno bhārātibhāro viya mānātimāno nāma. Attānaṃ pana avamaññanāvasena pavatto māno omāno nāma, so ‘‘hīnohamasmī’’ti pavattahīnamānasadisova. Anadhigatesu ariyadhammesu ‘‘adhigatā mayā’’ti uppanno māno adhikamānattā adhimāno nāma, ayaṃ pana sotāpannādiariyasāvakānaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ sakadāgāmī’’tiādinā na uppajjati tesaṃ maggaphalanibbānapahīnakilesāvasiṭṭhakilesapaccavekkhaṇena ariyaguṇapaṭivedhe nikkaṅkhattā. Dussīlassa pana na uppajjateva, sīlavatopi pariccattakammaṭṭhānassa na uppajjati, parisuddhasīlasseva pana suddhasamathalābhino, suddhavipassanālābhino, tadubhayalābhino vā uppajjati. Tesu tadubhayalābhī arahatte eva adhimaññitvā patiṭṭhāti suvikkhambhitakilesattā, parimadditasaṅkhārattā ca, itare sotāpannādīsupīti veditabbā. Pañcasu pana khandhesu ‘‘ahamasmī’’tiādinā pavatto māno asmimāno nāma. Pāpakena pana parūpaghātakena kammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānādinā attānaṃ seyyādito jappanavasena pavatto māno micchāmāno nāma.
在“亲属寻”等当中,以“我的亲属安乐度日、具足顺缘”这种念头,依止在家之爱、缘念亲属而生起的寻,就叫亲属寻;但如果以“亲属已灭尽,已衰亡,具足信与净信”这样依止出离,就不叫亲属寻。国土寻也是这样,它转起的方式应理解为“我们的国土食物丰足、美好”等。为不死而起的寻,或者不死的寻,就叫不死寻。其中,有人以蹲踞苦行等种种苦行折磨自己,心里转起“我来世会安乐、会不死”这样的念头,这就叫为不死而起的寻。而邪见者不能安住于某一种立场,以“这样对我也不对,那样对我也不对,另外那样对我也不对”等方式转起寻,就像想抓一条不死的鱼却抓不住那样。这样的寻,就叫不死的寻。这两种合在一起,这里就称为不死寻。巴利
Ñātivitakkotiādīsu ‘‘mayhaṃ ñātakā sukhajīvino sampattiyuttā’’ti evaṃ gehasitapemena ñātake uddissa uppanno vitakko ñātivitakko nāma, ‘‘ñātakā khayaṃ gatā vayaṃ gatā saddhā pasannā’’tiādinā pana nekkhammasito ñātivitakko nāma na hoti. Evaṃ janapadavitakkepi, tassa pana ‘‘amhākaṃ janapado subhikkho sundaro’’tiādinā pavattiākāro veditabbo. Amaratthāya vitakko, amaro vā vitakkoti amaravitakko. Tattha yo ukkuṭikappadhānādīhi dukkhe nijjiṇṇe samparāye attā sukhī amaro hotīti evaṃ pavatto, so amaratthāya vitakko nāma. Yo pana diṭṭhigatikassa ekasmiṃ pakkhe asaṇṭhahitvā ‘‘evampi me no, tathāpi me no, aññathāpi me no’’tiādinā amaramaccho viya gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pavatto, so amaro vitakko nāma. Taṃ duvidhampi ekato katvā idha ‘‘amaravitakko’’ti vutto.
还有,以貌似悲悯,比如和在家人一起悲伤、一起欢喜等方式,与基于在家的爱结合,并且和悲悯他人相关联的寻,就叫悲悯寻。以利养、恭敬和名声作为所缘,与基于在家的爱结合的寻,就叫利养恭敬名声寻;它的生起方式应当理解为“啊,但愿我能得到利养等”。生起“啊,但愿别人不要轻视我”这种基于在家的寻,就叫不受轻视寻。这是单则。巴利
Anuddayatā patirūpakena pana gihīhi sahasokisahananditādivasena gehasitapemena yutto parānuddayatāpaṭisaṃyutto vitakko nāma. Lābhena ceva sakkārena ca kittisaddena ca saddhiṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena yutto gehasito vitakko lābhasakkārasilokapaṭisaṃyutto vitakko nāma, tassa pana ‘‘aho vata me lābhādayo uppajjeyyu’’ntiādinā pavattiākāro veditabbo. ‘‘Aho vata maṃ pare na avajāneyyu’’nti uppanno gehasito vitakko anavaññattipaṭisaṃyutto vitakko nāma. Ekakaṃ.
在二法等的部分,除了前面已经讲过的嗔等之外,只对其余各项作注释。其中,在二法里,先就“怨恨”等来说:前阶段的嗔,通过“他骂了我”等反复串习,在后来的怨恨心中更坚固地结缚,这就叫怨恨。具有这种怨恨的人没法放下怨恨,就像涂抹了油脂的破布,再怎么洗,他的心也清净不了。这就是怨恨以系缚于怨为特征。巴利
Dukādīsu kodhādayo heṭṭhā vuttatthe vajjetvā avasesānaññeva vaṇṇanā hoti. Tattha dukesu tāva upanāhotiādīsu pubbabhāge kodho ‘‘akkocchima’’ntiādinā āsevanena aparakāle veracitte daḷhataraṃ ābaddho upanāho nāma, yena samannāgato veraṃ nissajjituṃ na sakkoti vasātelamakkhitapilotikā viya, sodhiyamānampissa cittaṃ na parisujjhati, svāyaṃ verupanibandhanalakkhaṇo.
不过,毁掉别人的功德、再以嗔心去涂抹它,这样生起的嗔就叫“抹黑”。这个抹黑,首先像粪便弄脏抓粪者的手一样弄脏自己的心;之后才针对别人,所以叫做“抹黑”。它的特征就是涂抹别人的功德。使等同、争胜,就是“攀比”;意思是先显示别人的功德,再用自己的功德去与之等同。以同样方式生起的贪,此贪以执轭为特征。巴利
Paraguṇaṃ pana vināsetvā tattha dosamakkhanavasena pavatto kodho makkho nāma. Ayaṃ hi paṭhamataraṃ attano cittaṃ gūtho viya gūthaggāhakaṃ hatthaṃ makkheti, pacchā paranti ‘‘makkho’’ti vutto, svāyaṃ paraguṇamakkhanalakkhaṇo. Paḷāsetīti paḷāso, parassa guṇe dassetvā attano guṇehi same karotīti attho. Tathāpavatto lobho, svāyaṃ yugaggāhalakkhaṇo.
即使在三门中都存在的过失,因为被覆藏,就像遮蔽眼睛的幻术一样,所以叫“谄”;它的特相是隐藏已生的过失。狡诈的状态,或者那种行为,就是诡诈,也就是伪诈;它的特相是显示并不存在的功德。巴利
Dvārattayepi vijjamānasseva dosassa paṭicchādanato cakkhumohanamāyā viyāti māyā, sā katadosapaṭicchādanalakkhaṇā. Saṭhassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā sāṭheyyaṃ, kerāṭiyaṃ, taṃ avijjamānaguṇappakāsanalakkhaṇaṃ.
不正直等(心所)应当依照前面所说的正直等的对立面,即不善法来理解。在“内结”等说法中,“内”指的是欲有,在那里以结缚众生的方式生起的五下分结,就叫做内结。“外”指的是色有和无色有。在那里以结缚方式生起的五上分结,就叫做外结。因为在欲有中,众生对它的执著很多,在其他有中则不是这样,所以应当知道欲有是内,其余的是外。这是二法。巴利
Anajjavādayo heṭṭhā vuttaajjavādipaṭipakkhaakusalavasena veditabbā. Ajjhattasaṃyojanantiādīsu ajjhattanti kāmabhavo, tattha satte bandhanavasena pavattāni pañcorambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni ajjhattasaṃyojanaṃ nāma. Bahiddhāti rūpārūpabhavo. Tattha bandhanavasena pavattāni pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni bahiddhāsaṃyojanaṃ nāma. Kāmabhave hi sattānaṃ ālayo bahuko, na itaresu, tasmā so ajjhattaṃ itare ca bahiddhāti veditabbā. Dukaṃ.
在三法组里,贪、嗔、痴这三种是不善根。与欲、嗔、害相应的三种寻,叫做三不善寻。同样这三种,以想为首,就是三不善想。从自性的角度说,也叫三不善界。身恶行、语恶行、意恶行这三种,叫做三恶行;它们应当依通过三门而发生的杀生等,或者依一切不善法来配合说明。按照经文的说法,除了见漏之外的欲漏等三种,叫做三漏。有身见、疑、戒禁取这三种,叫做三结。巴利
Tikesu pana lobhādīni tīṇi akusalamūlāni nāma. Kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāsampayuttā vitakkā tayo akusalavitakkā nāma. Te eva saññāsīsena tisso akusalasaññā. Sabhāvaṭṭhena tisso akusaladhātuyoti ca vuccanti. Kāyavacīmanoduccaritāni tīṇi duccaritāni nāma, tāni dvārattayappavattānaṃ pāṇātipātādīnaṃ, sabbākusalānaṃ vā vasena yojetabbāni. Suttantapariyāyena pana diṭṭhāsavavajjitā kāmāsavādayo tayo āsavā nāma. Sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsā tīṇi saṃyojanāni nāma.
欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱,这叫三种渴爱。其中,与常见相应的贪是有渴爱,与断见相应的贪是无有渴爱,其余一切渴爱都是欲渴爱。或者也可以这样理解:与欲界相关的贪是欲渴爱,与色界、无色界相关的是有渴爱,与断见相应的是无有渴爱。另外,欲渴爱、色渴爱、无色渴爱,这是另外三种渴爱。色渴爱、无色渴爱、灭渴爱,又是另外三种渴爱。其中,灭渴爱指的是与断见相应的渴爱。欲求、有求、梵行求,这叫三种求。其中,梵行求是指对被称为常见或断见的梵行的追求。我胜的慢、我等的慢、我劣的慢,像这样所说的慢类,叫三种慢类。因为慢是以胜等方式来区分、构想的,所以叫慢类。缘于生、老、死而生起的怖畏,叫三种怖畏。依照关于过去时等所说的三种,也就是对佛陀等生起疑惑、犹豫而现起的三种无明,叫三种黑暗。在以疑为首的分类中,与疑相应的无明被说为黑暗,应当知道,就是因为它能覆盖、遮蔽。巴利
Kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhā ca tisso taṇhā nāma. Tattha sassatadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato rāgo vibhavataṇhā, avasesā pana sabbāpi taṇhā kāmataṇhā. Kāmadhātupaṭisaṃyutto vā rāgo kāmataṇhā, rūpārūpadhātupaṭisaṃyutto bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato vibhavataṇhāti veditabbā. Kāmataṇhā rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā ca aparāpi tisso taṇhā nāma. Rūpataṇhā arūpataṇhā nirodhataṇhā ca puna aparāpi tisso taṇhā nāma. Tattha nirodhataṇhāti ucchedadiṭṭhisahagato. Kāmesanā bhavesanā brahmacariyesanā ca tisso esanā nāma. Tattha brahmacariyesanāti sassatucchedadiṭṭhisaṅkhātabrahmacariyassa gavesanā. ‘‘Seyyohamasmīti vidhā, sadisohamasmīti vidhā, hīnohamasmīti vidhā’’ti evaṃ vuttamānavidhā tisso vidhā nāma. Māno hi seyyādivasena vidahanato maññanato ‘‘vidhā’’ti vuccati. Jātijarāmaraṇāni paṭicca uppannāni bhayāni tīṇi bhayāni nāma. ‘‘Atītaṃ vā addhānaṃ ārabbhā’’tiādinā vuttāni tīṇi, buddhādīsu kaṅkhanavicikicchanavasena pavattā tisso avijjā tīṇi tamāni nāma. Vicikicchāsīsena tassa vibhaṅge taṃsampayuttā avijjāva vuttā, tassā eva paṭicchādakattenapi tamabhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
不过,凡是众生的乐等感受生起,如果认为这一切全都是过去所作之因造成的,这是第一种邪见处;认为是自在天创造所造之因造成的,这是第二种;认为没有因、没有缘,这是第三种。这三种就叫作三种邪见处。其中,持第一种主张的人,否定善、不善、造作、时节、心、食物等,否定趣、依处等,也否定亲近善人、听闻正法等一切缘和缘所生法,只承认业的果报;另外两种则把这一切因全都否定,分别承认自在天为因和无因。对这三种主张,应当从没有目的/作用等方面,按照各自的情况了知它们的过失。但因为怕篇幅太长,这里就不展开说了。巴利
Yaṃ kiñci pana sattassa sukhādikaṃ uppajjati, taṃ sabbaṃ pubbekatahetūti ekaṃ titthāyatanaṃ, issaranimmānahetūti dutiyaṃ, ahetuappaccayāti tatiyanti imāni tīṇi titthāyatanāni nāma. Tattha paṭhamavādī kusalākusalakiriyautucittāhārādikaṃ, gatiupadhiādikaṃ, sappurisūpanissayasaddhammassavanādikañca sabbaṃ paccayapaccayuppannaṃ paṭikkhipitvā ekaṃ kammavipākameva sampaṭicchati, itare pana dvepi sabbaṃ hetuṃ paṭikkhipitvā issarahetukaṃ, ahetukañca sampaṭicchanti, tesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādānaṃ vaseneva payojanābhāvādito yathānurūpaṃ doso ñātabbo. Ganthavitthārabhayena panettha na vitthārayimha.
贪、嗔、痴这三者,从构成障碍的角度说,叫做“物”。正是它们在烦恼的意义上称为“垢”,在造成染污的意义上称为“秽”,又因为能使人绊倒,所以称为“不平”。杀生等身、语、意三种不善行,则是另外三种“不平”。贪、嗔、痴从烧灼的意义上说,是三种火;从粗劣无味的意义上说,也是“浊”。杀生等身、语、意三种浊,则是另外三种“浊”。在受用欲乐时,生起“欲乐中没有过失”这样的常见,这叫做乐味见。以二十种事相为体的我见,因为一直紧跟着“我”转,所以叫做随我见。在这种我见中,“认为色是我,或者我拥有色,或者色在我之中,或者我在色之中”,对色蕴生起这四种见。对受、想、行、识其余诸蕴也是如此,应当知道共有二十种事相。巴利
Rāgadosamohā pana tayo palibodhaṭṭhena kiñcanā nāma. Te eva hi kilesaṭṭhena aṅgaṇāni, malīnabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena malāni, pakkhalanapātahetuto visamāni ca honti. Pāṇātipātādīni kāyavacīmanovisamāni aparānipi tīṇi visamāni nāma. Rāgadosamohā anudahanaṭṭhena tayo aggī, kasaṭanirojaṭṭhena kasāvā ca honti. Pāṇātipātādīni kāyakasāvādayo pana aparepi tayo kasāvā nāma. Assādadiṭṭhittike kāmaparibhoge ‘‘natthi kāmesu doso’’ti evaṃ pavattā sassatadiṭṭhi assādadiṭṭhi nāma. Vīsativatthukā pana attadiṭṭhi attānaṃ anugatattā attānudiṭṭhi nāma. Tassā pana ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, rūpavantaṃ vā attānaṃ, attani vā rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ vā attānaṃ samanupassatī’’ti evaṃ rūpakkhandhe catasso diṭṭhiyo. Evaṃ sesakkhandhesupīti vīsativatthukatā veditabbā.
在这里,以“色是我”等说法,把五蕴执取为“我”而转起的五种见,是断见;其余的则应知道是常见。以“没有布施”等论点转起的,叫作无有见,也就是邪见,意思是卑劣的见解。在无喜悦的三法中,用手、土块、棍棒等伤害有情,叫作害。通过身、语、意三门转起的不善法的行,叫作非法行。在难调伏的三法中,那些欲想、嗔想、害想,因为缘于种种不同的对象而生起,体性也各不相同,所以叫作种种想。在掉举的三法中,懈怠的状态就是懒惰,也就是放逸。在不尊重的三法中,以不接受教诫的方式所生起的忿怒,叫作不尊重。在不信的三法中,以不信三宝和业果的方式生起的不善法,叫作不信。依于五种悭吝,而不懂得说出一句“给予”的话,就叫作不慷慨。巴利
Tattha ca rūpaṃ attatodiādinā pañcakkhandhe attato gahaṇavasena pavattā pañca ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā pana sassatadiṭṭhiyoti veditabbā. ‘‘Natthi dinna’’ntiādinayappavattā pana natthikadiṭṭhi micchādiṭṭhi nāma, lāmakadiṭṭhīti attho. Aratittike pāṇileḍḍudaṇḍādīhi sattānaṃ vihiṃsanā vihesā nāma. Dvārattayappavattaakusaladhammassa cariyā adhammacariyā nāma. Dovacassatātike sāva kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāsaññā nānārammaṇesu pavattito, nānābhūtattā ca nānattasaññā nāma. Uddhaccattike kusītassa bhāvo kosajjaṃ, pamādova. Anādariyattike ovādassa anādiyanavasappavatto kodho anādariyaṃ nāma. Assaddhiyattike ratanattayakammaphalānaṃ asaddahanavasappavattā akusaladhammā assaddhiyaṃ nāma. Pañcavidhamacchariyavasena ‘‘dehī’’ti vacanassa ajānanā avadaññutā nāma.
在掉举三法中,对以意门为第六的诸根不加守护、不加防护,名为无律仪。身语两方面的违犯,名为恶戒。在圣者三法中,不愿见佛陀、独觉佛、声闻弟子,也不愿亲近侍奉他们,反倒希求不见诸圣者,名为不欲见圣者。不愿听闻、受持菩提分正法,反倒希求不听正法,名为不欲闻正法。指责他人过失、寻摘他人缺点,这种指责本身即名为指责心。在失念三法中,掉举即心的散乱,名为掉举。在不如理作意三法中,以“无常为常”等想法起心,或从与真理相反的角度起心,这种不恰当的作意转向,名为不如理作意。邪见、邪思惟等八种邪道,名为邪路;反复修习邪道,名为行邪路。昏沉与睡眠,即心的萎靡。三法。巴利
Uddhaccattike manacchaṭṭhesu indriyesu aguttadvāratā asaṃvaro nāma. Kāyikavācasikavītikkamo dussīlyaṃ nāma. Ariyattike buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ dassanopāsanādīsu anicchā ariyānaṃ adassanakamyatā nāma. Bodhipakkhikasaddhammassa savanadhāraṇādīsu anicchā saddhammaṃ asotukamyatā nāma. Parassa dosāropane randhagavesitāsaṅkhāto upārambhova upārambhacittatā nāma. Muṭṭhassaccattike uddhaccaṃ cetaso vikkhepo nāma. Ayonisomanasikārattike ‘‘anicce nicca’’ntiādinā, saccapaṭipakkhavasena vā anupāyamanasikārasaṅkhātaṃ āvajjanacittaṃ ayonisomanasikāro nāma. Micchādiṭṭhimicchāsaṅkappādayo aṭṭha micchāmaggā kummaggo nāma, micchāmaggassa āsevanā kummaggasevanā nāma. Thinamiddhaṃ cetaso ca līnattaṃ nāma. Tikaṃ.
在四组法中,关于衣服等四种生活必需品,生起“我能在哪里得到合意的东西”这样的渴爱,这叫四种渴爱的生起。圣者们不会走这些路,所以叫“非行处”,也就是贪欲、嗔恨、愚痴、恐惧。这些就是不该走的路、不该做的事,叫四种行非行处。其中,“欲”是指偏袒的贪爱;“怖”是指同样性质的嗔恨。对无常等事物,生起“常、乐、我、净”这样的想法,这四种叫颠倒,因为是以颠倒的方式看待事物;或者说,因为依止于此、进入于此,所以叫四种颠倒。这些按想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒来分,每一种各成三种,一共十二种。其中,对无常的执为常、对无我的执为我,这属于想颠倒、心颠倒、见颠倒,共六种;对苦的执为乐、对不净的执为净,这属于见颠倒,共两种——这八种由入流道断除。对不净的执为净,属于想颠倒和心颠倒两种,由不来道断除;对苦的执为乐,属于想颠倒和心颠倒两种,由阿拉汉道断除。应当这样理解。巴利
Catukkesu cīvarādīsu catūsu paccayesu ‘‘kattha manāpaṃ labhissāmī’’ti taṇhāya uppādo cattāro taṇhuppādā nāma. Na gacchanti etāhi ariyāti agatiyo, chandadosamohabhayā. Tā hi agantabbamaggagamanāni akattabbakaraṇāni cattāri agatigamanāni nāma. Tattha chandoti pakkhapātarāgo. Bhayanti tathāpavatto doso. Aniccādīsu ‘‘niccaṃ sukhaṃ attā subha’’nti evaṃ pavattā cattāro vipariyāsā viparītato dhamme esanato. Tesu vā āsanato pavisanato cattāro vipariyāsā nāma. Te saññācittadiṭṭhivipariyāsavasena paccekaṃ tayo tayo hutvā dvādasa honti. Tesu anicce niccaṃ, anattani attāti saññācittadiṭṭhivipariyāsā cha, dukkhe sukhaṃ, asubhe subhanti diṭṭhivipariyāsā dve cāti aṭṭha sotāpattimaggena pahīyanti, asubhe subhanti saññācittavipariyāsā dve anāgāmimaggena, dukkhe sukhanti saññācittavipariyāsā dve arahattamaggenāti veditabbā.
把没见到的说成见到了,把没听到的说成听到了,把没觉知到的说成觉知到了,把没认识到的说成认识到了——这样产生的四种说法,叫作四种非圣者的言说。另外,在所见等当中,把见到的说成没见到,把听到的说成没听到,把觉知到的说成没觉知到,把认识到的说成没认识到——这样产生的另外四种说法,也叫作四种非圣者的言说。这些和前面那四种合在一起,也称为八种非圣者的言说。杀生、不与取、欲邪行、妄语,叫作四种恶行。妄语等属于言语的恶行,另外还有四种,叫作四种语恶行。生、老、病、死的恐怖,叫作四种怖畏。国王、盗贼、火、水的恐怖是四种;下海的人会遇到的波浪、鳄鱼、漩涡、凶鱼的恐怖也是四种;自我谴责、他人谴责、刑罚、恶趣的恐怖是四种——这些以及另外三组四法,都叫作四种怖畏。其中,凶鱼就是凶猛的鱼。应当知道,所有这些怖畏都属于嗔恨心。对于一切苦乐等,认为是我自己造的、是别人造的、是自己和别人共同造的、是没有原因而生的——这样产生的四种见解,叫作四种邪见。四法。巴利
Adiṭṭhe diṭṭhaṃ, asute sutaṃ, amute mutaṃ, aviññāte viññātanti evaṃ pavattā cattāro anariyavohārā nāma. Diṭṭhādīsu pana adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ amutaṃ aviññātanti evaṃ pavattā aparepi cattāro anariyavohārā nāma. Ime ca purimehi saddhiṃ aṭṭha anariyavohārātipi vuccanti. Pāṇātipātaadinnādānakāmesumicchācāramusāvādā cattāri duccaritāni nāma. Musāvādādivacīduccaritāni aparānipi cattāri vacīduccaritāni nāma. Jātijarābyādhimaraṇabhayāni cattāri bhayāni nāma. Rājacoraaggiudakabhayāni cattāri, samuddaṃ orohantassa pana uppajjanakāni ūmikumbhīlaāvaṭṭasusukābhayāni ca cattāri, attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍaduggatibhayāni cattāri cāti imāni vā aparāni tīṇi catukkāni cattāri bhayāni nāma. Tattha susukāti caṇḍamacchā. Sabbānipi cetāni bhayāni paṭighacittānīti veditabbāni. Sabbaṃ sukhadukkhādikaṃ sayaṃkataṃ paraṃkataṃ ubhayakataṃ adhiccasamuppannanti evaṃ uppajjamānā imā catasso diṭṭhiyo nāma. Catukkaṃ.
在五法这一组里,说到“五下分结”等时,“下”是指欲界,因为它处在下方;诸结因成就彼处结生而分受这下方,也就是有身见、疑、戒禁取、欲贪、嗔恚这五种,称为五下分结。“上”是指色界和无色界,因为它们处在上方;诸结按前面说的方式分受它们,也就是色贪、无色贪、慢、掉举、无明这五种,称为五上分结。贪、嗔、痴、慢、见这五种,因为带有黏着的性质,称为五种系缚。同样这五种,因为会渗入内心、刺伤内心,称为五种刺。对佛、法、僧、学处有疑惑,这是四种;对同梵行者心怀嗔怒,这是第五种;这五种因为会使心变得僵硬、如垃圾、如树桩,称为五种心荒芜。在欲方面未离贪。在身体……乃至……在色……乃至……未离贪,尽情吃饱后,耽著于卧乐、躺乐、睡眠乐而住,并且发愿投生某一天众而修梵行;这样生起的五种法,因为会系缚心、如握拳般抓住心,称为五种心系缚。其中,“身体”是指内在的身体,“色”是指外在的色。认为“我是有想者”“我是无想者”“我是非想非非想者”,或者认为“存在的我断灭”,或者“证得现法涅槃”;这样生起的五种,称为五种见。巴利
Pañcakesu pañcorambhāgiyātiādīsu oraṃ vuccati kāmadhātu heṭṭhābhāvato, tattha upapattinipphādanato taṃ oraṃ bhajantīti sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsakāmarāgapaṭighā pañca orambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni nāma. Uddhanti rūpārūpadhātu uparibhāvato, taṃ vuttanayena bhajantīti rūparāgaarūparāgamānauddhaccaavijjā pañca uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanāni nāma. Rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhiyo pañca lagganaṭṭhena saṅgā nāma. Te eva pañca anupavisanaṭṭhena, tudanaṭṭhena ca pañca sallā nāma. Satthudhammasaṅghasikkhāsu kaṅkhanāni cattāri, sabrahmacārīsu kupitacittatā cāti ime pañca cittassa thaddhakacavarakhāṇukabhāvakaraṇattā cetokhilā nāma. Kāmesu avītarāgo. Kāye…pe… rūpe…pe… yāvadatthaṃ bhuñjitvā seyyasukhaṃ passasukhaṃ middhasukhaṃ anuyutto viharati, aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ caratīti evaṃ pavattā pañca dhammā cittaṃ bandhitvā muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā viya gahaṇato cetasovinibandhā nāma. Tattha kāyeti ajjhattike kāye, rūpeti bahiddhārūpe. Saññī attā, asaññī attā, nevasaññīnāsaññī attā, saṃvijjamāno pana attā ucchijjati, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ vā pāpuṇātīti evaṃ pavattā pañca diṭṭhiyo nāma.
杀生等直到饮酒这五种,因为能制造怨仇,所以叫五种怨。亲属、财产、疾病、戒律、见解这五种败坏,叫五种败坏。其中,败坏指的是与毁灭同时生起、由它产生的不善法。被众人厌恶、怨敌众多、过失众多、迷乱而死、堕入恶趣——这五种是不忍耐的过患,意思就是不能忍受的过失。对活命的恐惧、对恶名的恐惧、在众人面前怯场的恐惧、对死亡的恐惧、对恶趣的恐惧,这五种叫五种恐惧。有人声称:自己以尽情享受五种欲乐,以及初禅等四种禅那这五种方式,已经证得最上的现法涅槃——这类生起的论说,叫五种现法涅槃论。五法。巴利
Pāṇātipātādimajjapānapariyosānā pañca verakaraṇaṭṭhena verā nāma. Ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanāni pañca byasanā nāma. Tattha byasanāti vināsasahajātā, tato uppannā akusalā . Bahujanassa appiyatā, verabahulatā, vajjabahulatā, sammūḷhamaraṇaṃ, apāyagamananti ime pañca akkhantiyā ādīnavā, anadhivāsanāya dosāti attho. Ājīvakabhayaṃ asilokabhayaṃ parisasārajjabhayaṃ maraṇabhayaṃ duggatibhayanti imāni pañca bhayāni nāma. Yāvadatthaṃ pañcakāmaguṇaparibhogena ceva paṭhamajjhānādīhi catūhi jhānehi cāti pañcahi kāraṇehi attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto hotīti pavattā vādā pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā nāma. Pañcakaṃ.
在六法当中,忿怒、抹恩、嫉妒、诳骗、恶欲、执取自己的见解,这六种是争论的根源。对可爱的色等六种所缘生起欲贪,这六种叫做依俗家的欲贪法。对不可爱的六种所缘生起对抗,叫做六种对立事。对立本身就是事,所以叫对立事。对六种所缘的渴爱,叫做六种渴爱身。对师、法、僧、学处、不放逸、亲切接待不恭敬,叫做六种不恭敬。乐于做事、乐于闲聊、乐于睡眠、乐于聚会、乐于交际、乐于戏论,这六种叫做退堕法,意思是导致退堕。其中,在闻、见、交谈、受用、身体接触这五种当中相应投入,就是乐于交际。在渴爱、慢、见的戏论当中相应投入,应当知道这就是乐于戏论。乐于做事、乐于闲聊、乐于睡眠、乐于聚会这四种,加上难以教诲、结交恶友这两种,这些是另外六种退堕法。巴利
Chakkesu pana kodho makkho issā sāṭheyyaṃ pāpicchatā sandiṭṭhiparāmāsitāti imāni cha vivādamūlāni. Manāpiyesu rūpādīsu chasu ārammaṇesu chandarāgoti ime cha chandarāgā gehasitā dhammā nāma. Amanāpiyesu chasu ārammaṇesu paṭigho cha virodhavatthūni nāma. Virodho eva vatthu virodhavatthu. Chasu ārammaṇesu taṇhāva cha taṇhākāyā nāma. Satthudhammasaṅghasikkhāsu, appamāde, paṭisanthāre ca agāravā cha agāravā nāma. Kammārāmatā, bhassaniddāsaṅgaṇikasaṃsaggapapañcārāmatā ca cha parihāniyā dhammā nāma, parihānikarāti attho. Tattha savanadassanasamullapanaparibhogakāyasaṃsaggesu pañcasu yuttapayuttatā saṃsaggārāmatā. Taṇhāmānadiṭṭhipapañcesu yuttapayuttatā papañcārāmatāti veditabbaṃ. Kammabhassaniddāsaṅgaṇikārāmatā cattāro, dovacassatā, pāpamittatā dve cāti ime aparepi cha parihāniyā dhammā nāma.
在能引生喜悦的色等六种所缘中,生起的与居家喜悦相应的伺,称为喜悦随伺,应当理解为寻等法以及与之相应者。其余两组也照此理解。不过,这里与无明俱行的受之舍,应知为舍,也称为“无明舍”。在可意、不可意、中性的六种所缘中,依次生起的受,以“六种居家喜悦”等三组六法来说。如此生起的六种邪见是:“我有我”“我没有我”“我以我认知我”“我以我认知非我”“我以非我认知我”“这个我是作者、受者、常、恒”。其中,“有”是常见,“没有”是断见。把五蕴执为“我”,以想蕴认知其余诸蕴,这就是“我以我认知我”的见;把想蕴执为“我”,其余执为“非我”,这就是“我以我认知非我”的见;把想蕴执为“非我”,其余执为“我”,应知这就是“我以非我认知我”的见。六法组。巴利
Somanassaṭṭhāniyesu rūpādīsu chasu ārammaṇesu uppannā gehasitasomanassasampayuttā vicārā somanassupavicārā nāma, vitakkādayo dhammā, taṃsampayuttā cāti gahetabbā. Esa nayo itaradvayepi. Aññāṇasahitā panettha vedanupekkhā upekkhāti veditabbā, yā ‘‘aññāṇupekkhā’’tipi vuccati. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhamajjhattesu chasu ārammaṇesu yathākkamaṃ uppannā vedanā ‘‘cha gehasitāni somanassānī’’tiādinā chakkattayena vuttā. ‘‘Atthi me attā’’ti vā, ‘‘natthi me attā’’ti vā, ‘‘attanā vā attānaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘attanā vā anattānaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘attanā vā attānaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti vā, ‘‘so me ayaṃ attā kārako vedako nicco dhuvo’’ti evaṃ uppajjamānā imā cha diṭṭhiyo nāma. Tattha atthīti sassatadiṭṭhi. Natthīti ucchedadiṭṭhi. Pañcapi khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā saññākkhandhena sesānaṃ jānanavasena attanā vā attānaṃ sañjānāmīti diṭṭhi, saññākkhandhaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti, itare ca ‘‘anattā’’ti gahetvā attanā vā anattānaṃ sañjānāmīti diṭṭhi, saññākkhandhaṃ pana ‘‘anattā’’ti, itare ca ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā anattanā vā attānaṃ sañjānāmīti diṭṭhi ca veditabbā. Chakkaṃ.
在七法组中,欲贪、嗔恚、慢、见、疑、有贪、无明这七种,因为力量强、因为未被断除,所以在心相续中一再潜伏,因此称为随眠。这七种本身就是因为在轮回中系缚众生,所以称为结;应当知道,因为现行而缠缚,所以称为缠缚。无信、无惭、无愧、寡闻、懈怠、失念、劣慧这七种,是不善之人、非善士的法,也就是不善的、低劣的法,所以称为非法。杀生等身语恶行,是七种恶行。慢、过慢、慢过慢、卑慢、增上慢、我慢、邪慢,这七种称为慢。“由父母所生的我,在人间断灭;同样在六欲天中,以段食为食的天我断灭;在色界中,意所成的色我断灭;在四无色界中,四种无色我各各断灭、坏灭,死后不存在”,这样生起的七种断见,称为七种见。其中,前三种见是执取色蕴为我而生起的断见,其余四种应当知道是执取无色蕴而生起的。七法组。巴利
Sattakesu pana kāmarāgapaṭighamānadiṭṭhivicikicchābhavarāgaavijjā satta thāmagataṭṭhena, appahīnaṭṭhena ca cittasantāne anu anu sayanato anusayā nāma. Te eva satte vaṭṭasmiṃ saṃyojanato saṃyojanāni. Samudācāravasena pariyuṭṭhānato pariyuṭṭhānāti veditabbā. Assaddhiyaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappaṃ appassutatā kosajjaṃ muṭṭhassaccaṃ duppaññatāti ime satta asataṃ asappurisānaṃ, asantā vā lāmakā dhammāti asaddhammā nāma. Pāṇātipātādayo kāyavacīduccaritāni satta duccaritāni nāma. Māno atimāno mānātimāno omāno adhimāno asmimāno micchāmānoti ime satta mānā nāma. ‘‘Manussaloke mātāpettikasambhavo attā ucchijjati, tathā chasu devalokesu dibbo kabaḷīkārabhakkho attā, rūpaloke rūpī manomayo attā, catūsu arūpabhavesu catubbidho arūpī attā tattha tattha ucchijjati vinassati na hoti paraṃ maraṇā’’ti evaṃ pavattā satta ucchedadiṭṭhiyo satta diṭṭhiyo nāma. Ettha ca ādito tisso diṭṭhiyo rūpakkhandhaṃ attato gahetvā pavattā ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā catasso arūpakkhandheti ñātabbā. Sattakaṃ.
在八法组里,贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、疑、昏沉、掉举,这八种叫烦恼事。“我有什么业该做”,这是一项;同样,“我已经做了”“我该上路了”“已经走了”“我吃得少”“我吃得好”“我生病了”“我病好不久”,各是一项。这八种叫懈怠事,意思是让懈怠者生起懈怠的原因。在得到和失去、名声和没名声、称赞和责备、快乐和痛苦中,心依次被贪和嗔冲击,这叫在八种世间法中心被抵触。下面两个四法组所说的八种,叫非圣言。邪见、邪思惟等八种,叫邪性。比丘在确实犯戒被举罪时,用“我不记得”来推脱,这是一项;用“你是愚人”等话来反击举罪者,这是一项;同样,用“你也犯了这条”来反控举罪者,是一项;用别的事来搪塞,是一项;在僧团中挥手喧哗说话,是一项;用沉默来恼人,是一项;不顾僧团和举罪者就离开,是一项;因为害怕被举罪而舍弃学处,是一项。这八种叫人过失。“无想的我是有色的、无色的、既有色又无色的、既非有色也非无色的、有边的、无边的、既有边也无边的、既非有边也非无边的”,这样生起的八种叫无想论。“非想非非想的我是有色的、无色的”等等,这样生起的八种叫非想非非想论。八法组。巴利
Aṭṭhakesu pana lobho doso moho māno diṭṭhi vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccañcāti aṭṭha kilesavatthūni nāma. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci kammaṃ kattabbaṃ me’’ti ekaṃ, tathā ‘‘kataṃ me’’ti, ‘‘maggo me gantabbo’’ti, ‘‘gato’’ti, ‘‘appakaṃ me bhutta’’nti, ‘‘subhutta’’nti, ‘‘ābādho me uppanno’’ti, ‘‘aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā’’ti ekanti imāni aṭṭha kusītavatthūni nāma, kusītassa kosajjakāraṇānīti attho. Lābhe alābhe ca yase ayase ca pasaṃsāya nindāya ca sukhe dukkhe ca yathākkamaṃ rāgadosehi cittassa paṭihananaṃ aṭṭhasu lokadhammesu cittassa paṭighāto nāma. Heṭṭhā dvīhi catukkehi vuttā aṭṭha anariyavohārā nāma. Micchādiṭṭhimicchāsaṅkappādayo aṭṭha micchattā nāma. Bhikkhūhi vijjamānāya āpattiyā codiyamānassa ‘‘na sarāmī’’ti nibbeṭhanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘tvaṃ bālo’’tiādinā codakapaṭippharaṇaṃ ekaṃ, tathā ‘‘tuvaṃ cetamāpanno’’ti codakassa paccāropanaṃ, aññenaññaṃ paṭicaraṇaṃ, saṅghe bāhāvikkhepabhaṇanaṃ, tuṇhībhāvena viheṭhanaṃ, saṅghaṃ, codakañca anādiyitvā pakkamanaṃ, codanābhayā sikkhāpaccakkhānanti ime aṭṭha purisadosā nāma. Asaññī attā rūpī, arūpī , rūpī ca arūpī ca, nevarūpīnārūpī, antavā, anantavā, antavā ca anantavā ca, nevantavānānantavāti evaṃ pavattā aṭṭha asaññīvādā nāma. Nevasaññīnāsaññī attā rūpī arūpītiādinā pavattā aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā nāma. Aṭṭhakaṃ.
在九法组中,依“他曾对我做无益之事,正在做,将来会做;他曾对我的喜爱者做无益之事,正在做,将来会做;他曾对我的厌恶者做有益之事,正在做,将来会做”这样生起的九种愤恨,就叫九种愤恨事。忿、抹恩、嫉、悭、谄、诳、妄语、恶欲、邪见,这九种叫九种人垢。“我胜过胜者”等九种,叫九种慢。“缘于渴爱而有寻求,缘于寻求而有获得,缘于获得而有决断,缘于决断而有欲贪,缘于欲贪而有执取,同样有摄受、悭、守护,因守护而有执杖、执刀、斗诤、纷争、口角等许多恶法”,这样说的这些,叫九种以渴爱为根本的法。其中,决断:在智决断、渴爱决断、见决断、寻思决断这四种决断中,这里指的是寻思决断。因为得到利养之后,以“这是为了色所缘,这是为了声所缘”等方式,仅仅通过寻思来作决断。欲贪是微弱的贪,执取是强有力的确定。摄受应当理解为依渴爱和见而作摄受。“我是”“我是”“此是我”“我将是”“我将是有色”“我将是无色”“我将是有想”“我将是无想”“我将是非想非非想”,这样说的这些,以动摇之义叫九种动。这些同样以妄想之义叫妄想,以挣扎之义叫挣扎,以戏论之义叫戏论,这些又因各种因缘而被造作,所以也叫被造作的。在所有这些五组九法中,说的就是慢。因为慢也以“我是”等有想的方式生起,就像见一样。九法组。巴利
Navakesu pana ‘‘anatthaṃ me acari, carati, carissati, piyassa me anatthaṃ acari, carati, carissati, appiyassa me atthaṃ acari, carati, carissatī’’ti evaṃ pavattā nava āghātā eva āghātavatthūni nāma. Kodho makkho issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyaṃ musāvādo pāpicchatā micchādiṭṭhīti imāni nava purisamalāni nāma. ‘‘Seyyassa seyyohamasmī’’tiādayo navavidhā mānā nāma. ‘‘Taṇhaṃ paṭicca pariyesanā, pariyesanaṃ paṭicca lābho, taṃ paṭicca vinicchayo, taṃ paṭicca chandarāgo, taṃ paṭicca ajjhosānaṃ, tathā pariggaho, macchariyaṃ, ārakkho, ārakkhādhikaraṇaṃ daṇḍādānasatthādānakalahaviggahavivādādianeke pāpakā dhammā’’ti evaṃ vuttā ime nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā nāma. Tattha vinicchayoti ñāṇataṇhādiṭṭhivitakkavasena catūsu vinicchayesu vitakkavinicchayo idha adhippeto. Lābhaṃ hi labhitvā ‘‘idaṃ rūpārammaṇatthāya, idaṃ saddārammaṇādiatthāyā’’ti evaṃ vitakkeneva vinicchayo. Chandarāgo dubbalarāgo, ajjhosānanti balavasanniṭṭhānaṃ. Pariggahoti taṇhādiṭṭhivasena pariggahakaraṇanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Asmī’’ti, ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti, ‘‘ayamahamasmī’’ti, ‘‘bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘rūpī bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘arūpī bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘saññī bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘asaññī bhavissa’’nti, ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī bhavissa’’nti evaṃ vuttāni imāni nava calanaṭṭhena iñjitāni nāma. Imāneva maññanaṭṭhena maññitāni, vipphandanato vipphanditāni, papañcanato papañcitāni, tāneva tehi tehi kāraṇehi saṅkhatattā saṅkhatāni ca nāma honti. Sabbehi tehi pañcahi navakehi māno eva kathito. Sopi hi ‘‘asmī’’tiādīhi saññīhi ca ākārehi diṭṭhi viya pavattatīti. Navakaṃ.
在十法组里,贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、疑、昏沉、掉举、无惭、无愧,这十种烦恼就叫作烦恼事。“他曾对我不利”等九种,加上在木桩、荆棘等无因处生起的嗔恚,合起来叫十种嗔恚事。杀生等十种,叫作十不善业道。欲贪结、嗔恚结、慢结、见结、疑结、戒禁取结、有贪结、嫉结、悭结、无明结,这些叫作十种结。邪见、邪思惟等八种,加上邪智和邪解脱,合起来叫十种邪性。其中,邪智是指:在造恶时以思量手段的方式生起的痴,以及造恶后以“我做得很好”的方式回顾时生起的痴。邪解脱是指:实际上并未解脱,却自认为已解脱。以“没有布施,没有供养”等十种方式生起的无见,叫作十事邪见。“世间是常,或无常,或有边,或无边,命即是身,或命与身不同,如来死后存在,或如来死后不存在……或如来死后既存在又不存在,或如来死后既非存在也非不存在”——以这种方式生起的,叫作十事边执见。其中,“世间”指蕴等;“有边”是就狭小的遍处禅那而说的;“无边”应当理解为广大。“如来”指有情。这是十法组。巴利
Dasakesu pana lobho doso moho māno diṭṭhi vicikicchā thinaṃ uddhaccaṃ ahirikaṃ anottappanti ime dasa kilesā eva kilesavatthūni nāma. ‘‘Anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādayo nava khāṇukaṇṭakādīsu aṭṭhānaāghātena saddhiṃ dasa āghātavatthūni nāma. Pāṇātipātādayo dasa akusalakammapathā nāma. Kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭighamānadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsabhavarāgaissāmacchariyaavijjāsaṃyojananti imāni dasa saṃyojanāni nāma. Micchādiṭṭhimicchāsaṅkappādayo aṭṭha, micchāñāṇamicchāvimuttīhi saddhiṃ dasa micchattā nāma. Tattha micchāñāṇanti pāpakiriyāsu upāyacintāvasena ceva pāpakaṃ katvā ‘‘sukataṃ mayā’’ti paccavekkhaṇavasena ca pavatto moho. Micchāvimuttīti avimuttasseva sato vimuttasaññitā. ‘‘Natthi dinnaṃ, natthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādīhi dasahi ākārehi pavattaṃ natthikadassanaṃ dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi nāma. ‘‘Sassato loko, tathā asassato, antavā, anantavā, taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīra’’nti vā, ‘‘aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīra’’nti vā, ‘‘hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vā, ‘‘na hoti…pe… hoti ca na hoti ca, neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vā evaṃ pavattā dasavatthukā antaggāhikā diṭṭhi nāma. Tattha lokoti khandhādayo, ‘‘antavā’’ti idaṃ parittaṃ kasiṇajjhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anantavā’’ti idaṃ vipulanti gahetabbaṃ. Tathāgatoti satto. Dasakaṃ.
在十八种渴爱行处中,渴爱行处就是渴爱的现行、渴爱的转起。依于内在的,就是依于内在的五蕴。这里的属格是用于受格的意义。其中,“我是”“我是如此”“我是这样”“我是别样”“我将是如此”“我将是这样”“我将是如此样”“我将是别样”“如此我是”“我是乐的”“我可能是如此”“我可能是这样”“我可能是如此样”“我可能是别样”“我或许可能是如此”“我或许可能是这样”“我或许可能是如此样”“我或许可能是别样”——像这样所说的这些,就叫作依于内在的十八种渴爱行处。巴利
Aṭṭhārasakesu taṇhāvicaritānīti taṇhāsamudācārā taṇhāpavattiyo. Ajjhattikassupādāyāti ajjhattikaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Idaṃ hi upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Tattha ‘‘asmīti hoti, itthasmīti hoti, evasmīti hoti, aññathāsmīti hoti, tathā bhavissanti, itthaṃ bhavissanti, evaṃ bhavissanti, aññathā bhavissanti hoti, tathā asmīti, sātasmīti hoti, tathā siyanti, itthaṃ siyanti, evaṃ siyanti, aññathā siyanti hoti, tathā apāhaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ itthaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ evaṃ siyanti, apāhaṃ aññatā siyanti hotī’’ti evaṃ vuttāni imāni ajjhattikassupādāya aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni nāma.
在这里,“我是”生起,意思是:在内在的五蕴当中,从整体上执取“我是”的时候,就称为“我是”生起。可是有了这样的执取之后,接下来就分成两种执取:不比较和比较。其中,不比较是指不拿别的样子来比较、不靠近别的样子,只以自身的存在为所缘,于是生起“我是如此”。它的意思是:以渴爱、慢、见的方式执取“在刹帝利等当中,我就是这一种”。比较的执取则有两种:相等和不相等。其中,相等的执取是“我是这样”,意思是:就像这个刹帝利,或者婆罗门等,或者天、人、有色、无色等那样,我也是这样。“我是别样”则是不相等的执取,意思是:就像这些刹帝利等那样,我和他们不同,或者更低,或者更高。这四种是依现在而说的渴爱活动,而“我将是”等四种则是依未来而说。它们的含义应当依照前面四句的方式来了知。其中,“我是”等两句是依常见和断见而说。因为在这里,“我是”是常见,“沉没”是无常,“不是”是断见;后面“我可能是”等四句是依疑惑寻思而说;“我或许可能是”等四句,应当看作是以“啊,但愿我存在!”这样的方式生起的希愿构想而说。这是第一组十八渴爱行。巴利
Tattha asmīti hotīti ajjhattikesu khandhapañcakesu samūhato ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti gahaṇe satīti attho. Evaṃ pana gahaṇe sati tato paraṃ anupanidhāya, upanidhāya vāti dvidhā gahaṇaṃ hoti. Tattha anupanidhāyāti aññaṃ ākāraṃ anupanidhāya anupagamma sakabhāvamevārammaṇaṃ katvā itthasmīti hoti. Tassa ‘‘khattiyādīsu idaṃpakāro aha’’nti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhivasena gahaṇaṃ hotīti attho. Upanidhāya gahaṇaṃ pana duvidhaṃ hoti samato ca asamato ca. Tattha samato gahaṇaṃ evasmīti idaṃ, tassa yathā ayaṃ khattiyo, brāhmaṇādayo vā devamanussarūpīarūpiādayo vā, evamahamasmīti attho. Aññathāsmīti idaṃ pana asamato gahaṇaṃ, tassa yathā ime khattiyādayo, tato aññathā ahaṃ hīno vā adhiko vāti attho. Imāni tāva paccuppannavasena cattāri taṇhāvicaritāni, bhavissantiādīni pana cattāri anāgatavasena vuttāni. Tesaṃ purimacatukke vuttanayavasena attho veditabbo. Tattha asmītiādidvayaṃ sassatucchedaggāhavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha hi asmīti sassataṃ, sīdatīti sātaṃ, asassataṃ, ito parāni siyantiādīni cattāri saṃsayaparivitakkavasena vuttāni. Apāhaṃ siyantiādīni cattāri ‘‘api nāmāhaṃ bhaveyya’’nti evaṃ pavattapatthanākappanavasena vuttānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṭṭhārasakaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
第二项中,“执取外境”是指执取外在的五蕴。在这里应当知道:在执取外境上有十八种渴爱活动,是依前面刚说过的方式而说的,也就是“以此而成为‘我存在’、以此而成为‘我如此’、以此而成为‘我正是这样’、以此而成为‘我与此不同’”等等。这里只是“以此”这个词和前面不同。这里的“以此”,意思是通过这个外在的色……乃至……识。这里,外在的色应当理解为伞、刀、扇、食物、饮料、钱财、谷物等用具;受等则应当理解为奴婢、亲属、随从、象、马等用具。对于这些外在的色等,应当知道在一切情况下都要按“我如此”“我正是这样”等来套用。这是第二组十八种。巴利
Dutiye bāhirassupādāyāti bāhiraṃ khandhapañcakaṃ upādāya. Tattha ‘‘iminā asmīti hoti, iminā itthasmīti hoti, iminā evasmīti hoti, iminā aññathāsmīti hotī’’tiādinā anantare vuttanayena bāhirassupādāya aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritānīti veditabbāni. ‘‘Iminā’’ti padamattameva hettha purimehi viseso. Tattha imināti iminā bāhirena rūpena vā…pe… viññāṇena vāti attho. Tattha ca chattakhaggabījaniannapānadhanadhaññādiupakaraṇavasena bāhiraṃ rūpaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dāsadāsiñātiparijanahatthiassādiupakaraṇavasena vedanādayo veditabbā. Imehi bāhirehi rūpādīhi ‘‘itthasmīti evasmī’’tiādinā sabbattha yojanā veditabbā. Aṭṭhārasakaṃ dutiyaṃ.
不过,在“将这两者合在一起”等说法中,是把那两种十八类合起来计算,就成了三十六种渴爱活动。这样一来,对每一个众生而言,在过去时依两种十八类而有三十六种,同样在未来时也有三十六种。而在现在时,对某一个众生来说,按他实际遇到的情况,也能有这些;如果就一切众生而言,现在时同样也有三十六种。照上面所说的方式,把这一切合在一起,那么一切众生在三时中,依六种十八类,就有一百零八种渴爱活动,这就是这段话的意思。在“有一百零八种渴爱活动”这一句里,也应该这样理解它的含义。巴利
Itaresu pana tadekajjhaṃ abhisaṃyūhitvātiādīsu tadubhayaṃ aṭṭhārasakaṃ ekato yojetvā chattiṃsataṇhāvicaritāni honti, evaṃ ekekassa puggalassa atītakāle dvinnaṃ aṭṭhārasakānaṃ vasena chattiṃsa, tathā anāgate chattiṃsa honti. Paccuppanne pana ekassa yathālābhavasena tānipi labbhanti, sabbasattānaṃ vasena paccuppannepi chattiṃsa labbhanti. Iti evaṃ vuttena pakārena taṃ sabbaṃ ekato katvā sabbasattānaṃ kālattayepi channaṃ aṭṭhārasakānaṃ vasena aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni hontīti attho. Aṭṭhataṇhāvicaritasataṃ hotīti etthāpi evameva attho daṭṭhabbo.
在“以及那些”等句中,这里应当说的六十二种邪见,是导师在名为《梵网》的长部第一部经里亲自宣说的,这就是这段的意思。因为在《梵网》中,四种常住论、四种半常住论、四种有边无边论、四种不死矫乱论、两种无因生论、十六种有想论、八种无想论、八种非想非非想论、七种断灭论、五种现法涅槃论——这六十二种邪见,连同它们的因缘,以种种方式被宣说,应当依照那里所说的方法来理解它们的分类。以上是这里依照词义逐词解释所作的判定,而这里其余的判定,依照词义解释中所说的内容,就能很容易地理解。巴利
Yāni cātiādīsu yāni cettha dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni vattabbāni, tāni brahmajālanāmake dīghanikāyassa paṭhamasuttante (dī. ni. 1.29 ādayo) satthārā sayaṃ āhacca bhāsitānīti attho. Brahmajāle hi cattāro sassatavādā, cattāro ekaccasassatikā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā , aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti imāni dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni sanidānāni nānānayato vuttāni, tattha vuttanayeneva nesaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāvettha padatthānusārato vinicchayo, sesopettha vinicchayo padatthe vuttānusāratova suviññeyyoti.
《法心分别》论母的义释巴利
Dhammahadayavibhaṅgamātikatthavaṇṇanā
关于《法心分别论》论母中依词义等所作的判定,前面已经讲过了。不过,世尊在前文已经用种种方式分别了蕴、处等十二种法聚,现在又以十种方式——也就是一切摄、四地生起、所属等,能阐明千种前所未有方法、被称为一切法要义的“法心”——为了显示这种分别,所以才说了这部《分别论》。因此,这里的判定也是依《分别论》的方法来进行。在《分别论》中,先安立了带有提问的十二句论母,比如“有多少蕴?”等,然后依照前面所说的,从四地共通的角度,分别了名为“一切摄”的部分。其中,七种触等应当依七识界来了知。巴利
Dhammahadayavibhaṅgamātikāya pana padatthādito vinicchayo pubbe vuttova. Yasmā pana bhagavatā heṭṭhā nānānayato vibhattānaññeva khandhāyatanādīnaṃ dvādasannaṃ dhammakoṭṭhāsānaṃ puna sabbasaṅgāhikacatubhūmuppattitappariyāpannatādīhi dasahi vārehi apubbanayasahassavibhāvakehi sabbadhammādhippāyasaṅkhātehi dhammahadayehi vibhāgadassanatthamevāyaṃ vibhaṅgo vutto, tasmā vibhaṅganayato cettha vinicchayo hoti. Vibhaṅge hi paṭhamaṃ ‘‘kati khandhā’’tiādinā sapucchakaṃ dvādasapadikaṃ mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā heṭṭhā vuttānusāreneva catubhūmakasāmaññato sabbasaṅgāhikavāro nāma vibhatto, tattha satta phassādayo sattannaṃ viññāṇadhātūnaṃ vasena veditabbā.
第二个章节,则是依那些法在四地中、以四种分组来显示生起和不生起而展开的。其中,在第一分组里,首先——巴利
Dutiyo pana vāro tesaṃ catūsu bhūmīsu catūhi koṭṭhāsehi uppattānuppattidassanavasena pavatto. Tattha paṭhamakoṭṭhāse tāva –
在欲界里,有多少蕴……(中略)……有多少心?在欲界里,有五蕴、十二处、十八界、三谛、二十二根、九因、四食、七触、受、想、思、心。巴利
‘‘Kāmadhātuyā kati khandhā…pe… kati cittāni? Kāmadhātuyā pañcakkhandhā, dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo, tīṇi saccāni, bāvīsatindriyāni, nava hetū, cattāro āhārā, satta phassā, vedanā, saññā, cetanā, cittānī’’ti –
论母安立之后,便作了分别。其中,因为四地之法大多数生起于欲界有情的相续中,而不只是属于欲界所摄,所以这里用“五蕴”等说法,也把四地之法一并说到了。这里指的是在那一处所生起的法,并不是只限于那一地所摄的法。在色界等处,道理也是一样。巴利
Mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Tattha yasmā catubhūmakāpi dhammā yebhuyyena kāmāvacarasattānaṃ uppajjanti , na kāmāvacarāva. Tenettha ‘‘pañcakkhandhā’’tiādinā catubhūmakāpi vuttā. Tatthuppajjanakadhammā hettha adhippetā, na taṃbhūmipariyāpannāva. Rūpadhātuādīsupi eseva nayo.
这里说“三谛”,是因为灭谛脱离了方所,不能在任何方所中指出,所以把它排除之后才这样说。因为需要因缘的法,总是安住于作为自己依托因缘的方所;而没有因缘的法,就没有依托处。又或者说,有时被认知到的法,由于时间上的决定性,正好显示出它自身的有所造作性。否则,如果它在其他时间也存在,就会犯恒常的过失;如果现在也不存在,就会犯断灭的过失。因此应当理解:这些法只是在某些方所中能被认知。然而,说无为法不遍于一切方所,或者说有为法不可能不遍于一切方所,这都不合理。所以应当理解:无为法正是超越方所和时间的。巴利
Ettha ca tīṇi saccānīti idaṃ nirodhasaccassa desavinimuttatāya katthaci dese aniddisitabbato taṃ vajjetvā vuttaṃ. Kāraṇasāpekkhā hi dhammā attano nissayakāraṇabhūtaṃ desaṃ samāvasanti akāraṇassa anissayattā, yathā vā kadāci upalabbhamānā dhammā kālaniyatatāya attano saṅkhatattaṃva sūcenti. Aññathā itarakālesupi bhāvassa ca pasaṅgato, etarahipi vā abhāvassa, evaṃ kvaci dese upalabbhamānāpīti gahetabbaṃ. Sabbadesaabyāpitā pana asaṅkhatassa, saṅkhatassa vā asambhavato eva nopapajjati, tasmā desakālavinimuttameva asaṅkhatanti gahetabbaṃ.
在第二部分中,另外——巴利
Dutiyakoṭṭhāse pana –
在色界里,有五蕴、六处、九界、三谛、十四根、八因、三食、四触……乃至四心。巴利
‘‘Rūpadhātuyā pañcakkhandhā, cha āyatanāni, nava dhātuyo, tīṇi saccāni, cuddasindriyāni, aṭṭha hetū, tayo āhārā, cattāro phassā…pe… cattāri cittānī’’ti –
安立了论母之后,就加以分别说明。不过,色界众生没有鼻等根,所以香处等虽然确实存在,却不履行处等功能;因此,把它们排除之后,才说“六处、九界”等等,并非因为它们不存在。有些人却说:“在色界,香、味、段食以及大种的触功能都不存在,正因如此,巴利圣典中没有把它们列出来。”他们为了证成此说,举出许多似是而非的理由,大肆戏论;那只是他们自己的见解,不应采纳。应当知道:香等不可分离、具有触性、是界的自性;因此,除鼻等三根、二性根、乐苦忧三根,以及忧因、段食、鼻等三触等之外,便成立十四根等。巴利
Mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Yasmā pana rūpīnaṃ ghānādīnaṃ abhāvena vijjamānānipi gandhāyatanādīni āyatanādikiccaṃ na karonti, tasmā te vajjetvā ‘‘cha āyatanāni, nava dhātuyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ na tesaṃ abhāvā. Keci pana ‘‘rūpaloke gandharasā kabaḷīkāro āhāro ca mahābhūtānañca phoṭṭhabbakiccatā natthi, teneva pāḷiyaṃ na uddhaṭā’’ti vatvā taṃ sādhetuṃ bahuṃ hetupaṭirūpakaṃ vatvā papañcenti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattamevāti na gahetabbaṃ. Gandhādīnaṃ avinibbhogattā, phoṭṭhabbattā, dhātusabhāvattā ca ghānādittayabhāvadvayasukhadukkhadomanassindriyāni, pana domanassahetukabaḷīkārāhāraghānādittayasamphassādīni ca vajjetvā cuddasindriyādibhāvo veditabbo.
至于第三部分:巴利
Tatiyakoṭṭhāse pana –
在无色界中,有四蕴、二处、二界、三谛、十一根、八因、三食、一触……乃至一心。巴利
‘‘Arūpadhātuyā cattāro khandhā, dve āyatanāni, dve dhātuyo, tīṇi saccāni, ekādasindriyāni, aṭṭha hetū, tayo āhārā, eko phasso…pe… ekaṃ citta’’nti –
列出论母之后,再加以分别说明。在这里,由于眼根、耳根和未知当知根也都不存在,所以应当知道是十一种根。巴利
Mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Ettha ca cakkhusotaanaññātaññassāmītindriyānampi abhāvā ekādasindriyāni veditabbāni.
在第四部分中,巴利
Catutthakoṭṭhāse pana –
不属于三界所摄的,有四蕴、二处、二界、二谛、十二根、六因、三食、一触……乃至一心。巴利
‘‘Apariyāpanne cattāro khandhā, dve āyatanāni, dve dhātuyo, dve saccāni, dvādasindriyāni, cha hetū, tayo āhārā, eko phasso…pe… ekaṃ citta’’nti –
列出论母之后,再加以分别说明。因为无论从处所来看,还是从有情投生来看,都不存在所谓的“非所摄界”,所以不说“非所摄界”,而为了仅仅显示出已生起的出世间法,才说“非所摄中有四蕴”等等。这样,应当以四个部分来理解第二转。巴利
Mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Yasmā ca okāsavasena vā sattuppattivasena vā apariyāpannadhātu nāma natthi, tasmā ‘‘apariyāpannadhātuyā’’ti avatvā nibbattitalokuttarameva dassetuṃ ‘‘apariyāpanne cattāro khandhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ catūhi koṭṭhāsehi dutiyo vāro veditabbo.
第三轮——巴利
Tatiyo pana vāro –
色蕴属于欲界所摄;四种蕴可能属于欲界所摄,也可能不属于欲界所摄——像这样等等。巴利
‘‘Rūpakkhandho kāmadhātupariyāpanno, cattāro khandhā siyā kāmadhātupariyāpannā, siyā na kāmadhātupariyāpannā’’tiādinā –
在四种地中,以四个部分,通过显示各自地所摄法的方式而展开;这可以依照前面所说的来了知,所以不再详细说明。其中,“欲界所摄”是指因为属于欲界而含摄于其中,就是欲界的意思。其余各处也是同样的道理。巴利
Catūsu bhūmīsu catūhi koṭṭhāsehi taṃtaṃbhūmipariyāpannadhammadassanavasena pavatto, so ca heṭṭhā vuttānusārena sakkā ñātunti na vitthārito. Tattha ca kāmadhātupariyāpannoti kāmāvacarabhāvena tattha antogadho kāmāvacaroti attho. Sesesupi eseva nayo.
第四种转起方式,是在三地当中,用四个部分来显示结生刹那生起和不生起的法。其中,先就第一部分来说——巴利
Catuttho pana vāro tīsu bhūmīsu catūhi koṭṭhāsehi paṭisandhikkhaṇe uppajjanakānuppajjanakadhammadassanavasena pavatto. Tattha paṭhamakoṭṭhāse tāva –
在欲界结生的那一刹那,一切众生的五蕴都会显现;有些众生显现十一个处,有些众生显现十个处,有些众生显现另外十个处,有些众生显现九个处,有些众生显现七个处,有些众生显现十一个界……中间省略……有些众生显现七个界。一切众生都显现一个谛。有些众生显现十四根,有些众生显现十三根,有些众生显现另外十三根,有些众生显现十二根,有些众生显现十根,有些众生显现九根,有些众生显现另外九根,有些众生显现八根,有些众生显现另外八根,有些众生显现七根,有些众生显现五根,有些众生显现四根;有些众生显现三因,有些众生显现二因,有些众生显现无因。一切众生都显现四种食,一个触……中间省略……一个心。巴利
‘‘Kāmadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe sabbesaṃ pañcakkhandhā pātubhavanti, kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavanti, kassaci dasāyatanāni pātubhavanti, kassaci aparāni dasa, kassaci nava, kassaci satta, kassaci ekādasa dhātuyo…pe… satta dhātuyo. Sabbesaṃ ekaṃ saccaṃ pātubhavati. Kassaci cuddasindriyāni, kassaci terasa, kassaci aparāni terasa, kassaci dvādasa, kassaci dasa, kassaci nava, kassaci aparāni nava, kassaci aṭṭha, kassaci aparāni aṭṭha, kassaci satta , kassaci pañca, kassaci cattārindriyāni pātubhavanti, kassaci tayo hetū pātubhavanti, kassaci dve, kassaci ahetukā pātubhavanti. Sabbesaṃ cattāro āhārā, eko phasso…pe… ekaṃ cittaṃ pātubhavatī’’ti –
把论母列出来之后,就加以分别说明。其中,在结生的那一刹那,欲界的化生者、堕恶趣者,以及诸天神和人类中诸处具足者,除了声处以外,有十一个处显现,这十一个也就是十一界。因为声音在结生时绝对不会生起。不过,在他们当中,天生眼盲的有十处,天生耳聋的另有十处,天生眼盲又耳聋的有九处。对于胎生者,则依色、香、味、身、触、意、法,有七处和七界显现。化生者中的三因者,以意根为第六的眼等六根、两种性根中的一种、命根、喜根与舍根中的一种、信等五根,共十四根显现;他们当中的二因者,除了慧根以外,有十三根;初劫人类中的三因者,除了性根以外,另有十三根;他们当中的二因者,有十二根。胎生者中的三因者,在前面说的十四根中除去眼等四根,有十根;他们当中的二因者,有九根。化生者中的无因且诸处具足者,在前面说的十四根中除去信等,另有九根显现;他们当中的天生眼盲者有八根;天生耳聋者也是这样;天生眼盲又耳聋者有七根。胎生者中的无因者,则有身根、意根、性根、命根、舍根这五根显现;他们当中的非男非女者,有四根显现。因为在无因心里,虽然也有专一性存在,但还达不到定根的程度。依意识界,应当理解“一触”等说法。巴利
Mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Tattha paṭisandhikkhaṇe kāmāvacarānaṃ opapātikānaṃ, āpāyikānaṃ, devamanussānaṃ paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ saddāyatanavajjitāni ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavanti, tāneva ekādasa dhātuyo honti. Saddo hi ekantena paṭisandhiyaṃ na uppajjati, tesaññeva pana jaccandhānaṃ dasa, jaccabadhirānaṃ aparāni dasa, jaccandhabadhirānaṃ nava, gabbhaseyyakānaṃ rūpagandharasakāyaphoṭṭhabbamanodhammavasena satta āyatanadhātuyo pātubhavanti. Opapātikānaṃ tihetukānaṃ manacchaṭṭhāni indriyāni, bhāvadvaye ekaṃ, jīvitindriyaṃ, somanassupekkhindriyesu ekaṃ, saddhādīni pañcāti cuddasindriyāni, tesaṃ dvihetukānaṃ paññindriyaṃ vajjetvā terasa, paṭhamakappikānaṃ manussānaṃ tihetukānaṃ bhāvindriyaṃ vajjetvā aparānipi terasa, tesaññeva duhetukānaṃ dvādasa, gabbhaseyyakānaṃ pana tihetukānaṃ purimesu cuddasasu cakkhādīni cattāri vajjetvā dasa, tesaṃ duhetukānaṃ nava, opapātikānaṃ ahetukānaṃ paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ purimesu cuddasasu saddādīni vajjetvā aparāni nava, tesaññeva jaccandhānaṃ aṭṭha, tathā badhirānaṃ, andhabadhirānaṃ pana satta, gabbhaseyyakānaṃ pana ahetukānaṃ kāyamanobhāvajīvitaupekkhindriyāni pañca, tesaññeva napuṃsakānaṃ cattāri pātubhavanti. Ahetukacittesu hi vijjamānāpi ekaggatā samādhindriyataṃ na gacchati, manoviññāṇadhātuvasena pana ‘‘eko phasso’’tiādayo veditabbā.
在第二部分中,则说:巴利
Dutiyakoṭṭhāse pana –
在色界投生的那一刹那,除了无想天众之外,五蕴都会显现。五处、五界、一谛、十根、三因、三食、一触……乃至一心。巴利
‘‘Rūpadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe ṭhapetvā asaññasattānaṃ devānaṃ pañcakkhandhā pātubhavanti. Pañcāyatanāni, pañca dhātuyo, ekaṃ saccaṃ, dasindriyāni, tayo hetū, tayo āhārā, eko phasso…pe… ekaṃ citta’’nti –
把论母列出来之后,再加以分别说明。其中,依眼、色、耳、意、法来说,应当知道有五处、五界。这里不取香、味、触的理由,前面已经说过了。眼根、耳根、意根、命根,喜与舍当中的任意一种,以及信等五根,应当知道这就是十根。巴利
Mātikaṃ nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Tattha cakkhurūpasotamanodhammānaṃ vasena pañcāyatanadhātuyo veditabbā. Etthāpi gandharasaphoṭṭhabbānaṃ aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ pubbe vuttameva. Cakkhusotamanojīvitindriyāni, somanassupekkhānaṃ aññataraṃ, saddhādīni pañcāti dasindriyāni veditabbāni.
另外,在第三部分中——巴利
Tatiyakoṭṭhāse pana –
无想有情天人在投生的那一刹那,只有一个蕴显现,就是色蕴;有两个处,就是色处和法处;有两个界,就是色界和法界;有一个苦谛;有一个色命根。无想有情天人是无因的、无食的、无触的……无心识的。巴利
‘‘Asaññasattānaṃ devānaṃ upapattikkhaṇe eko khandho pātubhavati rūpakkhandho, dve āyatanāni rūpāyatanaṃ dhammāyatanaṃ, dve dhātuyo rūpadhātu dhammadhātu, ekaṃ dukkhasaccaṃ, ekaṃ rūpajīvitindriyaṃ, asaññasattā devā ahetukā, anāhārā, aphassakā…pe… acittakā’’ti –
带释义的论母已经列出。在这里,色虽然不执行对它们的处等作用,但因为在有识的色身者中已被包含,所以这里也把色包含了。然而香等因为在那里没有被包含,所以这里也没有被包含,并不是因为不存在。或者,由于一层居者和其他梵天神的色是眼之所缘,所以这里也举出了色处;而无想有情则有五处,有一食生起,应当如此理解。巴利
Saniddesamātikā nikkhittā. Ettha ca rūpampi kiñcāpi tesaṃ āyatanādikiccaṃ na karoti, saviññāṇakarūpīsu pana gahitattā idhāpi gahitaṃ. Gandhādayo pana tattha na gahitattā idhāpi na gahitā, no avijjamānatāya. Ekatalavāsikānaṃ vā sesabrahmānaṃ cakkhuvisayattā idhāpi rūpāyatanaṃ uddhaṭaṃ, asaññīnaṃ pana pañcāyatanāni, eko āhāro uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ.
第四部分中巴利
Catutthakoṭṭhāse –
在无色界投生的那一刹那,有四蕴、二处、二界、一谛、八根、三因、三食、一触……(中略)……一心。巴利
‘‘Arūpadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe cattāro khandhā, dve āyatanāni, dve dhātuyo, ekaṃ saccaṃ, aṭṭhindriyāni , tayo hetū, tayo āhārā, eko phasso…pe… ekaṃ citta’’nti –
把论母的条目列出来之后,再加以分别说明。在这里,应当知道意根、命根、舍根,以及信等五根,一共是八根。其余的部分很容易理解。如此,应当知道以四节来说明第四轮。巴利
Mātikāpadāni nikkhipitvā vibhattā. Ettha ca manojīvitaupekkhindriyāni, saddhādīni pañcāti aṭṭhindriyāni veditabbāni. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva. Evaṃ catūhi koṭṭhāsehi catuttho vāro veditabbo.
第五轮则是针对那些法,按地的差别,以“欲界法、非欲界法……乃至所摄法”这四对二法,先依论母列出,再依分别的方式展开解说,其含义和前面所说的一样。巴利
Pañcamo pana vāro tesaṃ dhammānaṃ bhūmantaravasena ‘‘kāmāvacaradhammā, na kāmāvacarā…pe… pariyāpannā’’ti cattāro duke mātikāvasena nikkhipitvā vibhajanavasena pavatto, so heṭṭhā vuttatthova.
第六轮则是先指出假名天、化生天和清净天之后,再从人趣和天趣中投生所依的业、寿命长短和显现方式来说明的。这里简要的意思是:众生做了布施、持戒等欲界善业之后,就会投生到人间的刹帝利大富长者等家族中,或者投生到四大王天、三十三天、夜摩天、兜率天、化乐天、他化自在天这六层天界里。在那些天界中,从须弥山和持双山之间的山腰开始,往下直到地面,横向直到轮围山,在这个范围之内,依山、依虚空、依树、依大地而住的四大王天众以及日月,都属于四大王天。从那里往上直到轮围山的边缘,三十三天等天界依次一层比一层高地安住着,应当这样理解。天界也没有不依轮围山而能到达的。巴利
Chaṭṭho pana vāro sammutidevaupapattidevavisuddhideve niddisitvā manussadevagatīsu uppādakakammaāyuppamāṇadassanavasena vutto. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – sattā hi dānasīlādikāmāvacarakusalaṃ katvā manussaloke khattiyamahāsālādikulesu ceva cātumahārājikatāvatiṃsayāmatusitanimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattisaṅkhātesu chasu devalokesu ca uppajjanti, tattha sinerupabbatavemajjhaparibhaṇḍapabbatato paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā yāva bhūmi tiriyaṃ cakkavāḷapabbataṃ āhacca etthantare pabbataākāsarukkhapathavinissitā cātumahārājacandasūriyā sabbe cātumahārājikā. Tato uddhaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ tāvatiṃsādayo yathākkamaṃ uparūpari ṭhitāti veditabbā. Devalokopi paramparacakkavāḷapabbataṃ appatto nāma natthi.
修习下品初禅后,众生投生到梵众天;修习中品初禅后,投生到梵辅天;修习上品初禅后,投生到大梵天。这三种人都住在初禅地的同一层。不过他们之间在寿命长短、光芒大小等方面有差别,往上各层也是这样。巴利
Paṭhamajjhānaṃ pana parittaṃ bhāvetvā brahmapārisajjesu uppajjanti, majjhimaṃ bhāvetvā brahmapurohitesu, paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā mahābrahmesu, ime tayopi janā paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ ekatale vasanti. Āyuābhādibhedena panesaṃ bhedo, evaṃ uparipi.
在四分法里,第二禅;在五分法里,第二禅和第三禅,修习下品、中品、上品之后,投生到少光天、无量光天、光音天。第三禅按下品等来修习之后,投生到少净天、无量净天、遍净天。第四禅修习之后,因为所缘、作意、欲、胜解等的差别,有些人投生到无想天,有些人投生到广果天,有些人投生到无烦天、无热天、善见天、善现天,有些人投生到色究竟天,还有些人依次投生到空无边处等四处。在那里,有些外道看见心的过失,认为“依靠心才有染污、损害等,苦也是由此而生”,于是生起“这就是现法涅槃”的想法,对想生起厌离,为了往生那里而修禅,结果只留下色身,或站、或坐、或卧,投生到那里之后,就在那里住五百劫。应当这样理解。巴利
Catukkanaye pana dutiyajjhānaṃ, pañcakanaye dutiyatatiyajjhānañca parittaṃ, majjhimaṃ, paṇītañca bhāvetvā parittābhāappamāṇābhāābhassaresu uppajjanti. Tatiyajjhānaṃ parittādivasena bhāvetvā parittasubhaappamāṇasubhasubhakiṇhesu. Catutthajjhānaṃ pana bhāvetvā ārammaṇamanasikārachandādhimuttiādinānattato keci asaññīsu, keci vehapphalesu, keci avihesu, atappesu, sudassesu, sudassīsu, keci akaniṭṭhesu, ākāsānañcāyatanādīsu catūsu ca yathākkamaṃ uppajjanti. Tattha hi ekacce titthiyā ‘‘cittaṃ nissāya rajjanadussanādayo, tannidānāni ca dukkhāni samuppajjantī’’ti citte dosaṃ disvā ‘‘diṭṭhadhammanibbānameta’’nti saññāvirāgaṃ janetvā tatrūpapattiyā jhānaṃ bhāvetvā rūpakāyamattā ṭhitā vā nisinnā vā nipannā vā hutvā nibbattitvā tattheva pañcakappasatāni tiṭṭhantīti veditabbā.
成就八等至的人,哪一种禅那会成熟结生呢?如果他对某种禅那已经很熟练,而且在所有熟练的禅那中,他发愿要投生到哪一种禅那的果报地,就会由那个愿力而结生;如果没有这样的愿,那么临终时进入哪一种等至,就由那一种结生;如果连这个也没有,就以上等的禅那——非想非非想处——结生。在净居天中的无烦天等天界里,除了不来者以外,其他众生不会往生;但不来者却能投生到除了无想天以外的一切梵天界。而且,一切圣者都是向上投生,不会向下投生。因为投生在初禅地的不来者,在九个梵天界中逐渐清净后,最终安住在最高的广果天般涅槃,不会退转,因为圣者没有向下投生的道理。广果天、色究竟天、非想非非想处,这三种存在叫最胜有。投生在这三处的不来者,既不向上走,也不向下走,就在那里般涅槃。在人间,有学圣者可以以在家身份终身安住,无学圣者则不行。因为他们在证得阿拉汉果的那一天,要么出家,要么般涅槃。在地居天中,漏尽者也可以终身安住。在六欲天中,只有入流者和一来者会安住;不来者则应当在当天就前往色界有,应当理解为像漏尽者一样般涅槃。这样,在这二十七地所摄的人、天、梵天界中投生的众生里,人间的寿命在这一次佛出世时,是一百岁,或者更少或更多。恶趣众生和地居天则没有固定的寿命期限,只有业才是标准。他们有的七天就死,有的住一劫。巴利
Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhīnaṃ kataraṃ jhānaṃ vipaccatīti? Paguṇaṃ, sabbesu paguṇesu yassa vipākabhūmiṃ pattheti, taṃpatthanāya ca asati yaṃ maraṇasamaye samāpajjati, taṃ, tasmimpi asati uttamavasena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ vipaccati. Suddhāvāsesu ca avihādīsu anāgāmivajjitā sattā na uppajjanti, anāgāmino pana asaññīvajjitabrahmalokesu sabbattha uppajjituṃ labhanti. Sabbesampi ca ariyānaṃ tatrūpapattito uparūpapattipi, na heṭṭhūpapatti. Te hi paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyaṃ nibbattā anāgāmino nava brahmaloke sodhetvā matthake vehapphalesu ṭhitā parinibbanti, na nivattanti ariyānaṃ heṭṭhūpapattiabhāvā. Vehapphalaakaniṭṭhanevasaññānāsaññāyatanabhavā tayopi seṭṭhabhavā nāma. Imesu tīsu ṭhānesu nibbattā anāgāmino neva uddhaṃ gacchanti, na adho. Tattheva parinibbāyanti . Manussaloke ca sekhā gihibhāve yāvajīvaṃ tiṭṭhanti, na asekhā. Te hi arahattaṃ pattadivase pabbajanti vā, parinibbanti vā. Bhummadevesu pana khīṇāsavāpi yāvajīvaṃ tiṭṭhanti. Chasu kāmāvacaradevesu sotāpannasakadāgāminova tiṭṭhanti, anāgāmino pana tadaheva rūpabhavaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati khīṇāsavena parinibbātunti gahetabbaṃ. Evaṃ imāsu sattavīsatiyā bhūmīsu pariyāpannamanussadevabrahmalokesu nibbattasattesu manussānaṃ tāva imasmiṃ buddhuppādeva vassasataṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, appaṃ vā bhiyyo. Āpāyikānaṃ, bhummadevānañca kadāci āyuparicchedo natthi, kammameva pamāṇaṃ. Te hi sattāhenapi maranti, kappampi tiṭṭhantīti.
四大王天的天寿,以人间五十年为一昼夜,三十个这样的昼夜为一个月,十二个这样的月为一年,以这样的年计算,天寿是五百年。换算成人间的年数,就是九百万年。三十三天则以人间一百年为一昼夜,照这样推算,天寿是一千年。夜摩天等以上诸天,年数依次向上翻倍,寿量也就应当知道是从下面起依次两倍、四倍地递增。巴利
Cātumahārājikānaṃ pana mānusakāni paññāsa vassāni ekaṃ rattindivaṃ, tāya rattiyā tiṃsa rattiyo māso, tena māsena dvādasamāsiyo saṃvaccharo, tena saṃvaccharena dibbāni pañcavassasatāni āyuppamāṇaṃ. Tāni manussagaṇanāya navutivassasatasahassāni honti. Tāvatiṃsānaṃ mānusakaṃ vassasataṃ ekaṃ rattindivaṃ katvā evamāgataṃ dibbaṃ vassasahassaṃ. Evaṃ yāmādīnaṃ vassagaṇanañca diguṇaṃ katvā heṭṭhimato diguṇacatugguṇaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
梵众天的寿命是三分之一劫,梵辅天是半劫,大梵天王是一劫,少光天是二劫。这样一层层往上翻倍,一直到遍净天都可以按这个规律推算。遍净天的寿命是六十四劫,无想天和广果天是五百劫,无烦天是一千劫。再往上同样按翻倍递增,一直到色究竟天都可以这样推算。色究竟天的寿命是一万六千劫。四无色天的寿命依次是二万劫、四万劫、六万劫、八万四千劫。巴利
Brahmesu pana brahmapārisajjānaṃ kappassa tatiyo bhāgo āyuppamāṇaṃ, brahmapurohitānaṃ upaḍḍhakappo , mahābrahmānaṃ eko kappo, parittābhānaṃ dve kappāti evaṃ uparūpari diguṇaṃ katvā yāva subhakiṇhā yojetabbaṃ. Subhakiṇhānaṃ hi catusaṭṭhikappaṃ āyuppamāṇaṃ, asaññīnaṃ, vehapphalānañca pañcakappasatāni, avihānaṃ kappasahassanti uparūpari diguṇavasena yāva akaniṭṭhā yojetabbaṃ. Akaniṭṭhānaṃ hi soḷasakappasahassāni, arūpānaṃ catunnaṃ yathākkamaṃ vīsati, cattāri, saṭṭhi, caturāsīti kappasahassāni āyuppamāṇanti.
被善业之力托举起来,投生到了欲界和色界;
就算到了有顶天,也还是会再堕入恶趣。
如此长寿的众生,因寿命耗尽而死去;
没有任何一种存在是恒常的,这是大仙所说的。
所以,真正有智慧、明智、心思细密又善于思考利益的人,
为了从老死中解脱,他们修习最殊胜的道路。
修习了通向并趣入涅槃的清净之道后;
彻底了知一切漏之后,他们作为无漏者般涅槃了。巴利
Ukkhittā puññatejena, kāmarūpagatiṃ gatā; Bhavaggatampi sampattā, punāgacchanti duggatiṃ. Tāva dīghāyukā sattā, cavanti āyusaṅkhayā; Natthi koci bhavo nicco, iti vuttaṃ mahesinā. Tasmā hi dhīrā nipakā, nipuṇā atthacintakā; Jarāmaraṇamokkhāya, bhāventi maggamuttamaṃ. Bhāvayitvā suciṃ maggaṃ, nibbānogadhagāminaṃ; Sabbāsave pariññāya, parinibbanti anāsavāti. (vibha. 1029);
第七节则是围绕诸蕴等的应胜知等性质来展开说明的。在这里——巴利
Sattamo pana vāro tesaṃ khandhādīnaṃ abhiññeyyādibhāvavibhāvanavasena pavatto. Tattha hi –
色蕴应当被胜知、应当被遍知,不应断除,不应修习,不应证知。四蕴应当被胜知、应当被遍知,可能是应断除的,可能是应修习的,可能是应证知的,也可能是不应断除、不应修习、不应证知的——以这样的方式……巴利
‘‘Rūpakkhandho abhiññeyyo, pariññeyyo, na pahātabbo, na bhāvetabbo, na sacchikātabbo. Cattāro khandhā abhiññeyyā pariññeyyā, siyā pahātabbā, siyā bhāvetabbā, siyā sacchikātabbā, siyā na pahātabbā na bhāvetabbā na sacchikātabbā’’tiādinā –
这十二个部分也已经详细地分别说明了。其中,以把握特相的智慧,五蕴等一切法都应该被直接了知。在知遍知、审察遍知、断遍知这三种遍知当中,按照各自相应的情况,以任何一种遍知来说,一切法都应该被遍知。即使是出世间法,也仅仅属于知遍知的范围。而不善法则应该被断除。道应该被修习,果和涅槃应该被证得。其中,色蕴是依知遍知和审察遍知的方式而被遍知的。因为在毗婆舍那的领域里,一切法都是依审察遍知而被遍知的。按照这个方法,在一切地方都应该了解“应直接了知”等的含义。巴利
Dvādasapi koṭṭhāsā vitthārato vibhattā. Tattha lakkhaṇapariggāhikāya paññāya khandhādayo sabbe dhammā abhiññeyyā. Ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāsu yathāyogaṃ yāya kāyaci pariññāya vasena sabbepi dhammā pariññeyyā. Lokuttaradhammāpi ñātapariññeyyāva. Akusalā pana pahātabbā. Maggo bhāvetabbo, phalaṃ, nibbānañca sacchikātabbaṃ. Tattha rūpakkhandho ñātatīraṇavasena pariññeyyo. Vipassanāvisaye hi sabbaṃ tīraṇapariññāya pariññeyyanti. Iminā nayena sabbattha abhiññeyyādibhāvo veditabbo.
第八节则是为了说明它们都有所缘而展开的,第九节则是为了显示它们在所见、所闻、所觉、所识中的归类而展开的。第十节则是为了显示从善三法组等开始、到有诤二法组为止的三法组与二法组的分类而展开的,这些也都按照前面所说的方式。这是这里的简要说明,详细内容在这里也和前面所说的一样。从开头起,在一切地方都应当依据《分别论》的巴利原文及其注释书来理解。巴利
Aṭṭhamo pana vāro tesaṃ sārammaṇatāvibhāvanavasena pavatto, navamo panesaṃ diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu saṅgahadassanavasena. Dasamo kusalattikādīhi saraṇadukapariyosānehi tikadukehi vibhāgadassanavasena pavatto, tepi heṭṭhā vuttanayāvāti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro panettha heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Ādito paṭṭhāya sabbattha vibhaṅgapāḷiaṭṭhakathāsu (vibha. 978 ādayo; vibha. aṭṭha. 978 ādayo) gahetabboti.